JP2019107508A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving the amusement of a game.SOLUTION: When receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is a "(probability variable or regular) jackpot" in a case of executing a consecutive chance outcome performance whose final lottery result is a "failure", a performance time of the consecutive chance outcome performance whose final lottery result is the "failure" can be prolonged (the consecutive chance outcome performance can be continued) till a variable performance corresponding to the winning information command. Since the variable performance to be executed in the consecutive chance outcome performance is added and the number of consecutive displays of the "chance outcome" is increased in this way, the expectation of a player who expects to transfer to a game state advantageous to the player can be improved and the player's expectation can consecutively be sustained for a long time. Therefore, the amusement of a game can be improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 35

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, pachinko machines have been known that improve the interest of a game by performing variable effects (dynamic display) or the like on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. The fluctuation effect (dynamic display) is an effect started by the game ball entering the ball entry opening (starting opening) (winning), for example, 3 provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device A total of nine symbols etc. are displayed on a square of × 3. More specifically, when the gaming ball wins the starting opening, the scroll of symbols etc. is started, and then the symbols etc. being scrolled are sequentially stopped and the total of nine symbols etc (stop symbols) are stopped and displayed. Do. In such a variable effect, a device is made to give an expectation to the player by executing an effect which suggests in advance that the player transitions to a game state (for example, a big hit) which is advantageous to the player.

  In this type of pachinko machine, for example, as an effect that suggests transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, display of the chance eyes etc. is not only performed once but also continuously for a plurality of times. Have been configured to perform the same effect or to perform the same effect or different effects continuously by displaying or sound effects multiple times (hereinafter referred to as "continuous effect"), expecting a sense of expectation for an advantageous gaming state The interest of the game is further improved by, for example, letting the player keep it. In addition, a chance eye is, for example, a stop symbol other than a hit, and a stop symbol (a display result, for example, symbols such as "3", "4", "1", etc.) respectively included Aspect of the For example, when the game ball wins to the starting opening, if there are a plurality of pending change effects to be started, this continuous effect is performed for the plurality of pending change effects, and is continuous The more the number of the change effects performed to the player, the more likely the player is to shift to the advantageous gaming state.

Japanese Utility Model Application Publication No. 7-24383

  However, even if the continuous effect is started, if the display frequency such as the chance eye is small, the player can not continue to have a sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state, and the player's sense of expectation is heightened. In addition, there is a problem that the player is given an impression that the game is monotonous.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 detects display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry port where game media enters, and entry of game media into the ball entrance. A detection means, peripheral control means for executing dynamic display of identification information on the display means when the game medium is detected to be entered by the detection means, and control of the peripheral control means And a main control means for performing control, wherein the main control means acquires ball entry information associated with the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means. The lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entering based on the acquiring means and the ball entering information acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means Send to peripheral control means Selection information transmission means, ball entry information storage means for storing ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, and execution of the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the display means, the peripheral control means performing, on the display means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means; A mode setting means for setting the stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means to a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode, and transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means Lottery information receiving means for receiving the selected lottery information, aspect information storage means for storing the aspect information indicating the stop display aspect of the dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information received by the lottery information receiving means, and the aspect In the dynamic display sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the information storage means, the stop display mode of the continuous series of dynamic display in the execution order becomes the respective predetermined mode The first mode control means to control the lottery information when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the dynamic display execution is performed after the series of the dynamic display controlled by the first mode control means is executed An executability judging means for judging whether the stop display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display executed by the means, and the first aspect when the executability judging means judges that the executability is possible A second mode of controlling the stop display mode of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of the dynamic display controlled by the control means is performed to be the predetermined mode And control means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the lottery result indicated by the received lottery information is a predetermined game value for the player When it is determined that the executability judging means is to give the player the predetermined game value by the game value judging means. Determining whether the stop display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first mode control means is executed It is

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the dynamic display is performed until a predetermined time has elapsed after execution is started by the dynamic display executing means. Is configured to be able to change the stop display mode of the currently displayed dynamic display until the end of the execution of the group, and the peripheral control means is configured to control the series of dynamic modes controlled by the first mode control means. It is executed by progress determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed since execution of dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means next to display being performed, and the dynamic display execution means Setting determination means for determining whether or not the stop display mode of the dynamic display being set is already set by the mode setting means, and the dynamic display set to a mode different from the predetermined mode by the mode setting means Stop display mode of When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the progress determining means determines that the predetermined time has not passed, and the setting determination means determines the predetermined time. And a third mode control means for changing the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means into the predetermined mode by the mode changing means if it is determined that the setting has been made. ing.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein, in the predetermined aspect, an aspect of effect of stop indication, an aspect of display result of stop indication, an effect of stop indication At least one of the sound aspects is included.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, in the main control means, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information accompanying the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and the ball entering information is entered. The lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means based on the ball information. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. The display control means instructs the peripheral control means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display to be executed is predetermined. The aspect setting means sets the aspect other than the aspect of the aspect or the predetermined aspect thereof. Then, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode information indicating the stop display mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information is the mode information storage In the dynamic display which is stored in the means and is sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the aspect information storage means, the stop display modes of the continuous series of dynamic display in the execution order are respectively predetermined It is controlled by the first aspect control means to become the aspect of In addition, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed, the stop display aspect is performed for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means It is determined by the executability judging means whether or not it can be executed in a predetermined manner. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed is a predetermined aspect It is controlled by the second mode control means so that Therefore, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution unit, the number of times of execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is increased. it can. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of execution, the sense of expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the gaming state advantageous to the player can be improved, and the sense of expectation is continued to the player longer. Can be held. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the lottery result indicated by the received lottery information is predetermined. If it is determined by the game value determination means that the game value is to be provided to the player, the dynamic display execution means is executed after a series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed. Whether the stop display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display is determined by the executability judging means. Therefore, when a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, it is possible to increase the number of times of dynamic display in which the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means becomes the predetermined mode. Therefore, the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player is improved, and further, after the sense of expectation is continuously held by the player for a longer time, the predetermined game is performed. The value can be given to the player. Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely giving the predetermined game value to the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, the following effect can be obtained. The dynamic display changes the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed until the end of the execution of the dynamic display until the predetermined time passes after the start of the execution by the dynamic display execution means A series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means was started. The heel is determined by the progress determining means. In addition, it is determined by the setting completion determination means whether or not the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is already set by the mode setting means, and an aspect different from the predetermined aspect by the mode setting means The stop display mode of the dynamic display set to is changed by the mode changing means to a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed by the progress determining means, and it is determined that the setting completion determining means has been set, the third mode control By the means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed into the predetermined mode by the mode change means. Therefore, even if a series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed, and then the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is started next to the series of dynamic display Within the period from the start of execution to the passage of a predetermined time, the third mode control means can set the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means to the predetermined mode. Therefore, when dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means, there is an opportunity to increase the number of times of execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode becomes the predetermined mode. It can be increased. Therefore, together with the opportunity to improve the player's sense of expectation, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the chance that the sense of expectation can be kept longer for the player.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, in the predetermined aspect, the aspect of the effect of the stop display, the aspect of the display result of the stop display Since at least one of the stop sound effects is included, the player can be made to recognize that the dynamic display stop display mode is set to a predetermined mode, and the player's interest Has the effect of being able to attract

  In addition, when making the stop display aspect of dynamic display into a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, you may change the content of the predetermined aspect for every dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the mode of the effect of the stop display, in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the mode of the display result of the stop display, and in the third dynamic display The predetermined mode is the mode of the sound effect of the stop display. As described above, if the content of the predetermined mode is changed for each dynamic display, the change of the stop display becomes colorful, so that the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of various counters, a holding ball storage area, and a holding ball execution area. (A) is a schematic diagram for demonstrating an example of the pattern of a normal fluctuation production, and its production content, (b) is for explaining an example of the chance eye normal fluctuation, and its production content FIG. It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of the chance eye super fluctuation | variation AD, and its presentation content. It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of chance eye | piece special fluctuation AF, and its presentation content. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen scrolls horizontally, and (b) shows an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen vertically scrolls. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a loss chance eye, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a reach chance eye. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to upper symbol row Z1, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to middle symbol row Z2, (c) ) Is a schematic view showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower row design row Z3. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the contents of the maximum changeable period memory of the effect control device, and (b) is a schematic view showing an outline of the maximum changeable period of out-of-plane variation, (C) is a schematic view showing an outline of the maximum changeable period of normal reach fluctuation. It is the schematic which shows an example of the content of RAM of a production control apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the relationship between the setting value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol (C) is a schematic view showing an example of a winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device and a set value corresponding to the lottery result indicated by the command. (A) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of a stop symbol pattern table, (b) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol pattern table which is being updated. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the content of display design pattern memory, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus corresponding to the content of display design pattern memory . It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows change processing of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the holding ball storage area order sending process of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows start winning processing of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing of a main control unit and a payout control unit. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing of a payment control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payment control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows start processing of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the audio | voice lamp presentation process of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows change production processing of a production control device. It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol pattern table update processing of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol pattern generation area update process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows command reception interruption processing of a production control device. It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol indication storage table updating processing of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the definite variation big hit winning process of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the definite variation time continuation production start process of a production control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol change processing of a production control device. It is a flow chart which shows a usual big hit winning process of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal time continuous rendering start process of a production control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows out-of-front and back out-of-front reach winning processing of the effect control device. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing of a production control device. It is a flow chart which shows false change setting processing of a production control device. It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol setting processing of a production control device. (A) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory before replacing the 3rd symbol (before change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content, (b), It is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display pattern pattern memory after replacing 3 symbols (after a change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content. (A) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory before replacing the 3rd symbol (before change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content, (b), It is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display pattern pattern memory after replacing 3 symbols (after a change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content. (A) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “permanent change jackpot” within a period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed (B) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command in which the lottery result is "probable hit" is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed. (A) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” within a period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed (B) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command in which the lottery result is “normally big hit” is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed. It is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “reach before and after reach” regardless of whether or not it is a changeable period. In (a), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance direction production is "probable variation jackpot", the pattern of the last variation production becomes "super reach variation (40 seconds)", and as a result, the display schedule is stopped It is a table which shows an example of the contents of change when the contents of a symbol are changed, and (b) is the pattern of the last change production when the final lottery result of a continuous chance eye direction production is "usually a big hit" It becomes "super reach change (40 seconds)", and as a result, it is a table showing an example of the contents of change when the contents of the stop design to be displayed are changed. In (a), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye direction production is “probable change jackpot”, the pattern of the last change direction effect becomes “special reach change (60 seconds)”, and as a result, the display schedule is stopped It is a table which shows an example of the contents of change when the contents of a symbol are changed, and (b) is the pattern of the last change production when the final lottery result of a continuous chance eye direction production is "usually a big hit" It becomes "special reach change (60 seconds)", and as a result, it is a table showing an example of the contents of change when the contents of the stop design to be displayed are changed. It is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable change jackpot” when the chance is displayed twice in a row. It is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable jackpot” when the chance is displayed three times in a row. (A) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” when a chance is displayed twice in a row, (B) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” when a chance is displayed three times in a row.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the content of the effect at the time of the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot.

  Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time. A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor (not shown), a push button stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a change in When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) changes corresponding to the amount of operation, and the operation is performed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the handle 51, whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Be Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) and the strike stop switch (not shown) are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In addition, in FIG. 2, in order to make the reference numerals understandable, a part such as a nail and a metal fitting is removed and illustrated. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Falling area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112 a to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A first symbol display device 37 mainly for displaying a first symbol is disposed on the upper right side upper portion (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area. The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b which are light emitting means.

  The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in a lighting state, and the gaming state as to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being changed, time is short or normal. Whether or not it is fluctuating is indicated by the lighting state. For example, the first symbol corresponding to the "probable variation big hit" described later, the first symbol corresponding to the "normal big hit", the first symbol corresponding to the "disengagement" is shown by the lighting state, or the number of holding balls is lit It is indicated by the state. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, and it may suggest the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LED by the combination of the luminescent color it can. Also, the 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as a lottery result of the jackpot, there are provided three lottery results of the "probable variation jackpot" of the first symbol, the "normal jackpot" of the first symbol, and the "disengagement" of the first symbol. . And, when winning a prize in the first ball entry 64, whether it is the "probable big hit" of the first symbol, the "normal hit" of the first symbol, or the "disengagement" of the first symbol I will be drawn.

  And, as a result of the lottery, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "probable variation jackpot" of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is increased, and it becomes the state of the game which is easy to shift to the special gaming state (big hit), Furthermore, the probability of hitting the second symbol, which will be described later, increases, and the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 2) opens for a predetermined time, and the ball enters the first entrance 64. It becomes the state of the game which is easy to ball. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as positive change (positive change state).

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “ordinary jackpot” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is in the normal state, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, the first ball entry opening The electric combination attached to the door 64 is in the open state for a predetermined time, and the ball is in a gaming state where it is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as a short time (short state), and a state other than a short change (probable state) and a short time (short state) is referred to as a normal state (normal state).

  In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol during a definite change or during a short time, the time for opening the electric role item attached to the first ball entrance 64, 1 It is also possible to change the number of times the motorized jack opens in each round.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “detachment” of the first symbol, the state of the game which is neither definite nor time-saving (the state that neither the jackpot probability of the first symbol nor the win probability of the second symbol is increased) Become.

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, the “probable variation jackpot” of the first symbol is the jackpot after the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, until the jackpot of the first symbol (a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot) is reached next The interval is the jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot) in which the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to the high probability state (the jackpot probability is higher than usual) and the jackpot probability of the second symbol also increases.

  In addition, the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol is that the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to the low probability state (the jackpot probability is normal) after the jackpot of which the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the predetermined fluctuation It is a big hit (16R normal big hit) in which only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased by the number of times (for example, 100 change times).

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it becomes "normal big hit" of the first symbol, it is configured to increase the probability of hitting the second symbol during a predetermined number of variations (for example, the number of variations of 100). However, instead, it may be configured to continue to increase the probability of hitting the second symbol until the lottery result of the jackpot of the next first symbol is determined.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of rounds is 16 when the first symbol "probable variation jackpot" or the first symbol "normal jackpot" is selected, but the number of rounds is arbitrary (eg, for example) 8 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.). In addition, the number of rounds may be different between the “probable variation jackpot” of the first symbol and the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol. For example, the maximum round number may be 16 rounds in the case of the "probable variation jackpot" of the first symbol, and the maximum round number may be 8 rounds in the case of the "normal jackpot" of the first symbol.

  Also, in the present embodiment, when it becomes the "probable variation jackpot" of the first symbol, the hit probability of the second symbol is increased until the lottery result of the jackpot of the next first symbol is determined. Although it comprises, instead, it may constitute so that the hit probability of the 2nd pattern may be raised only for a predetermined number of times of change (for example, 100 times of change).

  In the following description, the "probable jackpot" of the first symbol is simply described as "probability jackpot", and the "normal jackpot" of the first symbol is simply described as "usually jackpot", the first The "disengagement" of the symbol is simply described as "disengagement".

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 has a third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "LCD") that variably displays the third symbol by using a prize winning on the first entrance 64 as a trigger. The second symbol display portion 83, which is composed of an LED for fluctuating display of the second symbol with the passage of the ball of the second entry ball opening 67 (through gate) as a trigger, passes the second entry hole 67 (through gate) A second symbol holding lamp 84 is provided to indicate the number of holding balls of the held ball.

  The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are controlled by the effect control device 117 described later, and for example, three symbol rows of left, middle and right are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically or horizontally for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See Figure 9). Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and the variable display unit 80 is provided with a center frame so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. 86 are provided. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 and the display of the first symbol indicating the jackpot result of the jackpot, whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol. A decorative display (variation effect) corresponding to the display of the symbol display device 37 is performed in the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the LCD.

  In addition, after the lottery of the jackpot is started, in the first symbol display device 37, the stop symbol (the first symbol indicating the probability variation jackpot, the first symbol indicating the normal jackpot, the first symbol indicating the detachment) If the ball wins (enters the first ball entry 64) until the is displayed, the number of winnings (ball entering) is suspended up to four times, and the number of times of suspension is the first symbol display device Not only is indicated by 37, but it is also indicated by the number of lighting of the special figure holding lamp 85. Hereinafter, the number of holding times for the first entrance 64 is referred to as a special-image holding ball number N. In addition, the special figure reservation lamp 85 is provided four for the maximum number of times of suspension, and is disposed above the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the first entry ball slot 64 is configured to be held for a maximum of four winnings, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four, and is three or less, Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, special figure reservation lamp 85 is deleted, the territory which is divided into 4 or the number of times of suspension of the fluctuation indication which is based on the winning a prize to 1st ball entrance 64 in part of 3rd symbol display 81 May be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) different by the number of holding times. Further, the number of reservations may be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this case, the special view holding lamp 85 may not display the light.

  The second symbol display portion 83 alternates between a symbol of "o" as a display symbol (second symbol) and a symbol of "x" every time the ball passes through the second entry hole 67 (through gate). It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display in the second symbol display portion 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (symbol of “o”), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 has a predetermined time It becomes an open state, and it is constituted so that it may be in the state where it is easy for a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64.

  The number of times of passage of the second ball entry port 67 (through gate) is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of times of suspension is lit and displayed in the second symbol hold lamp 84. In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display portion 83 as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol are displayed. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the number of times the ball is reserved for the second ball entry port 67 (through gate) is not limited to the maximum number of times four, as with the first ball entry port 64, and is three or less, or 5 It may be set to the number of times or more (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reservations is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 4) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, a lottery for a big hit is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37.

  In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the general winning opening 63 are the same. Although it is configured, it may be a different number. For example, the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be twenty.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery with the main control device 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol, The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 16 times (16 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (shown in FIG. 4) part of) and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a, and the open state and normal time closed Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. If the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 lights up in a mode corresponding to a big hit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110) and an effect control board (effect control apparatus 117). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the effect control device 117, the payout control device 111, the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 controls the entire operation of the pachinko machine 10, transmits various commands to the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, and controls the operation of the sub control device It is The various commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in only one direction. The sub controller may be configured to transmit a command indicating the state of the sub controller to the main controller 110.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203 and counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 to be described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. The specific configuration of each of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area in which various flags, counters, values of I / O, etc. Region). Furthermore, the RAM 203 has a holding ball storage area 203a, a holding ball execution area 203b, a special view holding ball counter 203c, a work area 203d, and a prefetch high probability state flag 203e. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 18), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the case of the holding ball storage area 203a, when the ball wins (enters the first entry ball slot 64), the first hit random number counter C1 (see FIG. 5), the first hit type counter C2 in accordance with the winning timing. It is a memory for storing each value (see FIG. 5) and stop pattern selection counter C3 (see FIG. 5). Data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to one winning to the first entrance 64 is stored (held) up to four times in the holding ball storage area 203a. The specific configuration of the holding ball storage area 203a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, when the winning (the entering) to the first entrance 64 is detected and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203a. (That is, when the special figure reservation ball number N at the time of winning is less than 4), immediately based on the respective values of the stored (reserved) counters C1 to C3 separately from the start of the fluctuation effect. The lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol are acquired. In addition, as soon as the winning is detected, it is possible to obtain the lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol based on the data corresponding to the winning (each value of the counters C1 to C3) separately from the start of the fluctuation effect. Thereafter, it is described that the lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol are read ahead. Then, immediately after the end of the pre-reading, a prize information command indicating the pre-read lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  When the prize information command is received in the effect control device 117, the stop symbol (to be described later) is displayed based on the lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol indicated by the prize information command. It is determined whether or not to perform "variation display (variation display)" to be "" and perform it in the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter, referred to as "consecutive chance eye effect").

  In addition, although the specific example of "the chance eyes" is later mentioned with reference to FIG. 10 (a), (b), in this Embodiment, two types, "reach chance eyes" and "out of chance chance eyes" The chance of The "reach chance eye" is a stop symbol that is displayed when out-of-range reach occurs in the variable production when the continuous chance eye effect is being performed, and three identical symbols that are not a hit are displayed. It is a stop symbol to stop. In addition, the “off chance eye” is a stop symbol where no reach occurs but three identical symbols are displayed and stopped. In the following description, when both “reach chance eyes” and “disappeared chance eyes” are shown, or when it is sufficient to show either one, it is simply described as “the chance eyes”.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that has not yet started the effect to "chance eye", and further, the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to be changeable to the "chance of chance" in the middle of the change production. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect which has not yet been started is changed to the chance eye, the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect can be changed to the chance eye, that is, one more time We can display chance eyes.

  In addition, since it is possible to change the stop symbol to "chance eye" in the middle of the change effect, it is possible to perform the continuous chance effect if the change effect is being performed when the prize information command is received. Therefore, the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased as compared with the case where only the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect whose effect is not yet started is changed to the "chance eye", thus improving the player's sense of expectation Can. Further, by making the stop symbol "a chance eye", it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance eye effect is being produced, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to participate in the game.

  The holding ball execution area 203b is a memory for storing data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) referred to when executing processing such as determination of a big hit, setting of display of the first symbol display device 37, and the like.

  When processing such as determination of the jackpot and setting of display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed, data corresponding to each winning (stored in each of the above-mentioned holding balls storage area 203a (counters C1 to C3) The data corresponding to one winning combination among the respective values in (1) is shifted to this holding ball execution area 203b. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that the data is moved from one area where data is stored to another area. The specific configuration of the holding ball execution area 203b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special figure holding ball counter 203c is a counter for counting the number of holdings of winning for the first entrance 64, that is, the special figure holding ball number N. In addition, the special figure reservation ball counter 203c, the maximum value is "4", is initialized to "0" at the time of the initial setting of the RAM (see S113 of Fig. 17).

  In addition, in the special figure reservation lamp 85 (refer FIG. 2) mentioned above, the lamp | ramp of the same number as the special figure reservation ball number N is lighted. More specifically, when the value of special figure reservation ball counter 203c (special figure reservation ball number N) changes, special figure reservation ball after the counter value changes from main controller 110 to effect control apparatus 117 A pending number command is sent indicating the value of the number N. In the effect control device 117, when the number-of-holds command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the lamps with the same number as the number N of special-figure holding balls indicated by the number-of-holds command are turned on .

  The work area 203 d is an area for storing data related to the counters C 1 to C 4, CS 1 to CS 3, CINI 1 to CINI 2 (for example, counter values). The counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 are provided in the work area 203d, and the values of the counters are appropriately stored in counter buffers provided in the work area 203d.

  The prefetching high probability state flag 203e is a jackpot probability that is high when the pattern of the lottery result or the stop symbol is prefetched based on the newly held winning data (each value of the counters C1 to C3). It is a flag indicating whether the winning data should be analyzed as being in the state or the winning data should be analyzed as being in the low probability state (normal state) of the jackpot probability. Further, the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is initialized to OFF at the time of initial setting of the RAM (see S113 in FIG. 17).

  When this pre-reading high probability state flag 203e is on, winning data is analyzed as that the big hit probability is high probability state, when the pre-reading high probability state flag 203e is off, the big hitting probability is low The winning data is analyzed as being in a probability state. In a general pachinko machine, a jackpot lottery is performed, and if the lottery result is “probable jackpot”, the jackpot probability is high until the jackpot (probably jackpot or normal jackpot) is reached next time Transition to the state (the state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal). On the other hand, when the lottery result is “normally big hit” or “off”, the big hit probability shifts to the normal state.

  That is, the jackpot probability of the next jackpot lottery is determined by the most recent jackpot lottery result. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the data of the newly held winning is analyzed when being held, and further, the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203 e is sequentially updated according to the analyzed lottery result. There is. As a result, after the new winning data is stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the new winning data can be obtained without waiting until the start of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the new winning and obtaining the lottery result. When acquired, the lottery result can be analyzed (preread) based on the state of the preread high probability state flag 203e.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5, holding ball storage area 203a provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110, holding ball execution area 203b, a buffer for counters, and counters C1 to C4 and CS1 to CS3. , CINI1 to CINI2 etc. FIG. 5 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of various counters, a holding ball storage area 203a, and a holding ball execution area 203b.

  Determination of jackpot and display setting of the first symbol display device 37 for the storage ball storage area 203a, the storage ball execution area 203b, the buffer for counters, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, etc. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 83 and the like.

  In the setting of the display of the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery, the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the big hit symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the second symbol display portion 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating (see FIGS. 18 and 22), and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0.

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 is at an interval of 4 ms which is an execution interval of main processing (see FIG. 18) or at an interval of 2 ms which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203. When the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to when executing various control programs, the values of each counter stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the RAM 203, a holding ball storage area 203a and a holding ball execution area 203b are provided. As described above, when the ball wins (enters) the first ball entrance 64, the holding ball storage area 203a is used to store the values of the counters C1 to C3 according to the winning timing. It is a memory.

  The holding ball storage area 203a is composed of four holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area). The first hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the first hit type counter storage area 203a2, and the stop pattern selection counter are respectively stored in the four hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the hold ball storage area 203a. A storage area 203a3 is provided. The values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3.

  In the present embodiment, although the first hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the first hit type counter storage area 203a2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 are provided in the holding ball storage area 203a. The three areas 203a1, 203a2 and 203a3 do not necessarily have to be provided in the holding ball storage area 203a. For example, a new storage area is provided separately from the storage ball storage area 203a, and a part of the three areas 203a1, 203a2 and 203a3 is provided in the storage ball storage area 203a, and the rest is stored anew It may be provided in the area.

  As described above, in this holding ball storage area 203a, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins to the first entrance 64 is stored up to four times, In that case, data are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored.

  On the other hand, the holding ball execution area 203b is composed of only one area. In the reserved ball execution area 203b, a first random number counter storage area 203b1, a first collision type counter storage area 203b2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 are provided.

  Further, the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 19, but when a lottery for a big hit is started, it is stored in the first reserved area of the holding ball storage area 203a by the holding ball storage area sequential feeding process (see FIG. 20). The stored data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) are shifted to the areas 203b1 to 203b3 of the holding ball execution area 203b, respectively. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203b is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 21), the lottery result of the jackpot is determined based on the reference data, and the fluctuation display and stop corresponding to the lottery result The display is performed on the first symbol display device 37 or the like.

  More specifically, when the jackpot lottery is started, the random number value of the first random number counter storage area 203a1 of the first holding area is the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b. Be shifted. Similarly, the random number value of the first type counter storage area 203a2 is shifted to the first type counter storage area 203b2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. Ru.

  Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203b is completed, the holding first area becomes empty, so each processing of the holding ball storage area 203a is performed by the holding ball storage area sequential sending process (see FIG. 20) described later. A shift process is performed to pack the data stored (held) in (second to fourth) in an area (first to third) having a small area number. In the present embodiment, in the holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the holding areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held).

  Here, data shift in the holding ball storage area 203a will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c is "4", and data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203a. In this state, when the data of the first holding area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203b and the first holding area becomes empty, the data of the other areas (second to fourth) have an area number of 1 respectively. It is shifted to a small area (first to third). That is, data of the holding second area is shifted to the holding first area, data of the holding third area is shifted to the holding second area, and data of the holding fourth area is shifted to the holding third area .

  Also, for example, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c is "2", only the data of the holding second area is shifted to the holding first area, and the data shift is completed as described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of times of data shift can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

  Note that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area with a smaller area number, respectively. In that case, the determination as to whether or not the data is stored (held) in the reserved area (second to fourth) is unnecessary, so the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the program can be reduced, and the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the number of data stored in the holding ball storage area 203a (the number of holdings) is counted by the special view holding ball counter 203c, and a new winning is made at the first entrance 64. When it occurs, the data corresponding to the new winning is stored in the holding area (Holding 1st area to the 4th holding area) according to the value indicated by the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N) doing.

  Therefore, in the holding ball storage area 203a, since data corresponding to a new winning is not overwritten on the data stored (held) in the holding area, data from the shift source area to the shift destination area Can be left as it is without clearing the data in the area of the shift source. Therefore, the control burden can be reduced as compared with the case where the data of the shift source area is cleared after the data shift. The data of the shift source area may be cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. For example, the first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 738, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed. It is updated once each time and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 18).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and the holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. There are two types of jackpot random number values: low probability (the jackpot probability is normal) and high probability (the jackpot probability is higher than usual), and low probability (the jackpot probability) There are two kinds of random number values that are the big wins in the normal state), and the values are “373, 727”, and the high win rate random number values are 13 when the high probability (the high hit probability is higher than normal) The type is “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733”. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not the large hit is made from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the type of jackpot (a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot), and in the present embodiment, one by one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 4 And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a. The values of the random numbers that are "high probability state (probable variation big hit) after the big hit end" are "1, 2, 3", and the random number values that become "low probability state (usually big hit) after the big hit end" are "0, 4 And two types of hit types are determined. Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of "permanent variation jackpot" and "ordinary jackpot", and one type corresponding to disconnection One of the three display modes in total with the display mode is selected.

  In the present embodiment, based on the data acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64, it is determined that "big hit" and "high probability state (probable variation big hit) after big hit". If it is judged as "big hit" and "low probability state (usually big hit) after big hit", it will be "usually big hit". In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether a big hit or a definite variation big hit is usually provided from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 .

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). In the present embodiment, the pattern of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach is generated, the final stop symbol is shifted by only one before and after the reach symbol. With "stop before and after out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and with the same reach, the final stop design stops at other than before and after reach with "reach other than out of back and forth" Three stop (rendering) patterns (a form of display result of dynamic display) with “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) where reach does not occur are selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in 203a.

  A table (not shown) referred to for selecting the stop pattern from the value (random number value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the stop pattern is It is selected based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. A plurality of such tables are provided such that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 which can take one stop pattern is different. This is whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than a normal state), a low probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state) This is to change the selection ratio of each stop pattern according to the value 203c (the number N of special figure holding balls) and the like.

  For example, in a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal), the range of random numbers corresponding to the “completely out” stop pattern is 10 so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. A wide table of ̃238 is selected, and “complete out” is likely to be selected. In this table, the range of random numbers for "reach back and forth out" narrows to 0-5, and the range of random numbers for "reach other than back and forth" also narrows to 6 to 9, "front and back out of reach" and "back and forth It becomes difficult to select "reach except out".

  In addition, if the random number values are not stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203a in the low probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64 is secured. For this reason, a table with a narrow range of random number values 51 to 238 corresponding to the "completely out" stop pattern is selected, and "completely out" is less likely to be selected. In this table, the range of random numbers for "reach back and forth out" is 0 to 8, the range of random numbers for "reach other than back and forth" is as wide as 9 to 50, and "reach other than back and forth out" is easily selected It has become. Therefore, since the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 can be secured in the low probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously. .

  Next, three variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 will be described. First, two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. For example, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), and the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is sequentially added, and it is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as "first variation type counter", and CS2 is also referred to as "second variation type counter".

  In the present embodiment, the first variation type counter CS1 performs out-of-range fluctuation (rendering for 11 seconds), normal reach fluctuation (rendering for 20 seconds), super reach fluctuation (rendering for 40 seconds), special reach fluctuation (rendering for 60 seconds) One of the patterns (display modes) is determined from the patterns of the four variation effects of. By determining this pattern, a rough variation time of symbol variation is determined. Hereinafter, the patterns of these four variation effects are referred to as normal variation effect patterns.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. 8, patterns of variation effects provided in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, 15 types of patterns of fluctuation effects are provided, and in addition to the above-mentioned outlier fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation, chance eye normal fluctuation (representation for 20 seconds) , Chance eye super fluctuation AD (presentation of 40 seconds each), chance eye special fluctuation AF (presentation of 60 seconds each) are provided.

  Although details will be described later, the chance eye normal fluctuation is executed instead of the normal reach fluctuation when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and similarly, the chance eye super fluctuation A to D is a predetermined one. When the condition is satisfied, instead of the super reach fluctuation, the chance eye special fluctuations A to F are executed instead of the special reach fluctuation when the predetermined condition is satisfied. When this chance eye normal fluctuation, chance eye super fluctuation A to D, and chance eye special fluctuation A to F are executed, the stop symbol is displayed after "chance eye" is displayed once or more in the fluctuation time. . The predetermined conditions will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

  First, the pattern of a usual fluctuation production will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of a pattern of normal variation effects and the contents of the effects. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the out-of-range fluctuation, a stop symbol is displayed 11 seconds after the effect (for example, high-speed variation) is started to be executed. Likewise, in normal reach variation, a stop symbol is displayed 20 seconds after the effect is started, 40 seconds in super reach variation, and 60 seconds in special reach variation. In addition, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation generate reach and perform flashy effects (hereinafter referred to as "reach fluctuation"), respectively, to give the player a sense of expectation for a gaming state advantageous to the player. It is something to have.

  Next, chance eye normal fluctuation is explained. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the chance eye normal fluctuation and the contents of the effect thereof. The chance eye normal fluctuation (20 seconds) is executed in place of the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), and is configured to display “chance eye” once in the fluctuation time. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the chance eye normal fluctuation is constituted by the outlier fluctuation (11 seconds) and the reach fluctuation (9 seconds), and stops when it is started. The out-of-focus fluctuation of the "eye pattern" is executed, and then the reach fluctuation is executed and the stop pattern is displayed.

  Next, chance eye super fluctuation A to D will be described. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of chance eye super fluctuation A to D and the contents of the effect thereof. The chance eye super fluctuation AD (each 40 seconds) is executed instead of the super reach fluctuation (40 seconds). The chance eye super fluctuation A, B is configured to display the "chance eye" once in the fluctuation time, and so on, the chance eye super fluctuation C is twice and the chance eye super fluctuation D is 3 similarly. It is configured to display times. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the chance eye super fluctuation A is constituted by the out fluctuation (11 seconds) and the reach fluctuation (29 seconds), and once the execution is started, the stop symbol is displayed first Out-of-chance variation of "chance eye" is executed, followed by reach fluctuation and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Likewise, the chance eye super fluctuation B is configured by two normal reach fluctuations (20 seconds), and when the execution is started, the normal reach fluctuation of the chance symbol “chance eye” is executed first, and then again, Normal reach fluctuation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, the chance eye super fluctuation C is composed of two outlier fluctuations (10 seconds each) and normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), and when the execution is started, the outing fluctuation of the chance pattern of the stop pattern is It is executed twice in a row, and then the normal reach fluctuation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. Also, the chance eye super fluctuation D is composed of four outlier fluctuations (10 seconds each), and once the execution is started, the stop pattern is executed by three consecutive outlier fluctuations of the "chance eye" and continued Once again, the out fluctuation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, while the normal out-of-range fluctuation (refer to FIG. 6A) is the effect for 11 seconds, in this out-of-line variation for 10 seconds, for example, the time of high-speed fluctuation after the start of fluctuation is shortened by 1 second .

  Next, chance eye special variations A to F will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the chance eye special variations A to F and the contents of the effect thereof. The chance eye special variation AF (each 60 seconds) is executed instead of the special reach variation (60 seconds). The chance eye special variation A, B is configured to display the "chance eye" once within the variation time, and similarly, the chance eye special variation C, D is twice, the chance eye special variation E Is configured to be displayed three times, and the chance special variation F is displayed four times. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the chance eye special variation A is configured by the outset variation (11 seconds) and the reach variation (49 seconds), and once the execution is started, the stop symbol is displayed first Out-of-chance variation of "chance eye" is executed, followed by reach fluctuation and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Likewise, chance eye special variation B is composed of normal reach variation (20 seconds) and super reach variation (40 seconds), and when the execution is started, the stop symbol is the normal reach variation with the chance eye first Is executed, and then super reach variation is executed and a stop symbol is displayed. In addition, chance eye special variation C is made up of three normal reach variations (each 20 seconds), and when the execution is started, the normal reach variation of the chance symbol “opportunity eye” is executed twice in a row and continuously Once again, the normal reach change is executed and the stop symbol is displayed.

  In addition, chance eye special variation D is made up of two outliers (10 seconds each) and super reach variation (40 seconds), and once the execution is started, the stop symbol is the "eye of chance" The change is performed twice in a row, and then the super reach change is performed to display the stop symbol. In addition, the chance eye special variation E is composed of two outliers (10 seconds each) and two normal reach variations (20 seconds each), and once the execution is started, the stop symbol is the chance eye The out-of-order fluctuation is executed twice in a row, followed by the normal reach fluctuation in which the stop symbol is a chance eye. And finally, a normal reach change is performed and a stop symbol is displayed. In addition, the chance eye special variation F is composed of 5 outliers (10 seconds or 16 seconds), and when the execution is started, the stop pattern is executed with outliers (16 seconds) of the "eye chance". Then, the stop symbol "offer chance" out of change (10 seconds) is executed three consecutive times. And finally, the out-of-round fluctuation is executed again and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, while the normal out-of-range fluctuation (refer to FIG. 6A) is the effect of 11 seconds, in this out-of-range fluctuation of 16 seconds, for example, the time of high-speed fluctuation after the start of fluctuation is extended for 5 seconds .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, “chance eye normal fluctuation (20 seconds)” and “chance eye super fluctuation A” are combined by combining normal fluctuation effects (outside fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc.) Since “D (40 seconds)” and “Chance eye special fluctuation (60 seconds)” are configured, “Chance eye normal fluctuation”, “Chance eye super fluctuation A to D”, and “Chance eye special fluctuation” In the case of executing the fluctuation presentation according to “A to F”, the data for presentation used for the usual fluctuation presentation may be combined and executed. Therefore, data for presentation (variation production data to be described later) is specially prepared only for “chance eye normal fluctuation”, “chance eye super fluctuation A to D”, and “chance eye special fluctuation A to F”. Since it is not necessary to do so, it is possible to suppress the amount of variation effect data stored in the character ROM 275 of the effect control device 117 described later, and to suppress the consumption of the character ROM 275.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the fluctuation effect (variation display) is executed will be described. FIG. 9 is a view for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9 (a) is a schematic view showing an actual screen and an effective line setting when the display screen is horizontally scrolled. FIG. 9B is a schematic view showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen vertically scrolls.

  The third design consists of 10 main designs consisting of 10 types of character designs corresponding to the numbers from "0" to "9", and one type of sub-pattern formed smaller than this main design (in this embodiment, , And a picture of shellfish). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute symbol rows (virtual symbol reels) by arranging the main symbols in the ascending or descending order of the numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols. The details of the virtual symbol reel will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variation display is finished. It is configured as follows. When transitioning to “high probability state (probable variation big hit) after the big hit end”, a variable display in which main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability pattern”) are aligned is performed. On the other hand, in the case of transitioning to “the low probability state (usually the large hit) after the end of the big hit”, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to the “low probability pattern”) corresponding to even numbers are aligned is performed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the direction (vertical scroll or horizontal scroll) of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the first hit random number counter storage area of the holding ball execution area 203b. It is configured to change in accordance with the value of 203 b 1.

  Specifically, when the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b is an even number, as shown in FIG. 9A, the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed for each symbol row. The display is changed so as to scroll (horizontally scroll) from right to left (in the direction of the arrow X) with periodicity. As shown in FIG. 9A, at the time of such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed on each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3, the numbers in the main symbol are arranged in ascending order. ing.

  On the other hand, when the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b is an odd number, as shown in FIG. 9 (b), the main symbol and the sub symbol are periodic for each symbol row. Is displayed so as to scroll (vertically scroll) from the top to the bottom (arrow Y direction). As shown in FIG. 9B, at the time of such vertical scrolling, three symbol rows Z1 ', Z2' and Z3 'on the left, middle and right are displayed on each symbol row. In this case, in left symbol row Z1 ', numbers corresponding to main symbol row are arranged in descending order, and in middle symbol row Z2' and right symbol row Z1 ', numbers of main symbols appear in ascending order. Are arranged in

  As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, left, middle, and left for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 'to Z3'), respectively. The third symbol is displayed on the right, upper, middle, and lower three levels. Therefore, a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, five effective lines are set in both of vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, five lines of the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the right upward line L4, and the left upward line L5 are set as effective lines during horizontal scrolling. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, at the time of vertical scrolling, five lines of the upper line L1 ′, the middle line L2 ′, the lower line L3 ′, the upper right line L4 ′, and the upper left line L5 ′ are effective lines. It is set.

  And, in each game, when the combination of the jackpot symbol (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on any effective line when stopping the variable display which scrolls vertically or horizontally, the jackpot as a jackpot The video is displayed. In the case of horizontal scrolling (FIG. 9 (a)), the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and in the case of vertical scroll (FIG. 9 (b)) The variable display stops in the order of left symbol row Z1 ′ → right symbol row Z3 ′ → middle symbol row Z2 ′.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), a description will be given of "the chances (the missed chances, the reach chances)" displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. In FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), an example of the stop symbol when the variation direction of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is horizontally scrolled (in the direction of the arrow X in the figure) is shown. . Fig.10 (a) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of "disappearance chance eyes" displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, FIG.10 (b) is "reach" displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of "the chance eyes."

  First of all, I will explain about the "off chance". As described above, the "off chance eye" is a stop symbol where no reach occurs but three identical symbols are displayed and stopped. In FIG. 10 (a), the symbol of "turtle" is displayed on the right line L3 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2 and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. There is no reach in any of the five effective lines L1 to L5.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a stop symbol in which three identical symbols (here, "turtles") are displayed is regarded as a "missing chance eye" without the occurrence of reach. In the example shown in FIG. 10 (a), the same symbol displayed in each of the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 is "turtle", but if the symbols are the same, the other symbols are the same. It may be a symbol (for example, "shark" or "octopus").

  Next, "reach chance eyes" will be described. As described above, the "reach chance eyes" are stop symbols that are displayed as three identical symbols that are not hit but stop after reaching. In FIG. 10 (b), the symbols "Taco" are displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2 and the middle line L2 of the lower row Z3. Therefore, although reach is generated in the effective line L2 among the five effective lines L1 to L5, it is not a hit.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the reach is occurring but it is not a hit, and the stop symbol in which three identical symbols (here, "octopus") are displayed is "reach chance eyes". And As in the example shown in FIG. 10A, the same symbol may be another symbol (for example, "shark" or "turtle") as long as the symbol is the same.

  Further, the above-mentioned "out of chance" shown in FIG. 10 (a) or "reach chance" shown in FIG. 10 (b) is an example, and the stop position of the same symbol is not limited to this. For example, when the same symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is a "mismatched eye". Further, when the same symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is a "reach chance".

  In the present embodiment, as the pattern of the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-mentioned "outgoing chance eyes" and "reach chance eyes", "probably big hit symbol" which indicates a probability variation big hit Or, "Normal jackpot symbol" which usually shows a big hit, "front and back gap reach symbol" which shows a back and forth reach, "reach symbol other than back and forth" which shows a reach other than back and forth, and "completely out symbol" Is provided.

  Here, returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition, the second fluctuation type counter CS2 changes the time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol (middle symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 'in the present embodiment) stops (in other words, after reaching) The number of fluctuation symbols is determined. Then, based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, the reach control type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode are determined by the effect control device 117.

  Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, various diversification of fluctuation patterns can be easily realized. The values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation mode is determined by the combination of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, but the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1, or with the first variation type counter CS1. It is also possible to similarly determine the symbol variation mode in combination with the stop symbol.

  Here, a table (not shown) in which the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the type of display mode is provided in the ROM 202, and the type of display mode is determined from the value of the variation type counter CS1. In the case of selecting (a pattern of variation presentation), such a table is referred to. Similarly, a table (not shown) for selecting a fluctuation time (number of fluctuation symbols) from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS2 to the stop of the final stop symbol is also provided in the ROM 202.

  Next, the fluctuation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a "third variation type counter". The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment performs decorative effects according to the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and in addition to the variation of the symbols, it is possible to slide the changing symbols A notice effect such as passing a notice character for giving notice of occurrence of reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the advance effect is selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3.

  Specifically, the time required for the advance notice effect is added to the fluctuation time (for example, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.), or the fluctuation time is subtracted to shorten the time during which the fluctuation is displayed (eg- An effect pattern is selected which does not add or subtract fluctuation time, etc.).

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, also in the case of the fluctuation type counter CS3, the range of the effect pattern of the notice effect selected to the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is different There are several tables provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal) or a low probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is normal) A table is provided in which the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different in accordance with the value of (the special figure holding ball number N) or the like. The table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 in the same manner as the variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  As described above, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added / subtracted to / from the fluctuation time is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final change time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the change type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the ball is either the left or the right second ball entry port 67 (through gate) Acquired when it is detected that the vehicle has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be won, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) in which a random number value for determining whether or not the second random number counter C4 is determined from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

  Also, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and it is performed once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

  Here, returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an effect control device 117, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display unit 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and various switches and sensors not shown. A switch 208, a large open port solenoid for opening and closing on the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, and a solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an electric part are connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected by a touch sensor (not shown) that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the hit stop switch for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The effect control device 117 sets the sound output setting in the audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, sets the number of lighting of the lamp in the special view holding lamp 85, lights the lamp in the electric decoration 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc. The third symbol display device (LCD) 81 is used to control the change effect (variation display) and the jackpot effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD). These controls are executed based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 110. For example, control regarding lighting and extinguishing of the special view holding lamp 85 is executed based on the number-of-holds command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, and bus lines 279 and 280. The MPU 271 is connected to the input / output port 277 via a bus line 279 configured of an address bus and a data bus. Further, to the input / output port 277, the main controller 110, the image controller 274, the audio output device 226, the special view holding lamp 85, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34 and the like are connected.

  In addition, the image controller 274 is connected to the character ROM 275 and the video RAM 276, and is connected to the output port 278 via the bus line 280. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the winning probability of the big hit and the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there is, the effect control device 117 is made into a common part and the cost is reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, control of sound output, control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of fluctuation representation (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 are collectively performed. Although the effect control device 117 is configured to perform the control, various types of control may be shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, the sound lamp control device performs control of sound output and control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of display of fluctuation representation (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 is controlled. It may be configured to be performed by the device.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic device as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 incorporates a ROM 272 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 271, fixed value data, and the like, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory or the like. The ROM 272 of the effect control device 117 has a virtual symbol reel memory 272a and a maximum changeable period memory 272b. In the virtual symbol reel memory 272a, the virtual symbol reels showing the arrangement of the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are three symbol rows Z1, Z1 of the upper, middle and lower (left, middle and right) It is stored for each Z2, Z3 (Z1 ', Z2', Z3 '), and the maximum changeable period memory 272b is another stop pattern for the fluctuation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81. The maximum changeable period (hereinafter referred to as "maximum changeable period") is stored in the symbol. In addition, the thing of the period which can change the stop symbol of the fluctuation production started in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 to another stop symbol is only called a changeable period.

  Here, the virtual symbol reel memory 272 a of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c). FIG. 11 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to upper symbol row Z1 (left symbol row Z1 ′), and FIG. 11 (b) is a middle symbol row Z2 (middle symbol row Z2 ′). 11 (c) is a schematic view showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower row design row Z3 (right symbol row Z3 ').

  In the following description, only the case where the variable display scrolls horizontally will be described. However, when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 'and the middle symbol row Z2 is middle. The symbol row Z2 'may be read by replacing the lower row symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3'.

  In the virtual symbol reel memory 272a, virtual symbol reels indicating the arrangement of the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored for each of the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. Memory. As described above, the arrangement of the third symbol displayed in the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 is determined for each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, and "0" to "9" Consisting of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers of "" and one type of sub-pattern (in the present embodiment, a pattern of shellfish) formed smaller than this main symbol There is. One virtual symbol reel indicates the arrangement of the third symbol in one symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3.

  As shown to Fig.11 (a), the virtual symbol reel of upper symbol row Z1 is comprised by 18 3rd symbols. The arrangement of the pattern is, from the top to the back, "shellfish", "crab (9)", "shellfish", "angelfish (hereinafter referred to as" A fish ") (8), ...," The "Shellfish" and "Tako (1)" are arranged in the order, and the array numbers indicating the arrangement in the virtual symbol reel are assigned from 1 to 18 in the order of arrangement of the symbols. In addition, after the symbol of the last "octopus (1)", it returns to the symbol at the top, and it shall repeat repeatedly in order of "shellfish", "crab (9)", "shellfish", ....

  In addition, the number enclosed in parentheses following the name of the character symbol indicates the number corresponding to the character symbol. For example, the symbol of "crab" is a symbol corresponding to the numeral "9". It shows. Among the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the upper symbol row Z1, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the upper symbol row Z1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), the virtual symbol reel of the lower row pattern row Z3 is configured with eighteen third symbols. The arrangement of the symbols is the exact opposite of the arrangement of the upper symbol row Z1, and from the top to the rear, "Tako (1)", "Shellfish", "Harrisenbon (2)", ..., "Kani (Screw) 9) ”,“ shellfish ”are arranged in this order. Then, the array numbers indicating the arrangement on the virtual symbol reel are given in the order of 1 to 18. In addition, after the symbol of the final "shellfish", it returns to the symbol at the head, and it shall repeat repeatedly in order of "octopus (1)", "shellfish", "harisens bon (2)", .... Of the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the lower figure pattern row Z3, three consecutive third symbols (main figure and sub-pattern) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the lower figure pattern row Z3.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the virtual symbol reels of the middle symbol row Z2 are constituted by 20 third symbols, and the arrangement of the symbols is the arrangement of the virtual symbol reels of the lower pattern row Z3. It is an arrangement that adds two patterns of "shark (4)" and "shellfish" to the end. Then, as in the case of the virtual symbol reels of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, after the final symbol of "shellfish", it returns to the leading symbol, "octopus (1)", "shellfish", " The sequence of "Harrisembon (2)", ... is repeated, and the sequence numbers are also assigned from 1 to 20 in order from the top of the sequence to the rear. Among the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the middle symbol row Z2, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub-symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the middle symbol row Z2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the maximum changeable period memory 272b of the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 12 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the contents of the maximum changeable period memory 272b of the effect control device 117, and FIG. 12 (b) is a schematic view of the maximum changeable period of the deviation variation. FIG. 12C is a schematic view showing a maximum changeable period of normal reach fluctuation.

  In the following description, only the case where the variable display scrolls horizontally will be described. However, when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 'and the middle symbol row Z2 is middle. The symbol row Z2 'may be read by replacing the lower row symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3'.

  The maximum changeable period memory 272b is a memory in which the maximum changeable period of the outlier fluctuation to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 and the maximum changeable period of the normal reach fluctuation are stored. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12A, 10 seconds is stored as the maximum changeable period of the outlier variation, and 15 seconds is stored as the maximum changeable period of the normal reach variation.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has, as a pattern of normal fluctuation effects, out-of-position fluctuation (11 seconds), normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), super reach fluctuation (40 seconds), special reach fluctuation (60) Seconds) are provided. However, among these, the change effect for changing the stop symbol during the change effect is only out-of-range fluctuation and normal reach fluctuation. The reason will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, although the time of the whole of fluctuation production is different for every pattern of fluctuation production, three symbol lines (for example, upper pattern line Z1, middle pattern line Z2, lower figure pattern line Z3 displayed on the third symbol display device 81) In (refer to FIG. 9A), the time until the first upper symbol row Z1 and the second lower symbol row Z3 stop is common (10 seconds).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), when out-of-plane variation (11 seconds) is performed, three symbol rows (for example, upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, lower pattern) immediately after the start of execution Each of the columns Z3 (see FIG. 9A) starts high-speed fluctuation. After that, the upper symbol row Z1 switches in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation after 8 seconds and stops after 9 seconds, and the lower row pattern row Z3 simultaneously (that is, after 9 seconds) when the upper symbol row Z1 stops. It changes in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation and stops after 10 seconds. Then, the middle symbol row Z2 is switched in the order of the medium speed fluctuation and the low speed fluctuation at the same time as the lower figure design row Z3 is stopped (that is, after 10 seconds) and stopped after 11 seconds.

  In addition, in each variation production, the first upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high-speed variation to medium-speed variation for 1 second from 8 seconds to 9 seconds regardless of deviation variation (11 seconds), and further to low-speed variation This is a margin period provided for reliably performing (following) control processing such as switching and stopping. Also, similarly, the second lower figure pattern row Z3 for one second from 9 seconds to 10 seconds, and the third middle pattern row Z2 for one second from 10 seconds to 11 seconds, from high-speed variation to medium-speed variation This is a margin period provided for reliably performing (following) control processing such as switching and stopping at low speed fluctuation.

  Therefore, after stop display of upper symbol row Z1 is started among upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, that is, after upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high-speed variation to medium-speed variation Or, even after switching from medium speed change to low speed change, the third main pattern (the main pattern in the upper pattern row Z1) is placed in the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3. If you change the symbol (if you change it), you can change the stop symbol in the variable effect to "eye of chance". That is, even after the start of the out-of-out fluctuation, even after the upper symbol row Z1 starts the low-speed variation (after 8 seconds), if the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3 are in high-speed variation (less than 9 seconds), the middle symbol row Z2 And by replacing (changing) the third symbol in the lower row of symbol rows Z3, it is possible to change the stop symbol of the out-of-set variation to "chance eye".

  Therefore, when changing the stop design in the change production to "chance eye" only when the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are all moving at high speed (for example, less than 8 seconds) Rather, it is possible to secure a longer period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed. Therefore, since the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects.

  In particular, when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, the same main symbol is However, the third symbol may be changed to be in the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, after the start of the out-of-out fluctuation, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, and after the stop display of the lower-side pattern row Z3 is started (after 9 seconds), that is, the lower-side pattern row Z3 changes from high speed to middle Even after switching to fluctuation or after switching from medium-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, if middle symbol row Z2 is in high-speed variation (less than 10 seconds), replace (change) the third symbol of middle symbol row Z2 , You can change the stop pattern of out-of-range fluctuation to "chance".

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since it is possible to secure a longer period (changeable period), it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects by allowing a long changeable period. As described above, the maximum changeable period corresponding to the deviation fluctuation (11 seconds) is 10 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, when replacing the third symbol of the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, the third of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during high speed fluctuation or medium speed fluctuation It is configured to replace only the design. This is because while the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are fluctuating at high speed or medium speed, the scroll speed of the third symbol is generally high, and the player recognizes the third symbol constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This is because it is not possible (or because it is difficult to recognize), it is possible to replace the third symbol constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without making the player notice.

  On the other hand, when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are fluctuating slowly, generally, the scroll speed of the third symbol is low, and the player can recognize the third symbol constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Therefore, when the third symbol constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is replaced, the change is recognized by the player, so that a fluctuation effect unnatural to the player is executed. Even when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, if the third symbol constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is replaced, the change is recognized by the player, which is unnatural to the player. Fluctuation effect is executed. Therefore, by replacing only the third symbol of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 during high speed change or medium speed change, it is possible to prevent the player from performing unnatural change effects, thereby improving the value of the change effects. It is possible to increase the value of continuous chance eye effects. It should be noted that instead of replacing only the third symbol of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 during high speed fluctuation or medium speed fluctuation, even if only the third symbol of the symbol column Z1 to Z3 during high speed fluctuation is replaced Alternatively, only the third symbol of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during medium speed variation may be replaced.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 12 (c), when normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is executed, three symbols of upper, middle, and lower immediately after the start of execution, as in the case of out-of-bound fluctuation. Rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 start high-speed variation, upper symbol row Z1 stops after 9 seconds, lower figure symbol row Z3 stops after 10 seconds, and middle symbol row Z2 changes medium-speed and low-speed after 10 seconds Switch in order of fluctuation. However, after that, after the slow fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues for 10 seconds, the stop display is displayed.

  In the case of normal reach variation, the same main symbol is always contained in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. Even if the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display is long (10 seconds), so the middle symbol row Z2 changes the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 even during medium speed change or low speed change By changing (changing), it is possible to change the stop pattern of out-of-range fluctuation to "chance eye".

  More specifically, since the time until the stop display is long (10 seconds), the scroll display time of the middle symbol row Z2 is also long, and the third symbol is frequently exchanged in the middle symbol row Z2. Therefore, if the third symbol is replaced at the timing when a new third symbol is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the stop symbol can be changed to "chance" without making the player notice. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing unnatural fluctuation effects.

  Also, even if the middle symbol row Z2 is switched to medium-speed fluctuation or low-speed fluctuation, the stop symbol during the fluctuation production can be changed to "chance", so if the middle symbol row Z2 is in high-speed fluctuation (for example, 10) Rather than changing the stop symbol during change production to "chance eye" only in less than a second), since the changeable period can be secured longer, the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects can be further increased.

  For example, if it is less than 5 seconds after the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (after 10 seconds), the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed. Here, the reason why it is less than 5 seconds is to ensure that the stop symbol is changed, and the maximum changeable period is 10 seconds depending on the content of the control process (for example, when the control load is small) It may be close to In that case, since the maximum changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects. As described above, the maximum changeable period corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is 15 seconds.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the third symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are scrolled in the third symbol display device 81 in the order of arrangement of the third symbols determined by the virtual symbol reels. Are configured to For example, even if the remaining design time is short (1 second) after the low speed fluctuation of the middle pattern row Z2 is started as in the out-of-order fluctuation, even if the stop design is changed, scroll display to the changed third design It may not be possible to display the desired stop symbol. However, if it is normal reach fluctuation, the remaining display time is long (10 seconds) after the stop display of middle symbol row Z2 is started, so if it is less than 5 seconds after the start of the stop display, change the stop design, The changed third symbol can be scrolled and displayed, and the desired stop symbol can be reliably displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, as in the case of normal reach fluctuation, the stop symbol is changed only when the changed stop symbol ("chance eye") can be displayed reliably, regardless of the outlier fluctuation and the normal reach fluctuation. The control burden can be reduced compared to when trying to change the stop symbol. In addition, you may comprise so that the change of a stop symbol may be tried irrespective of a deviation fluctuation | variation or a normal reach fluctuation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of out-of-out fluctuation (11 seconds), since the time of high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is short (1 second), the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (changed) No, but it is configured to replace (change) the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 as in the case of normal reach variation by lengthening the high speed variation of the middle symbol row Z2 (for example, 6 seconds etc.) Also good.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum changeable period is changed according to the pattern of the change effect, but all the maximum changeable periods are the same time (8 seconds regardless of the pattern of the change effect ) May be used. That is, if all of the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are moving at high speed, replace (change) the third symbol of the upper, middle and lower pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 and remove them. The stop symbol of the change may be configured to be changed to the "chance of chance". In addition, as described above, for one second from 8 seconds to 9 seconds, control processing such as switching upper pattern row Z1 from high-speed fluctuation to medium-speed fluctuation and switching to low-speed fluctuation and stopping is reliably executed (following Margin period provided to Therefore, depending on the contents of the control process (for example, when the control load is small), the maximum changeable period may be close to 9 seconds. In that case, since the maximum changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum changeable period corresponding to normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is 15 seconds, but may be determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. That is, since the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time until the final stop symbol stops after the reach occurrence, a time that can reliably execute the control process is subtracted from the determined time. Maximum changeable period. According to this structure, the maximum changeable period can be secured to the longest according to the contents of the effect, so that the chance to perform the continuous chance effect can be further increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing when the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed (after 9 seconds) and the timing when the stop display of the lower pattern row Z3 is started (after 9 seconds) are the same. It is not necessary to set it, and it may be set arbitrarily. For example, the timing at which the stop display of the lower figure pattern row Z3 is started may be made faster than the timing at which the upper pattern row Z1 is stopped and displayed, and the lower pattern may be faster than the timing at which the upper pattern row Z1 is stopped and displayed. The timing at which the stop display of the column Z3 is started may be delayed. The same applies to the timing (after 10 seconds) when the symbol row Z3 in the lower figure is stopped and displayed (after 10 seconds) when the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (the timing needs to be the same) There is no need to set it arbitrarily.

  Here, returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. The RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 are stored, and various flags, counters, and values such as I / O. Work area (work area). Furthermore, the RAM 273 has various memories, flags, counters, and the like.

  Here, the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic view showing an example of the contents of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. The RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 includes a stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a, a special figure holding ball counter 273b, a chance line consecutive number counter 273c, a fluctuation time memory 273d, a fluctuation time counter 273e, and a fluctuation start flag 273f. , Stop symbol changeable period flag 273g, stop symbol setting in progress flag 273h, stop symbol set completion flag 273i, chance display number of times selection counter 273j, simulated variation chance eye display number memory 273k, stop symbol pattern table memory It has 271l, a display pattern pattern memory 273m, a probability variable extension possible period counter 273n, and a normal extension possible period counter 273o.

  The stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is a memory for storing a stop symbol instruction storage table. The stop symbol instruction storage table is a table for storing a setting value indicating a stop symbol to be set when the fluctuation effect is executed for the fluctuation effect being executed and each fluctuation effect to be executed individually. is there.

  Here, the stop symbol instruction storage table will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 (a) to 14 (c). Fig.14 (a) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the content of a stop symbol instruction storage table, FIG.14 (b) is an example of the relationship between the setting value memorize | stored in a stop symbol instruction storage table, and a stop symbol. FIG. 14C is a schematic view showing an example of a prize information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device 110 and setting values set according to the command. is there.

  The stop symbol instruction storage table stores a set value (mode information) indicating a stop symbol to be set when the fluctuation effect is executed for the fluctuation effect under execution and each fluctuation effect to be executed individually. It is a table for As shown in FIG. 14A, the stop symbol instruction storage table includes an execution area, a first holding area, a second holding area, a third holding area, a fourth holding area, and a next holding area. It is provided.

  The execution area stores the set value indicating the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed, and the first to fourth holding areas and the next holding area are set when the fluctuation effect to be executed is executed. The set value of the stop symbol to be stored is stored. More specifically, the first reserved area stores the next variable production to be executed, that is, the set value of the stop symbol to be set when the first variable presentation is performed for the first one. Ru.

  Likewise, in the second reserve area, the second variation area in the order of execution is scheduled, in the third reserve area, in the third variation area, the third variation area, in the fourth reserve area, the second schedule The setting values of the stop symbol to be set when the fourth variation effect is performed are stored. In the next hold area, the setting value is stored only when the setting value is stored in each of the first to fourth holding areas. In the next hold area, the change effect corresponding to the setting value of the fourth hold area is ended, and the setting value of the stop symbol to be set when the next change effect is performed is stored.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, “off” is stored as a setting value in the execution area. Hereinafter, in order to clarify that it is a set value, “set value:” is described before each set value when indicating the set value. For example, when the setting value is "out", "setting value: out" is described. Then, “set value: chance item” is stored in the first hold area and the second hold area. Likewise, "the set value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" is stored in the third reserve area, "set value: skip after big hit" is stored in the fourth reserve area, and nothing is stored in the next reserve area. Absent.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, when the variation effect corresponding to the setting value of the execution area is ended and the next variation effect is started, the setting value of the first hold area is shifted to the execution area. Then, the setting values of the second to fourth holding areas are respectively shifted to an area with a smaller area number (first to third holding areas), and the setting values of the next holding area are shifted to the fourth holding area. Ru. Thereby, the set value which shows the stop symbol of the fluctuation production in process of execution is memorize | stored in the execution area. In the case of shifting the setting value of each holding area (first to fourth holding areas, next holding area), for example, it may be performed only when the setting value is stored in the shift source holding area. As a result, the number of times of data shift can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced. In addition, regardless of whether setting values are stored in the shift source holding area, the setting values of the respective holding areas (first to fourth holding areas, next holding area) may be shifted. good.

  Next, the relationship between the setting value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol in the variation effect will be described. FIG. 14 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of the relationship between the setting value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect. As shown in FIG. 14B, eight types of setting values are provided in the present embodiment. Specifically, as set values, “set value: out”, “set value: chance eye”, “set value: skip after outset”, “set value: skip after big hit”, “set value: first skip”, "Setting value: jackpot", "setting value: chance eye & odd variation jackpot", "setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" are provided.

  When the change effect is executed when the set value of the execution area of the stop symbol instruction storage table is "set value: out", the stop symbol of the change effect becomes "outside pattern other than the chance eye" and the setting of the execution area When the fluctuation effect is executed when the value is “set value: chance”, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect becomes “the chance”. Likewise, if the setting value of the execution area is "setting value: skip after falling out", "setting value: skip after big hit", "setting value: first time skip", when the fluctuation effect is executed, If the stop symbol is "outside symbol other than chance eyes" and the setting value of the execution area is "set value: big hit" and the fluctuation effect is executed, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect is "probably big hit symbol" Or "usually a jackpot symbol" will be. In addition, it will be determined when a stop symbol command to be described later is received by the effect control device 117 as to which jackpot stop symbol will be given.

  In addition, when the change production is executed when the setting value of the execution area is "set value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot", at least one or more "chance eyes" are displayed in the change production, and finally, The stop symbol is "probably big hit symbol". In addition, when the change production is executed when the setting value of the execution area is "set value: chance eye & normal jackpot", at least one or more "chance eyes" are displayed in the change production, and finally, The stop symbol is "usually a big hit symbol".

  Next, the timing at which a new set value is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table will be described. FIG. 14C is a schematic view showing an example of a prize information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device 110 and a setting value corresponding to the lottery result indicated by the command. When the effect control device 117 receives a winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device 110, a set value (aspect information) corresponding to the received winning information command is added to the stop symbol instruction storage table. Is stored in In that case, the setting values are stored in the ascending order of the area numbers among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas).

  As shown in FIG. 14 (c), if the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command is "reach out of back and forth," "reach other than back and forth out of reach," and "complete out of reach," "set value: out" is stop symbol instruction storage It is newly stored in the table. Further, if the lottery result indicated by the received prize information command is “probable variation big hit”, “ordinary big hit”, “setting value: big hit” is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, when the set value corresponding to the received winning information command (lottery result) is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table, the content of the set value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table is used. In response, the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table are updated (see S1509, S1510 and S1513 of FIG. 34). When this update is performed, "set value: out" and "set value: jackpot" stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table are changed to any of the above-described eight types of set values.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. The special figure reservation ball counter 273b is a counter for counting the number of times of prize holding for the first entrance 64 (the special figure reservation ball number N). The special figure holding ball counter 273 b has a maximum value of “4”, and is initialized to “0” when setting an initial value of the RAM (see S1013 in FIG. 27). In addition, the value of special figure reservation ball counter 273b (special figure reservation ball number N), when the winning a prize information command transmitted from main controller 110 is received (refer to S1404 in Figure 33), fluctuation pattern command and production It is updated when the time addition command is received (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  The chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed. In the case of continuous chance counter effect 273c, 1 is added each time the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the chance symbol is executed, and when the continuous chance effect is finished (see S1417 in FIG. 33), the RAM It is initialized to "0" at the time of initial value setting (see S1013 in FIG. 27).

  The fluctuation time memory 273d is a memory in which the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. When the fluctuation pattern command and the presentation time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110 are received, the fluctuation time is stored in the fluctuation time memory 273d (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern command is a command indicating the pattern of fluctuation presentation to be started (outside fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, special reach fluctuation, etc.), and the presentation time addition command should be started to be executed. It is a command which shows the pattern of the notice production of change production. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is determined for each of the patterns of the fluctuation effect, and the extension time and the shortening time are determined for each of the patterns of the advance effect. Therefore, the fluctuation time memory 273d stores a time obtained by totaling the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the extension time (shortened time) corresponding to the rendering time addition command.

  The fluctuation time counter 273 e is a counter in which an elapsed time from when the fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. The fluctuation start flag 273 f is a flag that is turned on when the start of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is instructed from the main control device 110 and is turned off when the fluctuation effect is started. Specifically, the fluctuation start flag 273f is set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command and the presentation time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110 are received (see S1407 in FIG. 33), and the third symbol display device is displayed. The variable effect is set to OFF when 81 is started (see S1305 in FIG. 30).

  Whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is within the changeable stop symbol period (that is, within the changeable period) whether the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect started in the third symbol display device 81 is changed or not And is set to ON only when out-of-range fluctuation or normal reach fluctuation is started (see S1910 and S1911 in FIG. 41). While the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol (that is, within the changeable period). On the other hand, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off, the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed can not be changed. Specifically, the changeable period is over or the change effect is not executed. And so on.

  The stop symbol setting flag 273h is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is being set. When the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on, it indicates that it is in the process of setting the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect to be started (or started to be executed), and the stop symbol setting flag 273h is If it is off, it indicates that the setting of the stop symbol is finished or the setting of the stop symbol is not yet performed.

  The stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set. The stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is set to ON when the setting of the stop symbol is completed. When the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is off, it indicates that the setting of the stop symbol is not yet performed.

  For example, the chance display count selection counter 273 j is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 1 to 4 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 4). If the chance eye super fluctuation A to D is executed instead of the super reach fluctuation or the special reach fluctuation is executed to execute the chance eye special fluctuation A to F during the continuous chance eye effect production, this chance eye The value of the display number selection counter 273 j is referred to. Then, among the chance eye super fluctuation A to D or the chance eye special fluctuation A to F, the one showing “the chance eye” the same number of times as the reference value is selected and executed.

  If the chance eye normal fluctuation, the chance eye super fluctuation A to D, or the chance eye special fluctuation A to F is executed, the pseudo fluctuation chance eye display number memory 273k continuously displays "chance eye" in the fluctuation effect It is a memory in which the number is stored.

  The stop symbol pattern table memory 2731 is a memory for storing a stop symbol pattern table. The stop symbol pattern table is a table for preparing in advance an arrangement (combination of symbols) of the third symbol corresponding to the pattern of the stop symbol for each pattern of the stop symbol. In addition, only information (hereinafter, referred to as "third symbol array information") indicating "the array of third symbols" is stored in this table, and image data and the like are not stored.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, first, the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) corresponding to the pattern of the stop symbol to be displayed is It is acquired from within this stop symbol pattern table. And, in order to constitute the stop design which corresponds to the 3rd design arrangement information which is acquired, the graphics data of the 3rd design which is included in the stop design is acquired. After that, the image of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the arrangement of the third symbol indicated by the third symbol array information, and as a result, the stop symbol is displayed.

  Here, the stop symbol pattern table will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b). Fig.15 (a) is schematic which shows an example of the content of a stop symbol pattern table, FIG.15 (b) is schematic which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol pattern table which is being updated. In the following description, only the case where the variable display scrolls horizontally will be described. However, when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 'and the middle symbol row Z2 is middle. The symbol row Z2 'may be read by replacing the lower row symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3'.

  The stop symbol pattern table is a table for preparing in advance, for each stop symbol pattern, third symbol array information (information indicating the third symbol array) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. In addition, as above-mentioned, in this embodiment, as a pattern of a stop symbol, "a miss chance eye", a "reach chance eye", a "probability variation big hit symbol", a "normal big hit symbol", a "long reach out reach symbol", " Reach design other than the front and back deviation, "full out design" is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (a), in the stop symbol pattern table, the probability variation big hit area, the normal big hit area, the front and back side reach area, the front and back side reach area, the reach chance eye area, and the front chance eye area and , A completely out of area and a symbol pattern generation area are provided.

  The probability variation jackpot area is an area for storing the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “probability variation jackpot symbol”. Similarly, the normal big hit area corresponds to the "normal big hit symbol", the front and back out of reach area corresponds to the "front and back out of reach design", the reach area other than front and back out corresponds to the "reach reach other than back and forth", reach The chance eye area corresponds to the "reach chance eye", the out-of-chance eye area corresponds to the "out-of-chance eye", and the completely out of the area is for storing each third symbol array information corresponding to the "complete out of design" It is an area. Although the details will be described later, the symbol pattern generation area is a work area when the stop symbol pattern table is updated.

  Further, in each area, a first area, a second area, and a third area are provided, and in the first area, three symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, Among the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 9A), information indicating each symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is stored, and similarly, in the second area, Information indicating each symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is stored, and information indicating each symbol of the lower row symbol row Z3 is stored in the third area.

  Specifically, in the first area, the arrangement numbers (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reels corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 and at the left end of the three third symbols constituting the upper symbol row Z1 The sequence number of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored. Likewise, in the second area, the arrangement number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2 and the arrangement number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2 is It is memorized. In the third area, the arrangement numbers (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reels corresponding to the lower figure row Z3 and the array numbers of the third pattern stopped and displayed at the left end of the lower figure row Z3 are stored. Ru.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 15A, “6” is stored in the first area of the probability variation big hit area, “12” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. I assume. The array number of the first area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the upper symbol row Z1. Therefore, when the array number is "6", the upper symbol row Z1 sequentially extends from the left to the right. 7) It shows that it is a pattern row aligned with "", "shellfish", and "Ancho" (6). Likewise, when the arrangement number of the second area is "12", the middle symbol row Z2 is a symbol arranged in order from "left" to "right", "shellfish", "jugong (7)", "shellfish" When the sequence number of the third area is "11", the lower row of the figure row Z3 is "left-handed" (6), "shellfish" and "dugong (7)" in the order from left to right. Indicates that it is a row of symbols aligned with.

  When these symbol rows are combined, since "Jugon (7)" is lined up on the left upward line L5 (see FIG. 9A), it becomes a stop symbol indicating a probability variation big hit symbol. Therefore, when the stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on each arrangement number of the probability variation jackpot area, the probability variation jackpot symbol is displayed.

  In addition, since the description is the same for the normal jackpot area, the front and back reach area, the reach area other than the front and back, the reach chance eye area, the off chance eye area, and the completely out area, the description will be omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in each of the first to third areas, one array element number indicating each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is stored. Therefore, inside the RAM 273 rather than storing the arrangement numbers of the three third symbols constituting each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 and storing the arrangement order of the third symbols of each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3. The amount of information to be stored in can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, among the first to third areas, among the three third symbols constituting each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, the array number of the third symbol to be displayed stopped at the left end Although stored, the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the center may be stored, or the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the right end may be stored. Further, among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, the array number of any two third symbols may be stored, and each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is configured. The sequence numbers of the three third symbols may be stored respectively.

  Next, a symbol pattern generation area will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol pattern generation area is a work area for updating each area (such as a probability variation big hit area or a normal big hit area) in the stop symbol pattern table, and in each of the first to third areas, the value is like a counter. Will be updated.

  Specifically, 1 is added to the third area periodically (for example, every 5 ms), and when the value of the third area reaches the maximum value (ie 18), the third area is cleared to 1 and , 1 is added to the second area. Then, when the value of the second area reaches the maximum value (ie, 20), the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area. When the value of the first area reaches the maximum value (ie, 18), the first area is simply cleared to 1.

  Also, each time the value of the symbol pattern generation area is updated, the value (arrangement number) of each of the first to third areas after the update is the area in the stop symbol pattern table (for example, the probability variation) It is determined whether it corresponds to a big hit area, a normal big hit area, etc.), and the value (sequence number) of the symbol pattern generation area after updating is stored in the determined area. That is, in the symbol pattern generation area, a new third symbol array (combination of symbols) is generated, and thereafter, the generated third symbol array corresponds to the third symbol array (for example, probability variation big hit It is stored (copied) in an area or a normal jackpot area etc.).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 15B, “15” is stored in the first area of the symbol pattern generation area, “1” is stored in the second area, and “18” is stored in the third area. It is assumed that Here, 1 is added to the third area at the update timing of the symbol pattern generation area, but in this case, the value of the third area exceeds the maximum value (18), so the third area is cleared to 1 At the same time, 1 is added to the second area. As a result, the symbol pattern generation area is updated to a state in which the first area is "15", the second area is "2", and the third area is "1".

  If the first area is "15", it indicates that the upper symbol row Z1 is a symbol row aligned with "shellfish", "harissenbon (2)" and "shellfish" sequentially from left to right, and the following Similarly, when the second area is "2", the middle symbol row Z2 is aligned with "shellfish", "harissenbon (2)", and "shellfish", and when the third area is "1", the pattern shown below It is shown that row Z3 is a row of symbols aligned with "octopus (1)", "shellfish", and "harissenbon (3)".

  When these symbol rows are combined, since "Harrisembon (2)" exists in each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, a stop symbol indicating an eye for a chance of falling off is obtained. Therefore, the value of the updated symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the out-of-check chance area in the stop symbol pattern table.

  Then, when the symbol pattern generation area is updated again, 1 is added to the third area. As a result, in the symbol pattern generation area, the first area is "15" and the second area is "2", the second Three areas are updated to "2". Therefore, in this case, only the arrangement of the pattern row Z3 shown below is updated.

  When the 3rd area is "2", the lower figure handle row Z3 shows the symbol row aligned with "shellfish", "halisenbon (2)", and "shellfish", and when these symbol rows are combined, the middle line Since "Harrisenbon (2)" is lined up with L2, it usually becomes a stop pattern showing a big hit design. Therefore, the value of the updated symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the normal jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table.

  Similarly, the update of the stop symbol pattern table is repeated each time the symbol pattern generation area is updated. In addition, as a result of the symbol pattern generation area being updated, the value of the updated symbol pattern generation area being the stop symbol pattern table is generated when the stop symbol indicating the reach symbol in front and back, and the reach symbol other than back and forth is generated. Although it is stored in the reach area in the front and back, and in the reach area other than the front and back, respectively, when the stop symbol is the reach chance eye, the value of the updated symbol pattern generation area is the reach chance eye area Are also stored.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. The display symbol pattern memory 273 m is a memory for storing the third symbol array information (information indicating the array of the third symbol) of the stop symbol actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display symbol pattern memory 273 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, and FIG. 16 (b) is a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example. In the following description, only the case where the variable display scrolls horizontally (in the direction of the arrow X in the figure) will be described, but when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol column Z1 is displayed as the left symbol column Z1 '. The middle symbol row Z2 may be read by replacing the middle symbol row Z2 with the lower symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  The display symbol pattern memory 273 m is a memory for storing the third symbol array information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) of the stop symbol to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol pattern table Similarly, a first area, a second area, and a third area are provided.

  That is, in the first area, the arrangement numbers (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reels corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 are stopped and displayed at the left end among the three third symbols constituting the upper symbol row Z1. The sequence number of the third symbol is stored. Likewise, in the second area, the arrangement number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2 and the arrangement number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2 is It is memorized. In the third area, the arrangement numbers (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reels corresponding to the lower figure row Z3 and the array numbers of the third pattern stopped and displayed at the left end of the lower figure row Z3 are stored. Ru.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, “6” is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273 m, “12” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. In this state, it is assumed that a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Since the array number of the first area indicates the third symbol on the left end of the upper symbol row Z1, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 sequentially from left to right as shown in FIG. 16 (b) , “Jugong (7)”, “Shellfish”, “Anchow (6)” and a row of symbols are displayed.

  Likewise, since the array number of the second area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2, lined with "shellfish", "jugong (7)", "shellfish" sequentially from left to right The row of symbols is displayed, and the array number of the third area indicates the third symbol on the left end of the row of symbols Z3 in the figure below. Therefore, from left to right, "Ancho (6)", "shellfish", "jugong ( 7) "is displayed. As described above, each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3 is stopped and displayed in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower pattern row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Further, the same description will be made in the case where other arrangement numbers are stored in the first to third areas, and therefore the description will be omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in each of the first to third areas, one array element number indicating each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is stored. Therefore, inside the RAM 273 rather than storing the arrangement numbers of the three third symbols constituting each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 and storing the arrangement order of the third symbols of each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3. The amount of information to be stored in can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, among the first to third areas, among the three third symbols constituting each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, the array number of the third symbol to be displayed stopped at the left end Although stored, the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the center may be stored, or the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the right end may be stored. Further, among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, the array number of any two third symbols may be stored, and each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is configured. The sequence numbers of the three third symbols may be stored respectively.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the random number extension possible period counter 273 n receives a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable random hitting”, the final lottery result is “done until the effect period of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received winning information command. It is a counter used to determine whether it is possible to extend (continue) the presentation period of consecutive chance eye effects that are “off”. The remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before extension of the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is not possible (impossible of continuing the continuous chance eye effect) is stored in the definite variation time extension possible period counter 273n.

  Although details will be described later, it is possible to receive a winning information command in which the lottery result is “reach out of back and forth,” and as a result, the continuous chance effect effect in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed. Then, 5 is always stored in the probability variable extension possible period counter 273 n as the remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before the effect period of the continuous chance effect presentation becomes impossible (cannot be continued). After that, each time a prize information command is newly received, the value is decremented by one, and when the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n becomes less than 1, a prize information command whose lottery result is "certainly hit big hit" is received Also, it will not be possible to extend (continue) the presentation period for continuous chance eye effects.

On the other hand, when the probability change time extension possible period counter 273n is 1 or more, when a prize information command whose lottery result is “probability change jackpot” is received, a final lottery until a fluctuation effect corresponding to the received prize information command The presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation whose result is "off" is extended (continuation). As a result, apparently, the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye effect production is changed to the “permanent change jackpot”, and the production period of the continuous chance eye effect production is extended.
When the normal time extension possible period counter 273 o receives a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the final lottery result is “done until the effect period of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received winning information command. It is a counter used to determine whether it is possible to extend (continue) the presentation period of consecutive chance eye effects that are “off”. The remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before extension of the presentation period of the continuous chance-eye effect is not possible (impossible to continue the continuous chance-eye effect) is stored in the normal-time extendable period counter 273o.

  Although details will be described later, it is possible to receive a winning information command in which the lottery result is “reach out of back and forth,” and as a result, the continuous chance effect effect in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed. Then, the number of winning information commands that can be received by the normal extension extension period counter 273o can not be extended until the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is not extended (the continuous chance eye effect can not be continued), 1 or 2 Is stored. After that, each time a winning information command is newly received, the value is decremented by one, and when this normal time extension possible period counter 273 o becomes less than 1, a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal win” is received. Also, it will not be possible to extend the production period for continuous chance eye effects (continue for continuous chance eye effects).

  On the other hand, when the normal time extension possible period counter 273o is 1 or more, when a winning information command having a lottery result of “normal big hit” is received, a final drawing is performed until a fluctuation effect corresponding to the received winning information command. The presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect production whose result is “off” is extended (continuous chance eye effect presentation is continued). As a result, apparently, the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye effect production is changed to "normal jackpot", and the production period of the continuous chance eye effect production is extended.

  In the present embodiment, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility that the game state shifts to the advantageous gaming state (big hit) for the player after the continuous chance eye effect is finished, as the number of times of continuous display of "chance eye" increases. Be done. In addition, when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is "off" is executed, or when it is executed, a winning information command in which the lottery result is "(probably odd or normal) jackpot" is newly added. When it is received, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect production is extended (continuous chance eye effect production is continued).

  Therefore, when transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the number of times of displaying "chance eyes" displayed in the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, and the effect time of the continuous chance eye effect is extended. be able to. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player after improving the sense of expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the gaming state advantageous to the player, and further, after continuously giving the player a sense of expectation for a long time. It is possible to shift to the gaming state. Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to the gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In the case of giving a predetermined gaming value to the player (for example, performing payout balls) instead of transitioning to a gaming state (big hit) which is advantageous for the player, it is displayed in the continuous chance eye effect production In addition to increasing the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed, it may be configured to extend the presentation time of the continuous opportunity eye presentation. Even in this case, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely giving the predetermined game value to the player, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. The image controller 274 adjusts timings of the character ROM 275, the video RAM 276, the input / output port 277, and the output port 278 to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 276 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 275 is a memory in which data for presentation such as a symbol (a background symbol, a third symbol or a decorative symbol) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in a compressed format. In the character ROM 275, for example, various data for effect used for the fluctuation effect, a character symbol of the third symbol, a background symbol, a notice character symbol and the like are stored. As various data for effect, data (hereinafter referred to as “variation effect data”) used for each fluctuation effect of outlier fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation corresponds.

  As described above, each of the fluctuation effects of chance eye normal fluctuation, chance eye super fluctuation A to D, and chance eye special fluctuation A to F is each fluctuation effect of outlier fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, special reach fluctuation. Since it is a combination, the fluctuation presentation data used only for each fluctuation presentation of chance eye normal fluctuation, chance eye super fluctuation A to D, and chance eye special fluctuation A to F are not stored. However, it is also possible to prepare and store in the character ROM 275 variation presentation data used only for each variation presentation of the chance eye normal variation, the chance eye super variation A to D, and the chance eye special variation A to F.

  In the character ROM 275, the above-described effect data is stored in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the data for effect is constituted by about 1024 M bytes, and the data of about 1024 M bytes is compressed to about 768 M bytes and stored in the character ROM 275. The data for presentation compressed and stored in the character ROM 275 is read out and decompressed, and then written to a predetermined area of the video RAM 276.

  The video RAM 276 is a memory for storing data for effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (ready to be used immediately). The video RAM 276 has a variation effect data storage area 276a and a stop symbol data storage area 276b.

  The change effect data storage area 276a is a memory for storing change effect data for performing change effects such as high speed change in the third symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol data storage area 276b is a third symbol display device It is a memory for storing image data of a third symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop symbol data”) for forming a stop symbol to be displayed at 81.

  In the present embodiment, the one-time fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the fluctuation effect data and the stop symbol data. Although the details will be described later, when the change effect is started, first, an image corresponding to the change effect data (change effect) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the time, and then the stop symbol is displayed Every time it is time, a stop symbol (stop symbol data) is displayed (see S1310 and S1311 in FIG. 30).

  When the production control device 117 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the production time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110, it reads out from the character ROM 275 the fluctuation production data of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the received command. Are stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a (see S1908 and S1909 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, when the stop symbol command transmitted from main controller 110 is received, the stop symbol data of the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the received command is read from character ROM 275 and stored in this stop symbol data storage area 276b. (See S2114 to S2117 in FIG. 43).

  The reason why various data are read from the character ROM 275 and stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a and the stop symbol data storage area 276b is that the processing speed is generally higher in the RAM than in the ROM. For example, when the effect data is read out from the character ROM 275 and displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, when the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read out and smooth display can not be performed or clear. It may be impossible to display. It is also because it is easier to process display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative pattern or changing the color of the background pattern) by storing in the RAM.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 112, 117, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As the outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, 12 volt voltage for driving various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor etc., 5 for logic It generates a voltage of volts, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. and supplies the voltage required by each control device 110 to 112, 117, etc. among the voltage of 12 volts, the voltage of 5 volts and the backup voltage to each. .

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data in the RAM 203, and the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111 It transmits to the payout control device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 17 to 24. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 17) activated upon power-on and a main process (see FIG. 18) executed after the start-up process (regular implementation). In the configuration, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) activated in 2 ms cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. First, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then start-up processing and main processing will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 22, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a process repeatedly executed by the MPU 201, for example, in a cycle of 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, various switches are read (S501). Here, for example, the states of the various switches 208 connected to the main control unit 110 are read, and provided to various winning openings (general winning opening 63, specified winning opening 65a, first ball entry opening 64, etc.) When a winning is detected at the switch, a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 111 to pay out a winning ball number corresponding to the winning opening is set (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the first initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is The updated value is stored in the second initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4, and these counter values have maximum values (the present embodiment In the form, when reaching 738, 4, 238, 250), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the buffer corresponding to the counters C1 to C4 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, the start winning process with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S504), the launch control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by a touch sensor (not shown), and the condition is that the strike stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing is not operated. , It is a process which determines on / off of ball firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the start winning process (S504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504). The start winning process (S504) is a process for storing (holding) the data corresponding to the winning in the holding ball storage area 203a when the winning at the first entrance 64 is detected, as described above. It is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  In the start winning process (S504), first, the state (on or off) of the first ball entry switch 208a is read, and it is determined whether or not the ball has won (enters) the first ball entry 64 ( S651). In the process of S651, when it is determined that the state of the first ball entry switch 208a is off and there is no winning on the first ball entry 64 (S651: No), this is performed without doing anything. The start winning process (S504) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state of the first ball entry switch 208a is on and the ball is won (entered) in the first ball entry 64 (S651: Yes), the special figure holding ball counter It is determined whether or not the value 203c (special figure holding ball number N) is less than a predetermined upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S652).

  In the process of S652, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (special figure reservation ball number N) is 4, that is, when the upper limit value has already been reached (S652: No), S653 to S662 The respective processes are skipped, the start winning process (S504) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, in the process of S652, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (special figure holding ball number N) is less than 4 (S652: Yes), 1 is added to the special figure holding ball counter 203c (S653).

  Next, each value of the first collision random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated by the process of S503 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is stored in the holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. The storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 in the area corresponding to the special drawing reserve ball number N among the free reserve areas (the reserve first area to the reserve fourth area) are stored (S654).

  For example, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N) updated by the process of S653 is "1", the respective storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 of the holding first area are each counter Each value of C1 to C3 is stored respectively. That is, when the special figure reservation number of balls N is "X", each value of each counter C1-C3 is stored in each storage area 203a1-203a3 of the reserve X area, respectively.

  Next, based on the stored values of the counters C1 to C3 and the state of the prefetch high probability state flag 203e, a new winning lottery result is obtained (S655). More specifically, if the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is on, each value of the stored counters C1 to C3 is analyzed, assuming that the jackpot probability is a high probability state, and the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is off. Then, assuming that the jackpot probability is a low probability state, each value of each stored counter C1 to C3 is analyzed. And as a lottery result, whether it is "big hit" or "outside", and if it is a big hit if it is "probable big hit" or "usually a big hit" and if it is out, the stop symbol is "back and forth out of reach", "back and forth out" Get (read ahead) whether it is "other reach" or "complete out".

  Next, a prize information command indicating the acquired lottery result is output to the effect control device 117 (S656). Here, without waiting for the external output process (see S201 of FIG. 18) of the main process, the prize information command is immediately output to the effect control device 117. Since the main processing is executed every 4 ms, if the prize information command is immediately transmitted, the command can be transmitted to the effect control device 117 at most about 4 ms earlier.

  Therefore, the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced as compared to the case where the winning information command is output at the execution timing of the next main processing. Further, since the effect control device 117 can receive the winning information command and the other commands (for example, the hold number command) at different timings, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed at different timings, Control burden can be distributed. Further, since the main control device 110 can separately transmit the ball entry information command and the other commands to the effect control means 117, the control burden can be dispersed as compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing. .

  In the present embodiment, the winning information command is immediately output, but here, only the setting of the winning information command is performed, and output to the effect control device 117 by the external output processing of the execution timing of the next main processing. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S655 is a jackpot (S657), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S657: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot is a definite variation jackpot (S658) . On the other hand, when the lottery result is out (S657: No), the process of S658 to S660 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S661.

  In the process of S658, if the jackpot is a definite variation jackpot (S658: Yes), the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is set to ON (S659). On the other hand, if the jackpot is the normal jackpot (S658: No), the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is set to OFF (S660).

  Next, a pending number command is set (S661). Here, a number-of-holds command indicating the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N) is set. The hold number command set here is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the output holding number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special drawing holding ball number N indicated by the holding number command is turned on in the special drawing holding lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on according to the value of the special view holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N), and the new holding frequency is indicated by the lighting state (S662). When the process of S662 is completed, the start winning process (S504) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  According to the start winning process (S504) of FIG. 23 described above, when the first ball entrance switch 208a detects a winning on the first ball entrance 64, data corresponding to the winning (each counter C1 Each value of C3 to C3 can be stored in the area with the smallest area number among the vacant reserved areas (pended first area to reserved fourth area) of the reserved ball storage area 203a. Therefore, in the holding ball storage area 203a, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the winning in time can be stored. Therefore, the data is given with the order of winning in time (winning order). It can be memorized.

  In addition, the lottery result of data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the winning on the first entry slot 64 is read ahead, and the prize information command indicating the lottery result is output processing of the main processing (figure The output can be immediately output to the effect control device 117 without waiting for 18 (see S201). By immediately outputting (sending) the winning information command, the command can be sent to the effect control device 117 at a maximum speed of about 4 ms. Therefore, the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced.

  In addition, every time when the lottery result of data corresponding to a new winning combination is prefetched (acquired), the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203e can be updated based on the lottery result. Therefore, even when waiting for the start of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the new prize and acquiring the lottery result, when the data of the new prize is acquired, the state of the high probability state flag 203e of the lottery result is read It can be analyzed (prefetched) based on

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 in the payout emission control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing of main controller 110 and payout emission control device 111. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

  First, NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 will be described. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed in the payout and emission control device 111 will be described. By the NMI interruption process, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout launch control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start-up process of main controller 110. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the main control device 110, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when the MPU 201 is reset.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S101). Specifically, while setting a predetermined value to the stack pointer in advance and waiting for the sub control devices (the payout control device 111, the effect control device 117, etc.) to be in an operable state, the wait processing ( In the present embodiment, one second is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If not stored (S105: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If generation information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S111. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S213 of the main process (see FIG. 18). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 in order to initialize the payout control device 111 (S111). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. On the other hand, after transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of the power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S112, S113), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), occurrence information of the power failure is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S108). Next, a payout recovery command at power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S109), and the process proceeds to the processing of S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls. In the process of S110, an interrupt is permitted, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110 described later.

  Next, main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing main processing of main controller 110. The main process is a process for executing the main control of the pachinko machine 10, and is performed after the completion of the above-described start-up process (see FIG. 17) of the main controller 110 described above. It is a process. As an outline thereof, each processing of S201 to S206 is executed as periodic processing of 4 ms cycle, and the counter updating processing of S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

  In this main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to the sub control device (the payout control device 111, the effect control device 117, etc.) (S201). For example, when a prize ball command is set by the process of S501 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, for example, the number-of-holds command set by the start winning process (see FIG. 23) described above, and the variation of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation start process (see FIG. 21) described later Various commands such as fluctuation pattern command necessary for display, stop symbol command, stop command, effect time addition command, etc. are transmitted to the effect control device 117 respectively. Furthermore, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  The transmission of output data such as these commands is performed in the order in which the output data such as commands are set. Then, when the presentation control device 117 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81), the effect control device 117 receives the command according to the received command. 3 The mode of the fluctuation effect or the jackpot effect displayed on the symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set.

  Next, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the buffer corresponding to each of the counters CS1 to CS3 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 have been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the processing and the first pattern display device 37 are performed. A variation process of setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the fluctuation process (S204), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, the large opening opening and closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 ( S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a prescribed number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeatedly performed for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds).

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "o" or "x") in the second symbol display portion 83 is executed (S206). It will be briefly described that the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the second entry ball opening 67 (through gate), and the second symbol display portion 83 The second symbol variation display is carried out. And the judgment of the hit in the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when it comes to the hit state of the second symbol, the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time, Is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S207), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S208) If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes of S201 to S208 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S208: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in the present embodiment), it is set to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CINI1 and CINI2 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the buffers corresponding to the counters CS1 to CS3 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 mentioned above changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be randomly updated, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the process of S207, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed, so the process at the time of the power-off after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is transmitted to the sub control device (the payout control device 111, the effect control device 117, etc.) (S212) . Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S213), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  The processing of S207 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the state of the game performed in S201 to S206, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It can start from the process of S201. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S201. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see FIG. 17) is initialized. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value) in the process (S101), the process can be started from the process of S201. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the variation process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) of the main control device 110. The fluctuation process (S204) is a process for starting the fluctuation display corresponding to the data when the data corresponding to the winning is stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203a, and the main process (FIG. 18)).

  In this variation process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S301). During the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot (ie, two of "probable jackpot", "usually jackpot"), and jackpot The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the game is included. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this fluctuation processing (S204) is ended without performing anything, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110.

  If the jackpot is not inside (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S302: No), the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N) is acquired (S303).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304), and as a result of checking by the processing of S304, if the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No), S305 to S305 The process of S306 is skipped, and the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110. On the other hand, if the special figure reserve ball number N is 1 or more (S304: Yes), the reserve ball storage area order sending process to shift the data used for determination of big hit from reserve ball storage area 203a to reserve ball execution area 203b The process is executed (S305), and the variation start process for starting the variation display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). Then, the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110.

  Note that the holding ball storage area order forwarding process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, and the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, since this variation process (S204) is a subroutine executed in the main process, it is executed every 4 ms, but in the case of a big hit (S301: Yes) or in the case of variation (S302: Yes) In addition, since the processing of S305 to S306 is skipped, the fluctuation display is not started and the data corresponding to the pending prize are not consumed each time the fluctuation processing is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S302 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S307). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3, and this fluctuation time is If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, in the process of S307, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S308). The setting of the stop symbol is determined whether or not the big hit according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 "high probability state after big hit (( It is determined whether the symbol to be a “perhaps big hit)” or the symbol to be “a low probability state (usually a big hit) after the end of the big hit”.

  In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on in the “high probability state (probable variation big hit) after the big hit end”, and the green LED in the “low probability state (usually the big hit) after the big hit end”. Is turned on, and when it is out, the blue LED is turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  Further, in the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation among the plurality of LEDs 37a. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, a display mode for lighting the red LED is set.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S308, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37 The command is set (S309). When the effect control device 117 receives this stop command, the variation control in progress in the third symbol display device 81 is ended. More specifically, in the third symbol display device 81, when the variation time has passed, the variation is paused, and by receiving the stop command, the variation effect of 1 in the third symbol display device 81 ends. Then, when the process of S309 is completed, the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the holding ball storage area order sending process (S305) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the holding ball storage area sequential feeding process (S305) of the main control device 110. The holding ball storage area sequential sending process (S305) is a process for shifting data used for determining the jackpot from the holding ball storage area 203a to the holding ball execution area 203b, and is executed during the variation process (see FIG. 19) Processing. In addition, this process is a process performed when the number of special figures reservation balls N is one or more.

  In this holding ball storage area sequential sending process (S305), first, each data stored in the holding first area of the holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203b (S351). Specifically, in the process of S351, the data stored in the first hit random number counter storage area 203a1 of the hold first area is shifted to the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the hold ball execution area 203b. Similarly, the data stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203a2 is transferred to the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the data stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is transferred to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. Shift to

  Next, each data stored in the pending second area to the pending fourth area is shifted to an area with a smaller area number (first to third areas) (S 352). In the present embodiment, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which the data is stored (held). Therefore, the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of times of data shift can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced. be able to.

  Further, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having a small area number, respectively. In that case, the determination as to whether or not the data is stored (held) in the reserved area (second to fourth) is unnecessary, so the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, the special figure reservation ball counter 203c value (special figure reservation number of balls N) is decremented by 1 (S353), and the value of the special figure reservation number of balls counter 203c (special figure holding number of balls N) after subtraction is shown A pending number command is set (S354). The hold number command set here is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the output holding number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special drawing holding ball number N indicated by the holding number command is turned on in the special drawing holding lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on according to the value of the special view holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N), and the new holding frequency is displayed by the lighting state (S355). When the process of S355 is completed, the processing for sequentially storing the storage ball storage area (S305) is ended, and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 19).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the fluctuation start process (S306) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) of the main control device 110. The variation start process (S306) determines whether the jackpot is or not based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the holding ball execution area 203b, and according to the determination result It is a process for starting the fluctuation display, and is a process executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 19).

  In this variation start process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the holding ball execution area 203b is acquired (S401). That is, the value of the first collision random number counter C1 stored in the first collision random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b and the first collision type counter C2 stored in the first collision type counter storage area 203b2 And the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3.

  Then, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the process of S401, it is determined whether or not a big hit (S402). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode (low probability state or high probability state) of that occasion. As described above, at the time of normal low probability (the state of jackpot probability is normal), “373, 727” is the winning value among the numbers 0 to 738 of the random number counter C1 per first, and the time of high probability Is higher than normal), "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733" is the hit value.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the jackpot is, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired by the process of S401, which jackpot of the two types of jackpots ("probable jackpot", "normal jackpot") Determine the type per hit. As described above, in the case of the jackpot, if the numerical value ("0 to 4") of the first hit type counter C2 is "0, 4", it becomes "the low probability state (usually jackpot) after the jackpot end", "1 , 2 and 3 ", it becomes a" high probability state (probable variation big hit) after the end of the big hit ".

  In the process of S402, when it is determined that it is a big hit (S402: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired by the process of S401 is confirmed, and the display mode at the big hit is set (S403). That is, in the process of S403, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, transition to "high probability state (probable variation big hit) after big hit end" or "transition to low probability state (usually big hit) after big hit end" To set. When the transition state after the big hit ends is set, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on in the “high probability state (probable variation big hit) after the big hit end”, and the green LED in the “low probability state (usually the big hit) after the big hit end”. Is turned on, and when it is out, the blue LED is turned on.

  Further, based on the transition state after the big hit end, the stop design of the big hit which is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by the effect control device 117. That is, by setting the transition state after the big hit end by the process of S403, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S404). That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough variation time of symbol variation is determined among normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds), and special reach variation (60 seconds). In addition, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the variation time until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 '(middle symbol) stops) In other words, the number of fluctuating symbols is determined. By the determination of the variation pattern by the process of S404, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until stopping at the big hit symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined .

  The relationship between the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the fluctuation time is predetermined by a table or the like. The fluctuation time can also be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and is set only by the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether to set or to set both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be appropriately determined according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions at each time.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit in the process of S402 (S402: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S405). In the process of S405, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the holding ball execution area 203b. Based on the value of C3, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as "reach before / after out of reach", "reach outside of before / after out of reach", or "complete out of reach". In the present embodiment, as described above, whether it is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than a normal state) or a low probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state) The table is set so that the range of values corresponding to the respective stop patterns of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is different according to the value (special figure reserved ball number N) or the like.

  Next, based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S406). That is, as in the above-described S404, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, out-of-range fluctuation (11 seconds), normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds), special reach variation (60 seconds) Among them, while determining the rough fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation, after the reach occurrence based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ' The fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the symbol (middle symbol) stops is determined. By the determination of the fluctuation pattern by the process of S406, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the disappointing symbol is determined .

  In addition, in the process of S405, when "the front and back out of reach" or "reach other than back and forth out of reach" is set as the display mode at the time of out, reach fluctuation (normal reach change, super reach change, special reach) by the process of S406 The table is set in advance so that any of the fluctuations) is determined.

  Then, when the process of S404 or the process of S406 is finished, next, an effect time to be added to or subtracted from the fluctuation time determined by the first and second fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S407). At this time, addition / subtraction of the rendering time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the work area 203d of the RAM 203, and the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set. The fluctuation time of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the addition / subtraction of the presentation time is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added for one second, and when the variation display time is added. Are added for two seconds, and the variable display time is reduced for one second. Four types of addition values are determined.

  In addition, when the fluctuation display time is added / subtracted, the advance notice effect that the expectation value of the big hit becomes high in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the slip effect effect or the like which makes the fluctuation time of the fluctuation symbol longer than usual and slips An effect of displaying the advance notice character, an effect of shortening the fluctuation time of the fluctuation symbol of 1 than usual and immediately stopping it, etc. are performed. Also, if the value of the random number counter C1 per win is a big hit, the probability that the additional value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so the player should expect a big hit by confirming the notice effect. Can.

  Next, the variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S404 or S406 (S408), and the stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S403 or S405. (S409). Then, a rendering time addition command is set according to the addition value of the rendering time determined in the process of S407 (S410).

  After the processing of S410, the fluctuation direction command according to the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b is set (S411), and this fluctuation start process (S306) is ended and the fluctuation process (FIG. 19) Return to

  The variation direction command set by the process of S411 is a command that defines whether the variation display displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is vertical scrolling or horizontal scrolling. In the present embodiment, when the value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b is an even number, the variation direction command corresponding to the horizontal scroll is set, and the first random number counter storage area When the value of 203 b 1 is an odd number, a fluctuation direction command corresponding to vertical scrolling is set.

  Each command set in the variation start process (S306) is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the effect control device 117 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81), the effect control device 117 receives the command according to the received command. 3 The mode of the fluctuation effect or the jackpot effect displayed on the symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set.

  Here, when the variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the order of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117 will be described. As described above, in the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 18), the commands are transmitted in the order in which the commands are set. Moreover, before execution of the fluctuation start process (S306), the holding ball storage area sequential feed process (S305) is always executed.

  Therefore, the "holding number command" is set by the holding ball storage area sequential sending process (S305), and then the "variation pattern command", "stop symbol command", "calculation time addition command" by the fluctuation start process (S306). The commands are set in the order of “change direction command”. Therefore, various commands are transmitted from main controller 110 to effect control device 117 in the order of "number of pending commands", "variation pattern command", "stop symbol command", "calculation time addition command" and "variation direction command" Be done.

  Note that the information indicated by the "variation direction command" may be included in the "variation pattern command" without providing the "variation direction command". Further, the information indicated by the “calculation time addition command” may be included in the “variation pattern command” without providing the “calculation time addition command”. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which combined each.

  Also, these commands may be sent out of order. Also, the setting order of the commands may be changed, and the order of transmission may be changed. For example, if the "variation pattern command" and the "variation direction command" are sent first from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117, the variation display is started before other commands are transmitted, and the variation display is quickened. You can get started. This is because the "number-of-holds command", "stop symbol command", "calculation time addition command" and the like do not affect the start of the variable display.

  In addition, the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside may be limited to a predetermined number (for example, three) by execution of one external output process (S201). For example, when the number of commands to be transmitted is large (for example, six), transmission is performed over two main processes (the main process to be executed this time and the main process to be executed next). This is because if there are many commands to be transmitted at one time, it takes time to transmit, and there is a possibility that the main processing can not be executed every 4 ms. When configured in this way, it may be configured to transmit from a command with high priority. Specifically, as described above, the "variation pattern command" and the "variation direction command" are transmitted first from the main controller 110 to the effect control device 117, and then the "number-of-holds command" and the "stop symbol command" , “Calculation time addition command”, etc., is transmitted over one or more main processings. Even if the maximum number of commands to be sent to the outside is changed according to the remaining time of the main process, the amount of information to be processed in each main process, etc., by one execution of the external output process (S201). good.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. The processing of the MPU 211 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 25, the start-up process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process of the payout control device 111. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the payout control device 111, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when the MPU 211 is reset.

  First, initial setting processing accompanying power on is executed (S801). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value determined in advance, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S802), and the external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  After that, processing of data backup regarding the RAM 213 in the MPU 211 is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 (S804), and if not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the processing is shifted to S811. Transition. If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S805), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S806: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S811. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 213, as will be described later in the process of S917 of the main process (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111. Instead of the RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the RAM initialization processing of S811 and S812, after all areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), an initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). Thereafter, initialization of peripheral devices of the MPU 211 is performed (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the processing shifts to the main processing (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S806: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is held, In addition to clearing the power shutoff occurrence information (S807), in order to start the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls, the payout permission of the balls is set (S808). Thereafter, initialization of peripheral devices of the MPU 211 is performed (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main processing (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111 described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main processing executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing main processing of the payout control device 111. The main process is a process for executing the payout control of the ball, which is executed after the completion of the start-up process (see FIG. 25) of the above-described payout control device 111, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In this main processing, first, an award ball command, a payout return command, a payout initialization command and the like transmitted from the main control device 110 are received, and command determination processing for determining the type of those commands is performed (S901). The command determination process is a process for executing a process corresponding to each command according to various commands transmitted and received from the main control apparatus 110. Here, for example, the process is transmitted from the main control apparatus 110. When the payout return command, the payout initialization command, or the prize ball command is received, the payout of the prize balls and the lending balls is permitted.

  When the command determination process (S901) is completed, it is determined whether or not the payout is permitted (S902). If the payout is not permitted (S902: No), the main control device 110 is not yet in the up state. In such a case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout is permitted in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, if the payout is permitted in the process of S902 (S902: Yes), the state recovery switch 120 is checked, and the state recovery operation is executed when it is determined that the state recovery operation is started (S903).

  Thereafter, in accordance with the change in the state of the lower tray 50, setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full release state is executed (S904). That is, the full tray condition of the lower tray 50 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full tank switch, and when the lower tray full is reached, setting of the lower tray full condition is executed, and when the lower tray full is exhausted. , Set the lower plate full release state. Further, in accordance with the change of the state of the tank ball, the setting of the tank ball nonexistent state or the tank sphere nonexistent cancellation state is executed (S905). That is, the tank ball absence state is determined by the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, and the tank sphere absence state is executed when the tank sphere absence is reached, and the tank sphere absence state released when the tank sphere absence is eliminated. Execute the setting. Thereafter, the presence or absence of a state to be notified is determined, and when there is a state to be notified, notification is performed using a 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S906).

  Next, the processing of payout balls is executed by the processing of S 907 to S 909. That is, if the prize balls are not dispensable and the stored total number of prize balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the prize ball control process is started to pay out the prize balls (S909) . On the other hand, if the payout balls can not be paid out (S 907: Yes) or the total number of balls is 0 (S 908: Yes), the processing proceeds to the processing for the payout of the rental balls.

  In the processing of the lending of the balls at S910 to S912, if it is not in the dispensable state of the lending balls and the request for the withdrawal of the balls from the card unit is received (S910: No, S911: Yes), A rental ball control process is started (S912). On the other hand, if the lending balls can not be paid out (S910: Yes) or the rental ball payout request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Also, even after the end of the rental ball control process (S912), the process proceeds to S913.

  In the process of S913, control of the vibrator 134 (vibrator motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged (S913). After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 (S914), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored (S914: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1 Since the output is not performed and the power is not shut off, in this case, the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes of S901 to S913 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S914, if the occurrence information of the power cut is stored (S914: Yes), the power is cut off by the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. That is, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S915), and the command determination processing is executed again to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from main controller 110 (S916). ). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), the access to the RAM 213 is inhibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area backed up in the RAM 213.

  In addition, since the process of S914 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off at the timing when one cycle of the main process of the payout control device 111 ends, when returning from the state before the power-off, the process is started up. After completion of the process, the process can start from the process of S901. That is, the main process can be started as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, the process of the initial setting of the payout control device 111 without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer (S801) In (see FIG. 25), the process can be started from S901 by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value). Therefore, the control load on the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of the payout control device 111. In addition, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 43, the schematic views of FIGS. 44 and 45, and the tables of FIGS. 46 to 53. The process will be described. The processing of the MPU 271 is roughly divided into a start-up process activated upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and the various commands transmitted from the main control unit 110. Command reception interrupt processing, and stop symbol pattern table update processing for continuing to update the stop symbol pattern table until the power is turned off after the power is turned on.

  For the convenience of description, at first, with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. 48, an example of the conditions under which continuous chance eye effects are started and the number of times of continuous display of "chance eyes" displayed when started will be described. Do. Next, referring to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the condition that the number of continuous display of "chance eyes" displayed in the continuous chance eye effect increases and the number of continuous display of the final "chance eyes" when increased And an example will be described. Next, with reference to FIG. 51 to FIG. 53, under the condition that the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (the continuous chance eye effect is continued), and displayed when extended (continued) An example of the continuous display count of the chance eye "will be described. Then, the stop symbol pattern table update process is described with reference to FIG. 31, and subsequently, the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the start-up process (see FIG. 27), and the main process (see FIG. 28). Each process will be described in order.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new winning is detected in main controller 110, if the special figure holding ball number N at the time of winning is less than 4 (maximum number of holding times), each at the time of winning A lottery result corresponding to each value of the counters C1 to C3 is pre-read, and a winning information command indicating the lottery result is transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  Then, when the prize information command is received in the effect control device 117, the effect control device 117 determines whether or not to perform the continuous chance eye effect, and when it is determined to start the continuous chance eye effect, the execution is performed In order to set the stop symbol of the variation effect scheduled to be executed during or during execution to "the chance eye", update of the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a (update of the set value of each area, etc.) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to perform the continuous chance eye effect is performed only when the lottery result of the new winning combination is "probably big hit", "normal big hit" or "reach before and after". In addition, the number of times the "chance eye" is scheduled to be displayed at the start of the successive chance eye effect is the timing when the effect control device 117 receives the prize information command, the lottery result indicated by the received prize information command, and the stop symbol instruction It depends on the combination with the contents of the storage table.

  Although the details will be described later (see FIG. 49 and FIG. 50), the number of continuous display of “chance eye” in the continuous chance eye effect production may increase and may increase at the start of the continuous opportunity eye effect production. More specifically, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance item production is the "perhaps big hit" or the "normal big hit", when the last change production becomes the "super reach change" or the "special reach change", During the final variation production, the "chance" is displayed the same number of times as the value of the "ch" display count selection counter 273j. Therefore, in this case, if the value of the chance display count selection counter 273 j is 2 or more, the continuous display count of “chance show” in the continuous chance production is increased.

  First, with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. 48, an example of the conditions under which continuous chance eye effects are started and the number of times of continuous display of “chance eyes” displayed when started will be described. Each of FIGS. 46 to 48 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see FIG. 14). The left side of the figure (referred to as the left figure) shows the contents of the table immediately after the setting value corresponding to the received winning information command is stored, and the right side of the figure (referred to as the right figure) It shows the contents of the table after updating.

  First, FIG. 46 will be described. FIG. 46 (a) shows an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is "permanent change big hit" within a period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed. It is a table. FIG. 46 (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command in which the lottery result is "permanent change big hit" is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 46 (a) receives a winning information command whose lottery result is "permanent change jackpot" when "setting value: out" is stored in the execution area, and as a result, 1 indicates that "set value: jackpot (certain)" is newly stored in the reserved area. After that, when the table is updated, “setting value: chance” is stored in the execution area as shown in the first row of the right figure. This is because the prize information command has been received within the changeable period. In addition, “setting value: chance eye & probability variation big hit” is stored in the first holding area, and “setting value: skip after big hit” is stored in the second holding area.

  As a result, since the "chance of chance" is displayed in the fluctuation production in execution and the fluctuation production of the next (first scheduled to be performed), the "chance of vision" is displayed twice in a row in the continuous chance of visual production Be done. That is, since the stop symbol becomes "a chance eye" from the variation effect under execution, "chance eye" is displayed once more than the stop symbol becomes a "chance eye" from the variation effect scheduled to be executed.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “set value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, “set value: jackpot (probability)” is newly added to the second reserve area. When the table is updated and the table is updated, as shown in the second row of the right figure, the "opportunity eye" is displayed three times consecutively in the continuous opportunity eye effect presentation. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 46 (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command in which the lottery result is "permanent change big hit" is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 46 (b) receives the winning information command whose lottery result is "probable variation jackpot" when "set value: out" is stored in the execution area, and as a result, 1 indicates that "set value: jackpot (certain)" is newly stored in the reserved area. However, since the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed even if the table is subsequently updated, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in this case, the continuous chance effect presentation is not performed. This is because the prize information command is received during a period when the stop symbol can not be changed, the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed can not be changed to the "chance of chance", and the next (first scheduled to be executed) change effect Even if you change only the stop symbol of to "chance eye", since "chance eye" can not be displayed continuously, it is not possible to perform consecutive chance eye effects.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “set value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, “set value: jackpot (probability)” is newly added to the second reserve area. When the table is updated and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the second row of the right figure, and “setting value: chance eye” is stored in the first reserved area, and the second reserved area The “setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot” is stored in the field, and the “setting value: skip after big hit” is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, "outlying symbols other than chance eyes" is displayed in the change production in execution, and "the chance is displayed in the next (first to be executed) change presentation in execution and the second change performance to be executed. "Eye" is displayed. Therefore, the "opportunity eyes" are displayed twice in a row in the continuous opportunity eye effect production. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 47 (a) shows an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is "normal jackpot" within a period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed. It is a table. FIG. 47 (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 47 (a) receives the winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” when “set value: out” is stored in the execution area, and as a result, 1 Indicates that "set value: jackpot (normal)" is newly stored in the reserved area. After that, when the table is updated, “setting value: chance” is stored in the execution area as shown in the first row of the right figure. This is because the prize information command has been received within the changeable period. Also, "set value: chance & normal jackpot" is stored in the first reserve area, and "set: skip after big hit" is stored in the second reserve area.

  As a result, as in the case of the first row in FIG. 46 (a), the “opportunity eye” is displayed in each of the fluctuation presentation under execution and the fluctuation presentation next to it (first scheduled to be executed), so The chance eye is displayed twice in a row in the chance eye direction. That is, since the stop symbol becomes "a chance eye" from the variation effect under execution, "chance eye" is displayed once more than the stop symbol becomes a "chance eye" from the variation effect scheduled to be executed. Hereinafter, since the second and third stages are the same, the description will be omitted.

  In addition, as shown in the fourth row of the left figure, when “set value: out” is stored in each area from the execution area to the third reserve area, “set value: jackpot (normally in the fourth reserve area) When the table is updated and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the fourth row of the right figure, and each area from the first holding area to the third holding area is set Value: A chance eye is stored. Also, "set value: chance & normal jackpot" is stored in the fourth reserve area, and "set value: skip after big hit" is stored in the next reserve area.

  As a result, "outlying design other than chance eyes" is displayed in the change production in execution, and "chance eyes" are displayed in each of the change productions from the next (first to be executed) to the 4th execution schedule in execution. Is displayed. Therefore, in the continuous chance eye effect production, the "chance eye" is displayed four times in a row. In this case, if the stop symbol of the changing effect in execution is not "a chance eye", the continuous chance effect is performed, and if the final lottery result is a "normal jackpot", it is continuous This is because the number of times the "opportunity eyes" are continuously displayed in the chance eye presentation is limited to four times.

  FIG. 47 (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 47 (b) receives the winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” when “set value: out” is stored in the execution area, and as a result, 1 Indicates that "set value: jackpot (normal)" is newly stored in the reserved area. However, since the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed even if the table is subsequently updated, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in this case, the continuous chance effect presentation is not performed.

  This is due to the same reason as in the case of the first row in FIG. 46 (b), and since the prize information command is received during a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed, the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed is It is because it can not change to "eye" and as a result, it can not perform continuous chance eye rendition.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “set value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, “set value: jackpot (normal)” is newly added to the second reserve area. When the table is updated and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the second row of the right figure, and “setting value: chance eye” is stored in the first reserved area, and the second reserved area "Preset value: chance eye & normal jackpot" is stored in the "preset value: skip after big hit" is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, "outlying symbols other than chance eyes" is displayed in the change production in execution, and "the chance is displayed in the next (first to be executed) change presentation in execution and the second change performance to be executed. "Eye" is displayed. Therefore, the "opportunity eyes" are displayed twice in a row in the continuous opportunity eye effect production. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 48 will be described. FIG. 48 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “out of back and forth reach” regardless of whether it is a changeable period or not.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 48 receives the prize information command whose lottery result is "reach out of back and forth" when "set value: out" is stored in the execution area, and as a result, the first hold It shows that "set value: out of order (out of front and back)" is newly stored in the area. However, since the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed even if the table is subsequently updated, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in this case, the continuous chance effect presentation is not performed.

  This is because the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed is not changed, regardless of whether or not it is a changeable period, when a winning information command in which the lottery result is "back and forth out of reach" is received, As a result, it is because it is not possible to perform continuous chance eye effects.

  Also, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when "set value: out" is stored in the execution area and the first hold area, "set value: out (back and forth out)" is displayed in the second hold area. When the table is newly stored and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the second row of the right figure, and “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area. “Set value: skip after removal” is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, "outlying symbols other than chance eyes" is displayed in the change production in execution, and "the chance is displayed in the next (first to be executed) change presentation in execution and the second change performance to be executed. "Eye" is displayed. Therefore, the "opportunity eyes" are displayed twice in a row in the continuous opportunity eye effect production. The same explanation applies to the third row, so the description is omitted.

  In addition, as shown in the fourth row of the left figure, when “set value: out” is stored in each area from the execution area to the third reserve area, “set value: out (before and after) in the fourth reserve area When the table is updated and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the fourth row of the right figure, and the first reserved area stores “setting value: initial skip”. In each of the areas from the second holding area to the fourth holding area, “set value: chance eye” is stored, and in the next holding area, “set value: skip after removal” is stored.

  As a result, during the execution, and in the next (the first scheduled to be executed) fluctuation presentation, "outside the symbol other than chance eyes" is displayed, and in each fluctuation presentation from the execution scheduled to the second execution scheduled to the fourth execution scheduled Each "eye of chance" is displayed. Therefore, in the continuous chance eye effect production, the "chance eye" is displayed three times in a row. In this case, when the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect scheduled to be executed first is not the "chance eye", the continuous chance eye effect is executed, and the final lottery result is "the out of back and forth reach" The reason is that the number of continuous display of "opportunity eyes" in the continuous opportunity eye effect production is limited to a maximum of 3 times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of continuous display of "chance eye" in the continuous chance eye effect is "normal probability big hit (no restriction)" and "usually big hit (up to 4 times in a row) It is configured to be different in the case of “) and in the case of“ reach out of back and forth (up to 3 consecutive times) ”. As a result, the player can enjoy a highly entertaining game to the player, since the player will have a good time depending on the number of times of the continuous display of the "chance eye" when the continuous chance effect production is executed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the condition that the number of continuous display of "chance eyes" displayed in the continuous chance eye effect increases and the number of continuous display of the final "chance eyes" when increased And an example will be described.

  Each table of FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol of each variation effect executed during the continuous chance item effect. The left side of the figure (referred to as the left figure) shows the contents of the stop symbol of each variation effect scheduled at the start of the continuous chance eye effect production, and the right side of the figure (referred to as the right figure) is scheduled Shows the contents of the stop symbol of each variation effect after the change of.

  As described above, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance item production is the "probable variation big hit" or the "normal big hit", when the last variation production becomes the "super reach variation" or the "special reach variation", the final While the variable effect is being performed, the "chance eye" of the same number of times as the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j is displayed. Therefore, in this case, if the value of the chance display count selection counter 273 j is 2 or more, the continuous display count of “chance show” in the continuous chance production is increased.

  First, FIG. 49 will be described. In FIG. 49 (a), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance direction production is "probable change big hit", the pattern of the last change production is "super reach change (40 seconds)", and as a result, it is scheduled to be displayed It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of the stop symbol of is changed. In the case of FIG. 49 (b), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is "normal jackpot", the pattern of the final fluctuation production becomes "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)", and as a result, it is displayed It is a table which shows an example of the contents of change when the contents of stop design are changed.

  The first row in the left figure in FIG. 49 (a) shows that the number of times the “Chance Eye” is continuously displayed is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance eye effect production. After the start of, in the first variation production, "chance of chance" is displayed, and in the second variation of performance, it is shown that "probably sizable big hit symbol" is displayed after the "chance of chance". In the drawings of FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the fact that the “probable variation big hit design” is displayed after the “chance of chance” in the one variation production is described as “the chance eye + probability variation big hit”. In addition, the "normal jackpot design" is described in the same manner.

  Here, when the pattern of the last (second) change production is "super reach change", one of "chance eye super change A to D" (see Fig. 7) is substituted for the "super reach change". To be executed. Then, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times, and then the "probable variation jackpot" is displayed. In addition, the number of times of display of "the chance eye" in the last fluctuation production is determined by the value of the number-of-chance display time selection counter 273j. For example, if the value at the time of referring to the chance display count selection counter 273 j is “2”, the display count of “chance show” in the last variation effect is two.

  Therefore, since the "chance of chance" is displayed in the first fluctuation production and the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times in the second fluctuation production, the "chance of chance" is continuously displayed up to four times in the continuous chance production Is displayed. That is, the “chance of eyes” scheduled to be twice in a row at the start of the consecutive chance of effect production is displayed up to four times in a row.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, normally, after the start of the continuous chance effect production, "chance opportunity" is displayed in the first and second fluctuation production, and in the third fluctuation production, "chance When the “probable variation jackpot” is displayed after the eyes, the final (third) variation effect pattern becomes “super reach variation”, as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times, and thereafter, the "probable odds jackpot" is displayed. Therefore, the "chance eye" scheduled to be three consecutive times at the start of the consecutive chance eye effect presentation is displayed up to five times consecutively. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  In the case of FIG. 49 (b), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is "normal jackpot", the pattern of the final fluctuation production becomes "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)", and as a result, it is displayed The example of the change content when the content of the stop symbol is changed is shown.

  The first row in the left figure in FIG. 49 (b) shows that the number of times the “Chance Eye” is continuously displayed is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance eye effect production. After the start of the "change chance" is displayed in the first change production, and "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed after the "chance" in the second change production.

  Here, when the pattern of the last (second) change production is "super reach change", one of "chance eye super change A to D" (see Fig. 7) is substituted for the "super reach change". To be executed. Then, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times, and then the "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed. Note that, as described above, the number of display of “chance” in the final variation effect is determined by the value of the display number of times display counter 273 j.

  Therefore, since the "chance of chance" is displayed in the first fluctuation production and the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times in the second fluctuation production, the "chance of chance" is continuously displayed up to four times in the continuous chance production Is displayed. That is, the “chance of eyes” scheduled to be twice in a row at the start of the consecutive chance of effect production is displayed up to four times in a row.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, normally, after the start of the continuous chance effect production, "chance opportunity" is displayed in the first and second fluctuation production, and in the third fluctuation production, "chance If the "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed after the eye, the final (third) variation effect pattern becomes "super reach variation", as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to twice, and then the "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed. Therefore, the "chance eye" scheduled to be three consecutive times at the start of the consecutive chance eye effect production is displayed up to four times consecutively. In this case, in the final variation production, the "chance eye" is not displayed up to three times if the continuous chance eye effect is performed and the final lottery result is "usually win", This is because the number of continuous display of "opportunity eyes" in the continuous chance eye effect production is limited to a maximum of 4 times. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 50 will be described. In FIG. 50 (a), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye direction production is "probable change big hit", the pattern of the last change direction effect becomes "special reach change (60 seconds)", and as a result, it is scheduled to be displayed It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of the stop symbol of is changed. In FIG. 50 (b), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye direction production is "normal jackpot", the pattern of the final fluctuation direction is "special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)", and as a result, it is displayed It is a table which shows an example of the contents of change when the contents of stop design are changed.

  The first row in the left figure in FIG. 50 (a) shows that the number of times the “Chance Eye” is continuously displayed is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance eye effect production. After the start of, in the first variation production, "chance of chance" is displayed, and in the second variation of performance, it is shown that "probably sizable big hit symbol" is displayed after the "chance of chance".

  Here, when the final (second time) variation presentation pattern is "special reach variation", any of the "special chance variations A to F" (see Fig. 8) is substituted for the "special reach variation". To be executed. Then, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to four times, and then the "probably oddity winning symbol" is displayed. Note that, as described above, the number of display of “chance” in the last variation presentation is determined by the value of the display number of times display counter 273 j. For example, when the value at the time of referring to the chance display count selection counter 273 j is “3”, the display count of “chance view” is 3 times.

  Therefore, since the "chance of chance" is displayed in the first fluctuation production and the "chance of chance" is displayed up to four times in the second fluctuation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to five times consecutively in the continuous chance production Is displayed. That is, the "chance of chance" scheduled to be twice in a row at the start of the consecutive chance of rendition is displayed up to five times in a row.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, normally, after the start of the continuous chance effect production, "chance opportunity" is displayed in the first and second fluctuation production, and in the third fluctuation production, "chance When the “probable variation jackpot” is displayed after the eyes, the final (third) variation effect pattern becomes “special reach variation”, as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to four times, and thereafter, the "probable odds jackpot" is displayed. Therefore, the "opportunity eyes" scheduled to be three consecutive times at the start of the consecutive chance eye effects are displayed up to six times in succession. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  In FIG. 50 (b), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye direction production is "normal jackpot", the pattern of the final fluctuation direction is "special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)", and as a result, it is displayed The example of the change content when the content of the stop symbol is changed is shown.

  The first row in the left figure in FIG. 50 (b) shows that the number of times the “Chance Eye” is continuously displayed is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance eye effect production. After the start of the "change chance" is displayed in the first change production, and "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed after the "chance" in the second change production.

  Here, when the final (second time) variation presentation pattern is "special reach variation", any of the "special chance variations A to F" (see Fig. 8) is substituted for the "special reach variation". To be executed. Then, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times, and then the "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed. Note that, as described above, the number of display of “chance” in the final variation effect is determined by the value of the display number of times display counter 273 j.

  Also, in this case, if the "chance eye" is not displayed up to four times in the final fluctuation production, the continuous chance eye effect is executed, and if the final lottery result is "usually win", This is because the number of continuous display of "opportunity eyes" in the continuous chance eye effect production is limited to a maximum of 4 times.

  Therefore, since the "chance of chance" is displayed in the first fluctuation production and the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times in the second fluctuation production, the "chance of chance" is continuously displayed up to four times in the continuous chance production Is displayed. That is, the “chance of eyes” scheduled to be twice in a row at the start of the consecutive chance of effect production is displayed up to four times in a row.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, normally, after the start of the continuous chance effect production, "chance opportunity" is displayed in the first and second fluctuation production, and in the third fluctuation production, "chance When the “normal jackpot symbol” is displayed after the eyes, the final (third) variation effect pattern becomes “special reach variation”, as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to twice, and then the "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed. Therefore, the "chance eye" scheduled to be three consecutive times at the start of the consecutive chance eye effect production is displayed up to four times consecutively.

  In this case, as described above, the "opportunity eyes" will not be displayed up to 4 times in the last fluctuation presentation, as described above, the continuous opportunity eye presentation is executed, and the final lottery result will be "normal jackpot" In this case, the number of continuous display of "chance eyes" in the continuous chance eye effect production is limited to a maximum of 4 times. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is "probable change big hit" or "normal big hit", the last change production is "super reach change" or "special reach" When it becomes "fluctuation", it is configured to increase the number of continuous display of "the chance eye". As a result, the player can enjoy a highly entertaining game to the player, since the player will have a good time depending on the number of times of the continuous display of the "chance eye" when the continuous chance effect production is executed. In addition, the fluctuation presentation for increasing the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" may not be limited to the last fluctuation presentation, but may be fluctuation presentation at any timing as long as it is the fluctuation presentation in the continuous chance presentation. In addition, the fluctuation presentation for increasing the number of times of the continuous display of “the chance eye” may be performed not only by one fluctuation presentation but by a plurality of fluctuation presentation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51 to FIG. 53, the condition that the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (the continuous chance eye effect is continued) and the “chance displayed when extended (continued) An example of the number of continuous display of “eye” will be described.

  Each of FIGS. 51 to 53 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see FIG. 14). The left side of the figure (referred to as the left figure) shows the contents of the table immediately after the setting value corresponding to the received winning information command is stored, and the right side of the figure (referred to as the right figure) It shows the contents of the table after updating.

  First, FIG. 51 will be described. FIG. 51 receives a winning information command in which the lottery result is "permanent change big hit" when the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is "off", and as a result, the continuous chance eye effect is It is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when the effect period is extended (continuation chance eye effect is continued). In the following description, it is assumed that the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed will be two when the successive chance effect effect that the final lottery result is "off" is executed.

  In the first row in the left diagram of FIG. 51, “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area, and next time in the third holding area When "setting value: skip after removal" is stored as a setting value of winning a prize, a winning information command whose lottery result is "permanent change big hit" is received, and as a result, "setting value of the third holding area: It is indicated that “skip after removal” is overwritten to “set value: jackpot (certain)” (see S1505 in FIG. 34: No).

  After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the first row in the right figure, “setting value: chance item & probability variation big hit” is stored in the third holding area, and the setting value for the next winning in the fourth holding area “Setting value: skip after big hit” is stored as (see S1613 in FIG. 36). The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the next variation presentation is performed after the continuous chance presentation is finished, first, the “eye shot” is displayed, and then the “probable big hit pattern” is displayed. Therefore, apparently, it becomes the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “permanent change big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed three times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) and the number of times of displaying the chance eye is added by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable change big hit" Ru.

  In the second row of the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, and “set value: skip after removal” is set as the set value for the next prize in the second reserve area. When stored, it indicates that “set value: skip after removal” of the second reserved area is overwritten to “set value: jackpot (certain)”. After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance item & probability variation jackpot” is stored in the second holding area as shown in the second row of the right figure, and the next holding area is set in the third holding area. As a value, "set value: skip after big hit" is stored.

  As a result, also in this case, it is the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the "permanent change big hit" is executed, and the "chance opportunity" is displayed three times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is increased by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable change big hit" Ru. The same explanation applies to the third row, so the description is omitted.

  In the fourth row of the left figure, “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area, and next time in the third holding area When “set value: skip after deviance” is stored as a set value of the prize, a prize information command “lot out” is received first, and a prize result is “probably hit” This shows the state in which the information command is received second. That is, “set value: skip after removal” is stored as it is in the third reserve area (see S1505 in FIG. 34: Yes), and “set value: jackpot (probability)” is newly stored in the fourth reserve area. Show that.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance item” is stored in the third reserve area and “set value: chance item & probability variation” is stored in the fourth reserve area as shown in the fourth row of the right figure. A "big hit" is stored, and a "set value: skip after big hit" is stored in the next hold area as the setting value of the next winning. The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the first variation production is executed after the continuous chance production is finished, the "chance of chance" is displayed, and when the second fluctuation production is executed, the "chance of chance" is displayed first, Subsequently, the "probable jackpot symbol" is displayed. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “permanent change big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period for continuous chance eye effects is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued), and the number of displayed "Chance Eyes" is increased by 2 and the final lottery result is changed to "Probable variation big hit" Ru.

  In the fifth row of the left figure, “setting value: chance” is stored in the execution area and the first execution area, and “setting value: skip after removal” is the setting value for the next winning in the second holding area. If stored, the winning information command having the lottery result "off" is received twice (first and second) twice, and the winning information command having the lottery result "certainly hit" is third It shows the received state. That is, “set value: skip after removal” is stored as it is in the third reserve area, and “set value: jackpot (certain change)” is newly stored in the fourth reserve area.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance” is stored in the second holding area and the third hold area, and “setting value: The chance eye & probability variation big hit "is stored, and" predetermined value: skip after big hit "is stored in the next hold area as the setting of the next prize.

  As a result, also in this case, it becomes the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “probable odds hit” is executed, and the “chance effect” is displayed five times in succession in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is increased by three, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable hit". Ru. The same applies to the fifth and subsequent stages, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, FIG. 52 will be described. FIG. 52 receives a winning information command in which the lottery result is "permanent change jackpot" when the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is "off", and as a result, in the continuous chance effect It is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when the effect period is extended (continuation chance eye effect is continued).

  In the above-described FIG. 51, it has been described that the number of continuous display of the “chance eye” is two when the continuous chance effect effect is executed in which the final lottery result is “off”. Then, it demonstrates as what the continuous display frequency of "the chance eyes" will be 3 times.

  In the first row in the left diagram of FIG. 52, “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, “setting value: chance eye” is stored in each area from the first holding area to the third holding area, and the fourth When “set value: skip after removal” is stored as the setting value of the next winning in the reserve area, a prize information command whose lottery result is “permanent change jackpot” is received, and as a result, the fourth reserve area “Setting value: skip after removal” indicates that “setting value: jackpot (certain variation)” is overwritten (see S1505 in FIG. 34: No).

  After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the first row in the right figure, “set value: chance item & probability variation big hit” is stored in the 4th holding area, and as the next winning setting value in the next holding area. “Setting value: skip after big hit” is stored (see S1613 in FIG. 36). The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the next variation presentation is performed after the continuous chance presentation is finished, first, the “eye shot” is displayed, and then the “probable big hit pattern” is displayed. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “permanent change big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) and the number of times of displaying the chance eye is added by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable change big hit" Ru.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in each area from the execution area to the second hold area, and “set value as the next winning set value in the third hold area” : Indicates that “setting value: skipping after removal” of the third reserved area is overwritten to “setting value: jackpot (certain variation)” when “skip after removal” is stored. After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the second row of the right figure, “set value: chance item & probability variation jackpot” is stored in the third reserve area, and the next prize is set in the fourth reserve area. As a value, "set value: skip after big hit" is stored.

  As a result, also in this case, it becomes the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the "probable odds hit" is executed, and the "chance effect" is displayed four times continuously in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is increased by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable change big hit" Ru. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  In the fifth row in the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in each area from the execution area to the second hold area, and “set value: out of the third hold area” as the set value for the next winning. Indicates that the winning information command in which the lottery result is “off” is received first and the winning information command in which the lottery result is “probable jackpot” is received secondly when “skip back” is stored. ing. That is, “set value: skip after removal” is stored as it is in the third reserve area (see S1505 in FIG. 34: Yes), and “set value: jackpot (probability)” is newly stored in the fourth reserve area. Show that.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance item” is stored in the third reserve area and “set value: chance item & probability variation” is stored in the fourth reserve area, as shown in the fifth row in the right figure. A "big hit" is stored, and a "set value: skip after big hit" is stored in the next hold area as the setting value of the next winning.

  As a result, when the first variation production is executed after the continuous chance production is finished, the "chance of chance" is displayed, and when the second fluctuation production is executed, the "chance of chance" is displayed first, Subsequently, the "probable jackpot symbol" is displayed. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “permanent change big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed five times in succession in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period for continuous chance eye effects is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued), and the number of displayed "Chance Eyes" is increased by 2 and the final lottery result is changed to "Probable variation big hit" Ru.

  In the sixth row of the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, and “set value: skip after removal” is set in the second reserve area as the set value for the next prize. If stored, the winning information command having the lottery result "off" is received twice (first and second) twice, and the winning information command having the lottery result "certainly hit" is third It shows the received state. That is, "set value: skip after removal" is stored as it is in the second reserve area, "set value: out" is newly stored in the third reserve area, and "set value: big hit" in the fourth reserve area "(Probable)" indicates that it is newly stored.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance” is stored in the second holding area and the third holding area, and “setting value: The chance eye & probability variation big hit "is stored, and" predetermined value: skip after big hit "is stored in the next hold area as the setting of the next prize.

  As a result, also in this case, it is similar to the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “probable variation jackpot” is executed. Specifically, "opportunity eyes" are displayed six times in a row in the continuous opportunity eye effect presentation. That is, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is increased by three, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable hit". Ru. The same applies to the seventh and subsequent stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a continuous effect of which the final lottery result is "off" is executed, if a winning information command whose lottery result is of "probable variation big hit" is received, the continuous chance is It is possible to extend the presentation time of the eye presentation (consecutive chance eye presentation is continued). As a result, the fluctuation effect to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect is added, and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed increases, so the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the advantageous gaming state for the player The feeling can be improved. Furthermore, since the rendering time is extended, it is possible to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous for the player after the player has been continued for a long time in a state where the sense of expectation has been improved. Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  Next, FIG. 53 will be described. FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b) show that the winning information command in which the lottery result is "normally big hit" is received when the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is "off". As a result, it is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where the effect period of the continuous chance item effect is extended (the continuous chance item effect is continued).

  First, FIG. 53 (a) will be described. In FIG. 53 (a), it is assumed that the consecutive chances of being displayed with the "chance of eye" will be two times when the successive chance effect effect of which the final lottery result is "off" is executed.

  In the first row in the left diagram of FIG. 53 (a), “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area, and the third holding is When “set value: skip after removal” is stored as the setting value of the next winning in the area, a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” is received, and as a result, “the third holding area” The setting value: “skip after removal” indicates that “setting value: jackpot (normal)” is overwritten (see S1505 in FIG. 34: No).

  After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the first row in the right figure, “setting value: chance item & normal jackpot” is stored in the third holding area, and the setting value for the next winning in the fourth holding area “Setting value: skip after big hit” is stored as (see S1713 in FIG. 39). The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the next variation presentation is performed after the continuous chance presentation is finished, first, the "chance" is displayed, and then the "normal jackpot" is displayed. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “normal jackpot” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed three times in succession in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period for continuous chance eye effects is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued), and the number of display of "chance eyes" is increased by one, and the final lottery result is changed to "normal jackpot" Ru.

  In the second row of the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, and “set value: skip after removal” is set as the set value for the next prize in the second reserve area. When stored, it indicates that "set value: skip after removal" of the second reserved area is overwritten to "set value: jackpot (normal)". After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the second row of the right figure, “set value: chance item & normal jackpot” is stored in the second holding area, and the next winning area is set in the third holding area. As a value, "set value: skip after big hit" is stored.

  As a result, also in this case, it is the same as when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed, and “chance effect” is continuously displayed three times in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is added by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "normal jackpot" Ru. The same explanation applies to the third row, so the description is omitted.

  In the fourth row of the left figure, “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area, and next time in the third holding area When “set value: skip after deviance” is stored as a set value for a prize, a prize information command “lot out” is randomly received, and a prize result is “usually a big hit”. This shows the state in which the information command is received second. That is, “set value: skip after removal” is stored as it is in the third reserve area (see S1505 in FIG. 34: Yes), and “set value: jackpot (normal)” is newly stored in the fourth reserve area. Show that.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance item” is stored in the third reserve area and “set value: chance item & normal” in the fourth reserve area as shown in the fourth row of the right figure. A "big hit" is stored, and a "set value: skip after big hit" is stored in the next hold area as the setting value of the next winning. The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the first variation production is executed after the continuous chance production is finished, the "chance of chance" is displayed, and when the second fluctuation production is executed, the "chance of chance" is displayed first, "Normal jackpot symbol" is displayed subsequently. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “normal jackpot” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period for continuous chance eye effects is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued), and the number of displayed "Chance Eyes" is increased by 2 and the final lottery result is changed to "Normal win". Ru.

  In the present embodiment, when the continuous chance effect production is executed, and the final lottery result is "normal big hit", the number of times the "chance opportunity" is continuously displayed in the continuous chance effect production is four times at maximum. Is limited to. In addition, although the details will be described later, even if the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) on condition that the winning result information command in which the lottery result is “normal big hit” is received. , The number of consecutive "opportunity eyes" is limited to four times. That is, even when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed apparently, the number of times of continuously displaying “chance eyes” is limited to a maximum of 4 times.

  In addition, as shown in the fifth row of the left figure, "setting value: chance eye" is stored in the execution area and the first holding area, and "setting value: skip after removal" as the setting value for the next winning in the second holding area. "" Is stored, indicates that the winning information command having the lottery result "off" is received first, and the winning information command having the lottery result "normal jackpot" is received second. . That is, “set value: skip after removal” is directly stored in the second reserved area, and “set value: jackpot (normal)” is newly stored in the third reserved area.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance item” is stored in the second hold area, and “set value: chance item & normal” in the third hold area, as shown in the fifth row of the right figure. A "big hit" is stored, and a "setting value: skip after big hit" is stored in the fourth hold area as the setting of the next winning.

  As a result, also in this case, it is the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is increased by two, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "normal jackpot" Ru. The same applies to the sixth and subsequent stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 53 (b) will be described. FIG. 53 (b) is a winning information command in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot” when the continuous chance effect is produced in which the final lottery result is “off” as in FIG. 53 (a). As a result, it is a table which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where the production period of continuous chance eye effect production is extended (continuous chance eye effect production is continued).

  In FIG. 53 (a) described above, it has been described that the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed will be two when the successive chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is "off" is executed. In FIG. 53 (b), the explanation is made on the assumption that the number of continuous display of "chance" is three.

  In the first row on the left side of FIG. 53 (b), “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, and “setting value: chance” is stored in each area from the first holding area to the third holding area. When the “setting value: skip after removal” is stored as the setting value for the next winning in the fourth holding area, a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” is received, as a result, the fourth It shows that “setting value: skip after removal” of the holding area is overwritten to “setting value: jackpot (normal)” (see S1505 in FIG. 34: No).

  After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the first row in the right figure, “set value: chance item & normal jackpot” is stored in the fourth holding area, and the next holding area is the setting value for the next winning. “Setting value: skip after big hit” is stored (see S1713 in FIG. 39). The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the next variation presentation is performed after the continuous chance presentation is finished, first, the "chance" is displayed, and then the "normal jackpot" is displayed. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “normal jackpot” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period for continuous chance eye effects is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued), and the number of display of "chance eyes" is increased by one, and the final lottery result is changed to "normal jackpot" Ru.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in each area from the execution area to the second hold area, and “set value as the next winning set value in the third hold area” : Indicates that “setting value: skipping after removal” of the third reserved area is overwritten to “setting value: jackpot (normal)” when “skip after removal” is stored. After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the second row in the right figure, “set value: chance item & normal jackpot” is stored in the third reserve area, and the next prize is set in the fourth reserve area. As a value, "set value: skip after big hit" is stored.

  As a result, also in this case, it is the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is added by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "normal jackpot" Ru. The same explanation applies to the third row, so the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where a continuous chance effect is produced in which the final lottery result is "off", when the winning information command whose lottery result is "usually win" is received, It is possible to extend the presentation time of continuous chance eye effect production (continue continuous chance eye effect presentation). As a result, the fluctuation effect to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect is added, and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed increases, so the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the advantageous gaming state for the player The feeling can be improved. Furthermore, since the rendering time is extended, it is possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state for the player after making the player continue the state in which the sense of expectation has been improved for a long time. Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even when the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) on condition that the winning result command in which the lottery result is “normally big hit” is received, the continuous “chance eye” Since the number of times of display is limited to a maximum of 4 times, the appearance of the "opportunity eyes" is up to 4 even if the appearance of continuous chance eye effects in which the final lottery result is "usually a big hit" is apparently It can be limited to times. Therefore, apparently, when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is executed, the number of continuous display of “chance eye” exceeds 4 times, and the operation of the gaming machine is not good. It can suppress becoming stable beforehand.

  Next, each flowchart of FIGS. 27 to 43 will be described. As described above, the processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 can be roughly divided into the startup processing activated upon power-on, the main processing executed after the startup processing, and transmission from the main control device 110 There are a command reception interrupt process which is executed each time a received various command is received, and a stop symbol pattern table update process which keeps updating the stop symbol pattern table until the power is turned off after the power is turned on.

  First, stop symbol pattern table update processing (see FIG. 31) will be described, followed by command reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), start-up processing (see FIG. 27), and main processing (see FIG. 28). Do. In addition, each flow chart is a flow chart when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 scrolls horizontally, but when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed to the left symbol row Z1 'and the middle symbol is displayed. The column Z2 may be read by replacing the middle pattern row Z2 'with the lower pattern row Z3 with the right pattern row Z3'.

  First, with reference to FIG. 31, the stop symbol pattern table updating process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol pattern table updating process of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol pattern table updating process is a process for continuously updating the stop symbol pattern table stored in the stop symbol pattern table memory 271 (for example, every 5 ms) from the time the power is turned on until the time the power is turned off. is there. In this stop symbol pattern table update processing, first, symbol pattern generation area update processing is executed (S2201).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the symbol pattern generation area updating process (S2201) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the symbol pattern generation area updating process of the effect control device 117. The symbol pattern generation area update process (S2201) is a process for updating the symbol pattern generation area in the stop symbol pattern table, and is a process executed in the stop symbol pattern table update process (see FIG. 31). .

  In this symbol pattern generation area updating process (S2201), first, 1 is added to the third area of the symbol pattern generation area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2231). Next, it is determined whether the value of the third area exceeds 18 (maximum value) (S2232). If the value of the third area exceeds 18 (S2232: Yes), the value of the third area is the maximum value (The arrangement number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reels corresponding to the lower row design row Z3) is exceeded. Therefore, the third area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the second area (S2233). On the other hand, when the value of the third area is 18 or less in S2232 (S2232: No), each processing of S2233 to S2237 is skipped, and this symbol pattern generation area update processing is ended, and the stop symbol pattern table It returns to the update process (see FIG. 31).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the second area exceeds 20 (maximum value) (S2234). If the value of the second area exceeds 20 (S2234: Yes), the value of the second area is the maximum value This is the case where the arrangement number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2 is exceeded. Therefore, the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area (S2235). On the other hand, in S2234, when the value of the second area is within 20 (S2234: No), each processing of S2235 to S2237 is skipped, and this symbol pattern generation area update processing is finished, and the stop symbol pattern table It returns to the update process (see FIG. 31).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the first area exceeds 18 (maximum value) (S2236). If the value of the first area exceeds 18 (S2236: Yes), the value of the first area is the maximum value (The arrangement number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to upper symbol row Z1) is exceeded. Therefore, the first area is cleared to 1 (S2237). On the other hand, in S2236, when the value of the first area is 18 or less (S2236: No), each processing of S2237 is skipped, and this symbol pattern generation area update processing is finished, and stop symbol pattern table update processing Return to (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the third area is incremented by one, and when the value of the third area reaches the maximum value, 1 is added to the second area, and the value of the second area is the maximum value. When 1 is reached, 1 is added to the first area, but the area for increasing the value by 1 may be the second area or the first area. For example, if the value of the second area is increased by one, when the value of the second area reaches the maximum value, the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area. Then, when the value of the first area reaches the maximum value, the first area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the third area. When the third area reaches the maximum value, the third area is simply cleared to one. Further, the value to be added is not limited to 1, and may be set arbitrarily. Further, predetermined values may be added to the first to third areas, respectively.

  In addition, random numbers (in the range of 1 to 18) corresponding to the first area may be acquired and used as the values of the first area, or random numbers (in the range of 1 to 20) corresponding to the second area. It may be acquired and used as the value of the second area, or a random value (in the range of 1 to 18) corresponding to the third area may be acquired and used as the value of the third area.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the symbol pattern generation area updating process (S2201) is completed, it is next determined whether the value of the updated symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach chance eye (S2202). Specifically, an upper symbol row Z1 corresponding to the value of the first area of the symbol pattern generation area, a middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to the value of the second area, and a lower figure symbol row Z3 corresponding to the value of the third area It determines whether the stop symbol which combined with and shows the stop symbol of the reach chance eye.

  In the process of S2202, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach chance eye (S2202: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the reach chance eye area in the stop symbol pattern table. (S2203). Specifically, the value of the first area of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the first area of the reach chance eye area, and similarly, the value of the second area of the symbol pattern generation area is the same as that of the reach chance eye area In the second area, the value of the third area of the symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the third area of the reach chance eye area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the processing of S2204.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2202, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the reach chance eye (S2202: No), the process of S2203 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2204.

  In S2204, it is determined whether the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach symbol in the back and forth direction (S2204). If the stop symbol of the reach symbol in the back and forth direction is indicated (S2204: Yes), the symbol pattern generation area Is stored in the front and back out of reach area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2205). Then, it returns to the process of S2201, and repeats each process of S2201-S2205 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol other than the reach symbol (S2204: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is the stop symbol of the reach symbol except the symbol Is determined (S2206). If the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach symbol other than the front and rear deviation (S2206: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the reach area other than front and rear deviation in the stop symbol pattern table ( S2207). Then, it returns to the process of S2201, and repeats each process of S2201-S2207 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol other than the reach symbol except for the back and forth deviation (S2206: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is the probability symbol of the large stop symbol It is determined whether to show (S2208), and when showing the stop symbol of the probability variation big hit symbol (S2208: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the probability variation big hit area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2209). Then, it returns to the process of S2201, and repeats each process of S2201-S2209 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than a probability variation big hit symbol (S2208: No), does the value of the symbol pattern generation area usually indicate a stop symbol of big hit symbol Is determined (S2210), and when the stop symbol of the normal jackpot symbol is shown (S2210: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the normal jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2211). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of S2201, and the above-described processes of S2201 to S2211 are repeated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2210, if the value of the symbol pattern generation area usually indicates a stop symbol other than the big hit symbol (S2210: No), does the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicate the stop symbol of the missing chance eye Is determined (S2212), and in the case of showing the stop symbol of the missed chance eye (S2212: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the missed chance area in the stopped symbol pattern table (S2213). Then, it returns to the process of S2201, and repeats each process of S2201-S2213 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2212, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the missing chance eye (S2212: No), when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of a completely missing symbol is there. Therefore, the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the complete deviation area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2214). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of S2201, and the above-described processes of S2201 to S2214 are repeated.

  According to the stop symbol pattern table updating process of FIG. 31 described above, the stop symbol pattern table can be continuously updated (for example, every 5 ms) from the time the power is turned on until the time it is shut off. Since the value of each area in the stop symbol pattern table can always be updated, an irregular value is acquired each time the value of each area (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol of the stop symbol) is acquired. Therefore, since the arrangement (stop symbol) of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be various, it is possible to prevent the player from having a monotonous impression on the game, and to be highly entertaining. It becomes possible to provide the game which it has.

  Also, in the stop symbol pattern table, various areas such as the probability variation big hit area and the normal big hit area are provided, but once the value of the symbol pattern generation area provided as the work area (the third symbol arrangement information ), And then the value is stored (copied) in an area according to the updated value (such as a probability variation big hit area or a normal big hit area), so that it is stored correctly in the desired area regardless of the timing. The third symbol array information (information indicating the array of the third symbol) being acquired can be acquired.

  For example, if the value (third symbol array information) of each area (probable variation big hit area or normal big hit area) in the stop symbol pattern table is directly updated without providing the symbol pattern generation area, the value update timing In some cases, desired third symbol sequence information can not be obtained. That is, if the value in the directly updated area is not the value according to the area, it is necessary to correct the value in the area to the correct value (re-update or move to the appropriate area). However, if the value in the area is acquired before the processing is completed, the wrong third symbol array information is acquired. In this embodiment, once, the value of the symbol pattern generation area (third symbol array information) is updated, and then the value is stored in an area (such as a probability variation big hit area or a normal big hit area) according to the updated value ( Since the copying is performed, the third symbol array information stored in the desired area can be acquired accurately regardless of the timing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the effect control device 117. The command reception interrupt process is an interrupt process for receiving various commands transmitted from the main controller 110, and is a process executed each time the various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. is there.

  In the command reception interrupt process, it is first determined whether a winning information command has been received (S1401), and if a winning information command has been received (S1401: Yes), whether the stop symbol setting flag 273h of the RAM 273 is on or not Is determined (S1402). As described above, the winning information command is a command indicating a lottery result for a new winning.

  In the process of S1402, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on (S1402: Yes), since the stop symbol setting process described later (see FIG. 43) is being executed, the process waits until the flag is turned off. On the other hand, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is off (S1402: No), the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set on (S1403), and the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process is executed (S1404).

  Although the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, it is a process for storing a setting value corresponding to the received winning information command in the stop symbol instruction storage table. When the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (S1404) is finished, the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to OFF (S1405), and the process shifts to the process of S1406.

  On the other hand, when the prize information command is not received in the process of S1401 (S1401: No), the process of S1402 to S1405 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1406. In the process of S1406, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command and the presentation time addition command are received (S1406), and when the variation pattern command and the presentation time addition command are received (S1406: Yes), the variation presentation setting process is executed. (S1407).

  As described above, the fluctuation pattern command is a command indicating the fluctuation time (pattern of fluctuation effect) of the fluctuation effect to be executed, and the effect time addition command indicates the extension time or shortening time of the fluctuation effect to be executed. It is a command. Further, the fluctuation effect setting process is a process for setting fluctuation effect data necessary for starting the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later with reference to FIG. When the variation effect setting process (S1407) is completed, the process proceeds to S1408.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command and the effect time addition command are not received in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), the process of S1407 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1408. In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol command has been received (S1408). When the stop symbol command has been received (S1408: Yes), the flag 273h during stop symbol setting is on as in the case of S1402. It is determined whether or not (S1409). In addition, as above-mentioned, stop symbol command is a command which shows the pattern of the stop symbol displayed in the fluctuation production which should be performed.

  In the process of S1409, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on (S1409: Yes), the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34) described later is being executed, so the process waits until the flag is off Do. On the other hand, if the stop symbol setting flag 273h is off (S1409: No), the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set on (S1410), and the stop symbol setting process is executed (S1411).

  Although the stop symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43, the stop symbol setting process is a process for setting a stop symbol of a fluctuation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 or to be started. When the stop symbol setting process (S1411) is finished, the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to OFF (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when the stop symbol command is not received (S1408: No), the process of S1409 to S1412 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1413.

  In the process of S1413, it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1413), and when a stop command has been received (S1413: Yes), the variation effect under execution in the third symbol display device 81 is ended (S1414). Next, the set value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1415), and the set value is "set value: skip after hit" or "set value: after removal" It is determined whether it is "skip" (S1416).

  Here, when the acquired setting value is “setting value: skipping after hit” or “setting value: skipping after falling off” (S 1416: Yes), the chance line consecutive number counter 273 c of the RAM 273 is reset (set to 0) ) (S1417), and proceeds to the processing of S1418. On the other hand, in the process of S1416, when the obtained setting value is not "set value: skip after hit" or "set value: skip after out of step" (S1416: No), the process of S1417 is skipped and Transfer to processing.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol command is not received in the process of S1413 (S1413: No), the process of S1414 to S1417 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1418. In the process of S1418, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1418). When another command has been received (S1418: Yes), a process according to the other command is executed (S1419).

  For example, when a power-off command is received, processing for storing power-off occurrence information in a predetermined area of the RAM 273 is performed. Also, for example, when the number-of-holds command is received, when the number-of-holds display update processing (see S1203 in FIG. 29) is executed, the same number of lamps as the number N of special figure holding balls indicated by the received number-of-holds command Is a process such as setting to be turned on in the special view holding lamp 85 or the like.

  On the other hand, when another command is not received in the process of S1418 (S1418: No), the process of S1419 described above is skipped, and the command reception interrupt process is ended.

  According to the above command reception interrupt process of FIG. 33, when the winning symbol information command is received or the stop symbol command is received, each of the stop symbol setting in-progress flags 273 h is turned on if it is turned off. It is possible to wait for execution of processing according to the command. In addition, when the winning information command is received or the stop symbol command is received, the stop symbol setting flag 273h can be set to ON during the period from the start to the end of the processing regarding the stop symbol.

  When the process according to the winning information command is executed, new setting values are mainly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table, and the contents of the table are updated. Further, when the processing according to the stop symbol command is executed, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect is set based mainly on the setting value of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  For example, when the winning information command and the stop symbol command are received at the same timing, the processing according to each command is executed at the same timing, so one process refers to the contents of the stop symbol instruction table. During the process, the other process may affect each other, such as rewriting the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table, and as a result, it may not be possible to execute the process correctly in each process.

  However, in the present embodiment, even if the winning information command and the stop symbol command are received at the same timing, the flag 273h is set to ON during the execution of one of the processes, The other process can be queued for execution. Therefore, processing can be accurately performed without affecting each other.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (S1404) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (S1404) of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol instruction storage table update process (S1404) is a process for storing the set value corresponding to the received winning information command in the stop symbol instruction storage table, and is a process executed each time a winning information command is received. It is. This is a process executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (S1404), first, 1 is added to the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b of the RAM 273 (S1501). Next, a lottery result is extracted from the received prize information command (S1502). Here, as a lottery result, whether it is "big hit" or "out", or if it is a big hit, it is "probable big hit" or "usually a big hit" or if it is out, the stop symbol is "back and forth out of reach", " Whether it is a reach other than back and forth deviation or "complete out" is extracted.

  Then, it is determined whether the extracted lottery result is "off" (S1503), and if the extracted lottery result is "off" (S1503: Yes), stop symbol instruction storage of stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a In the table, the setting value of the area storing the setting value of the current winning is acquired (S1504). Next, it is determined whether the acquired setting value is “setting value: skip after hit” or “setting value: skip after removal” (S1505), and the acquired setting is “setting value: skip after hit” Or, if “set value: skip after removal” (S1505: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1507 without doing anything because the set value is already set.

  On the other hand, if the acquired setting value is not “setting value: skipping after hit” or “setting value: skipping after falling off” (S1505: No), the setting value is not set yet, so to the process of S1506 Transition. Further, in the process of S1503, when the extracted lottery result is "hit" (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1506.

  In the process of S1506, the setting value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is an area according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b among the holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table. (S1506). For example, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273 b is “1”, the setting value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is stored in the first holding area. That is, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b is "X", the setting value according to the extracted lottery result is stored in the Xth holding area.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 14C, the set values corresponding to the extracted lottery result are “when the lottery result is“ reach out of back and forth, ”“ reach other than out of back and forth, ”and“ completely out ”. If the setting value is “off” and the lottery result is “probable variation jackpot”, “ordinary jackpot”, it is “setting value: jackpot”.

  Next, it is determined whether the extracted lottery result is a "big hit" (S1507), and if the extracted lottery result is a "big hit" (S1507: Yes), it is determined whether it is a "probable jackpot" (S1508). When the lottery result is “probable variation big hit” (S1508: Yes), the probability variation big hit winning process is executed (S1509), and the process shifts to the process of S1511. In addition, although the probability variation big hit winning processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, start the continuous chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is “a probability variation jackpot”, or, the final lottery result is “off It is a process for determining based on the content of a stop symbol instruction storage table whether extension of the production period of continuous chance eye production which is "is extended."

  On the other hand, in the process of S1508, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot" (S1508: No), the normal jackpot winning process is executed (S1510), and the process shifts to the process of S1511. Although the normal jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, continuous chance eye effects are started in which the final lottery result is “normally jackpot”, or the final lottery result is “off It is a process for determining based on the content of a stop symbol instruction storage table whether extension of the production period of continuous chance eye production which is "is extended."

  In the process of S1511, the values of the probability variable extension possible period counter 273n and the normal extension possible period counter 273o of the RAM 273 are cleared to 0 (S1511). This is because, in the present embodiment, the presentation period is extended only when the continuous chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed. That is, it is assumed that the winning information command in which the lottery result is “(permanent change or normal) jackpot” is received, and as a result, the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is “(permanent change or normal) jackpot” Also, since the extension of the rendering period is not performed, the value of each counter 273n, 273o is cleared. Then, when the process of S1511 is finished, this stop symbol instruction storage table updating process is finished, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In addition, in the process of S1507, if the lottery result is "out" (S1507: No), it is determined whether it is "back and forth out of reach" (S1512). If the lottery result is "back and forth out of reach" (S1512: Yes), the back and forth out of reach prize winning process is executed (S1513), the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process is ended, and the command reception interrupt process (FIG. Return to 33). In addition, about the reach winning combination process before and after, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, stop symbol instruction storage table whether to start the continuous chance eye effect of which the final lottery result is "off (chance eye)" It is a process for making a decision based on the content of.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1512, if the lottery result is not "reach out of back and forth" (S1512: No), it is determined whether the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n of the RAM 273 is 1 or more (S1514) If the period counter 273n is 1 or more (S1514: Yes), the value of the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is decremented by 1 (S1515). On the other hand, when the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is less than 1 (S1514: No), the processing of S1515 is skipped.

  Next, it is determined whether the normal extension possible period counter 273o of the RAM 273 is 1 or more (S1516). If the normal extension possible period counter 273o is 1 or more (S1516: Yes), the normal extension possible period The value of the counter 273o is decremented by 1 (S1517). On the other hand, when the normal time extension possible period counter 273o is less than 1 (S1516: No), the process of S1517 is skipped. Then, this stop symbol instruction storage table updating process is ended, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the probability variable big hit winning process (S1509) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the probability variation jackpot processing (S1509) of the effect control device 117. The probability variation big hit winning process (S1509) starts the continuous chance eye effect production where the final lottery result is the “probability chance success jackpot”, or the duration of the continuous chance eye effect presentation where the final lottery result is “off” Is a process for determining whether to extend the character based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  In this probability variation big hit winning process (S1509), first, it is determined whether the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n of the RAM 273 is 1 or more (S1531). As described above, in the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n, the remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before extension of the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is not possible (continuous chance eye effect can not be continued) is stored. It is memorized.

  If the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is less than 1 (S1531: No), it is impossible to extend the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation (impossible to continue the continuous chance eye effect presentation). Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S1539. For example, when the continuous chance rendition production in which the final lottery result is “(probable or normal) jackpot” is performed, or when it is performed, the rendition period of the continuous chance rendition is not extended. Since it is possible (consecutive chance eye effect can not be continued), 0 is stored in the probability variable extension possible period counter 273n.

  In the present embodiment, based on the value of the probable variation time extension possible period counter 273n, it is determined whether it is possible to extend or not be able to extend the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation. Therefore, in order to determine whether extension is possible or not, it is determined on the basis of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time whether or not there is continuous chance eye effect being executed or scheduled to be executed, or stop symbol instruction storage table Since it is not necessary to count the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production based on the contents of, it is possible to reduce the control burden.

  In addition, when it is determined whether it is possible to extend or not be able to extend the production period of continuous chance eye effects, it is determined whether or not continuous chance eye effects being executed or scheduled to be executed based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time. Alternatively, the determination may be made by counting the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed in the successive chance eye effect production based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1531, when the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is 1 or more (S1531: Yes), the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a (see left figure in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52) Each setting value of) is acquired (S1532).

  Next, it is determined whether “setting value: chance” is stored in the area where the setting value of the previous winning combination is stored (S1533). As described in the process of S1506 in FIG. 34, when a winning information command is newly received, lottery information is extracted from the winning information command, and the set value corresponding to the lottery information is the stop symbol instruction storage table. Of the reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) are stored in an area according to the value of the special map reserved ball counter 273b. Therefore, at least in the execution area of the stop symbol instruction storage table, the previous winning setting value remains (stored).

  Here, in the case where the setting value of the previous winning combination is “setting value: chance eye”, it is first performed after continuous chance eye effects whose final lottery result is “off” are to be executed. , It is only in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is "permanent change big hit".

  The reason is that the probability variation jackpot process is not executed in the first place when the winning result information command in which the lottery result is “normally big hit” or the lottery result receives “off”. In addition, even if the continuous chance effect is produced in which the final lottery result is "off", the winning information command whose lottery result is "off" is first received thereafter, and thereafter, This is because, upon receiving a winning information command in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the setting value of the previous winning is “setting value: skip after deviation” or “setting value: omission”.

  In the process of S1533, when "set value: chance" is stored in the area in which the previous set value of the winning combination is stored (S1533: Yes), the set value of the current winning combination is "set value". : It is possible to add the fluctuation presentation to the continuous chance eye effect and to extend the effect period (continue the continuous chance eye effect) only by setting it as “chance eye”. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1543.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1533, when "setting value: chance eye" is not stored in the area where the setting value of the previous winning combination is stored (S1533: No), the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (execution All areas in which “set value: skip after deviation” is stored are extracted from the area (including the area) (S1534).

  Then, from the areas thus extracted, one closest to the area in which the setting value of the current winning is stored is extracted (S1535). More specifically, the arrangement order of the areas in the extracted areas means that it is closest to the area in which the setting value of the current winning is stored. The areas are arranged in the following order: “next hold area” → “fourth hold area” → “third hold area” → “second hold area” → “first hold area” → “execution area” It is assumed that

  Next, it is determined whether one area has been extracted from the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area) (S1536). Here, if it is not possible to extract even one area (S1536: No), the change in the stop symbol becomes other than the “chance eye” after the end of the consecutive chance eye effect of which the final lottery result is “disappeared” is finished. This is the case where the effect has been executed several times. Therefore, since the fluctuation presentation can not be added to the continuous chance eye presentation, the processing shifts to the processing of S1539.

  For example, it is assumed that continuous chance eye effects whose final lottery result is "off" are executed, and "set value: skip after out of line" is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. After that, when the successive chance item effect is finished and the next variation effect is executed, the setting area of the stop symbol instruction storage table is shifted by "set value: skip after deviance", and the variation effect is executed. Furthermore, since the set value of the execution area of the stop symbol instruction storage table is overwritten when the next variation effect is executed, “set value: skip after deviance” disappears from the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  On the other hand, if one area can be extracted from the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area) in the process of S1536 (S1536: Yes), it is determined whether the extracted area is the execution area ( S1537). If the extracted area is an execution area (S1537: Yes), there is a possibility that the stop period of the variation effect being executed can be changed to the chance to extend the effect period of the continuous chance eye effect (continue the effect) Because there is, it is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1538).

  On the other hand, if the extracted area is the hold area (the first hold area to the fourth hold area) (S1537: No), the hold area (the first hold area to the fourth area) regardless of the presence or absence of the variation effect being executed. By setting the setting value of the holding area to “set value: chance”, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation can be extended (continuation chance eye effect presentation is continued.) Therefore, the processing shifts to the processing of S1542. .

  In the process of S1538, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1538: No), since it is a period in which the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect under execution can not be changed, the stop symbol other than "chance eye" Will be displayed. That is, since it is not possible to extend the effect period of the continuous chance eye effect production, the probability variation continuous effect start process is executed (S1539).

  In addition, although the definite variation time continuous effect start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table whether to start the continuous chance item effect of which the final lottery result is “precisely changed big hit” It is a process for making a decision based on Then, when the probability variation continuous effect start process (S1539) is finished, the probability variation big hit winning process is terminated, and the process is returned to the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1538, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1538: Yes), by changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect in execution to the chance, the effect period of the continuous chance eye effect If you can extend the Therefore, stop symbol replacement processing is executed (S1540). Although the stop symbol replacement process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, the stop symbol replacement process is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to the "chance of chance". When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, the third symbols of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 'to Z3') during high speed variation among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed are replaced, The stop symbol is changed to a chance eye.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) is completed, next, 1 is added to the chance line continuation number counter 273c (S1541), and the process proceeds to the process of S1542. As described above, the chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed.

  In the processing of S1542, all the setting values of each area from the area storing the previous winning setting value to the area extracted in the processing of S1535 in the stop symbol instruction storage table are "Setting value: It changes to "the chance eye" (S1542), and it shifts to processing of S1543.

  In the process of S1543, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: jackpot" of the area where the set value of the current winning is stored is changed to "set value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" (S1543 ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: skip after big hit" is set in the area where the set value of the next winning should be stored (S1544), and this probability change big hit winning process is ended and stopped It returns to the symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the above-mentioned probability variation big hit winning process (S1509) of FIG. 35, when the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is "off", the prize information command whose lottery result is "probability variation jackpot" Can be extended (continuation chance eye effect presentation can be continued). As a result, the fluctuation effect to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect is added, and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed increases, so the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the advantageous gaming state for the player The feeling can be improved, and the expectation can be kept longer for the player. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, after allowing the player to continue a state in which the sense of expectation has been improved for a long time, it is possible to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player (here, “probable change jackpot”). Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the effect period of the continuous chance effect of which the final lottery result is "off" is over, and the next fluctuation effect is started, if it is within the changeable stop symbol period, Since it is possible to change the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed to "chance eye", the time for the continuous chance eye effect can be extended (continuous chance eye effect can be continued). Therefore, since the opportunity which can increase the number of times of the continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production can be increased, with the opportunity which can improve the sense of expectation of the player, the expectation is continued longer to the player Can increase the chances of having it.

  Further, with reference to the value of the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n, it is determined whether it is possible to extend the rendering period of the continuous chance eye effect rendering or not. Therefore, in order to determine whether extension is possible or not, it is determined on the basis of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time whether or not there is continuous chance eye effect being executed or scheduled to be executed, or stop symbol instruction storage table Since it is not necessary to count the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production based on the contents of, it is possible to reduce the control burden.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the probability variation continuous effect start process (S1539) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the probability variation continuous effect start process (S1539) of the effect control device 117. The probability variation continuous effect start process (S1539) is a process to determine based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table whether to start the continuous chance eye effect of which the final lottery result is "a probability variation big hit". This is a process executed in the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot process (see FIG. 35).

  In this definite variation time continuous effect start process (S1539), first, each setting value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram of FIG. 46) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1601). Next, in the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area), the number of "setting values: out" following the area ahead is counted from the area where the setting value of the previous winning is stored, and is removed. The continuous number is set (S1602).

  Here, the “forward area” indicates an area in the direction approaching the execution area. Specifically, each area is "next holding area" → "fourth holding area" → "third holding area" → "second holding area" → "first holding area" → "execution area" , And continues forward (see FIG. 46).

  Next, it is judged whether the setting value of the execution area is the foremost "setting value: out" in the counted "setting value: out" (S1603), and among the counted "setting values: out" In the case where the setting value of the execution area is the "front end: setting value: out" (S1603: Yes), there is a possibility of changing the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed. Therefore, in this case, it is determined first whether "super reach change" or "special reach change" is being performed (S1604). On the other hand, when the setting value of the execution area is not the foremost "setting value: out" among the "setting value: out" that is counted (S1603: No), the stop symbol of the execution effect (not executed) Since it is the case of changing only, the processing shifts to the processing of S1609.

  In the process of S1604, when "super reach change" or "special reach change" is being executed (S1604: Yes), the variation effect being executed (that is, reach effect) is executed rather than the start of the continuous chance eye effect presentation Give priority to continuation. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1609. This is because the reach effect of “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” generally has a higher game value than the continuous chance effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when "super reach change" or "special reach change" is not executed (S1604: No), there is a possibility to change the stop pattern of the change effect in execution, so next It is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1605). When the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1605: No), since it is a period in which the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect in execution can not be changed, the process proceeds to S1609.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1605, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1605: Yes), the stop symbol of the change effect being executed is changed. In this case, stop symbol replacement processing is executed (S1540). Although the stop symbol replacement process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, the stop symbol replacement process is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to the "chance of chance". When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, the third symbols of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 'to Z3') during high speed variation among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed are replaced, The stop symbol is changed to a chance eye.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) is finished, next, 1 is added to the chance line consecutive number counter 273c (S1607). As described above, the chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed. Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, all the setting values of each area from the area in which the previous winning setting is stored to the execution area are changed to "setting value: chance eye" (S1608), It transfers to the process of S1612.

  In the process of S1609, in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, the area following the area where the previous setting value of winning is stored is continued to the area ahead [Setting value: The number of “outliers” is counted to obtain an outlier continuous number (S1609). Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is one or more (S1610).

  If the number of consecutive runs off is 1 or more (S1610: Yes), at least, using the variation presentation of the last winning (planned) and the variation presentation of the current winning (scheduled), continuous chance eyes I can perform the production. Therefore, in this case, in the hold area (the first hold area to the fourth hold area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, from the area where the setting value of the previous winning is stored, continues to the area ahead : Change all "outside" to "set value: chance" (S1611), and shift to S1612.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1610, if the continuous number of out-of-sequence is less than 1 (S1610: No), it is the case where continuous chance eye effects can not be started. Return to Therefore, since it is possible to prevent that the execution of the fluctuation effect in which the stop pattern becomes the "chance eye" is limited to one time, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the successive ball appearance from being dimmed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in value.

  In the process of S1612, "set value: jackpot" of the area where the set value of the current winning is stored is changed to "set value: chance item & probability variation jackpot" in the stop symbol instruction storage table (S1612 ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: skip after big hit" is set in the area where the set value of the next winning should be stored (S1613), and this probability change continuous effect start process is ended. , Return to the probability variation jackpot processing (see FIG. 35).

  According to the above-mentioned probability variation continuous effect start process (S1539) of FIG. 36, the stop symbol of the change effect being executed is compared with the case where only the stop symbol of the change effect scheduled to be executed is changed to the "chance eye". The part that can be changed to the "chance eye", that is, one more "chance eye" can be displayed. Therefore, the chance to perform the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved. In addition, the fluctuation effect which makes the stop design the “chance of a chance” is executed at least twice continuously. That is, since the single-shot execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect presentation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of continuous display of "chance eye" in the continuous chance eye effect is "normal probability big hit (no limit)" and "usually big hit (up to 4 times maximum) In the case of "" and the case of "reach out of back and forth (up to 3 consecutive times)" is configured to be different. Therefore, every time the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eyes" increases, the player will improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and will rejoicate according to the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eyes". .

  Therefore, the player can not improve the sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state when the display of the "chance eye" is finished only once, and thus not only the sense of the player's sense of expectation is impaired, but also lack of sense or frustration Makes the player feel In particular, if the one-time display of the "chance eye" is frequently performed, the player may repeatedly feel dissatisfaction and dissatisfaction repeatedly, and eventually, the player's interest in the continuous chance eye effect diminishes As a result, the value of continuous chance eye effects is reduced.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the variable effect which sets the stop symbol as the "chance-eye" is executed at least twice or more consecutively. Therefore, the player can improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and the player's attention can be drawn to the fluctuation display to be executed and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed. It can increase the value of chance eye direction.

  In addition, if the upper symbol row Z1, among the three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the stop symbol, is displayed in a stopped state, the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are in high-speed fluctuation. Change (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol (main symbol in upper symbol row Z1) enters in each symbol row Z2 and Z3 in the middle and bottom, and during variation production You can change the stop symbol of to "Chance Eye".

  Therefore, only when all of the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are moving at high speed, the stop symbol is changed rather than the case where the stop symbol in the change effect is changed to "chance eye" It is possible to secure a long possible period (modifiable period). Therefore, since the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects.

  In particular, when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the stop symbol, the middle symbol If the row Z2 is moving at high speed, replace (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, and change the stop symbol during the change production to "chance eye" it can.

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since it is possible to secure a longer period (changeable period), it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects by allowing a long changeable period.

  In addition, when normal reach variation is executed, among the three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the upper, middle, and lower in the stop symbol, it is always the same in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3. The main symbol is included, and even if the low speed fluctuation of the middle pattern row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display (10 seconds) is long, so 5 seconds after the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is started Before passing through, the third symbol can be replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, and the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to "chance eye". Therefore, only when middle symbol row Z2 is moving at high speed, an opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects as long as the changeable period can be secured as compared with the case where the stop symbol during change effect is changed to "chance eye" Can be further increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol replacement process of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol replacement process (S1540) is a process for changing the stop symbol of the change effect being executed to the “chance of a eye”, and the above-mentioned probability variation big hit winning process (see FIG. 35) and the probability variation continuous effect start process (See FIG. 36), normal jackpot winning process (see FIG. 38) described later, and normal time continuous effect starting process (see FIG. 39) described later (see FIG. 39).

  In this stop symbol replacement process (S1540), first, it is judged whether the stop symbol set completion flag 273i of the RAM 273 is on (S2301), and if the stop symbol set completion flag 273i is off (S2301: No) The stop symbol command has not been received yet, and the stop symbol is not set. In this case, all symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are collectively changed without changing the third symbol for each symbol row Z1, Z2, and Z3, and the stop symbol is set to "chance eye".

  That is, the third symbol array information (information indicating the third symbol array) is acquired from the chance eye area (reach chance eye area or out of chance eye area) in the stop symbol pattern table (S2302), and the acquisition The stored third symbol array information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273 m (S2303). Next, stop symbol data (image data of the third symbol) necessary to construct a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol array information of the display symbol pattern memory 273 m is acquired from the character ROM 275 and the stop symbol data storage area It stores in 276b (S2304). Then, the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is set to ON (S2305), and the stop symbol replacement process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if the stop symbol set completion flag 273i is on (S2301: Yes), are all the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the stop symbols in the fluctuation effect in execution all during high speed change? Is determined (S2306). If all symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect under execution are all moving at high speed (S2306: Yes), the replacement of the third symbol for each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3 is not performed Then, all the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are put together and changed, and the stop symbol is set to "chance eye". Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S2302.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2306, when all the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the stop symbols in the fluctuation effect being executed are not in high speed variation (S2306: No), that is, at least one symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3. If the stop display is being performed, or if it is in low speed fluctuation (medium speed fluctuation), the third symbol array information stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273 m is acquired (S2307). Next, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol array information are acquired respectively (S2308).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect being executed is outlier fluctuation (S2309), and when the fluctuation effect being executed is other than outlier fluctuation (that is, normal reach fluctuation) (S2309: No), acquired It is determined whether the stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol array information is the reach chance eye (symbol) (S2310). If the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol array information is the reach chance eye (symbol) (S2310: Yes), the replacement of the third symbol is unnecessary, so this stop symbol replacement process is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol array information is other than the reach chance eye (symbol) (S2310: No), the process proceeds to S2314.

  In the process of S2309, if the fluctuation effect being executed is a outlier fluctuation (S2309: Yes), it is determined whether the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 acquired in S2308 have the same symbol (main symbol) (S2311). If the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 have the same pattern (S2311: Yes), the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 acquired in the process of S2308 are common to each pattern row Z1 and Z3 One third symbol (the same main symbol) is selected (S2314). Then, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 acquired in the process of S2308 is replaced (S2315) so that the chance eye is configured with the selected third symbol (S2315), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2316.

  On the other hand, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 do not have the same symbol in the processing of S2311 (S2311: No), the third symbol (main symbol) is selected from among the upper symbol row Z1 acquired in S2308. One is selected (S2312). Then, the third symbol of the lower figure symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 acquired in the process of S2308 is replaced (S2313) so that the chance eye is constituted by the selected third symbol (S2313).

  Next, third symbol array information indicating a stop symbol (chance) newly configured by replacing the third symbol is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273 m (S2316). Then, among the stop symbol data already stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b, only the stop symbol data of the portion changed by the replacement of the third symbol is replaced (S2317). Specifically, stop symbol data (image data of the third symbol) necessary to construct a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol array information of the display symbol pattern memory 273 m is acquired from the character ROM 275 and replaced (changed (changed) The stop symbol data storage area 276b is overwritten with only stop symbol data corresponding to the) portion. Then, the stop symbol replacement process is ended, and the probability variation jackpot processing (see FIG. 35), the probability variation continuous effect start processing (see FIG. 36), the normal jackpot award processing (see FIG. 38), or the normal time continuous rendering The process returns to the start process (see FIG. 39).

  According to the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) of FIG. 37 described above, each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 of the stop symbols in the case of the variation effect being executed and when the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed is not set yet When Z3 is moving at high speed, the third symbol of each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3 is not replaced, but all symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are collectively changed and stopped. I have changed the design to a chance. Therefore, the third symbol to be replaced (in symbol row unit) is determined for each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3, and the symbol row Z1, Z2 and so on so that the third symbol enters each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3. It is not necessary to replace the third symbol every Z3 (in symbol row unit). Therefore, since the stop symbol can be changed to the chance with simple processing, the control load can be reduced.

  Further, in the processing of S2317, among the stop symbol data already stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b, only the stop symbol data of the portion changed by the replacement of the third symbol is replaced. Therefore, the stop symbol data of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 being stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 for which the low speed fluctuation (or medium speed fluctuation) is started It is possible to replace (change) only the stop symbol data of the non-stop display symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 without affecting the stop symbol data. Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed while the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are accurately stopped on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol in the changing effect being executed is not set yet, and when each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 of the stop symbol in the changing effect being executed is changing at high speed respectively In addition, all symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are collectively changed and the stop symbol is changed to chance, but the third symbol to be replaced for each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3 is determined, The third symbol may be replaced for each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 and the stop symbol may be changed to the chance.

  In addition, if the upper design row Z1 and the lower design row Z3 have the same design (third design), replace only the third design of the middle design row Z2 to minimize the change of the third design. , The stop design has been changed to chance. Therefore, the processing for replacing the third symbol is reduced as compared with the case where the third symbol of the lower row symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced, so that the control load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the same symbol (third symbol), only the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced, and the stop symbol is a chance eye Although it has changed, the stop design may be changed to the chance by replacing the third design of the lower row design row Z3 and the middle design row Z2 respectively.

  Here, replacement of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, only the case where the variable display scrolls horizontally (in the direction of the arrow X in the figure) will be described, but when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol column Z1 is displayed as the left symbol column Z1 '. The middle symbol row Z2 may be read by replacing the middle symbol row Z2 with the lower symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  In FIG. 44, an example in the case of replacing the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower row symbol row Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 will be described, and in FIG. An example in the case of replacing the third symbol only in the middle symbol row Z2 among the middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, an example of replacing the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower row symbol row Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 will be described. FIG. 44 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m before replacing the third symbol (before change) and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the contents; b) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of display symbol pattern memory 273 m after replacing the 3rd symbol (after a change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), "11" is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, "11" is stored in the second area, and "4" is stored in the third area. It is assumed that In this state, when the stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in the upper symbol row Z1, in order from left to right, "shellfish", "shark (4)", "shellfish The symbol row is displayed.

  Likewise, in the middle pattern row Z2, in order from the left to the right, the symbol row aligned with "Ancho (6)", "Shell" and "Jugon (7)" From the to the right, "Shell", "Tortoise (3)" and "Shell" are displayed in order. That is, these symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 indicate the stop symbols of the completely out-of-point symbol displayed in the out-of-range fluctuation.

  As described above, when the out-of-out fluctuation is executed and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol do not have the same symbol, before the low-speed variation of the lower symbol row Z3 starts (less than 9 seconds The stop symbol can be changed up to). Here, in the case of changing the stop symbol, one third symbol (main symbol) has to be selected from the upper symbol row Z1, but in this stop symbol, there is only "shark". Therefore, in this case, the third symbol of the lower row design symbol Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced so that the "shark" enters the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 respectively.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with a symbol row aligned with "turtle (3)", "shellfish" and "shark (4)" sequentially from left to right. Further, the pattern row Z3 in the lower figure is replaced with a symbol row aligned with "turtle (3)", "shellfish" and "shark (4)" sequentially from left to right.

  In this way, when the symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are replaced, symbols of "shark" are displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2 and the right line L3 of the lower pattern row Z3. Because it enters, the stop design becomes the chance eye.

  Then, if the stop symbol can be changed to the chance, the array No. "5" indicating the middle symbol row Z2 after change is stored in the second area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, and the lower pattern row Z3 after change is shown. The array number "5" is stored in the third area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. As a result, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the out-of-out fluctuation is executed and the same pattern exists in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol, before the low-speed variation of the middle symbol row Z2 starts (10 The stop symbol can be changed to less than a second). The explanation of the replacement of the third symbol is omitted because it is the same.

  In addition, replacement of the 3rd symbol described above is an example. For example, the third symbol is replaced so that the symbol of "shark" is disposed in the left line L1 of the lower row pattern Z3 so that the symbol of "shark" is disposed in the left line L1 of the middle symbol array Z2. You may go. In addition, for example, when there are two main symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower row pattern row Z3 so that the stop symbol becomes a chance eye by one of the main symbols Change it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, an example in which only the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with the third symbol among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 will be described.

  Fig. 45 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m before replacing the third symbol (before change) and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the contents; b) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of display symbol pattern memory 273 m after replacing the 3rd symbol (after a change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), "11" is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, "10" is stored in the second area, and "6" is stored in the third area. It is assumed that In this state, when the stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in the upper symbol row Z1, in order from left to right, "shellfish", "shark (4)", "shellfish The symbol row is displayed.

  Likewise, in the middle pattern row Z2, in order from left to right, the symbol row aligned with "shellfish", "angkou (6)" and "shellfish" is shown from left to right in the lower row pattern row Z3. A series of symbols are displayed in line with "shellfish", "shark (4)" and "shellfish" in order. That is, these symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 indicate stop symbols of reach symbols other than the front and back deviation displayed in various reach variations. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol is changed to a chance only when outliers or normal reach change is being executed, so it is assumed here that normal reach change is performed.

  As described above (see FIG. 12), when the normal reach variation is executed, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol always have the same symbol (main symbol) and the middle symbol row Z2 If it is less than 5 seconds even after the low speed fluctuation is started, it is possible to change the third symbol of the non-stop display of the middle symbol row Z2.

  Here, when changing the stop design, it is necessary to select one same third design (main design) from the upper design row Z1 and the lower design row Z3. In this stop design, “shark” There is only ". Therefore, in this case, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced so that the "shark" enters the middle symbol row Z2. For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with a symbol row aligned with "shark (4)", "shellfish" and "octopus (1)" sequentially from left to right.

  When the middle pattern row Z2 is replaced in this way, a "shark" pattern is inserted in the middle line L2 of the upper pattern row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle pattern row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower pattern row Z3. So, the stop pattern is the reach chance eye.

  Then, when the stop symbol can be changed to the reach chance, the arrangement number "19" indicating the middle symbol row Z2 after the change is stored in the second area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. As a result, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed.

  The replacement of the third symbol described above is an example. For example, the third symbol may be replaced so that the symbol “shark” is arranged on the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2. Also, for example, in the case where the same main symbol is included in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, two in the same main symbol, the stop symbol becomes a chance eye by one of the main symbols It is sufficient to change the symbol row Z2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the normal jackpot winning process (S1510) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the normal jackpot winning process (S1510) of the effect control device 117. In the normal jackpot winning process (S1510), a continuous chance item presentation of which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is started, or a presentation period of continuous chance item effects of which the final lottery result is “off” Is a process for determining whether to extend the character based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  In this normal jackpot winning process (S1510), first, it is determined whether the normal time extension possible period counter 273o of the RAM 273 is 1 or more (S1571). As described above, the remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before extension time period of the continuous chance eye effect is not extendable (continuous chance eye effect can not be continued) is stored in the normal extension possible period counter 273o. Ru.

  If the normal-time extendable period counter 273o is less than 1 (S1571: No), it is impossible to extend the effect period of the continuous chance-eye effect (the continuous chance-eye effect can not be continued). Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S1576. For example, when the continuous chance rendition production in which the final lottery result is “(probable or normal) jackpot” is performed, or when it is performed, the rendition period of the continuous chance rendition is not extended. Since it is possible (consecutive chance eye effect can not be continued), 0 is normally stored in the extension possible period counter 273o.

  In the present embodiment, based on the value of the normal-time extendable period counter 273o, it is determined whether it is possible or not to extend the effect period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation. Therefore, whenever it is determined whether extension is possible or not, the presence or absence of a continuous chance effect being executed or scheduled to be executed is determined based on the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table, or the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table Since it is not necessary to count the number of times of continuous display of the "opportunity eyes" in the continuous opportunity eye effects based on the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, when it is determined whether it is possible to extend or not be able to extend the production period of continuous chance eye effects, it is determined whether or not continuous chance eye effects being executed or scheduled to be executed based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time. Alternatively, the determination may be made by counting the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed in the successive chance eye effect production based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1571, when the normal time extension possible period counter 273o is 1 or more (S1571: Yes), each of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see left figure in FIG. 53) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a. The setting value is acquired (S1572).

  Next, it is determined what the setting value of the previous winning combination is (S1573). Note that, as described above, since either 1 or 2 is set in the normal-time extendable period counter 273o, the condition that becomes S1571: Yes is the consecutive chances that the final lottery result is "off". Only when the winning information command received first or the winning information command received second is the winning information command whose lottery result is “normally a big hit” after the effect is to be executed.

  For example, if the winning information command received first is a winning information command in which the lottery result is “normally a big hit”, the setting value of the previous winning is “setting value: chance”. On the other hand, if the second received prize information command is a prize information command in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the setting value of the previous prize is “set value: skip after deviation”. The reason is that the normal time can be extended if the prize information command received first is not a prize information command whose lottery result is "off" (that is, if it is a prize information command whose lottery result is "probable variation jackpot") Since the value of the period counter 273o is set to 0 (see S1511 in FIG. 34), S1571: Yes does not result.

  In the process of S1573, when the setting value of the previous winning combination is "setting value: chance eye", it is only for setting the setting value of this winning combination to "setting value: chance eye", and continuous chance eye effect is produced Variation presentation can be added, and the presentation period of continuous chance eye effects can be extended (continuous chance eye effects can be continued). Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1579.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1573, if the setting value of the previous winning combination is "setting value: skip after deviating", it is determined whether the setting value of the execution area is "setting value: skipping after deviating" (S1574 ). If the setting value of the execution area is "set value: skip after deviance" (S1574: Yes), the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed is changed to a chance to extend the production period of continuous chance eye effects ( Since there is a possibility that the effect can be continued), it is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1575).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1574, when the setting value of the first holding area is "setting value: skip after removal", the setting value of the first holding area is "setting value regardless of the presence or absence of the variation effect being executed. : It is possible to extend the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation (continue the continuous chance eye effect presentation) only by setting it as "the chance eye". Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1578.

  In the process of S1575, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1575: No), since it is a period that can not change the stop symbol of the variation effect under execution, the stop symbol other than "chance eye" Will be displayed. That is, since it is not possible to extend the effect period of the continuous chance-eye effect, the normal-time continuous effect start process is executed (S1576).

  In addition, although it will be described later with reference to FIG. 39 about the normal time continuous effect start process, the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table whether to start the continuous chance effect effect of which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” It is a process for making a decision based on Then, when the normal time continuous effect start process (S1576) is ended, the normal jackpot winning process is ended, and the process is returned to the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1575, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1575: Yes), by changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed to the chance, the effect period of the continuous chance eye effect If you can extend the Therefore, stop symbol replacement processing is executed (S1540). In addition, about a stop symbol replacement process, it is a process for changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation production in process of execution into a "chance of chance", as described above with reference to FIG. When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, the third symbols of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 'to Z3') during high speed variation among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed are replaced, The stop symbol is changed to a chance eye.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) is finished, next, 1 is added to the chance line continuation number counter 273c (S1577), and the process shifts to the process of S1578. As described above, the chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed. In the process of S1578, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, change "set value: skip after removal" in the area where the previous set value of the winning is stored, "set value: change to a chance (S1578), Transfer to the process of S1579.

  In the process of S1579, "set value: jackpot" of the area where the set value of the current winning is stored is changed to "set value: chance & normal jackpot" in the stop symbol instruction storage table (S1579 ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: skip after big hit" is set in the area where the preset value of the next winning should be stored (S1580), and this normal big hit winning process is ended and stopped It returns to the symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the normal jackpot processing (S1510) of FIG. 38 described above, the winning information command in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot” when the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed. Can be extended (continuation chance eye effect presentation can be continued). As a result, the fluctuation effect to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect is added, and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed increases, so the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the advantageous gaming state for the player The feeling can be improved, and the expectation can be kept longer for the player. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, after allowing the player to continue a state in which the sense of expectation has been improved for a long time, it is possible to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player (here, “normal jackpot”). Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the effect period of the continuous chance effect of which the final lottery result is "off" is over, and the next fluctuation effect is started, if it is within the changeable stop symbol period, Since it is possible to change the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed to "chance eye", the time for the continuous chance eye effect can be extended (continuous chance eye effect can be continued). Therefore, since the opportunity which can increase the number of times of the continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production can be increased, with the opportunity which can improve the sense of expectation of the player, the expectation is continued longer to the player Can increase the chances of having it.

  In addition, even when the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) on condition that the winning result command in which the lottery result is “normally big hit” is received, the continuous “chance eye” The normal time extension possible period counter 273o is set so that the number of display times is limited to a maximum of four times (see S1806 and S1808 in FIG. 40). Therefore, even when the continuous chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed apparently, it is possible to limit the number of continuously displayed “chance eyes” to 4 times at the maximum. Therefore, apparently, when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is "normally big hit" is executed, the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed exceeds 4 times, and the operation of the gaming machine is not good. It can suppress becoming stable beforehand.

  Further, with reference to the value of the normal-time extendable period counter 273 o, it is determined whether it is possible to extend the rendering period of the continuous chance eye effect rendering or not. Therefore, in order to determine whether extension is possible or not, it is determined on the basis of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time whether or not there is continuous chance eye effect being executed or scheduled to be executed, or stop symbol instruction storage table Since it is not necessary to count the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production based on the contents of, it is possible to reduce the control burden.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the normal time continuous rendering start process (S1576) executed by the MPU 271 in the rendering control device 117 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the normal time continuous effect start process (S1576) of the effect control device 117. The normal time continuous effect start process (S1576) is a process for determining based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect that the final lottery result is "normally big hit" This is a process executed in the above-described normal jackpot winning process (see FIG. 38).

  In this normal time continuous rendering start process (S1576), first, each setting value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram in FIG. 47) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1701). Next, in the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area), the number of "setting values: out" following the area ahead is counted from the area where the setting value of the previous winning is stored, and is removed. The continuous number is set (S1702). As described above, each area is in the order of "next hold area" → "fourth hold area" → "third hold area" → "second hold area" → "first hold area" → "execution area" So let's continue ahead.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is 4 (maximum value) (S1703). If the number of consecutive outliers is 4 (S1703: Yes), each area from the execution area to the third reserved area is It is a case where the setting value: out of position is stored, and the “setting value: hit (normal)” is stored in the fourth holding area. Here, if the chance chance effect is started continuously and the "chance chance" is displayed from the variation production being executed, the number of times the "chance chance" is continuously displayed in the continuous chance production is 5 times or more, so it is being executed. I do not change the stop symbol of the change production of. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1709. That is, since the final lottery result is "normally a big hit", the process proceeds to the process of S1709 in order to limit the number of times of continuous display of "chance" to 4 times at the maximum.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1703, if the number of consecutive outliers is other than 4 (any of 0 to 3) (S1703: No), the setting value of the execution area is the forefront among the counted "setting values: out". It is determined whether "set value: out" of (S1704). If the setting value of the execution area is the foremost "setting value: out" among the "setting values: out" that are counted (S1704: Yes), the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed First, it is determined whether "super reach change" or "special reach change" is being performed (S1705).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1704, if the setting value of the execution area is not the frontmost "setting value: out of the counted" setting values: out "(S1704: No), the execution schedule (not executed) Since only the stop symbol of the change effect is changed, the process proceeds to S1709.

  In the process of S1705, when the "super reach change" or the "special reach change" is being executed (S1705: Yes), the variation effect being executed (that is, reach effect) is executed rather than the start of the continuous chance eye effect presentation Give priority to continuation. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1709. This is because, as described above, reach effects of “super reach change” or “special reach change” generally have higher game value than “continuous reach eye effects”.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1705, when "super reach change" or "special reach change" is not executed (S1705: No), there is a possibility of changing the stop pattern of the change effect being executed, so next It is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1706). If the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1706: No), since it is a period in which the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect under execution can not be changed, the process proceeds to S1709.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1706, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1706: Yes), it is a case of changing the stop symbol of the variation effect under execution. In this case, stop symbol replacement processing is executed (S1540). In addition, about a stop symbol replacement process (refer FIG. 37), it is a process for changing the stop symbol of the change production in process of execution into a "chance of chance" as mentioned above. When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, the third symbols of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 'to Z3') during high speed variation among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed are replaced, The stop symbol is changed to a chance eye.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) is finished, next, 1 is added to the chance line consecutive number counter 273c (S1707). As described above, the chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed. Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, all the setting values of each area from the area where the previous winning setting is stored to the execution area are changed to "setting value: chance eye" (S1708), It transfers to the process of S1712.

  In the process of S1709, in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, the area following the area where the previous setting value of winning is stored is continued to the area ahead [Setting value: The number of “outliers” is counted to obtain an outlier continuous number (S1709). Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is 1 or more (S1710).

  If the number of consecutive runs off is 1 or more (S1710: Yes), at least, using the variation presentation of the last winning (planned) and the variation presentation of the current winning (scheduled), continuous chance eyes I can perform the production. Therefore, in this case, in the hold area (the first hold area to the fourth hold area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, from the area where the setting value of the previous winning is stored, continues to the area ahead : Change all "off" to "set value: chance" (S1711), and shift to S1712.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1710, when the continuous number of out-of-sequence is less than 1 (S1710: No), since the continuous chance eye effect can not be started, this normal time continuous effect start process is ended, and the normal jackpot winning process (FIG. 38) Return to Therefore, since it is possible to prevent that the execution of the fluctuation effect in which the stop pattern becomes the "chance eye" is limited to one time, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the successive ball appearance from being dimmed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in value.

  In the process of S1712, "set value: jackpot" of the area where the set value of the current winning is stored is changed to "set value: chance eye & normal jackpot" in the stop symbol instruction storage table (S1712 ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: skip after big hit" is set in the area where the set value of the next winning should be stored (S1713), and this normal time continuous effect start process is ended. Return to the normal jackpot winning process (see FIG. 38).

  According to the normal-time continuous rendering start process (S1576) of FIG. 39 described above, just as in the case of the probability variation-time continuous rendering start process (see FIG. 36), only the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect scheduled to be executed As compared with the case of changing, it is possible to display "more chance eyes" as much as it is possible to change the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed to "chance eyes", that is, one more time. Therefore, the chance to perform the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

  In addition, the fluctuation effect which makes the stop design the “chance of a chance” is executed at least twice continuously. That is, since the single-shot execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect presentation. Specifically, as described above, when the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the variable effect which sets the stop symbol as the "chance-eye" is executed at least twice or more consecutively. Therefore, the player can improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and the player's attention can be drawn to the fluctuation display to be executed and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed. It can increase the value of chance eye direction.

  In addition, if the upper symbol row Z1, among the three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the stop symbol, is displayed in a stopped state, the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are in high-speed fluctuation. Change (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol (main symbol in upper symbol row Z1) enters in each symbol row Z2 and Z3 in the middle and bottom, and during variation production You can change the stop symbol of to "Chance Eye".

  Therefore, only when all of the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are moving at high speed, the stop symbol is changed rather than the case where the stop symbol in the change effect is changed to "chance eye" It is possible to secure a long possible period (modifiable period). Therefore, since the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects.

  In particular, when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the stop symbol, the middle symbol If the row Z2 is moving at high speed, replace (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, and change the stop symbol during the change production to "chance eye" it can.

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since it is possible to secure a longer period (changeable period), it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects by allowing a long changeable period.

  In addition, when normal reach variation is executed, among the three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the upper, middle, and lower in the stop symbol, it is always the same in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3. The main symbol is included, and even if the low speed fluctuation of the middle pattern row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display (10 seconds) is long, so 5 seconds after the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is started Before passing through, the third symbol can be replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, and the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to "chance eye". Therefore, only when middle symbol row Z2 is moving at high speed, an opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects as long as the changeable period can be secured as compared with the case where the stop symbol during change effect is changed to "chance eye" Can be further increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the back and forth reach reach winning process (S1513) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the out-of-order reach winning process (S1513) of the effect control device 117. A process for determining whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect of which the final lottery result is “off (chance)”, based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table, in the reach winning process before and after (S1513) It is a process performed in the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (refer FIG. 34) mentioned above.

  In the front and back out of reach reach winning process (S1513), first, each setting value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram in FIG. 48) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1801).

  Next, in the reserve area (the first reserve area to the fourth reserve area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, from the area where the setting value of the previous winning is stored, "setting value: out" continuing from the area ahead The number of is counted to obtain an out-of-order continuous number (S1802). As described above, each area is in the order of "next hold area" → "fourth hold area" → "third hold area" → "second hold area" → "first hold area" → "execution area" So let's continue ahead. In addition, here, as in the process of S1602 of FIG. 36 and the process of S1702 of FIG. 39, the final lottery result is that “set value: out” of each area up to the execution area is not counted. This is because, in the case of the continuous chance eye effect which is "off (a chance eye)", the stop symbol in progress is not changed.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is 3 (maximum value) (S1803). If the number of consecutive outliers is 3 (S1803: Yes), each area from the first holding area to the third holding area “Set value: out” is stored in “4”, and “set value: out (back and forth out)” is stored in the fourth hold area.

  Here, when the continuous chance eye effect presentation is started, and the "chance eye" is displayed from the fluctuation presentation scheduled to be executed first, the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed in the continuous chance eye effect is four times, three times Beyond. Therefore, in this case, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect scheduled to be executed first is not considered as a chance eye. Therefore, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: out" of the first holding area is changed to "set value: first time skip" (S1804), and the process moves to S1806.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1803, if the number of consecutive outliers is other than 3 (any of 0 to 2) (S1803: No), it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is 2 (S1805). If the number of consecutive outliers is 2 (S1805: Yes), the process proceeds to S1806.

  In the process of S1806, 1 is set to the normal time extendable period counter 273o of the RAM 273 (S1806), and the process shifts to the process of S1809. In addition, as described above, the number of winning information commands that can be received by the normal extension possible period counter 273o can not be extended until the production period of the continuous chance effect production can not be extended (the continuous chance effect production can not be continued). It is memorized. In the case of S1803: Yes and S1805: Yes, when the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the number of times the "chance-eye" is continuously displayed is three. Even if the continuous chance item production is extended (continuous chance item production is continued) and the final lottery result is changed to "normally big hit", the normal time extension possible period counter 273o in the processing of S1806. Since 1 is memorized, it is possible to limit the number of continuous display of "chance eye" to a maximum of 4 times.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the number of consecutive outliers is other than 2 (less than 2) (S1805: No), it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is 1 (S1807). If the number of consecutive runs is 1 (S1807: Yes), at least, using the variation presentation of the last winning (planned) and the variation presentation of the current winning (scheduled), continuous chance Can perform eye effects. Therefore, in this case, 2 is set in the normal time extension possible period counter 273o (S1808), and the process shifts to the processing of S1809. In addition, in the case of 1807: Yes, if the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the number of continuous display of “chance-eye” is two. Even if the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) and the final lottery result is changed to “normal jackpot”, the process of S1808 allows the normal time extension possible period counter 273 o Since 2 is memorized, it is possible to limit the number of continuous display of "chance" to up to 4 times.

  In the process of S1809, 5 is set in the probability variable extension possible period counter 273n of the RAM 273 (S1809), and the process proceeds to the process of S1810. In addition, as described above, the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n has the remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before extension of the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect becomes impossible (continuous chance eye effect can not be continued). Memory is stored. Even if continuous chance eye direction production is extended (continuous chance eye direction production is continued) and the final lottery result is changed to "probable variation jackpot", there is no restriction on the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed, so The time extendable period counter 273 n stores 5 (maximum value).

  In the process of S1810, in the holding area (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, from the area where the setting value of the current winning is stored, continues to the area ahead [Setting value: All the "off" is changed to "set value: chance" (S1810). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, in the area where the setting value of the next winning should be stored, "setting value: skip after deviance" is set (S1811), and this out-of-front / outside reach prize winning processing is ended, It returns to the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1807, if the number of consecutive outliers is other than 1 (specifically, 0) (S1807: No), it is a case where continuous chance eye effects can not be started. In this case, it is determined whether the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is 1 or more (S1812). If the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is 1 or more (S1812: Yes), the probability variation extension possible period counter The value 273 n is decremented by 1 (S 1813). On the other hand, when the probability variation extension possible period counter 273 n is less than 1 (S 1812: No), the processing of S 1813 is skipped.

  Next, it is determined whether the normal extension possible period counter 273o is 1 or more (S1814). If the normal extension possible period counter 273o is 1 or more (S1814: Yes), the normal extension possible period counter 273o Is decremented by 1 (S1815). On the other hand, when the normal time extension possible period counter 273o is less than 1 (S1814: No), the process of S1815 is skipped. Then, the front and back out of reach reach winning process is ended, and the process returns to the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the above-described front and back out of reach reach winning process (S1513), in the stop symbol instruction storage table, in the area where the setting value of the next winning should be stored, “setting value: skip after removal” can be set. . Therefore, since the stop symbol of the next fluctuation production for which the continuous chance eye effect is finished can always be a stop symbol other than the "chance eye", the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is "off (chance eye)" If you execute, you can definitely limit the number of consecutive "chances" to 3 times. In the case where the production time for the continuous chance eye effect is extended, the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye effect is changed from “off” to “(probably changed or normal) jackpot”.

  For example, after the end of the continuous chance eye effect production (for example, the "chance eye" is displayed three times in a row), another continuous chance eye effect production (for example, the "chance eye" is displayed three times in succession) is performed Then, it would appear as if the variable effect with the stop symbol as the chance eye was performed six consecutive times. However, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the next variation effect for which the continuous chance-eye effect is finished can always be a stop symbol other than the "chance-eye", so that the continuous chance-eye effect is continuously executed. It can prevent.

  In addition, for example, after the end of the continuous chance eye effect (for example, the "chance eye" is displayed three times in a row), subsequently, the continuous chance eye effect (for example, Even when "the eye" is displayed four times in a row, it seems as if the variable effect with the stop symbol "a chance eye" has been performed seven times in a row. However, even in such a case, for the same reason as described above, the continuous chance eye effect can be prevented from being continuously performed, so that the continuous chance eye effect can be accurately performed.

  In addition, the fluctuation effect which makes the stop design the “chance of a chance” is executed at least twice continuously. That is, since the single-shot execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect presentation. Specifically, as described above, when the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the variable effect which sets the stop symbol as the "chance-eye" is executed at least twice or more consecutively. Therefore, the player can improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and the player's attention can be drawn to the fluctuation display to be executed and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed. It can increase the value of chance eye direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the fluctuation effect setting process (S1407) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation effect setting process (S1407) of the effect control device 117. The fluctuation effect setting process (S1407) is a process for setting the fluctuation effect data required to start the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, each time the fluctuation pattern command and the effect time addition command are received. It is a process to be performed. This is a process executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In the fluctuation effect setting process (S1407), first, the fluctuation start flag 273f of the RAM 273 is set to ON, and the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is set to OFF (S1901). As described above, the fluctuation start flag 273f is a flag that is turned on when the start of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is instructed from the main control device 110, and turned off when the fluctuation effect is started. Further, the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is a flag that is turned on when the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation time is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command and presentation time addition command, and it is stored in the fluctuation time memory 273d (S1902). As described above, the fluctuation pattern command is a command indicating the fluctuation time (pattern of fluctuation effect) of the fluctuation effect to be executed, and the effect time addition command indicates the extension time or shortening time of the fluctuation effect to be executed. It is a command.

  Next, the set value of each area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is shifted by one area (forward) in the direction of the execution area (S1903). As described above, each area is in the order of "next hold area" → "fourth hold area" → "third hold area" → "second hold area" → "first hold area" → "execution area" So let's continue ahead. That is, the set value of the "first reserved area" is shifted to the "execution area", and the set value of the "second reserved area" is shifted to the "first reserved area". Likewise, the setting value of "third holding area" is set to "second holding area", the setting value of "fourth holding area" is set to "third holding area", and the setting value of "next holding area" is set to "third Shift to the 4th reserve area.

  In the present embodiment, data (setting value) is shifted only for the area in which the setting value is stored. Therefore, data shift processing is not performed for areas where setting values are not stored, so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the setting value, the data (setting value) of each area may be shifted to the area one area ahead. In that case, since it is unnecessary to determine whether data is stored in each area, the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the program can be reduced, and the free space of the ROM 272 can be increased.

  Next, the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 273b is decremented by 1 (S1904), and the set value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is acquired (S1905). Then, it is determined whether the acquired setting value is "setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" or "setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" (S1906), and the acquired setting value is "setting value: chance eye & If the probability variation jackpot is "set value: chance & normal jackpot" (S1906: Yes), the pseudo variation setting process is executed (S1907).

  Although the pseudo change setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, the change of the final change effect when the final lottery result of the continuous chance item effect is “probable change big hit” or “normal big hit” It is a process for determining whether to increase the number of times of continuous display of the "opportunity eyes" based on time. When this pseudo variation setting process (S1907) is completed, the variation effect setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1906, when the acquired setting value is other than "setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" or "setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" (S1906: No), fluctuation of fluctuation time memory 273d Fluctuation effect data corresponding to time is acquired from the character ROM 275 (S1908). Then, the acquired variation effect data is stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276 (S1909).

  Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time memory 273d is fluctuation time of outlier fluctuation or normal reach fluctuation (S1910), and if fluctuation time is fluctuation time of outlier fluctuation or normal reach fluctuation (S1910: Yes), the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is set to ON (S1911), the variation effect setting process is ended, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if the fluctuation time is a fluctuation time other than the outlier fluctuation or the normal reach fluctuation (S1910: Yes), the process of S1911 is skipped, the fluctuation effect setting process is ended, and the command reception allocation is completed. It returns to the loading process (see FIG. 33).

  According to the change effect setting process (S1407) of FIG. 41 described above, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g can be set to ON only when out-of-range change or normal reach change is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the pseudo variation setting process (S1907) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the pseudo variation setting process (S1907) of the effect control device 117. The simulated change setting process (S1907) is performed based on the change time of the last change effect, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance item production is the "probable change big hit" or the "normal big hit". It is a process for determining whether to increase the number of continuous display times. In addition, it is a process that is executed in the above-described variation effect setting process (see FIG. 41).

  In this pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1907), first, the fluctuation time stored in the fluctuation time memory 273d of the RAM 273 is acquired (S2001), and the acquired fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of "normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)" It is determined (S2002). In addition, as described above, in the fluctuation effect where the lottery result of the prize is “perhaps big hit” or “usually big hit”, “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)”, “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, “special reach fluctuation ( Among the respective patterns of “60 seconds)”, the variation representation of any pattern is selected (see FIG. 21).

  In the process of S2002, when the acquired fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)” (S2002: Yes), the chance eye normal fluctuation (20 seconds) is substituted for the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) (20 seconds) This is the case where FIG. 6 (b) is executed. In addition, the number of continuous display of "the chance eye" is not changed. In this case, 1 is stored in the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273k of the RAM 273 (S2003), and variation effect data of "chance eye normally variation (20 seconds)" is acquired from the character ROM 275 (S2004), S2012 Move to the process of

  Note that, as described above, the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273 k is used when “chance order normal variation”, “chance order super variation A to D”, or “chance eye special variation A to F” is executed. , It is a memory in which the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" in the fluctuation production is stored.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when the acquired fluctuation time is not the fluctuation time of "normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)" (S2002: No), the value of the chance eye display frequency selection counter 273j of the RAM 273 is acquired and the value Are stored in the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273k (S2005).

  Next, it is determined whether the setting value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is "chance of chance & normal jackpot" (S2006). If the setting value of the execution area is "chance eye & normal jackpot" (S2006: Yes), the total value of the value of the chance line consecutive number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo fluctuation chance eye display number memory 273k is 4 It is determined whether it exceeds (S2007).

  When the total value of the value of the chance line consecutive number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273k exceeds 4 (S2007: Yes), the final lottery result is “normal big hit” Since the number of times the “opportunity eye” is displayed continuously exceeds 4 in the continuous chance eye effect production, it is limited to a maximum of 4 times. Therefore, "4-value of the consecutive chance counter number 273c" is calculated, and the result is stored in the pseudo variation chance display number memory 273k (S2008), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2009.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2006, when the setting value of the execution area is "chance & probability variation jackpot" (S2006: No), the process of S2007 and S2008 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2009. In addition, in the process of S2007, when the total value of the value of the chance line consecutive number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273k is 4 or less (S2007: No), the process of 2008 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S2009.

  In the process of S2009, it is determined whether the acquired fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)" (S2009), and the acquired fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)" In some cases (S2009: Yes), instead of super reach change (40 seconds), one of chance eye super change AD (40 seconds) (see FIG. 7) is executed. In addition, the number of continuous display of "opportunity eyes" may increase.

  In this case, one fluctuation effect data for displaying the same number of "chances" as the value stored in the simulated fluctuation chances display number memory 273k is stored in the character ROM 275. It acquires from among each of the variation presentation data of “D” (S2010), and shifts to the processing of S2012.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2009, when the acquired fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)” (S2009: No), the chance reach special fluctuation A is substituted for the special reach fluctuation (60 seconds). .About.F (40 seconds) (see FIG. 8). In addition, the number of continuous display of "opportunity eyes" may increase.

  In this case, one chance effect data for displaying the same number of "chances" as the value stored in the simulated fluctuation chances display number memory 273k is stored in the character ROM 275. It acquires from among each fluctuation production data of "F" (S2011), and shifts to processing of S2012.

  In the process of S2012, the change effect data acquired in the process of S2004, the process of S2010, or the process of S2011 is stored in the change effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276 (S2012), and the pseudo change setting process is ended. , And return to the change effect setting process (see FIG. 41).

  According to the above-described simulated change setting process (S1907) in FIG. 42, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance item effect is “probable change big hit” or “normal big hit”, the change time of the last change effect “ If the change time of the super reach change (40 seconds) or the change time of the “special reach change (60 seconds)”, it is possible to increase the number of times the “opportunity eye” is continuously displayed. Therefore, even when the number of fluctuation effects to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect production is small and the number of continuous display of the "chance eye" is small, the number of continuous display times of the "chance eye" can be increased. Therefore, every time the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eyes" increases, the player will improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and as a result, the player can continuously view the number of "chance eyes". I will have a good time in response. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a highly entertaining game.

  In addition, even when the number of the fluctuation effects performed in the continuous chance effect production is small, the number of the fluctuation effects performed is apparently increased, so that the fluctuation effects in the continuous chance effect production can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a monotonous impression on the game and to provide a game having high interest.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the last variation effect is "variation time of normal reach variation (20 seconds)", the variation time of "super reach variation (40 seconds)", "special reach variation ( In the case of a fluctuation time of 60 seconds), either one of “chance eye normal fluctuation” or “chance eye super fluctuation A to D” or “chance eye special fluctuation A to F” is respectively executed. There is. On the other hand, at least one time of “normal reach” only if the change time of the last change presentation is the change time of “super reach change (40 seconds)” and the change time of “special reach change (60 seconds)” After performing "variation (20 seconds)", the number of continuous display of "chance" may be increased. Specifically, if the fluctuation time of the last fluctuation presentation is the fluctuation time of "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)", one of "chance eye super fluctuation B, C" is configured to be executed, and If the fluctuation time of the last fluctuation presentation is the fluctuation time of “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, one of “chance eye special fluctuation B to E” is configured to be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed and to execute "normal reach fluctuation" or "special reach fluctuation" at least once. As described above, the normal reach fluctuation and the super reach fluctuation each generate the reach and give a flashy effect to give the player a sense of anticipation for the game state which is advantageous, so that the chance eye is The combination of the increase in the number of times of continuous display and the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state can further improve the player's sense of expectation. Therefore, the player can be monotonous with respect to the game because the expectation given to the player can be changed depending on whether to increase the number of times the "opportunity" is continuously displayed or not. It is possible to avoid having an impression and to provide a game having high interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, stop symbol setting processing (S1411) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol setting process (S1411) of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol setting process (S1411) is a process for setting a stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed or started in the third symbol display device 81, and is executed each time the stop symbol command is received. It is a process. Further, it is a process executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In the stop symbol setting process (S1411), first, it is determined whether the stop symbol setting completed flag 273i of the RAM 273 is on (S2101). As described above, the stop symbol set completion flag 273i is a flag that is turned on when the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set. Here, when the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is already on, within the changeable period after the change effect is started, the winning information command is received earlier than the stop symbol command, and as a result, it is executed It is a case where the stop pattern of the change effect to be started (or underway) is set to the "chance of chance".

  In the process of S2101, when the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is on (S2101: Yes), the above-mentioned stop symbol replacement process (see FIG. 37) is executed, and the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed is already set. Since this is the case, the stop symbol setting process is ended without doing anything, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is off (S2101: No), the setting value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S2102) .

  Then, it is determined whether the acquired setting value is "setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" or "setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" (S2103), and the acquired setting value is "setting value: chance If it is the "eye & probability variation jackpot", or "the setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" (S2103: Yes), the continuous chance eye effect production in which the final lottery result is "probability variation jackpot" or "usually jackpot" Is the case of setting the stop symbol of the final variation effect.

  In this case, the third symbol array information (the third image from the chance symbol area (reach chance symbol area or missing chance symbol area) in the stop symbol pattern table by the value of the pseudo variation chance symbol display number memory 273k of the RAM 273 Information indicating the arrangement of the three designs is acquired (S2104). As described above, the stop symbol pattern table is constantly updated (for example, every 5 ms) from the time the power is turned on until it is shut off, so the values of each area (arrangement of the third symbols of stop symbols) An irregular value is acquired each time the information indicating.

  For example, in the process of S2104, only the third symbol array information corresponding to the "reach chance eye" may be acquired, or only the third symbol array information corresponding to the "disappointment chance eye" may be acquired. Further, third symbol array information corresponding to the "reach chance eye" and third symbol array information corresponding to the "mismatched chance eye" may be acquired. In this way, it is possible to change the "chance of chance" displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance of illusion effect, so that the player has a monotonous impression on the game. It becomes possible to avoid and to provide a game having high interest.

  As described above, when the chance eye normal fluctuation, the chance eye super fluctuation A to D, or the chance eye special fluctuation A to F is executed, the pseudo fluctuation chance eye display number memory 273 k indicates “in the fluctuation effect”. It is a memory in which the number of continuous display of the chance eye is stored. Normally, in the case of a fluctuation effect where the lottery result is "perhaps big hit" or "usually big hit", "normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)", "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)", "special reach fluctuation (60 seconds) The variation representation of any of the patterns is selected from the respective patterns of)) (see FIG. 21). However, this time it is the last change production of the continuous chance item production that the final lottery result is "perhaps big hit" or "usually big hit", so as described above (see Fig. 42), normal reach change, super reach change , Instead of each variation of the special reach variation, either the chance eye normal variation, the chance eye super variation A to D, or the chance eye special variation A to F is executed.

  Next, stop symbol data (image data of the third symbol) necessary to construct a stop symbol corresponding to each third symbol array information acquired in the process of S2104 is acquired from the character ROM 275, and the video RAM 276 is selected. Each is stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b (S2305). Then, the pattern of the stop symbol is extracted from the received stop symbol command (S2106), and among the areas in the stop symbol pattern table (see FIG. 15A), an area corresponding to the pattern of the extracted stop symbol Then, third symbol array information is acquired (S2107). That is, in the process of S2107, the third symbol array information corresponding to the "probable jackpot symbol" or the "normal jackpot symbol" is acquired.

  Next, the acquired third symbol array information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273 m (S2108), and stop symbol data necessary to form a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol array information of the display symbol pattern memory 273 m (Image data of the third symbol) is acquired from the character ROM 275, and additionally stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276 (S2309). As a result, stop symbol data of "chance eye" and "probable big hit symbol" or "normal big hit symbol" displayed in the final variation effect are stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b.

  In addition, in the process of S2106 mentioned above, although the pattern of the stop symbol is acquired from the received stop symbol command, the final stop symbol is also the “probable large hit symbol” or “normally large hit even with the setting value acquired in S2102 Since it is possible to identify whether it is a symbol, it may be possible to extract the pattern of the stop symbol based on the setting value acquired in S2102 instead of the received stop symbol command.

  Then, the value of the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273k is added to the chance eye continuation number counter 273c (S2110), and the process shifts to the process of S2118. As described above, the chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2103, when the acquired setting value is not "setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" or "setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" (S2103: No), the acquired setting value is It is determined whether "set value: chance" (S2111). When the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance eye” (S2111: Yes), 1 is added to the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c (S2112), and the chance eye area (reach) in the stop symbol pattern table The third symbol array information is acquired from the chance eye area or the out of chance eye area (S2113).

  For example, in the process of S2113, it is acquired whether it is the third symbol array information corresponding to the "mismatched chance" or the third symbol array information corresponding to the "reach chance" according to the pattern of the variation effect being executed. . More specifically, if the pattern of the variation effect being executed is "outside fluctuation (11 seconds)", the third symbol array information corresponding to "outside chance eye" is acquired. In addition, if the pattern of the fluctuation effect being executed is "normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)", "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)", or "special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)", it corresponds to "reach chance eyes" Acquires the third symbol array information.

  In this way, it is possible to change the "chance of chance" displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance of illusion effect, so that the player has a monotonous impression on the game. It becomes possible to avoid and to provide a game having high interest. In addition, only the third symbol array information corresponding to the "reach chance eye" may be acquired, or only the third symbol array information corresponding to the "mismatched chance eye" may be acquired. Further, third symbol array information corresponding to the "reach chance eye" and third symbol array information corresponding to the "mismatched chance eye" may be acquired.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2111, when the acquired setting value is not “set value: chance” (S2110: No), it is a case where the stop symbol instructed by the stop symbol command may be set as it is. In this case, the pattern of the stop symbol is extracted from the received stop symbol command (S2114). Here, from the stop symbol command, any one of "long reach", "full reach", "complete miss", "probable big hit", and "normal hit" is extracted as the stop symbol pattern.

  Next, 3rd symbol arrangement information is acquired from the area corresponding to the pattern of the extracted stop symbol among the areas in the stop symbol pattern table (see FIG. 15A) (S2115). Then, the acquired third symbol array information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273 m (S2116), and the stop symbol data necessary for constructing the stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol array information of the display symbol pattern memory 273 m ( The third symbol image data is acquired from the character ROM 275 and stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276 (S2317).

  As a result, stop symbol data, which is image data of the stop symbol displayed in the variable effect, is stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S2118. In the process of S2118, the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is set to ON (S2118), the stop symbol setting process is ended, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  When stop symbol command is received by the stop symbol setting process (S1411) of FIG. 43 above, based on the setting value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the pattern of the stop symbol indicated by the received stop symbol command It is possible to set the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed or to be started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the stop symbol instruction storage table is provided, when setting the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed or to be started, the stop symbol instruction storage table is simply used. An appropriate stop symbol can be set by referring to the setting value of the execution area and referring to the received stop symbol command only when necessary. In other words, every time when the stop symbol command is received, the number of times the "opportunity eye" should be displayed in the continuous opportunity eye effect display, the number of the "opportunity eye" displayed continuously after starting the continuous opportunity eye effect, etc. It is not necessary to make a determination to determine the stop symbol of the current variable effect based on the situation of the present, and to set an appropriate stop symbol. Thus, the control burden can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, a stop symbol instruction storage table is provided, but a counter for counting the number of times of displaying "chance eyes" to be displayed in the continuous chance eye effect, stopping this, and the continuous chance eye effect A counter is provided to count the number of "chance eyes" displayed continuously since the start of the game, and every time a stop symbol command is received, the current variation's effect is displayed based on the conditions such as the contents of various counters. A decision may be made to determine the stop symbol, and an appropriate stop symbol may be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the start-up process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the start-up process of the effect control device 117. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the effect control device 117, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when the MPU 271 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, the power on notification process is executed (S1002).

  The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. 33, the display lamp 34, the special view holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  When the power on notification process is finished, next, to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 275, and the video RAM 276 is displayed. Are stored in a predetermined area of (S1003). Then, using the effect data, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (S1004).

  Next, the power-off process flag is turned on to determine whether the current start-up process has been executed because the MPU 271 has been reset during execution of the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) described later. It is judged by whether or not it is (S1005).

  As described above, when a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instant power failure”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to effect control device 117 or the like. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the power-off command is received, the effect control device 117 stores power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received in the RAM 273 and performs power-off processing ( 28) is executed. Then, the power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process is completed.

  That is, during the execution of the power-off process, whether or not the MPU 271 is reset can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag. If the power is completely shut off during or after the completion of the power-off process, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, and the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, when the power-off process flag is off, the current start-up process is performed after one of the following three states is entered. In the first state, the power supply is completely shut off. Since the data in the RAM 273 is lost when the power is completely shut off, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  In the second state, a power failure process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power shutdown does not occur and returns to normal, and then the power shutdown process is completed. , And MPU 271 are reset. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 273 is held without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  The third state is a state in which only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset by noise or the like. That is, when the MPU 271 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110), the power-off process flag is kept off and the data of the RAM 273 is held. Be done.

  If the current start-up process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is off (S1005: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 273 is destroyed It confirms (S1006). It should be noted that it is checked here whether the data is destroyed if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held if the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. For example, control of the effect control device 117 can be continued using the data.

  For example, even if only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, the control can be continued using the data to perform the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is necessarily initialized, it is also necessary to start over from the initial state as to whether to start the continuous chance eye effect presentation. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, it is possible to use the data to continuously determine whether to start rendering for the continuous chance eyes, so perform continuous chance eyes rendering It is possible to suppress the reduction of opportunities.

  The confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 273 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 273. Conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction in the RAM 273 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 273 is confirmed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 273 is not confirmed (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1011.

  More specifically, when the power-on process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 273 (the power is turned off (the RAM 273 is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 273 is destroyed (S1006: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1007. On the other hand, although a power failure process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, the power is not shut off and returns to normal. Thereafter, the MPU 271 is reset after the power shutdown process is completed. If the current start-up process is started after the current start-up process is started or after the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset only by noise or the like, Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1006: No), and the process proceeds to the process of S1011.

  In the process of S1005, when the power-off process flag is on (S1005: Yes), the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power-off occurs. Then, the state returns to normal, and thereafter, the MPU 271 is reset during execution of the power-off process. In this case, the current memory state of the RAM 273 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since it is difficult to continue the control in such a case, the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started.

  In the process of S1007, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 273 is checked (S1007). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. The read / write check of the RAM 273 clears all storage areas of the RAM 273 to zero.

  Next, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 273 (S1008: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 273 to set RAM destruction check data (S1009) . By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 273 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 273 (S1008: No), an abnormality in the RAM 273 is notified (S1010), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 273. In addition, on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the abnormality of the RAM 273 may be notified.

  In the process of S1011, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1011). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is performed, and turned off when the power is completely shut off (see S1117 in FIG. 28). Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power-off process does not occur and returns to normal, and then the power-off process The MPU 271 is reset during execution of the program or after completion of the process.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1011: Yes), the work area of the RAM 273 is cleared to initialize each process of the effect control device 117 (S1012), and the initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1013). Is set (S1014), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The memory 273a to 273k of the RAM 273 corresponds to the work area of the RAM 273.

  On the other hand, the case where the power-off flag is off when the start-up process is executed is, for example, the case where the power is turned on again after the power is completely shut off (data in RAM 273 including data of the power-off flag is lost) Or the noise or the like resets only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117, and the power-off flag is not turned on (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110), the RAM 273 Is the case when the data of

  Therefore, in such a case (S1011: No), S1012, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 273, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1013, and the initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1013). Then (S1014), the processing shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1012 is to save the data in the work area of the RAM 273 without clearing it when the start process is started when only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued by keeping it. For example, even if only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, the control can be continued using the data to perform the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is necessarily initialized, it is also necessary to start over from the initial state as to whether to start the continuous chance eye effect presentation. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, it is possible to use the data to continuously determine whether to start rendering for the continuous chance eyes, so perform continuous chance eyes rendering It is possible to suppress the reduction of opportunities.

  Further, when the processing of S1007 to S1009 is executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 273 have already been cleared by the processing of S1007, so it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 273 again.

  Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing main processing of the effect control device 117. The main process is a process for executing control relating to a game effect (such as voice output and display), and is executed after the start process (see FIG. 27) of the effect control device 117 described above is completed, and then repeatedly executed. Processing.

  In the main processing, first, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1101) is performed (S1101), and after the previous determination (the process of S1101) is performed, If one millisecond or more has elapsed (S1101: Yes), voice lamp effect processing is executed (S1102). The sound lamp effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. The sound lamp effect process is mainly a process for executing lighting control of various lamps and sound output control. When this audio lamp effect process (S1102) is completed, the process proceeds to S1103.

  On the other hand, if one millisecond or more has not elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1101) is executed (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1103. It is the processing in S1102 that mainly relates to lamp lighting control and audio output control that it is the processing in S1102 that determines whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed in the processing of S1101. It is because it is not necessary to execute in a short cycle (within 1 ms).

  In the process of S1103, it is determined whether 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1103) was performed (S1103), and 20 m after the previous determination (the process of S1103) was performed. When the second or more has elapsed (S1103: Yes), the variation effect process is executed (S1104). In addition, about a fluctuation production process, although it mentions later with reference to FIG. 30, it is a process for displaying the moving image (image) according to a fluctuation production on 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 (LCD). When this variation production process (S1104) is completed, the process proceeds to S1105.

  On the other hand, if 20 ms or more has not elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1103) is executed (S1103: No), the process of S1104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1105. The process of S1103 is to determine whether 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed, because the process of S1104 changes the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) in the fluctuation time. Since the process is performed according to the update, it is not necessary to execute in a short cycle (within 20 ms).

  In the process of S1105, it is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g of the RAM 273 is on (S1105), and if the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1105: Yes), the fluctuation time counter of the RAM 273 273 e is updated (S 1106). In addition, as described above, since the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is a flag which is turned on only during the changeable period of the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed, the change effect is always executed if the flag is turned on. . In addition, out-of-range fluctuation or normal reach fluctuation is always performed (see S1910 and S1911 in FIG. 41).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 273e is equal to or greater than the maximum changeable period (see FIG. 12A) corresponding to the fluctuation effect being executed (S1107), and the value of the fluctuation time counter 273e is the maximum If it is more than the changeable period (S1107: Yes), the stop symbol of the changing effect in execution can not be changed, so the process proceeds to S1112. That is, in the process of S1107, it is determined whether the variation effect being executed is out of effect for 10 seconds or more, and if the normal reach variation is 15 seconds or more.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1107, if the value of the fluctuation time counter 273e is less than the maximum changeable period corresponding to the fluctuation effect being executed (S1107: No), whether the fluctuation effect being executed is out of fluctuation It determines (S1108). If the fluctuation effect being executed is other than the out-of-out fluctuation (that is, normal reach fluctuation) (S1108: No), the stop symbol can still be changed, so the processing of S1109 to S1112 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1113. Transition.

  Thereby, when the normal reach change is executed, the stop symbol changeable period flag is not turned off until the maximum changeable period (15 seconds) of the normal reach change elapses, so the stop symbol changeable period flag is turned off. The timing at which the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are all stopped can be displayed as close as possible to the time (20 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect until the time (20 seconds) when all of the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed approaches. , Opportunity can increase the opportunity to do eye effect presentation.

  On the other hand, if the variable effect being executed is out of step (S1108: Yes), the third symbol array information of the display symbol pattern memory 273m is acquired (S1109). Then, it is determined whether the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the same symbol among the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower of the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol array information (S1110) If there is the same symbol (S1110: Yes), since it is still possible to change the stop symbol of deviation variation, the processing of S1111 to S1112 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1113.

  Thereby, when out-of-plane variation is being executed, if the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower-side pattern row Z3 have the same pattern, the stop pattern can be changed until the maximum changeable period (10 seconds) of the out-of-plane variation has elapsed. Since the period flag is not turned off, the timing at which the stop symbol changeable period flag is turned off should be as close as possible to the time (11 seconds) in which all upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed. it can. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous chance eye effect is to be started until the time (11 seconds) during which all of the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed (11 seconds) , Opportunity can increase the opportunity to do eye effect presentation.

  Also, if out-of-set variation is being performed, if the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 do not have the same symbol, the upper symbol row Z1 stops until the upper symbol row Z1 stops (that is, until the lower row pattern Z3 starts low-speed variation) The stop symbol changeable period flag is not turned off). Also in this case, the timing at which the stop symbol changeable period flag is turned off can be made as close as possible to the time (11 seconds) in which the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are all stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect until the time (11 seconds) when all the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed approaches. , Opportunity can increase the opportunity to do eye effect presentation.

  On the other hand, if the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 do not have the same symbol (S1110: No), it is determined whether the upper symbol row Z1 has stopped in the third symbol display device 81 (S1111). If the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped (including middle and low speed fluctuations) (S1111: Yes), the stop design change flag can not be changed, so the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is turned off Then (S1112), the process proceeds to S1113.

  In the process of S1111, when the upper symbol row Z1 is in high-speed variation in the third symbol display device 81 (S1111: No), the stop symbol of the deviation variation can be changed, so the process of S1112 is skipped and S1113 Transfer to processing.

  In the process of S1113, the chance display number selection counter 273j of the RAM 273 is updated (S1113), and it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 273 (S1114). The occurrence information of the power-off is stored when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110. In the process of S1114, when the occurrence information of the power-off is stored (S1114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1116), and the power-off process is executed (S1117) . After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1118), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off, and the output to the audio output device 226, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the third symbol display device 81 Turn off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased. Note that turning off each output port is to prevent abnormal display or abnormal voice output, and prevents the player from being confused by the abnormal display or abnormal voice output. It is for.

  In the process of S1114, if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored (S1114: No), whether or not the RAM 273 is destroyed based on the keyword “55AAh” (see the process of S1009 of FIG. 27) stored in the RAM 273. If the RAM 273 is not destroyed (S1115: No), the processing returns to S1101 and the above-described processing of S1101 to S1115 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the RAM 273 is destroyed in the process of S1115 (S1115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. In addition, when it is confirmed that the RAM 273 is destroyed, the sound output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special view holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc. The notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by

  By the main processing of FIG. 28 described above, the timing at which the stop symbol changeable period flag is turned off can be made as close as possible to the time when all the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the continuous chance eye effect presentation starts until the time when the upper, middle, lower each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 are all stopped and displayed, it is possible to determine the continuous chance eye You can increase the opportunity to make a presentation.

  In addition, while the continuous chance eye effect can be performed by replacing only the third symbol of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 during high speed fluctuation or medium speed fluctuation, the stop symbol changeable period flag is set to ON, If it is not possible to execute the continuous chance eye effect unless the third symbol of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed during the low speed fluctuation (or during the stop display), the stop symbol changeable period flag is set to OFF. Then, after the stop symbol changeable period flag is turned off, it is not determined (skipped) whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect production, so during the low speed fluctuation (or stop display) third It is possible to prevent the design from being changed. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player from changing the third symbol that can be recognized by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an unnatural fluctuation effect. Therefore, the value of the fluctuation presentation can be improved, and the value of the continuous chance eye presentation can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the audio lamp effect process (S1102) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the audio lamp effect process (S1102) of the effect control device 117. The audio lamp effect process (S1102) is mainly a process for executing lamp lighting control and audio output control, and is a process executed in the above-described main process (see FIG. 28).

  In the sound lamp effect process (S1102), first, the output of each lamp (for example, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) is set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1205 described later. (S1201). Then, the customer waiting effect processing of S1202 is executed, and thereafter, the number-of-helds display update processing is executed (S1203). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has passed for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed. Moreover, in the number-of-holds display update processing, the number of lighting of the special-image holding lamp 85 is updated based on the number-of-holds command transmitted and received from the main control device 110.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1204). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. For example, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces an expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, it may be a decision button for changing to an effect that can be possessed or selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1204 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, the lamp editing process is executed (S1205), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1206). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1206, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1207), the sound lamp effect process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted and received from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1205 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1206 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the fluctuation effect process (S1104) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation effect process (S1104) of the effect control device 117. The fluctuation effect process (S1104) is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) to display a moving image (image) corresponding to the fluctuation effect, and is executed in the above-described main process (see FIG. 28). Processing.

  In the fluctuation effect process (S1104), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for big hit (that is, whether it is big hit or not) (S1301), If it is inside (S1301: Yes), jackpot effect processing is executed (S1302). In the jackpot effect processing, the number of rounds is updated, the number of prize balls is updated, the background image is updated for each round, and the like (for example, the effect data is read from the character ROM 275 every round Write to the area, etc.). After the end of the jackpot effect process (S1302), the variation effect process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is not a big hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether the third symbol display device 81 is in the middle of executing the fluctuation effect (during fluctuation) (S1303), and is not in fluctuation. (S1303: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 273f of the RAM 273 is on (S1304). As described above, the fluctuation start flag 273f is a flag that is turned on when the start of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is instructed from the main control device 110, and is turned off when the fluctuation effect is started. Specifically, the flag is set to ON when the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110 are received (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  In the process of S1304, when the change start flag 273f is off (S1304: No), another display process is executed (S1313), and the change effect process is ended. The other display processing is, for example, display processing such as a customer waiting effect which is executed when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has passed a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1304, when the fluctuation start flag 273f is on (S1304: Yes), first, the fluctuation start flag 273f is turned off (S1305). Then, the fluctuation time counter 273e of the RAM 273 is reset (set to 0), counting of the fluctuation time is started (S1306), and the process shifts to the processing of S1308. As described above, the fluctuation time counter 273 e is a counter that stores an elapsed time from when the fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when the fluctuation effect is being executed (varying) (S1303: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 273e is updated (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not it is within the fluctuation presentation time by confirming the presence or absence of reception of the stop command transmitted from the main control device 110 (S1308). For example, it is determined that it is within the fluctuation production time between the start of the fluctuation production and the reception of the stop command.

  When it is determined in the process of S1308 that it is within the fluctuation production time (S1308: Yes), it is determined whether it is the display time of the stop symbol (S1309). For example, it is determined whether the elapsed time of the fluctuation time counter 273e has reached the display time of the stop symbol set for the fluctuation effect being executed, and when the elapsed time becomes the display time of the stop symbol, the stop symbol is displayed. It is determined that it is time to display.

  In the process of S1309, when it is not yet the display time of the stop symbol (S1309: No), the third symbol display device 81 (LCD is displayed using the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276 ) Displays an image corresponding to the change effect data (change effect such as high-speed change) (S1310). As described above, in the present embodiment, the one-time variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the variation effect data for performing the variation effect such as high-speed variation and the stop which is the image data of the stop symbol It is performed based on the symbol data. Then, when the process of S1310 ends, the variation effect process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1309, if it is the display time of the stop symbol (S1309: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 is performed using the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276. A stop symbol is displayed on (LCD) (S1311). Then, the variation effect processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 28).

  In the process of S1308, when it is not within the fluctuation production time (S1308: No), that is, when the time of the fluctuation production ends, the fluctuation production in the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is paused (S1312). For example, the display of a new image is stopped on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), the image being displayed continues to be displayed without being changed. When the process of S1312 ends, the variation effect process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  According to the above-described change effect process (S1104) in FIG. 30, it is possible to display a moving image (image) and a stop pattern according to the change effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). In addition, it is possible to perform one-time change effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) based on the change effect data and the stop symbol data. Specifically, when the change effect is started, first, the change effect data stored in the change effect data storage area 276a is read, and the image corresponding to the change effect data (the change effect such as the high speed change) is the third symbol It is displayed on the display device 81. Then, every time the display time of the stop symbol is reached, the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b is read out and the stop symbol is displayed.

  That is, since data used for one time of the variable performance are stored in different storage areas 276a and 276b and read out as necessary, it is within the time of the variable performance and before the stop symbol display time In this case, the stop symbol data set (stored) once after the start of the change effect can be rewritten (overwritten) to another stop symbol data. Therefore, after the fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (that is, in the middle of the fluctuation effect), the stop symbol can be changed to the "chance of chance".

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to change the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that has not yet started the effect to "chance eye", and further, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to change the stop symbol during the change production to the "chance of chance" during the change production. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect which has not yet been started is changed to the chance eye, the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect can be changed to the chance eye, that is, one more time You can display "Opportunity Eye". Therefore, the chance to perform the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved. In addition, the fluctuation effect which makes the stop design the “chance of a chance” is executed at least twice continuously. That is, since the single-shot execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect presentation. Specifically, as described above, when the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the variable effect which sets the stop symbol as the "chance-eye" is executed at least twice or more consecutively. Therefore, the player can improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and the player's attention can be drawn to the fluctuation display to be executed and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed. It can increase the value of chance eye direction.

  In addition, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye effect production is "probable variation big hit" or "normally big hit", the variation time of the last variation production of "super reach variation (40 seconds)", or A fluctuation time of "special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)" can increase the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed. Therefore, even when the number of fluctuation effects to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect production is small and the number of continuous display of the "chance eye" is small, the number of continuous display times of the "chance eye" can be increased. Therefore, every time the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eyes" increases, the player will improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and as a result, the player can continuously view the number of "chance eyes". I will have a good time in response. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a highly entertaining game.

  In addition, even when the number of the fluctuation effects performed in the continuous chance effect production is small, the number of the fluctuation effects performed is apparently increased, so that the fluctuation effects in the continuous chance effect production can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a monotonous impression on the game and to provide a game having high interest.

  When the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed, when the prize information command whose lottery result is “(probable change or normal) jackpot” is received, the production time of the continuous chance effect production Can be extended (continuation chance eye effect presentation continued). As a result, the fluctuation effect to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect is added, and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed increases, so the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the advantageous gaming state for the player The feeling can be improved, and the expectation can be kept longer for the player. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, after allowing the player to continue a state in which the expectation is improved for a long time, it is possible to shift to a game state advantageous to the player (here, “(probably changed or normal) jackpot”). Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the effect period of the continuous chance effect of which the final lottery result is "off" is over, and the next fluctuation effect is started, if it is within the changeable stop symbol period, Since it is possible to change the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed to "chance eye", the time for the continuous chance eye effect can be extended (continuous chance eye effect can be continued). Therefore, since the opportunity which can increase the number of times of the continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production can be increased, with the opportunity which can improve the sense of expectation of the player, the expectation is continued longer to the player Can increase the chances of having it.

  In addition, even when the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) on condition that the winning result command in which the lottery result is “normally big hit” is received, the continuous “chance eye” The normal time extension possible period counter 273o is set so that the number of display times is limited to a maximum of four times (see S1806 and S1808 in FIG. 40). Therefore, even when the continuous chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed apparently, it is possible to limit the number of continuously displayed “chance eyes” to 4 times at the maximum. Therefore, apparently, when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is "normally big hit" is executed, the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed exceeds 4 times, and the operation of the gaming machine is not good. It can suppress becoming stable beforehand.

  In addition, when the winning result information command whose lottery result is “probable variation big hit” is received, referring to the value of the probable variation time extension possible period counter 273n, the winning information command whose lottery result is “usually big hit” If received, the value of the normal time extension possible period counter 273o is referred to, and it is determined whether the duration of the continuous chance eye stage rendering can or can not be extended. Therefore, in order to determine whether extension is possible or not, it is determined on the basis of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time whether or not there is continuous chance eye effect being executed or scheduled to be executed, or stop symbol instruction storage table Since it is not necessary to count the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production based on the contents of, it is possible to reduce the control burden.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on each above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, and various modification improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the continuous chance effect is produced in which the final lottery result is "off", the winning information command having the lottery result "(probable or normal) jackpot" is received, The production period of continuous chance eye effects whose final lottery result is "off" is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued) until the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received winning information command. . As a result, apparently, the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye effect production is changed to “(probable or normal) jackpot”, and the production period of the continuous chance eye effect production is extended. In addition to this, or in place of this, a continuous chance effect with the final lottery result being "off" and a continuous chance effect with the final lottery result as "(probable or normal) jackpot" When two continuous effects are executed, the two continuous effects may be connected so as to be one continuous effect. As an example, the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed first, and then the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “(probably odd or normal) jackpot” is executed Case will be described. In this case, among the variable effects to be executed in order, it is a variable effect to be executed after the continuous chance effect effect that the final lottery result is “off”, and the final lottery result is “(probable change Or, all the fluctuation effects to be executed prior to the continuous chance eye effect which is the “big hit” are extracted. Then, the stop symbols of each of the extracted variation effects are set to be all "chance eyes". As a result, the continuous chance effect with the final lottery result being "off" and the continuous chance effect with the final lottery result as "(probable change or normal) jackpot" are one continuous chance effect. It is connected, and apparently, it becomes the same as the case where the continuous chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is “(probability or normal) jackpot” is executed. Therefore, since the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" increases, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the gaming state advantageous to the player, and the sense of expectation is made longer. It can be held by the player continuously. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, after allowing the player to continue a state in which the expectation is improved for a long time, it is possible to shift to a game state advantageous to the player (here, “(probably changed or normal) jackpot”). Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, when the horizontal scroll variation display is executed in the third symbol display device 81, a part of the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol is displayed. Even after the symbol row (upper symbol row Z1 or lower row symbol row Z3) is stopped and displayed, replace the third symbol of the symbol row during high-speed variation, and change the stop symbol during variation effect to "chance eye" However, after all of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the third symbol of each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 may be replaced so that the stop symbol becomes a "chance eye". For example, as soon as all the stop symbols are displayed, an effect may be performed in which all the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 are replaced, or an effect in which only some symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 may be replaced may be performed. According to this configuration, the stop symbol can be changed even after the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and therefore, the period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed can be secured at the longest. Therefore, since the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects. The same applies to the case where variable display of vertical scroll is executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the fluctuation effect data used for the fluctuation effect and the stop symbol data used for displaying the stop symbol are stored separately, and the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the stop symbol are “chance The stop symbol data is changed so as to become "the eye", and each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 which is scrolled (fluctuating) is displayed so that the stop symbol is stopped and displayed, but the stop symbol is stopped. Acquires the remaining time until the stop symbol is displayed without storing the data, and when the remaining time elapses, the scroll display is being performed so that the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 stop at the "chance eye" The symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be changed.

  In the above embodiment, when the variable display is horizontally scrolled in the third symbol display device 81, the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed, but The number of symbol rows is not limited to three, and may be one or two, or four or more. Further, also in the case where the variable display vertically scrolls, the number of symbol rows may be other than three.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the continuous chance effect is executed, the fluctuation effect in which the stop symbol becomes the "chance symbol" is configured to be continuously executed, but the stop symbol is the "chance symbol". An effect in which the variable effect which is to be performed is performed intermittently may be performed as a continuous chance effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although it is determined in the presentation control device 117 whether or not the continuous chance eye effect is to be performed, instead, it is determined whether the main control device 110 is to perform the continuous chance eye effect or not It is good also as composition of performing judgment. When it is determined in the main control unit 110 whether or not to perform the continuous chance eye effect, since transmission and reception of the winning information command is unnecessary, the number of transmissions of the command in the main control unit 110, and in the effect control unit 117 The number of command receptions can be reduced. Therefore, both control burdens of the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above embodiment, each time the prize information command is received, the effect control device 117 stores the setting value corresponding to the lottery result indicated by the received prize information command in the stop symbol instruction storage table. Although it comprises, it may constitute so that a setup value which can distinguish each lottery result may be memorized, respectively. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command is "reach before and after reach", "set value: reach before and after reach" is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. Likewise, if "reach other than out of reach," "set value: reach other than out of reach," "complete out," "set out: completely out," if "certainly hit big hit," "set up If "normal jackpot", "setting value: normal jackpot" is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. If configured in this way, it is possible to identify the pattern of the stop symbol by referring to the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table, so every time when a new change effect is started, the stop symbol command indicating the stop symbol of the change effect is displayed. There is no need to send and receive. Therefore, the control load can be reduced for both the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the last fluctuation production in the continuous chance film production ends in the “permanent change jackpot” or the “normal jackpot”, one or more “chance eyes” once the last fluctuation production is started. Is displayed and the effect is continued, and then the stop symbol corresponding to "perhaps big hit" or "usually big hit" is displayed, but in the last variation production, the effect to display the "eye of chance" is not performed The effect may be performed as usual, and a stop symbol corresponding to "probably big hit" or "usually big hit" may be displayed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lottery result of the new winning is “normally big hit”, and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within a period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed. If “set value: out” is stored from the execution area to the third hold area in the stop symbol instruction storage table, the display of “chance eye” is limited to a maximum of four consecutive times in the case where In addition, do not change the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently being executed. Instead of this, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently being executed is changed to "chance", and thereafter, the stop symbol of each of the first to third fluctuation effects is also changed to "chance". And in the stop symbol of the fourth change production which is the last change production, without displaying "the chance eyes", it is made to simply display the stop design corresponding to "the normal jackpot", "the chance eyes" The display of may be limited to a maximum of 4 consecutive times.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the maximum value of the number of continuous display of "chance eyes" in the continuous chance eye production is "normally big hit (no limit)" and "usually a big hit (up to 4 times in a row)" Although the case and the case of “reach out of back and forth (up to 3 consecutive times)” are configured differently, this maximum value may be set arbitrarily.

  Further, in the above embodiment, another continuous chance eye effect is not performed after completion of the continuous chance eye effect, but the continuous chance eye effect may be continuously performed. . For example, when performing continuous chance eye effects continuously, the total number of "chance eyes" displayed as if they were continuous by executing each continuous opportunity eye effect continuously is the subsequent continuous Do not exceed the maximum number of consecutive times according to the final lottery results for directing the chance eyes. Specifically, if the lottery result of the subsequent consecutive chance eye direction production is "probable variation big hit", the restriction number of continuous display of "chance eye" is not performed, and if "normal big hit", up to 4 times in a row and up to "out of order" If it is a reach or a chance of getting out, it will be up to 3 consecutive times. As a result, since the number of times of continuous changing effects with the stop symbol as the "chance of chance" increases, the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

  Moreover, in the continuous chance eye effect production of the above embodiment, although the fluctuation effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as "the chance eye (the missed chance eye, the reach chance eye)", the stop symbol is the "chance eye". Alternatively, the sound effect during the change effect (a mode of the sound effect of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third symbol) may be changed to a sound effect different from that during the normal change effect. This sound effect makes it possible for the player to recognize that the player is producing the continuous chance eyes, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to participate in the game. In addition, after making the stop design “the chance eye”, furthermore, the sound effect during the change production (a mode of the sound effect of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third design, etc.) You may change it to a different sound effect.

  Moreover, in the continuous chance eye effect production of the above embodiment, although the fluctuation effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as "the chance eye (the missed chance eye, the reach chance eye)", the stop symbol is the "chance eye". Alternatively, the lighting portions 29 (33) during the variable effect and the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (a form of the dynamic display effect) may be changed to a pattern different from that during the normal variable effect. Since it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance effect is being produced by the lighting pattern different from the normal, it is possible to attract the player's interest. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to participate in the game. In addition, after making the stop design “the chance eye”, furthermore, during the normal fluctuation production of the illumination parts 29 to 33 during the fluctuation production and the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (a form of the dynamic display production) You may change it to a different pattern.

  Moreover, in the continuous chance eye effect production of the above embodiment, although the fluctuation effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as "the chance eye (the missed chance eye, the reach chance eye)", instead, it is different from the usual special It is also possible to perform various fluctuation effects continuously. For example, the same variation effect (the same aspect of the effect of dynamic display) may be performed continuously, or different variation effects may be continuously performed in a predetermined order. This special variation effect makes it possible for the player to recognize that the continuous chance effect is being performed, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect production of the above embodiment, the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as "the chance eye (the missed chance eye, the reach chance eye)" is continuously performed, but at that time, the effect during the fluctuation effect Change the sound (a mode of sound effect of dynamic display, for example, stop sound of the third symbol etc.) to a sound effect different from that during normal fluctuation production, or display parts 29 to 33 or display lamp during fluctuation production The lighting pattern of 34 (a mode of the effect of dynamic display) may be changed to a pattern different from that during the normal change effect, or a special change effect different from the normal may be performed continuously. Moreover, you may perform each combining two or more.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the stop symbol in which three same 3rd symbols are stopped and displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is set as "the chance eye", three predetermined third symbols are the 3rd symbol. The stop symbol displayed in a stopped state on the three-symbol display device 81 may be set as the "chance of chance".

  Further, in the above embodiment, control of sound output, control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of fluctuation representation (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 are collectively performed. Although the effect control device 117 is configured to perform the control, various types of control may be shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, the sound lamp control device performs control of sound output and control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of display of fluctuation representation (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 is controlled. It may be configured to be performed by the device.

  In the above embodiment, one first ball entry port 64 is provided as the ball entry port at which the determination of the jackpot is started, but two or more first ball entry ports may be provided. . Then, in accordance with the first ball entry where the game ball has won, it may be configured to change the effect mode of the continuous chance effect (for example, change the scroll direction (vertical and horizontal) of the effect).

  Further, in the above embodiment, when determining the effect pattern (front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear out, reach completely out) displayed by the third symbol display device 81, based on the counter value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Although it has been decided, it is decided based on the counter values of other counters (first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3) without providing stop pattern selection counter C3. It may be configured to In addition, the effect pattern displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is one of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3, the counter value of the first random number counter C1, and the counter of the first type counter C2. It may be determined based on the value, or based on a plurality of counter values of the variation type counters C1 to C3, the counter value of the first random number counter C1, and the counter value of the first collision type counter C2. You may decide.

  In the first embodiment, the first random number counter C1 counts numerical values in the range of 0 to 738, but the range to be counted may be appropriately determined. Here, in order to count numerical values in the range of 0 to 738, an area of at least 2 bytes (the range which can be counted in 2 bytes is 0 to 65535) is required. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is composed of 2 bytes, it may count a numeric value in the range of 0 to 65535, which is the maximum range that can be counted by 2 bytes, or 0 to 32768 (most significant bit Only the bit value is “1”, the other bits may be counted in the range of bit values “0”.

  Similarly, in the first hit type counter C2 in the above embodiment, numerical values in the range of 0 to 4 are counted, and in the stop pattern selection counter C3, numerical values in the range of 0 to 238 are counted. The range may be determined as appropriate. Here, in order to count numerical values in the range of 0 to 4 and in the range of 0 to 238, an area of at least 1 byte (the range which can be counted by 1 byte is 0 to 255) is required. For example, if the first type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are configured by 1 byte, it is possible to count a numerical value in the range of 0 to 255 which is the maximum range that can be counted by 1 byte. , 0 to 128 (only the most significant bit has a bit value of “1”, and the other bits have a bit value of “0”).

  Here, when calculating the probability with the maximum value of the range to be counted as the denominator and one count value as the numerator, the wider the range to be counted, the easier it is to provide various probabilities. For example, if the denominator is 100, the probability can be set only every 1%, but if the denominator is 1000, the probability can be set every 0.1%. That is, the wider the range to be counted, the easier it is to fine-tune the probability. In pachinko machines, it is common practice to produce models with the same variation effects and jackpot effects but different jackpot probabilities, so by configuring the pachinko machine to easily perform fine adjustment of the probability, Fine adjustment of the jackpot probability can be easily performed for each model, and the design load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 is configured to transmit the hold count command to the effect control unit 117, but the hold count command may not be transmitted. That is, in the effect control device 117, since the special figure reserve ball number N is stored in the special figure reserve ball counter 273b of the RAM 273, the special figure reserve ball number N can be known without receiving the reserve number command. That is, in this case, the lamps of the same number as the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273 b are configured to be lighted by the special figure holding lamp 85. As a result, the number of transmissions of the command in the main control device 110 and the number of reception of the command in the effect control device 117 can be reduced, so that the control burden on both the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117 can be reduced. Can.

  Moreover, although the "variation direction command" is provided in the said embodiment, you may implement this invention by the pachinko machine etc. in which the "variation direction command" is not provided. Further, although the “operation time addition command” is provided in the above embodiment, the present invention may be implemented by a pachinko machine or the like in which the “operation time addition command” is not provided.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control device 110 determines the change effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the advance notice effect, but the effect control device 117 replaces the main control device 110, The fluctuation effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the advance effect may be determined. For example, in the effect control device 117, when the winning information command is received, the change effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the advance effect effect are determined based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. In the case where the effect control device 117 determines the change effect or the notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the special view holding lamp 85 displays the number of holdings for the first ball entrance 64. You do not have to, or you may. When the number of holdings is not displayed, the number of transmissions of the number-of-holdings command in the main control device 110 can be reduced, so that the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure reserve ball number N is notified by turning on the special figure reserve lamp 85, but without the special figure reserve lamp 85, the special figure reserve ball number N is displayed as the third symbol It may be configured to display on the device 81. In addition, the display is such that the number of reservations is displayed visually distinguishably (for example, a number or an area divided into four is displayed as an aspect different by the number of reservations (for example, color or lighting pattern)) Do. The special figure holding ball number N may be notified by turning on the special figure holding lamp 85, and the special figure holding ball number N may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, although it was constituted so that winning a prize to the 1st entrance 64 can be held a maximum of four times, the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times, or three times or less, or , 5 or more times (for example, 8 times) may be set.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure holding ball counter 203c is provided as a counter for counting the special drawing holding ball number N of the first entrance 64, but without providing the counter 203c, it is possible to Check the contents of the holding ball storage area 203a (for example, at the start of fluctuation) (count the number of areas with data) to obtain the special figure holding ball number N of the first entrance 64 You may configure it. In this case, after shifting data from the shift source area to the shift destination area, the data of the shift source area is cleared.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is limited to the one that scrolls the symbols as identification information in the vertical or horizontal direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 Instead, the symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Also, it may be scrolled diagonally. Also, it may be scrolled immediately above. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In the above embodiment, the passage of the second entrance 67 is configured to be suspended up to four times each, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The present invention may be implemented on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from that of the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented in a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as V zone. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an allearch or a ball.

  The present invention may be implemented on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from that of the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area after the jackpot symbol is displayed. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is a coin, a medal, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above will be shown. A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry A game machine comprising: peripheral control means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control regarding a game. The control means is a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information accompanying the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means , Lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering the ball, lottery information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means to the peripheral control means, and the ball entering information By acquisition means Ball storage information storage means for storing the stored ball storage information, and dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball storage information storage means; The control means performs, on the display means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, and the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means , Lottery information receiving means for receiving the lottery information by the lottery information receiving means, and aspect information storage means for storing the aspect information indicating the aspect of the dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information received by the lottery information receiving means When it is determined that the mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to a predetermined mode based on the contents of the mode information storage means First change means for changing the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means to the predetermined mode when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means, and the first change For each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display whose aspect is changed by the means, the dynamic display is executed in the predetermined mode, or instead of the dynamic display, the dynamic display is different from the dynamic display A game machine A1 comprising: predetermined mode execution means for executing a plurality of target displays in the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the entering of the game medium is detected by the detecting means in the main control means, the entering information associated with the entering ball is acquired by the entering information acquiring means, and based on the entered information. Lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. The display control means instructs the peripheral control means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means. Further, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode information indicating the mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information is used as the mode information storage means Based on the contents of the mode information storage means, whether or not the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to a predetermined mode is determined by the change possibility determination means. Here, if it is determined that the changeability determination unit determines that the change is possible, the mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed by the first change unit to a predetermined mode. Furthermore, for each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display whose aspect is changed by the predetermined aspect execution means, the dynamic display is executed in a predetermined aspect, or instead of the dynamic display A plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are executed in a predetermined manner.

  Since the dynamic display executing means of the peripheral control means executes the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means, the aspect of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means of the peripheral control means Is determined before the start of its execution. In the peripheral control means, since the aspect of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to the predetermined aspect by the first changing means, the aspect of the dynamic display determined before the start of the execution is It can be changed in a predetermined manner during execution of the dynamic display. Therefore, when the aspect of the dynamic display is continuously made into the predetermined aspect, since the aspect of the active dynamic display which has already been executed can be made into the predetermined aspect, the unexecuted dynamic is executed next. The aspect of the dynamic display can be made into the predetermined aspect more than once from the aspect of the dynamic display to the predetermined aspect. Therefore, the opportunity to make the aspect of dynamic display into the predetermined aspect continuously can be increased. Further, the dynamic display performed following the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first change means is executed by the predetermined mode execution means in a predetermined mode, or the dynamic display performed subsequently is performed Instead of the dynamic display, a plurality of dynamic display different from the dynamic display can be executed in a predetermined manner. Therefore, as compared with the case where the dynamic display is performed in a predetermined manner without changing the dynamic display, the dynamic display is replaced, and a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are performed in a predetermined manner. In some cases, dynamic display of a predetermined aspect can be performed one or more times. Therefore, while increasing the opportunity to make the aspect of dynamic display a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, the frequency | count of execution of the dynamic display of a predetermined aspect can also be increased.

  In the gaming machine A1, the peripheral control means includes effect information storage means for storing effect information for which dynamic display effect contents to be executed in the display means are defined, and the predetermined mode execution means is the effect A game machine A2 characterized in that a plurality of dynamic displays are executed from among the dynamic displays defined by the effect information stored in the information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the effect information storage means stores the effect information in which the effect contents of the dynamic display executed in the display means are defined in the peripheral control means, and the predetermined mode execution means A plurality of dynamic displays are executed from among the dynamic displays defined by the presentation information. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare special effect information and store it in the storage area only in order to execute a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display changed by the second changing means. Therefore, the consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the effect information, the effect contents of the dynamic display for enhancing the player's sense of expectation and the effect contents of the dynamic display different from the dynamic display are included in each of the dynamic display It is determined together with the execution time, and when the execution of the dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first changing means is instructed by the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means. The method further comprises executability determination means for determining whether it is possible to execute a plurality of dynamic displays including the dynamic display for enhancing the player's sense of expectation within the execution time of the instructed dynamic display, If it is determined that execution is possible by the executability judging means, instead of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means, the dynamic display including the player's sense of expectation is included. It has multiple dynamic displays Gaming machine A3, wherein are those to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in the presentation information, presentation contents of dynamic display for enhancing the player's sense of expectation and presentation contents of dynamic display different from the dynamic display are executed for each of the dynamic display If execution of the dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first changing means is instructed by the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means, the execution of the instructed dynamic display is performed. It is determined by the executability judging means whether or not a plurality of dynamic displays including dynamic displays which increase the player's sense of expectation can be respectively executed within the time. Then, if it is determined that execution is possible, instead of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, a plurality of dynamic pictures including dynamic display for enhancing the player's sense of expectation Each display is executed by the predetermined mode execution means. Therefore, instead of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, when a plurality of dynamic displays are executed, the dynamic display which always enhances the player's sense of expectation is executed As a result, the player can be made to have a sense of expectation, and furthermore, since a plurality of dynamic displays are executed, the contents of the dynamic display can be diversified. Therefore, in the case where the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed as it is, and in the case where plural dynamic displays are executed instead of the instructed dynamic display, the player Since it is possible to make a change in the sense of expectation given to the player, it is possible to provide the player with a highly entertaining game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, whenever the peripheral control means receives lottery information by the lottery information receiving means, mode information indicating an aspect of dynamic display not yet executed corresponding to the lottery information, When the execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the aspect information storage execution means associated with the reception order of the lottery information and stored in the aspect information storage means, and the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the execution is instructed Means for acquiring, from the mode information storage means, mode information corresponding to the selected dynamic display based on the reception order of the lottery information, and the mode information obtained based on the mode information obtained by the mode information acquisition means Execution mode setting means for setting the mode of dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means, and the predetermined mode execution means is determined to be changeable by the changeability determination means And a second change unit configured to change the mode information of the unexecuted dynamic display stored in the mode information storage unit to mode information indicating the predetermined mode. Gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in the peripheral control means, whenever the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode information indicating the non-executed dynamic display mode corresponding to the lottery information is executed as the mode information storage The mode information of the unexecuted dynamic display stored in the mode information storage means when stored in the mode information storage means in association with the order of reception of the lottery information from the means and stored in the mode information storage means and changeable by the change possibility determination means Are each changed by the second changing means to the mode information indicating the predetermined mode. Then, when execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instructing means, the mode information corresponding to the dynamic display for which the execution is instructed is the mode information from the mode information storage means on the basis of the reception order of the lottery information. Based on the mode information, the mode of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means is set by the execution mode setting means based on the mode information. Therefore, when execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means, the mode information corresponding to the instructed dynamic display is simply obtained, and the dynamic instructed for the execution based thereon. The display mode can be set. That is, whenever it is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means to execute the dynamic display, it is necessary to determine a situation such as whether the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode and set an appropriate mode. Because it does not exist, control burden can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A4, if one of the second changing means and the aspect information storage executing means has the other of the second changing means and the aspect information storage executing means changing or setting the aspect information in the aspect information storage means , A game machine A5 characterized in that the mode information is changed or set after the end of the process.

  According to the gaming machine A5, if one of the second changing means and the mode information storage executing means is changing or setting the mode information in the mode information storing means, the other of the second changing means and the mode information storage executing means Change or set the form information after it is finished. Therefore, while the mode information in the mode information storage means is being changed or set by one of the second changing means and the mode information storage execution means, the mode information being changed or set is erroneously changed to the second change It can be prevented from being changed or set by the other of the means and aspect information storage execution means. Therefore, accurate aspect information can be stored in the aspect information storage means.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the aspect of the dynamic display executed next to each dynamic display in which the aspect is changed to the predetermined aspect by the second changing means is limited to an aspect different from the predetermined aspect. A game machine A6 characterized by comprising mode restriction means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the aspect of the dynamic display performed next to each dynamic display whose aspect is changed to the predetermined aspect by the second changing means is the aspect restriction means in an aspect different from the predetermined aspect. Limited by Therefore, when execution of a dynamic display is instructed next to each dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the second changing means, the dynamic display is performed in a mode different from the predetermined mode. In addition, while the dynamic display is being executed, even if it is determined that the aspect of the dynamic display being executed by the changeability determining means can be changed to the predetermined aspect, the aspect of the dynamic display being executed is It is executed without change. Therefore, after the aspect of the dynamic display is continuously made into the predetermined aspect, it is possible to prevent the aspect of the dynamic display from being continuously made into the predetermined aspect again, so that the aspect of the dynamic display exceeds the scheduled number. Can be prevented from continuing.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the main control means may separate the information on the number of ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means separately from the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means. A game machine A7 characterized in that it has a number-of-entered-number-of-balls sending means for sending to the peripheral control means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in the main control means, information on the number of ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means separates from the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means to the periphery control means It is transmitted by the number transmission means. Therefore, since the peripheral control means can separately receive the lottery information and the information on the number of ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means, processing for each information can be executed at different timings. , The control burden can be distributed. In addition, since the main control means can separately transmit the lottery information and the information on the number of ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means to the peripheral control means, compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing, Control burden can be distributed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a dynamic display mode, a dynamic display mode, and a dynamic mode sound effect. Game machine A8 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the predetermined mode includes at least one of the mode of dynamic display effect, the mode of display result of dynamic display, and the mode of sound effect of dynamic display, The player can be made aware that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode, and the player's interest can be attracted.

  In addition, when making the aspect of a dynamic display into a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, you may change a predetermined | prescribed aspect for every dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined aspect is the aspect of the dynamic display, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined aspect is the display of the dynamic display, and the third dynamic In the display, the predetermined aspect is the aspect of the sound effect of the dynamic display. As described above, changing the aspect of the dynamic display can make the dynamic display change more colorful, and thus can attract the player's interest more strongly.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry And a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to perform dynamic display of the identification information, and when the detection means detects the entrance of the game medium, the detection means is accompanied by the entrance of the game medium. The lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information, the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry based on the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, and the lottery information Aspect information storage means for storing aspect information indicating an aspect of dynamic display corresponding to lottery information acquired by acquisition means, and ball entry information storage means for storing ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, The dynamic display execution means is The dynamic display of the identification information is performed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, and when the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the content information of the aspect information storage means is used. The changeable / non-removable determination unit determines whether or not the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution unit can be changed to a predetermined mode, and when the changeable / non-changeable determination unit determines that change is possible, the dynamic About the 1st change means which changes the mode of the dynamic display currently performed by the display execution means into the said predetermined mode, and each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display which changed the mode by the 1st change means And a predetermined mode execution means for executing the dynamic display in the predetermined mode or performing a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display in the predetermined mode instead of the dynamic display. A baby Game machine A9 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A9, when the detecting means detects the entering of the game medium, the entering information associated with the entering ball is acquired by the entering information acquiring means, and the entering information is stored in the entering information storage means It is memorized. And execution of dynamic display is performed by dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the entering information storage means. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the ball entry information, and the dynamic corresponding to the lottery information Aspect information indicating an aspect of display is stored in the aspect information storage means. Then, based on the contents of the mode information storage means, the change possibility determination means determines whether or not the mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to a predetermined mode. Here, if it is determined that the changeability determination unit determines that the change is possible, the mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed by the first change unit to a predetermined mode. Furthermore, the aspect of the dynamic display before the execution of the dynamic display performed next to the dynamic display whose aspect is changed is changed by the second change means to the predetermined aspect. Then, based on the execution time of the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the second changing means, the executability judging means determines whether or not a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display whose mode is changed can be executed. . If it is determined that execution is possible by the executability judging means, instead of the dynamic display changed by the second changing means, a plurality of dynamic displays different from the changed dynamic display are respectively executed in a predetermined mode in a predetermined mode It is carried out by means.

  Since the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, the aspect of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined before the start of its execution. However, since the aspect of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to the predetermined aspect by the first changing means, the aspect of the dynamic display determined before the start of the execution is the dynamic display Can be changed in a predetermined manner during execution of. Therefore, when the aspect of the dynamic display is continuously made into the predetermined aspect, since the aspect of the active dynamic display which has already been executed can be made into the predetermined aspect, the unexecuted dynamic is executed next. The aspect of the dynamic display can be made into the predetermined aspect more than once from the aspect of the dynamic display to the predetermined aspect. Therefore, the opportunity to make the aspect of dynamic display into the predetermined aspect continuously can be increased. Further, the dynamic display performed following the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first change means is executed by the predetermined mode execution means in a predetermined mode, or the dynamic display performed subsequently is performed Instead of the dynamic display, a plurality of dynamic display different from the dynamic display can be executed in a predetermined manner. Therefore, as compared with the case where the dynamic display is performed in a predetermined manner without changing the dynamic display, the dynamic display is replaced, and a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are performed in a predetermined manner. In some cases, dynamic display of a predetermined aspect can be performed one or more times. Therefore, while increasing the opportunity to make the aspect of dynamic display a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, the frequency | count of execution of the dynamic display of a predetermined aspect can also be increased.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry A game machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control related to a game. The control means is a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information accompanying the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means , Lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering the ball, lottery information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means to the peripheral control means, and the ball entering information By acquisition means It comprises: ball entry information storage means for storing the acquired ball entry information; and dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute dynamic display of identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means The peripheral control means, when instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means to execute dynamic display of identification information, the player can dynamically display identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. The player can recognize the identification information by the dynamic display execution means executed on the display means in a manner in which the identification information is difficult to recognize, and the aspect of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means After the display mode is changed to the above mode, stop display execution means for stopping and displaying the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information on the display means, and lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means are received When the lottery information is received by the selected information receiving means and the lottery information receiving means, a part of the plurality of identification information is stopped by the stop display execution means or the plurality of identification information is displayed by the dynamic display execution means If a portion of the character is dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode, the dynamic display execution means changes the identification information dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode, thereby stopping the display of the identification information The dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the difficult-to-recognize mode when it is determined by the changeable determination means that the changeability determination means determines whether the changeable to the predetermined aspect and the changeability determination means The first change means for changing the stop display mode of the existing identification information to the predetermined mode, and the stop display of the identification information whose mode is changed by the first change means is ended, and the dynamic display of the identification information thereafter is performed. A game machine characterized by further comprising: second changing means for controlling so that the predetermined mode is selected as a stop display mode of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means when being executed B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information accompanying the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and based on the ball entering information Lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means Is instructed to the peripheral control means by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, when execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the player can dynamically display the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. After the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in a difficult-to-recognize manner, and then the aspect of the dynamic display being executed is made an aspect in which the player can recognize the identification information. The plurality of identification information dynamically displayed is stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display execution means. Then, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means is received by the lottery information reception means, the stop display execution means causes part of the plurality of identification information to be stopped or displayed by the dynamic display execution means When a part of the plurality of identification information is displayed dynamically in a recognizable manner, stop display of the identification information by changing the identification information dynamically displayed in a manner difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means It is determined by the changeability determination means whether or not the mode can be changed to a predetermined mode. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is changed by the first change unit to a predetermined mode. Then, the stop display of the identification information changed to the predetermined mode is ended by the first changing means, and the dynamic display of the identification information thereafter is executed, the stop of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means Since the second changing unit controls the predetermined mode as the display mode, the stop display mode of the identification information executed by the stop display execution unit is continuously or intermittently changed to the predetermined mode.

  Therefore, even after the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information and then the stop display execution means causes some of the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed, or the dynamic display execution means performs the plurality of identification information Dynamic display in a difficult-to-recognize manner within a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic-display execution means, even if The stop display mode of the identification information in can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is not a period during which the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, but only a period in which all of the plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner. The period dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize can also be a period that can be changed to a predetermined manner. Therefore, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of identification information be a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased by the part which can extend the changeable period.

  Note that, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a high speed (scroll display) is exemplified. Further, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a medium speed or a low speed (scroll display) is exemplified.

  Moreover, that the stop display mode is a predetermined mode means that predetermined identification information is included in the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed, and that the predetermined identification information is regularly included. Are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means instructs the dynamic display execution means of the dynamic display execution means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information, the first to n-th plural pieces of identification information are connected. Dynamic display of the identification information sequence up to (n is an integer of 2 or more) is executed on the display means in the unit of identification information sequence, and the same identification information is included in each of the first to nth identification information sequences When the stop display mode of the identification information is the predetermined mode when the stop display is displayed, the stop display execution means performs the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. The first to n-th identification information sequences are stopped and displayed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to n-th identification information sequences, and the changeability determination unit determines lottery information by the lottery information receiving unit When receiving the If the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence is executed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the display execution means, it is determined that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, and the first change means The stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is determined as a predetermined mode when it is determined that the changeability determination unit determines that the change is possible. A game machine B2 characterized in that it is to be changed.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the first to n-th (n is an integer of 2 or more) in which a plurality of identification information are connected. Dynamic display of identification information strings up to is performed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in units of identification information strings, and thereafter, the first to nth identification information strings are the first to nth identification information Stop display is performed by the stop display execution unit for each identification information column in the order of the columns. Here, when the same identification information is included in each of the first to n-th identification information strings and the stop display is performed, it is determined that the stop display mode of the identification information is a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence is executed by the dynamic display execution means in a mode in which recognition of the second identification information is difficult, the stop display mode of the identification information Is determined to be changeable to a predetermined mode by the change possibility determination means. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed by the first change means to a predetermined mode . Therefore, when the stop display of the identification information is performed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to n-th identification information sequences by the stop display execution unit, even after the first identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, even if the first identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner by the dynamic display execution means, the second identification information string is recognized within a period in which the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a difficult recognition manner. It is possible to change the stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings in the dynamic display in a difficult manner to a predetermined mode. Therefore, the period during which the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to the predetermined mode is not limited to the period in which all of the first to n-th identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize mode. A period from the time when one identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to the time before the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner is also a changeable period in a predetermined manner. Can. Therefore, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of identification information be a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased by the part which can extend the changeable period.

  The arrangement of each of the first to n-th identification information strings stopped and displayed in each display area of the display means may be any arrangement. For example, each identification information row may be arranged in a row in the vertical direction and may be arranged in order horizontally, or each identification information row may be arranged in a row in the horizontal direction and arranged in order in the vertical direction. The information row may be a row in the diagonal direction, and may be arranged in parallel by shifting in parallel. Further, each identification information string may be arranged on a straight line.

  In the gaming machine B2, the changeability determination means includes identification information determination means for determining whether the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information rows, and the lottery information When the lottery information is received by the receiving means, the identification information judging means judges that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information strings, and the dynamic display executing means If the dynamic display of the n-th identification information sequence is executed in the difficult-to-recognize mode, it is determined that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, and the second changing unit The stop display mode of the nth identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed to a predetermined mode when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means. Feature game machine B3

  According to the gaming machine B3, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined by the identification information determining means that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information lines. If the dynamic display execution means performs the dynamic display of the nth identification information string in a difficult-to-recognize mode, the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to the predetermined mode and the change possibility determination means determines Be done. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the stop display mode of the nth identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed by the first change means to a predetermined mode. Therefore, the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information strings is displayed in the order of the first to n-th identification information strings by the stop display execution means. When executed for each identification information string, the first to (n−1) th identification information strings can be recognized even after each identification information string is stopped and displayed, or the (n−1) th identification information string can be recognized Even if it is displayed dynamically, within the period in which the nth identification information string is displayed dynamically in a difficult-to-recognize manner, stop display of the nth identification information sequence in the dynamic display in its difficult-to-recognize manner The aspect can be changed to a predetermined aspect. Therefore, the period during which the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to the predetermined mode is not limited to the period in which all of the first to n-th identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize mode. The period from when one identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to before the (n-1) th identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner can also be changed to a predetermined aspect It can be a period. Therefore, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of identification information be a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased by the part which can extend the changeable period.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the dynamic display of the identification information, the (n-1) th identification information string is dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode, and then the nth identification information string is stopped. The first dynamic display capable of executing change processing for changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the first change unit until the display is performed, and the (n-1) th identification information string The second dynamic display incapable of executing the change process by the first changing unit after the dynamic display in the recognizable mode and the stop display of the nth identification information string is displayed. The dynamic display execution unit executes any one of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display, and the changeability determination unit is configured to execute the first to the second (n Determine whether the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each identification information string up to -1) The identification information determination means includes the same identification information in each of the first to (n−1) th identification information strings when the lottery information is received by the lottery information reception means. If it is determined that the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, it is determined that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. Machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the dynamic display of the identification information includes the dynamic display of the (n-1) th identification information string in a recognizable manner and the stop display of the nth identification information string The first dynamic display capable of executing the changing process of changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the first changing means during the period, and the (n-1) th identification information sequence moving in a recognizable manner And the second dynamic display in which the change processing by the first change means can not be executed between the time when the dynamic display is performed and the n-th identification information string is stopped and displayed, and the first dynamic One of the display and the second dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined by the identification information determining means that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information columns, and the dynamic display is executed. If the first dynamic display is executed by the means, the stop display mode of the identification information is determined to be changeable to the predetermined mode by the change possibility determination means. When the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, the (n-1) th identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, and then the n-th identification information string is displayed. Since the change processing for changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the first change means can be executed before the stop display is performed, the nth identification information is generated before the nth identification information string is displayed by stop. Be certain to change the column identification information. Therefore, the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information columns is stopped and executed. When executed by the means, the stop display mode of the identification information can be reliably changed to the predetermined mode before the n-th identification information string is stopped and displayed. Therefore, only when the stop display mode of the identification information can be reliably changed to the predetermined mode before the nth identification information string is stopped and displayed, the stop display mode of the identification information is determined by the first changing means in the predetermined mode. The first change means changes the stop display mode of the identification information to the stop display mode regardless of whether or not the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed before the n-th identification information row is stopped and displayed. Control burden can also be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, an array information storage means for storing array information indicating an array of identification information in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged in a predetermined order is provided. The stop display execution means corresponds to the one identification information sequence in the arrangement of the identification information indicated by the arrangement information, corresponding to a part of the continuous arrangement in the arrangement of the identification information indicated by the arrangement information. Range information storage means for storing one range information indicating the range of continuous arrangement for each of the first to n-th identification information strings is provided, and dynamic display of identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means A game machine B5 for causing the display means to stop and display each identification information of an identification information sequence corresponding to each range information stored in the range information storage means after being stored.

  According to the gaming machine B5, array information indicating an array of identification information in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged in a predetermined order is stored in the array information storage means, and one identification information string includes array information It corresponds to a part of continuous sequences among the sequences of identification information to be shown. Further, in the arrangement of identification information indicated by the arrangement information, one range information indicating a range of a continuous arrangement corresponding to one identification information sequence is a range information storage means for each of the first to n-th identification information sequences Is stored in the display unit, and after the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the dynamic display execution unit, each identification information of the identification information string corresponding to each range information stored in the range information storage unit is stopped and displayed on the display unit The stop means is displayed by the execution means. Therefore, when identifying each identification information of each of the first to n-th identification information sequences to be displayed in a stopped state, one range information indicating the range of the array corresponding to one identification information sequence is selected from the first to the first Since each identification information string up to n can be stored, for each of the first to n-th identification information strings, information individually indicating each identification information included in the identification information string, and a sequence of each identification information The amount of information stored in the storage means can be reduced compared to the case of storing the information indicating the order.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the stop display execution means includes identification information acquisition means for acquiring the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed on the display means, and the plurality of the acquisition information acquired by the identification information acquisition means. Identification information storage means for storing identification information, and after the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, each identification information stored in the identification information storage means is displayed on the display means The display is stopped, and the first change unit is the dynamic display execution unit among the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit when the changeability determination unit determines that the change is possible. A game machine B6, characterized in that the identification information corresponding to the identification information dynamically displayed is changed, and the stop display mode of the identification information is changed to a predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine B6, when the identification information acquisition means acquires the plurality of pieces of identification information to be stopped and displayed on the display means, the plurality of acquired identification information is stored in the identification information storage means, and the plurality of pieces of stored information The identification information is displayed on the display means by the stop display execution means after the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means. In addition, when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means, among the pieces of identification information stored in the identification information storage means, the identification information corresponding to the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed. And the stop display mode of the identification information is changed to the predetermined mode by the first change means. Therefore, among the plurality of pieces of identification information stored in the identification information storage means stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means, only the identification information not yet stopped and displayed can be changed by the first change means, so the stop display is executed. It is possible to change the identification information without affecting the identification information in the middle and the identification information which has been stopped and displayed. Therefore, the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode while accurately performing the stop display of the identification information.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry Dynamic display execution means for the player to execute the dynamic display of identification information composed of a plurality of identification information in the display means in a manner in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means Stop display execution means for causing the display means to stop and display the plurality of pieces of identification information dynamically displayed after the player has made the aspect in which the player is able to recognize the identification information; In the gaming machine, the ball entering information acquiring means acquiring ball entering information accompanying the ball entering when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, and the ball entering information acquiring means Record ball entry information The ball entry information storage means and the dynamic display execution means execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, and are acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means When the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entering based on the ball entering information, and the lottery information acquiring means, the plurality of identification information by the stop display executing means By changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means if the dynamic display is executed in the recognizable mode by a part of the stop display or the dynamic display execution means The changeable determination unit determines whether the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, and the dynamic display execution unit determines that the changeable determination unit determines that the stop display mode can be changed. The first change means for changing the stop display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed in the difficult mode to the predetermined mode, and the stop display of the identification information whose mode is changed by the first change means is ended, and then And second changing means for controlling so that the predetermined mode is selected as the stop display mode of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. Gaming machine B7 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B7, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information associated with the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and the ball entering information is received by the ball entering information storage means It is memorized. Then, based on the contents of the entering information storage means, the dynamic display of the identification information constituted by the plurality of identification information is performed by the dynamic display instructing means in the display means in a mode in which the player has difficulty in recognizing the identification information. After the mode of the dynamic display being performed and the mode of the dynamic display being performed is made the mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, the plurality of identification information being dynamically displayed is stopped at the display means Stop display is performed by the display execution means. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the ball entry information, and the lottery information is acquired. Furthermore, the dynamic display execution unit is configured such that the stop display execution unit dynamically displays a part of the plurality of identification information in a state in which a part of the plurality of identification information can be recognized by the stop display or the dynamic display execution unit. It is determined by the change possibility determination means whether or not the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode by changing the identification information dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is changed by the first change unit to a predetermined mode. Then, the stop display of the identification information changed to the predetermined mode is ended by the first changing means, and the dynamic display of the identification information thereafter is executed, the stop of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means Since the second changing unit controls the predetermined mode as the display mode, the stop display mode of the identification information executed by the stop display execution unit is continuously or intermittently changed to the predetermined mode.

  Therefore, even after the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information and then the stop display execution means causes some of the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed, or the dynamic display execution means performs the plurality of identification information Dynamic display in a difficult-to-recognize manner within a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic-display execution means, even if The stop display mode of the identification information in can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is not a period during which the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, but only a period in which all of the plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner. The period dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize can also be a period that can be changed to a predetermined manner. Therefore, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of identification information be a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased by the part which can extend the changeable period.

  Note that, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a high speed (scroll display) is exemplified. Further, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a medium speed or a low speed (scroll display) is exemplified.

  Moreover, that the stop display mode is a predetermined mode means that predetermined identification information is included in the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed, and that the predetermined identification information is regularly included. Are illustrated.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry A game machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control related to a game. The control means is a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information accompanying the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means , Lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering the ball, lottery information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means to the peripheral control means, and the ball entering information By acquisition means Ball entering information storage means for storing the obtained ball entering information, and dynamic display instructing means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball entering information storage means, The peripheral control means is a dynamic display execution means for executing on the display means the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, and the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means Aspect setting means for setting an aspect to a predetermined aspect or an aspect different from the predetermined aspect, lottery information reception means for receiving lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means, and the lottery information A mode information storage means for storing mode information indicating a mode of dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information received by the receiving means, and the order by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the mode information storage means In the dynamic display to be executed, the production availability determination means for determining whether or not the continuous performance for performing the continuous dynamic display in the execution order in the predetermined mode can be performed, and the continuous performance by the performance availability determination means A continuous effect control unit configured to control the mode of continuous dynamic display of the execution order to be executed by the dynamic display execution unit, when it is determined that execution is executable; The method further comprises setting prohibiting means for prohibiting the mode of the dynamic display from being set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means when the effect determining means determines that the continuous effect can not be performed. A game machine C1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C1, in the main control means, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information accompanying the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and based on the ball entering information Lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. The display control means instructs the peripheral control means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means. Further, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode information indicating the mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information is used as the mode information storage means A continuous effect that causes continuous dynamic display of the execution order to be executed in a predetermined manner in the dynamic display that is stored and is sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the aspect information storage means It is determined by the production availability determination means whether it is feasible. Here, if it is determined that the continuous effect can be performed by the effect determining means, the continuous effect control means such that the form of the continuous dynamic display of the execution order to be executed by the dynamic display executing means becomes a predetermined aspect respectively When it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed, the setting prohibiting means prohibits the mode setting means from setting the mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode.

  Therefore, when performing the dynamic display in order by the dynamic display executing means, if the continuous effect can be performed, the continuous dynamic display of the execution order can be performed in a predetermined manner, and the continuous effect can be performed. Can be prevented to prevent the dynamic display of a predetermined mode from being performed. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is performed, the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is always performed continuously, so that the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is performed only once. It can prevent. Therefore, when the continuous effect is executed, the dynamic display is always performed twice or more, so the player can be attracted to the dynamic display to be executed and the number of times of the execution, etc. Can increase the value of

  In the gaming machine C1, when the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, when the entering of the gaming medium is detected by the detection means, the gaming machine is detected along with the detection of the entering ball. The execution of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means is configured to be suspended in the order of detection of the entering ball, and the effect determination means determines whether or not the effect is determined based on the content of the mode information storage means. A hold determination unit that determines whether execution of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution unit is suspended, and the lottery determination unit receives the lottery information by the lottery information reception unit; If it is determined that the execution of the display is suspended, it is determined that the continuous effect is executable, and if it is determined that the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended by the suspension determining means, the continuous effect is When it is determined that the line is not possible, and the continuous effect control means determines that the continuous effect can be performed by the effect possibility determination means, the dynamic display in which the execution by the dynamic display execution means is suspended A game machine C2 characterized in that a mode of continuous dynamic display of the execution order is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, when the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, when the entering of the gaming medium is detected by the detecting means, the gaming machine moves in response to the detection of the entering. Execution of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means is suspended in the order of detection of the entering sphere, and the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the mode information storage means It is determined by the suspension determination means whether the execution is suspended. When it is determined that the execution of the dynamic display is suspended by the suspension determining unit when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the continuous effect is determined to be executable by the effect determining unit, and as a result, The continuous effect control means sets the mode of the continuous dynamic display of the execution order in the dynamic display in which the execution by the dynamic display execution means is suspended to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means. On the other hand, when it is determined by the hold determination unit that the execution of the dynamic display is not held, the continuous production effect determination unit determines that the continuous effect can not be performed.

  Therefore, when the execution of the dynamic display is suspended in the gaming machine when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the aspect of the dynamic display in which the execution is suspended, and the new display following the suspension. The mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information whose execution is suspended can be executed in a predetermined mode. On the other hand, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the predetermined mode from being executed unless the execution of the dynamic display is suspended. Therefore, while the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended in the gaming machine and continuous rendering can not be performed, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the predetermined mode from being performed only once. Therefore, even in the gaming machine in which the execution of the dynamic display is suspended, the value of the continuous rendering can be increased.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display is being executed until the execution of the dynamic display is finished until a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display execution means starts the execution. The aspect of the dynamic display is configured to be changeable, and the peripheral control means determines whether the aspect of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means has been set by the aspect setting means. It comprises: a setting completion determination means, and a mode change means for changing the mode of the dynamic display set in the mode different from the predetermined mode by the mode setting means to the predetermined mode, and the effect determination means may The progress display means for determining whether the predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display start means starts dynamic display, and the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means; If it is determined by the means that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the continuous effect is determined to be executable, and if the changeable determination unit determines that the predetermined time has elapsed, the continuous effect is not executed. If it is determined that the continuous effect control means determines that the continuous effect can be performed by the effect determination means and if it is determined that the setting determination means determines that the continuous effect has been set, the dynamic display The mode of the dynamic display being executed by the execution means is changed to the predetermined mode by the mode changing means, and the dynamic display executed after the dynamic display having the mode changed is finished In the case where the mode of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means, and the setting prohibition means determines that the continuous effect can not be performed by the effect determination means, The aspect of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined aspect by the aspect setting means, and the aspect of the dynamic display is prohibited to be changed to the predetermined aspect by the aspect changing means. A gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the dynamic display is executed during the period from the start of execution by the dynamic display execution means to the end of the execution of the dynamic display until a predetermined time elapses. The display mode is configured to be changeable, and the peripheral control means determines whether the dynamic display mode being executed by the dynamic display execution means has been set by the mode setting means by the setting determination means. The aspect of the dynamic display set in the aspect different from the predetermined aspect by the aspect setting means is changed to the predetermined aspect by the aspect changing means. In addition, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if it is determined by the progress determining means that the predetermined time has not passed since the dynamic display was started by the dynamic display executing means, continuous effect is given. If it is determined by the changeable determination means that the predetermined time has elapsed, the changeable determination means determines that the continuous effect can not be performed by the effect determination means. Then, if it is determined that the continuous effect can be performed by the effect determination unit and determined that the setting is determined by the setting determination unit, the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit by the continuous effect control unit The aspect of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display executing means is changed to the predetermined aspect by the aspect changing means, and the aspect of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means is changed to the predetermined aspect by the aspect setting means. It is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed by the effect determining means, the setting prohibiting means sets the aspect of the dynamic display by the aspect setting means to the predetermined aspect, and the dynamic display by the aspect changing means It is prohibited that the aspect of is changed to a predetermined aspect.

  Therefore, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, and before the predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is started. The aspect of the dynamic display being executed and the aspect of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information to be executed next to the dynamic display can be executed in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the dynamic display is not executed by the dynamic display executing unit, or the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing unit. If a predetermined time has elapsed since the target display was started, dynamic display of a predetermined mode can be prevented from being performed. Therefore, while the aspect of the dynamic display being executed and the aspect of the dynamic display to be executed next to the dynamic display can not both be made into the predetermined aspect, continuous presentation can not be performed, It is possible to prevent the execution of the dynamic display of the predetermined aspect from being performed only once. Therefore, even in a gaming machine capable of changing the aspect of the dynamic display being executed, the value of continuous rendering can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the aspect information storage means includes, as the aspect information, first aspect information indicating that the aspect of the dynamic display is the predetermined aspect, or the dynamic display The second mode information indicating that the mode of the second mode is different from the predetermined mode is stored, and the peripheral control means receives the lottery information every time the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means. Means for storing the second mode information in the mode information storage means in association with the reception order of the lottery information as the mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the mode information storage executing means, and the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means Aspect information acquisition means for acquiring, from the aspect information storage means, aspect information corresponding to the dynamic display for which execution is instructed when execution of the dynamic display is instructed, based on the reception order of the lottery information And the effect determining unit determines that the continuous effect can be performed when the second mode information in which the receiving order is continuous is stored in the mode information storing unit, and the mode information storing unit The continuous effect is determined to be not executable when the second mode information in which the reception order is continuous is not stored, and the continuous effect control means determines that the continuous effect can be executed by the effect determination means. When the second aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is changed to the first aspect information, the setting prohibition means may When it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed by the determination unit, the change processing is not executed, and the mode setting unit acquires the first mode information by the mode information acquisition unit. If the second mode information is acquired by the mode information acquisition unit, the mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit is set to the predetermined mode. A game machine C4 characterized in that an aspect of the dynamic display executed by the display execution means is set to an aspect different from the predetermined aspect.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the aspect information storage means includes, as aspect information, first aspect information indicating that the aspect of dynamic display is a predetermined aspect, or the aspect of dynamic display is a predetermined aspect. The second mode information indicating that it is another mode is stored, and in the peripheral control means, every time the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information The second mode information is stored in the mode information storage means by the mode information storage execution means in association with the reception order of the lottery information. And, when the second information in which the reception order is continuous is stored in the information storage means, it is determined by the effect determination means that the continuous effect can be performed, and the second aspect in which the reception order is continuous in the information storage means If the information is not stored, it is determined by the effect determining unit that the effect can not be performed continuously. Here, when it is determined that the continuous effect can be performed by the effectability determination means, the change process of changing the continuous second mode information of the reception order stored in the mode information storage means to the first mode information is continuous effect It is executed by the control means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed by the effect determining unit, the change processing is not performed by the setting prohibiting unit. Further, when execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the mode information corresponding to the dynamic display instructed for the execution is the mode information storage based on the reception order of the lottery information It is acquired by the aspect information acquisition means from the means. Then, when the first mode information is acquired, the mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means, and when the second mode information is acquired, the dynamic mode is dynamically performed. The aspect of the dynamic display executed by the display execution means is set by the aspect setting means to an aspect other than the predetermined aspect.

  Therefore, the mode information newly stored in the mode information storage means can be only the second mode information, and only in the second mode information stored in the mode information storage means, when the continuous effect can be executed. The continuous second mode information of the reception order can be changed to the first mode information. Therefore, when the continuous effect can not be performed, the first mode information is not stored in the mode information storage means in the first place, so that the mode of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means. And the dynamic display execution means does not execute the dynamic display of the predetermined mode. Therefore, when the dynamic display is sequentially performed by the dynamic display execution means, it can be reliably prevented that the execution of the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is performed only once.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry Different from the predetermined aspect or the predetermined aspect of the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of identification information in the display means, and the aspect of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means In the gaming machine provided with mode setting means set to the mode, when the ball is detected by the detection means, ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information accompanying the ball; A lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering a ball based on the ball entering information acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and a dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means Information indicating the aspect of The aspect information storage means, the ball entry information storage means for storing the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, and the dynamic display execution means are based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means The dynamic display of identification information is executed, and when the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, the dynamic display execution unit is sequentially executed based on the contents of the aspect information storage unit. In the dynamic display, it is possible to execute the continuous production by means of the production availability determination means for determining whether it is possible to execute the continuous production in which the continuous dynamic display in the execution order is performed in the predetermined mode. A continuous effect control unit configured to control each of the continuous dynamic display aspects of the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution unit when it is determined that: And setting prohibition means for prohibiting the mode of the dynamic display from being set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means when it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed by the effect determining means. Gaming machine C5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C5, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information associated with the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and the ball entering information is received by the ball entering information storage means It is memorized. Then, based on the contents of the entry information storage means, dynamic display of identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the ball entry information, and the dynamic corresponding to the lottery information Aspect information indicating an aspect of display is stored in the aspect information storage means. Then, based on the contents of the mode information storage means, the continuous effect is executed to execute the continuous dynamic display of the execution order in the predetermined mode among the dynamic displays sequentially executed by the dynamic display executing means Whether it is possible or not is determined by the effect determination means. Here, if it is determined that the continuous effect can be performed by the effect determining means, the continuous effect control means such that the form of the continuous dynamic display of the execution order to be executed by the dynamic display executing means becomes a predetermined aspect respectively When it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed, the setting prohibiting means prohibits the mode setting means from setting the mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode.

  Therefore, when performing the dynamic display in order by the dynamic display executing means, if the continuous effect can be performed, the continuous dynamic display of the execution order can be performed in a predetermined manner, and the continuous effect can be performed. Can be prevented to prevent the dynamic display of a predetermined mode from being performed. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is performed, the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is always performed continuously, so that the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is performed only once. It can prevent. Therefore, when the continuous effect is executed, the dynamic display is always performed twice or more, so the player can be attracted to the dynamic display to be executed and the number of times of the execution, etc. Can increase the value of

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a dynamic display mode, a dynamic display mode, and a dynamic mode sound effect. Gaming machine C6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C6, the predetermined aspect includes at least one of the aspect of the dynamic display effect, the aspect of the display result of the dynamic display, and the aspect of the sound effect of the dynamic display, The player can be made aware that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode, and the player's interest can be attracted.

  In addition, when making the aspect of a dynamic display into a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, you may change a predetermined | prescribed aspect for every dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined aspect is the aspect of the dynamic display, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined aspect is the display of the dynamic display, and the third dynamic In the display, the predetermined aspect is the aspect of the sound effect of the dynamic display. As described above, changing the aspect of the dynamic display can make the dynamic display change more colorful, and thus can attract the player's interest more strongly.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry A game machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control related to a game. The control means is a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information accompanying the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means , Lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering the ball, lottery information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means to the peripheral control means, and the ball entering information By acquisition means Ball entering information storage means for storing the obtained ball entering information, and dynamic display instructing means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball entering information storage means, When the peripheral control means instructs execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the player can dynamically display the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. Dynamic display execution means executed in the display means in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the game, and the aspect in which the player can recognize the identification information the mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means Stop display execution means for causing the display means to stop and display the plurality of identification information being dynamically displayed, and a predetermined stop display mode for the dynamic display to be stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means Mode setting means for setting a mode different from the predetermined mode or the mode thereof, and a stop display mode of the dynamic display in which a mode different from the predetermined mode is set as the stop display mode by the mode setting means When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means and the lottery information receiving means for receiving the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means. If a part of the plurality of identification information is stopped by the stop display execution means or a part of the plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode by the dynamic display execution means, The stop display mode of the dynamic display is set as the predetermined display mode by changing the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the dynamic display execution means. Means for judging whether change is possible to the aspect of and the stop display of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means when it is judged that the change is possible by the change possibility judging means Mode control means for controlling so that the display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means becomes at least the predetermined mode after execution, and the changeability determination means determines that the change is impossible In this case, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode by the mode changing unit. A game machine D1 characterized by including predetermined mode prohibiting means for prohibiting.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the entering of the gaming medium is detected by the detecting means in the main control means, the entering information associated with the entering ball is acquired by the entering information acquiring means, and based on the entered information. Lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. The display control means instructs the peripheral control means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, when execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the player dynamically identifies the identification information by the dynamic display of the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. It is made to be executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in a difficult-to-recognize mode, and then the mode of the dynamic display being executed is made to be a dynamic mode after the player is made to recognize the identification information. The plurality of pieces of identification information being displayed are stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display execution means. The stop display mode of the dynamic display for which the stop display is made is set by the mode setting means to a mode different from the predetermined mode or the predetermined mode, and is set to the mode different from the predetermined mode as the stop display mode The stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to a predetermined mode by the mode changing means. Then, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means is received by the lottery information reception means, the stop display execution means causes part of the plurality of identification information to be stopped or displayed by the dynamic display execution means If a part of a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in a manner difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means is changed By doing this, it is determined by the changeability determination means whether the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined mode. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means after the stop of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means is finished is at least predetermined. It is controlled by the aspect control means to become the aspect of. On the other hand, if it is determined that change is not possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode by the mode change means. Is prohibited by the predetermined mode prohibiting means.

  Therefore, until the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display execution means, and a part of the plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, and then the identification information dynamically displayed in a difficult recognition manner disappears. When the lottery information is received, the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in a manner difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means is changed to the stop display mode of the dynamic display as the predetermined mode It is possible to determine whether the change is possible by the change possibility determination means. Therefore, the time limit for determining whether the display mode of dynamic display can be changed can be as close as possible to the time when all of the plurality of identification information dynamically displayed is stopped and displayed, so that the dynamic display The determination as to whether or not the stop display mode can be changed can be performed until the time when all of the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be determined to be changeable until all of the plurality of identification information displayed dynamically are stopped and displayed, so that control by the mode control means The opportunity to make the stop display mode of the dynamic display be a predetermined mode continuously can be increased.

  In addition, when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means, after the stop of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is ended, the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means Since the stop display mode can be controlled by the mode control means so as to be at least a predetermined mode, for example, the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed to a predetermined mode. Dynamic display in which the display mode is a predetermined mode can be continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change is not possible by the change possibility determination means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting means and the stop display mode of the dynamic display by the mode change means Since it is possible to prohibit the change in the predetermined mode by the predetermined mode prohibiting means, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display executing means from executing the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent that the execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is performed only once, and when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is performed, it is always performed twice Since the above-described process is continuously executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the stop display mode of the dynamic display and the number of times of the dynamic display. Therefore, while being able to raise the value of the presentation which carries out the dynamic display which a stop display mode turns into a predetermined mode continuously, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of a dynamic display continuously a predetermined mode can be increased. .

  Note that, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a high speed (scroll display) is exemplified. Further, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a medium speed or a low speed (scroll display) is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D1, when the execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the dynamic display execution means is connected to a plurality of identification information from the first to the n-th (n Executes the dynamic display of the identification information sequence up to an integer of 2 or more in the display means in units of identification information sequence, and the same identification information is included in each of the first to nth identification information sequences The stop display mode of the dynamic display is the predetermined mode when the stop display is performed, and the stop display execution unit is configured to execute the second display after the dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display execution unit. The identification information sequence from 1 to n is stopped and displayed for each identification information sequence in the order of the 1st to nth identification information sequence, and the changeability determination means receives the lottery information by the lottery information receiving means The dynamic display execution when If the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the step, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is determined to be changeable to the predetermined mode, and the stop display execution means If the second identification information sequence is displayed as a stop display or the second identification information sequence is displayed dynamically by the dynamic display execution means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is When it is determined that the change to the predetermined mode is not possible, and the mode control means is determined to be changeable by the change possibility determination means, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays in the difficult-to-recognize mode. The stop display mode of the second to the n-th identification information sequence is changed to the predetermined mode by the mode changing means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display whose stop display mode is changed is ended after the stop display is ended. Dynamic display execution hand Gaming machine D2, wherein the dynamic display of the stop display mode to be performed is to set the predetermined manner by the mode setting means by.

  According to the gaming machine D2, when the execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the identification from the first to the n-th (n is an integer of 2 or more) in which a plurality of identification information are connected Dynamic display of the information sequence is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in units of identification information sequence, and thereafter, the first to n-th identification information sequences are arranged in the order of the first to n-th identification information sequence The stop display execution means causes the stop display to be performed for each identification information row. Here, when the same identification information is included in each of the first to n-th identification information strings and the stop display is performed, it is assumed that the stop display mode of the dynamic information is a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the second identification information sequence by the dynamic display executing means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is specified. It is determined by the changeability determination means that the change to the aspect of is possible. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means by the mode control means changes the mode The stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the stop display of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode by the means and the stop display mode is changed is ended by the mode setting means It is set to an aspect. On the other hand, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the second identification information string is stopped by the stop display execution unit, or the second identification information string is dynamically recognized by the dynamic display execution unit. If it is displayed, it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can not be changed to a predetermined mode and the change possibility determination unit.

  In order to set the stop display mode of the dynamic display as the predetermined mode, the stop display mode of each of the first to n-th identification information columns needs to include the same identification information. The stop display mode of the second identification information line includes at least one piece of identification information that constitutes the stop display mode of the first identification information line before the second identification information line is stopped and displayed. It must be done. Here, when the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, if the identification information dynamically displayed is changed, the change in the identification information is recognized by the player. Unnatural dynamic display will be executed for the player. However, after the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the stop setting manner of the dynamic display is set to a predetermined manner by the manner setting means, and the dynamic indication is performed by the manner changing means. Since it is possible to prohibit the stop display mode of the display mode from being changed to the predetermined mode by the predetermined mode prohibiting means, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display execution means from executing the dynamic display unnatural to the player. Therefore, the value of the dynamic display which a stop display aspect turns into a predetermined | prescribed aspect can be improved, and the value of the production | presentation which performs the dynamic display which a stop display aspect becomes a predetermined aspect continuously can be raised.

  The arrangement of each of the first to n-th identification information strings stopped and displayed in the display area of the display means may be any arrangement. For example, each identification information row may be arranged in a row in the vertical direction and may be arranged in order horizontally, or each identification information row may be arranged in a row in the horizontal direction and arranged in order in the vertical direction. The information row may be a row in the diagonal direction, and may be arranged in parallel by shifting in parallel. Further, each identification information string may be arranged on a straight line.

  In the gaming machine D2, the changeability determination means includes identification information determination means for determining whether the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each of the first to (n-1) of the identification information rows. When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined that the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each of the first to (n-1) of the identification information sequences by the identification information determining means If the nth identification information string is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the dynamic display execution unit, it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed to the predetermined mode. The dynamic display is performed if the nth identification information sequence is displayed as a stop indication by the stop display execution means or the nth identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner by the dynamic display execution means. Stop display mode of display Note that it is determined that the predetermined mode can not be changed, and the mode control means is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the dynamic display execution means when the change possibility determination means determines that the change is possible. The dynamic display after changing the stop display mode of the n-th identification information row to the predetermined mode by the mode changing means and stopping the dynamic display whose stop display mode is changed A game machine D3 characterized in that a stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the execution means is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each of the first to (n-1) identification information columns, the identification information is determined If it is determined by the means and the nth identification information string is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means in a difficult-to-recognize manner, the stop display manner of the dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined manner and the changeability determination means It is determined by Here, if it is determined that the change is possible, the stop control mode of the nth identification information string dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means by the mode control means is specified by the mode change means. The stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the stop display of the dynamic display is changed to the mode and the stop display mode is changed is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means Ru. On the other hand, if the nth identification information string is displayed by the stop display execution means in the stop display or the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the nth identification information string in a recognizable manner, the stop display mode of the dynamic display It is determined by the changeability determining means that the change to the predetermined mode is impossible.

  In order to set the stop display mode of the dynamic display as the predetermined mode, the stop display mode of each of the first to n-th identification information columns needs to include the same identification information. When the same identification information is included in the stop display modes of each identification information sequence up to the (n-1) th, only the stop display mode of the nth identification information sequence may be changed. According to the gaming machine D3, even after the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed while being dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner. Since the determination as to whether or not the stop display mode of the display can be changed can be made by the change possibility determination means, it is possible to further increase the chances of being determined as changeable. In addition, after the nth identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable mode, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, and the dynamic display is performed by the mode changing unit. Since it is possible to prohibit the stop display mode of the vehicle from being changed to the predetermined mode by the predetermined mode prohibiting means, it is possible to prevent dynamic display unnatural to the player from being executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the stop display mode Can improve the value of the dynamic display of the predetermined aspect. Therefore, while being able to raise the value of the presentation which carries out the dynamic display which a stop display mode turns into a predetermined mode continuously, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of a dynamic display continuously a predetermined mode can be increased. .

  In the gaming machine D2 or D3, in the dynamic display of the identification information, the n-th identification information string is dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the n-th identification information string is displayed. A first dynamic display capable of executing a change process of changing the stop display mode of the nth identification information sequence to the predetermined mode by the mode changing unit until the identification information sequence of the is stopped and displayed; After the nth identification information string is dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode, a second dynamic display which can not execute the change process by the mode changing means is provided, and the dynamic display is provided. The execution means executes any one of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display, and the changeability determination means executes the first dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. And the nth identification information string in the first dynamic display is Note: A progress determining means for determining whether the predetermined time has passed since the dynamic display in a recognizable manner, and the stop display mode of each of the first to (n-1) identification information sequences are the same. When the lottery information is received by the identification information judging means for judging whether the identification information exists and the lottery information receiving means, it is judged whether the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means Dynamic display determination means, and when the dynamic display determination means determines that the first dynamic display is being executed, the identification information determination means If it is determined that the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each identification information string up to 1), and it is determined that the predetermined time has not passed by the progress determining means, the stop display of the dynamic display An aspect to the above-mentioned predetermined aspect If it is determined that the additional display is possible, and if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed by the progress determining means, it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can not be changed to the predetermined mode. A gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the dynamic display of the identification information includes the n-th identification information within a period from the time when the n-th identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to when the predetermined time passes. A first dynamic display capable of executing change processing for changing the stop display mode of the nth identification information column to a predetermined mode by the mode changing means until the column is stopped and displayed, and the nth identification information column And the second dynamic display incapable of executing change processing by the mode change unit after the dynamic display is performed in a recognizable manner, and the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are provided. One of the above is executed by the dynamic display execution means. When it is determined by the dynamic display determination unit that the first dynamic display is being executed, the identification information determination unit is the same as the stop display mode of each of the first to (n−1) th identification information sequences It is determined by the identification information determination unit that there is identification information of the above, and the predetermined time has not elapsed since the progress determination unit dynamically displays the nth identification information string in the first dynamic display in a recognizable manner If it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changeable to the predetermined mode, it is determined by the change possibility determination unit. On the other hand, when it is determined by the dynamic display determination means that the first dynamic display is being executed, the progress determination means moves the nth identification information string in the first dynamic display in a recognizable manner If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed since the intentional display, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is determined by the change possibility determination unit as being not changeable to the predetermined mode. Therefore, the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display in which the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each of the first to (n-1) identification information columns is executed If it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed before the predetermined time elapses even after the nth identification information string is dynamically displayed in a manner recognizable by the player Can be performed by the change possibility determination means. Therefore, since the opportunity judged to be changeable can be further increased, the opportunity to make the stop display mode of the dynamic display into the predetermined mode continuously can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, when the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution unit, when the entering of the gaming medium is detected by the detection unit, the game is entered. The execution of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display executing means is suspended in the order of detection of the entering ball in accordance with the detection of the sphere, and the changeability determination means determines the dynamic display execution. Holding determination means for determining whether execution of the dynamic display performed by the means is held, and when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, execution of the dynamic display by the hold determination means Is determined to be suspended, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is determined to be changeable to the predetermined mode, and it is determined that the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended by the hold determination unit. And If it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can not be changed to the predetermined mode, and the mode control means determines that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means, the dynamic display execution is performed It is characterized in that, in the dynamic display pending execution by the means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display in continuous execution order is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means. Gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, when the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, when the entering of the gaming medium is detected by the detecting means, the gaming machine moves in response to the detection of the entering. The execution of the dynamic display performed by the target display execution means is configured to be suspended in the order of detection of entering balls. When it is determined that the execution of the dynamic display is suspended by the suspension determination means when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the changeable mode. It is determined by the availability determination means. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the mode control means causes the stop display mode of the continuous dynamic display of the execution order to be displayed in the dynamic display pending execution by the dynamic display execution means as the mode setting means Are set to predetermined modes respectively. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended by the suspension determination unit when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is not changed to a predetermined mode. It is determined by the possible / modifiable determination means.

  Therefore, when the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode setting means sets the stop display mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode and the mode change It is possible to prohibit the stop display mode of the dynamic display from being changed to the predetermined mode by the means by the predetermined mode prohibiting means. Accordingly, while the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended in the gaming machine, the stop display can not be performed continuously by the dynamic display execution means in which the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode can not be continuously executed. It is possible to prevent the dynamic display whose aspect is the predetermined aspect from being executed by the dynamic display execution means. Therefore, it can be prevented that the execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is performed only once, and the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is always performed twice Since the above-described process is continuously executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the stop display mode of the dynamic display and the number of times of the dynamic display. In addition, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the execution of the dynamic display is suspended in the gaming machine, the dynamic display in which the execution is suspended and the newly executed following the suspension. In the dynamic display including the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information, the stop display mode of the continuous dynamic display of the execution order can be set to a predetermined mode. Therefore, the opportunity to make the stop display mode of a dynamic display into a predetermined | prescribed mode continuously can be increased. Therefore, even in the gaming machine in which the execution of the dynamic display is suspended, the value of the effect of continuously executing the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode can be enhanced, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display The opportunity to make it a predetermined aspect continuously can be increased.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry Dynamic display execution means for the player to execute the dynamic display of identification information composed of a plurality of identification information in the display means in a manner in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means Stop display execution means for causing the display means to stop and display the plurality of identification information being dynamically displayed after the player has made the aspect in which the dynamic display being executed allows the identification information to be recognized And the ball entry information acquiring unit for acquiring ball entry information accompanying the ball when the ball is detected by the detection unit, and the ball acquisition information acquiring unit for acquiring the ball entry information. Entered ball information The ball entry information storage means to store and the dynamic display execution means execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, and are acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means When the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entering based on the entered ball information, and the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means, the plurality of identifications by the stop display execution means If the part of the information is displayed in a stop display or the part of the plurality of identification information is displayed dynamically by the dynamic display execution means, the aspect in which the dynamic display execution means makes the recognition difficult Changeable determination means for determining whether or not the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed to the predetermined mode by changing the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in The dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after termination of the stop display of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution unit when it is determined that the changeability is determined by the changeability determination unit The mode display means for controlling the stop display mode of at least the predetermined mode and the stop display mode for the dynamic display by the mode setting means when it is determined that the change is not possible by the change possibility determination means Is set to the predetermined aspect, and the aspect changing means is provided with predetermined aspect prohibition means for prohibiting the stop display aspect of the dynamic display from being changed to the predetermined aspect. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information associated with the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and the ball entering information is received by the ball entering information storage means It is memorized. Then, based on the contents of the entering information storage means, the dynamic display of the identification information constituted by the plurality of identification information is performed by the dynamic display instructing means in the display means in a mode in which the player has difficulty in recognizing the identification information. After the mode of the dynamic display being performed and the mode of the dynamic display being performed is made the mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, the plurality of identification information being dynamically displayed is stopped at the display means Stop display is performed by the display execution means. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the ball entry information, and the lottery information is acquired. Furthermore, the dynamic display execution unit is configured such that the stop display execution unit dynamically displays a part of the plurality of identification information in a state in which a part of the plurality of identification information can be recognized by the stop display or the dynamic display execution unit. Determines whether the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined mode by changing the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized Be done. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means after the stop of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means is finished is at least predetermined. It is controlled by the aspect control means to become the aspect of. On the other hand, if it is determined that change is not possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode by the mode change means. Is prohibited by the predetermined mode prohibiting means.

  Therefore, until the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display execution means, and a part of the plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, and then the identification information dynamically displayed in a difficult recognition manner disappears. When the lottery information is received, the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in a manner difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means is changed to the stop display mode of the dynamic display as the predetermined mode It is possible to determine whether the change is possible by the change possibility determination means. Therefore, the time limit for determining whether the display mode of dynamic display can be changed can be as close as possible to the time when all of the plurality of identification information dynamically displayed is stopped and displayed, so that the dynamic display The determination as to whether or not the stop display mode can be changed can be performed until the time when all of the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be determined to be changeable until all of the plurality of identification information displayed dynamically are stopped and displayed, so that control by the mode control means The opportunity to make the stop display mode of the dynamic display be a predetermined mode continuously can be increased.

  In addition, when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means, after the stop of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is ended, the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means Since the stop display mode can be controlled by the mode control means so as to be at least a predetermined mode, for example, the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed to a predetermined mode. Dynamic display in which the display mode is a predetermined mode can be continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change is not possible by the change possibility determination means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting means and the stop display mode of the dynamic display by the mode change means Since it is possible to prohibit the change in the predetermined mode by the predetermined mode prohibiting means, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display executing means from executing the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent that the execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is performed only once, and when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is performed, it is always performed twice Since the above-described process is continuously executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the stop display mode of the dynamic display and the number of times of the dynamic display. Therefore, while being able to raise the value of the presentation which carries out the dynamic display which a stop display mode turns into a predetermined mode continuously, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of a dynamic display continuously a predetermined mode can be increased. .

  Note that, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a high speed (scroll display) is exemplified. Further, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a medium speed or a low speed (scroll display) is exemplified.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry A game machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control related to a game. The control means is a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information accompanying the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means , Lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering the ball, lottery information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means to the peripheral control means, and the ball entering information By acquisition means Ball entering information storage means for storing the obtained ball entering information, and dynamic display instructing means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball entering information storage means, The peripheral control means is a dynamic display execution means for executing on the display means the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, and the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means A mode setting means for setting the stop display mode to a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode, a lottery information receiving means for receiving lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means, and According to the content of the aspect information storage means for storing the aspect information indicating the stop display aspect of the dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information received by the lottery information receiving means, the dynamic display is performed based on the contents of the aspect information storage means A first mode control means for controlling so that a stop display mode of a continuous series of dynamic display in the execution order becomes the predetermined mode among the dynamic display sequentially executed by the means, and the lottery information reception When the lottery information is received by the means, after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control unit is executed, the stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit is An executability judging means for judging whether the executability can be performed in a predetermined mode and the series of dynamic display controlled by the first mode control means when the executability judging means judges that the executability is possible A second mode control means for controlling the stop display mode of the dynamic display to be executed by the dynamic display execution means after being played back to the predetermined mode Machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information accompanying the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and based on the ball entering information Lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. The display control means instructs the peripheral control means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display to be executed is predetermined. The aspect setting means sets the aspect other than the aspect of the aspect or the predetermined aspect thereof. Then, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode information indicating the stop display mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information is the mode information storage In the dynamic display which is stored in the means and is sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the aspect information storage means, the stop display modes of the continuous series of dynamic display in the execution order are respectively predetermined It is controlled by the first aspect control means to become the aspect of In addition, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed, the stop display aspect is performed for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means It is determined by the executability judging means whether or not it can be executed in a predetermined manner. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed is a predetermined aspect It is controlled by the second mode control means so that Therefore, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution unit, the number of times of execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is increased. it can. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of execution, the sense of expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the gaming state advantageous to the player can be improved, and the sense of expectation is continued to the player longer. Can be held. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, a game value determination to determine whether the lottery result indicated by the received lottery information is to impart a predetermined game value to the player Means, the executability judging means being controlled by the first aspect control means when the game value judging means judges that the predetermined game value is to be given to the player It is determined whether or not the stop display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode with respect to the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the dynamic display is executed.

  According to the gaming machine E2, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the gaming value judging means that the lottery result indicated by the received lottery information is to give the predetermined gaming value to the player. If determined, it is possible to execute the stop display mode in a predetermined mode for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed It is determined by the availability determination means. Therefore, when a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, it is possible to increase the number of times of dynamic display in which the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means becomes the predetermined mode. Therefore, the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player is improved, and further, after the sense of expectation is continuously held by the player for a longer time, the predetermined game is performed. The value can be given to the player. Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely giving the predetermined game value to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display executing means, the game console performs the dynamic display which is continuously executed. Is configured to be limited to a predetermined number or less, and the executability judging means controls the display mode of stopping the dynamic display to be the predetermined mode by the second mode control means. The lottery information includes a total number determination unit that determines whether the total number of dynamic displays for which the predetermined mode is the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means exceeds the predetermined number, and the lottery information When the lottery information is received by the receiving means, if it is determined that the total number determining means does not exceed the predetermined number, the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed. Gaming machine E3, characterized in that the stop display mode for dynamic display that is performed is to determine executable by the predetermined manner by the dynamic display execution means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means, the total number of the dynamic display executed in succession is predetermined. It is configured to be limited to a number or less, and is executed continuously by the dynamic display execution means by controlling the stop display aspect of the dynamic display to be a predetermined aspect by the second aspect control means It is determined by the total number determination means whether the total number of dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode exceeds the predetermined number. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if it is determined that the total number determining means does not exceed the predetermined number, a series of dynamic display controlled by the first mode control means is executed. With regard to the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, it is determined by the executability judging means that the stop display mode is executable in a predetermined mode. Therefore, even if the second mode control means controls the stop display mode of the dynamic display to be a predetermined mode, the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means becomes a predetermined mode. The control by the second mode control means can be executed only when the total number of displays does not exceed the predetermined number. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress that the total number of dynamic display in which the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means becomes a predetermined mode exceeds the predetermined number, the total number of the dynamic display exceeds the predetermined number It is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from becoming unstable.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display executing means, the game console performs the dynamic display which is continuously executed. The executability judging means is configured to limit the total number of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means and the second aspect control means to the predetermined number. It has a remaining number counting means for counting the remaining number of dynamic display until reaching, and when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the remaining number of dynamic display counted by the remaining number counting means is 1 If it is the above, the stop display mode is executed in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first mode control unit is executed. Possible and judgment The second aspect control means is configured to execute the dynamic processing after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed when the execution possibility determination means determines that the execution is possible. Among the dynamic display executed by the display execution means, the display mode for stopping the dynamic display equal to or less than the remaining number counted by the remaining number counting means is controlled to be the predetermined mode. Game machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means, the total number of the dynamic display executed continuously is predetermined. It is configured to be limited to a number or less, and the remaining number of dynamic displays is counted until the total number of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means and the second aspect control means reaches a predetermined number. It is counted by means. And, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the remaining number of the dynamic display counted by the remaining number counting means is one or more, a series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means It is determined by the executability judging unit that the stop display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution unit after the above is executed. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, counting by the remaining number counting means among the dynamic displays executed by the dynamic display executing means after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed It is controlled by the second mode control means so that the stop display mode of the dynamic display equal to or less than the remaining number to be set becomes the predetermined mode. Therefore, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, whether the execution is possible can be determined by the executability judging means by referring to the remaining number counted by the remaining number counting means. Therefore, the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display executing means becomes a predetermined mode each time the lottery information receiving means receives the lottery information in order to determine whether the execution is possible by the executability determining means. Since there is no need to calculate the total number of dynamic displays, the control burden can be reduced. Further, even in the case where the stop display mode of the dynamic display is controlled by the second mode control means, it is not necessary to calculate the number of controllable dynamic displays, so the control load can be further reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display executing means until the predetermined time has elapsed until the execution of the dynamic display is ended. The stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed is configured to be changeable, and the peripheral control unit is configured to execute the dynamic display after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first mode control unit is executed. The progress display means for determining whether the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the dynamic display performed by the display execution means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means In the predetermined mode, there are set display determination means for determining whether or not the mode setting means has been set, and the display mode for stopping the dynamic display set to a mode different from the predetermined mode by the mode setting means. Change form When lottery information is received by the changing means and the lottery information receiving means, the progress determining means determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed, and the set determination means determines that the setting has been made. And third mode control means for changing the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means to the predetermined mode by the mode change means. Machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the dynamic display is executed during the period from the start of execution by the dynamic display execution means to the end of the execution of the dynamic display until a predetermined time passes. The stop display mode of the display is configured to be changeable, and a series of dynamic display controlled by the first mode control unit is executed, and then the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit is started to be executed. It is determined by the progress determining means whether a predetermined time has elapsed since then. In addition, it is determined by the setting completion determination means whether or not the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is already set by the mode setting means, and an aspect different from the predetermined aspect by the mode setting means The stop display mode of the dynamic display set to is changed by the mode changing means to a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed by the progress determining means, and it is determined that the setting completion determining means has been set, the third mode control By the means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed into the predetermined mode by the mode change means. Therefore, even if a series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed, and then the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is started next to the series of dynamic display Within the period from the start of execution to the passage of a predetermined time, the third mode control means can set the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means to the predetermined mode. Therefore, when dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means, there is an opportunity to increase the number of times of execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode becomes the predetermined mode. It can be increased. Therefore, together with the opportunity to improve the player's sense of expectation, it is possible to increase the chance that the sense of expectation can be kept longer for the player.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E5, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the series of dynamic to be controlled by the first aspect control means based on the contents of the aspect information storage means Dynamic display determination means for determining whether there is a plurality of displays, and when it is determined by the dynamic display determination means that there is a plurality of a series of dynamic displays to be controlled, the first aspect control means first The execution order of the dynamic display execution means is later than the series of dynamic display controlled by the first mode control means, and the dynamic display execution is performed from the series of dynamic display finally controlled by the first aspect control means A game machine E6 comprising: fourth mode control means for controlling the stop display mode of each dynamic display in which the execution order of the means is earlier to be the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine E6, when lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is dynamic if there is a series of dynamic displays to be controlled by the first aspect control means based on the contents of the aspect information storage means As determined by the display determination means, the execution order of the dynamic display execution means is later than the series of dynamic displays initially controlled by the first aspect control means, and is finally controlled by the first aspect control means The stop display mode of each dynamic display in which the execution order of the dynamic display execution means precedes the series of dynamic displays is controlled by the fourth mode control means so as to be a predetermined mode. Therefore, when there are a plurality of series of dynamic displays to be controlled by the first aspect control means, the plurality of series of dynamic displays are executed by the dynamic display execution means as one series of dynamic displays. Can. Therefore, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means, the number of executions of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is further increased. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be further improved by increasing the number of times of execution, and the sense of expectation can be kept longer for the player. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information in the display means, and a stop display mode of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means in a predetermined mode or the predetermined mode Is a game machine provided with a mode setting means for setting in another mode, wherein when the ball is detected by the detection means, ball entry information acquiring means for acquiring ball entry information accompanying the ball. And ball entry information storage means for storing the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, and the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means To carry out the above Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball based on the entering information acquired by the acquiring means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means Of the mode information storage means for storing the mode information, and a series of continuous motions of the execution order in the dynamic display sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the mode information storage means When the lottery information is acquired by the first mode control means for controlling the stop display mode of the target display to be the predetermined mode and the lottery information acquiring means, the first aspect control means controls the first aspect control means An executability judging means for judging whether the stop display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means after the series of the dynamic display is executed; Dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control unit is executed when it is determined by the execution availability determination unit that the execution is possible And a second mode control means for controlling the stop display mode of the second mode to be the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine E7, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information associated with the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and the ball entering information is received by the ball entering information storage means It is memorized. Then, based on the contents of the entry information storage means, the dynamic display execution means causes the dynamic display execution means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display to be executed is a predetermined mode or The mode setting means sets the mode other than the predetermined mode. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the ball entry information, and the dynamic corresponding to the lottery information The mode information indicating the stop display mode of the display is stored in the mode information storage means. Then, based on the contents of the mode information storage means, the stop display modes of the continuous series of dynamic display in the execution order among the dynamic display executed in order by the dynamic display execution means are respectively predetermined modes and It is controlled by the first aspect control means to become Furthermore, when lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a stop display aspect is performed for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed. It is determined by the executability judging means whether or not it can be executed in a predetermined manner. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed is a predetermined aspect It is controlled by the second mode control means so that Therefore, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution unit, the number of times of execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is increased. it can. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of execution, the sense of expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the gaming state advantageous to the player can be improved, and the sense of expectation is continued to the player longer. Can be held. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a mode of effect of stop display, a mode of display result of stop display, and a mode of sound effect of stop display. A game machine E8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E8, at least one of the mode of the effect of the stop display, the mode of the display result of the stop display, and the mode of the sound effect of the stop display is included in the predetermined mode, so dynamic display The player can be made to recognize that the stop display mode of is set to the predetermined mode, and the player's interest can be attracted.

  In addition, when making the stop display aspect of dynamic display into a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, you may change the content of the predetermined aspect for every dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the mode of the effect of the stop display, in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the mode of the display result of the stop display, and in the third dynamic display The predetermined mode is the mode of the sound effect of the stop display. As described above, if the content of the predetermined mode is changed for each dynamic display, the change of the stop display becomes colorful, so that the player's interest can be attracted more strongly.

  A gaming machine F1 characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine F3 characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64 first ball entry (ball entry)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control unit (main control means)
117 Production control device (peripheral control means)
203a Holding ball storage area (ball entry information storage means)
208a First ball entry switch (detection means)
273a Stop symbol instruction storage table memory (mode information storage means)
S306 Dynamic Display Indication Means S654 Entry Information Acquisition Means S655 Lottery Information Acquisition Means S656 Lottery Information Transmission Means S1104 Dynamic Display Execution Means S1411 Aspect Setting Means S1401 Lottery Information Reception Means S1507 Game Value Determination Means S1513 First Aspect Control Means S1531, S1571 Execution possibility determination means S1537, S1538, S1574, S1575 Progress determination means S1540 Third aspect control means S1542, S1543, S1578, S1579 Second aspect control means S2301 Setting completion determination means S2302 to S2317 Aspect change means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, pachinko machines have been known that improve the interest of a game by performing variable effects (dynamic display) or the like on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. The fluctuation effect (dynamic display) is an effect started by the game ball entering the ball entry opening (starting opening) (winning), for example, 3 provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device A total of nine symbols etc. are displayed on a square of × 3. For example, when the gaming ball wins the start opening, the scroll of symbols etc. is started, and then the symbols etc. being scrolled are sequentially stopped to stop and display a total of nine symbols etc. (stop symbols). In such a variable presentation, a presentation is made to suggest in advance that the player is to shift to a gaming state (for example, winning) advantageous to the player, and a device is made to give the player a sense of expectation.

In this type of pachinko machine, for example, as an effect that suggests transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, display of the chance eyes etc. is not only performed once but also continuously for a plurality of times. Have been configured to perform the same effect or to perform the same effect or different effects continuously by displaying or sound effects multiple times (hereinafter referred to as "continuous effect"), expecting a sense of expectation for an advantageous gaming state The interest of the game is further improved by, for example, letting the player keep it. The continuous presentation, for example, when a game ball has won the start hole, variation effect to be started if a plurality of hold, Ru performed for a plurality of fluctuation effect being its pending.

Japanese Utility Model Application Publication No. 7-24383

  However, even if the continuous effect is started, if the display frequency such as the chance eye is small, the player can not continue to have a sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state, and the player's sense of expectation is heightened. In addition, there is a problem that the player is given an impression that the game is monotonous.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the number of display times such as chance eyes in continuous rendering .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 detects display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry port where the game ball can enter, and ball entry of the game ball into the ball entry port detection means for, which was a dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of a plurality of the identification information on the display means if the input spheres game ball is detected by the detection means, before If the incoming ball game ball is detected by the serial detection means, and ball entrance information acquisition means for acquiring input sphere information accompanying the ball entrance, entrance for storing ball entrance information acquired by the ball entrance information acquisition means Sphere information storage means, and dynamic display time determination means for determining the dynamic display time when the dynamic display of the identification information based on the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means is started; When new entry information is acquired by the entry information acquisition means, The final stop display mode in the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means in a mode in which the combination of predetermined identification information is finally stopped and displayed within the determined dynamic display time. Changeability determination means for determining whether changeable is possible, and an aspect of final stop display in dynamic display already executed by the dynamic display execution means when it is determined that changeable is possible by the changeability determination means The first change means for changing the combination of the predetermined identification information to a mode in which the combination of the predetermined identification information is finally displayed in a stopped state, and the new entering information based on the changeability determination means determining that changeable. The predetermined identification information is an aspect of a final stop display in the dynamic display of the identification information based on the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage unit before the acquisition of Stop display setting means for setting the combination to be finally stopped and displayed, storage means for storing the combination of the predetermined identification information changed by the first change means, and storage in the storage means And updating means for updating the combination of the predetermined identification information .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to increase the number of display times of the combination of predetermined identification information .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of various counters, a holding ball storage area, and a holding ball execution area. (A) is a schematic diagram for demonstrating an example of the pattern of a normal fluctuation production, and its production content, (b) is for explaining an example of the chance eye normal fluctuation, and its production content FIG. It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of the chance eye super fluctuation | variation AD, and its presentation content. It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of chance eye | piece special fluctuation AF, and its presentation content. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen scrolls horizontally, and (b) shows an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen vertically scrolls. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a loss chance eye, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a reach chance eye. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to upper symbol row Z1, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to middle symbol row Z2, (c) ) Is a schematic view showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower row design row Z3. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the contents of the maximum changeable period memory of the effect control device, and (b) is a schematic view showing an outline of the maximum changeable period of out-of-plane variation, (C) is a schematic view showing an outline of the maximum changeable period of normal reach fluctuation. It is the schematic which shows an example of the content of RAM of a production control apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the relationship between the setting value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol (C) is a schematic view showing an example of a winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device and a set value corresponding to the lottery result indicated by the command. (A) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of a stop symbol pattern table, (b) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol pattern table which is being updated. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the content of display design pattern memory, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus corresponding to the content of display design pattern memory . It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows change processing of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the holding ball storage area order sending process of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows start winning processing of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing of a main control unit and a payout control unit. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing of a payment control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payment control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows start processing of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the audio | voice lamp presentation process of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows change production processing of a production control device. It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol pattern table update processing of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol pattern generation area update process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows command reception interruption processing of a production control device. It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol indication storage table updating processing of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the definite variation big hit winning process of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the definite variation time continuation production start process of a production control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol change processing of a production control device. It is a flow chart which shows a usual big hit winning process of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal time continuous rendering start process of a production control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows out-of-front and back out-of-front reach winning processing of the effect control device. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing of a production control device. It is a flow chart which shows false change setting processing of a production control device. It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol setting processing of a production control device. (A) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory before replacing the 3rd symbol (before change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content, (b), It is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display pattern pattern memory after replacing 3 symbols (after a change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content. (A) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory before replacing the 3rd symbol (before change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content, (b), It is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display pattern pattern memory after replacing 3 symbols (after a change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content. (A) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “permanent change jackpot” within a period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed (B) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command in which the lottery result is "probable hit" is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed. (A) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” within a period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed (B) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command in which the lottery result is “normally big hit” is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed. It is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “reach before and after reach” regardless of whether or not it is a changeable period. In (a), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance direction production is "probable variation jackpot", the pattern of the last variation production becomes "super reach variation (40 seconds)", and as a result, the display schedule is stopped It is a table which shows an example of the contents of change when the contents of a symbol are changed, and (b) is the pattern of the last change production when the final lottery result of a continuous chance eye direction production is "usually a big hit" It becomes "super reach change (40 seconds)", and as a result, it is a table showing an example of the contents of change when the contents of the stop design to be displayed are changed. In (a), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye direction production is “probable change jackpot”, the pattern of the last change direction effect becomes “special reach change (60 seconds)”, and as a result, the display schedule is stopped It is a table which shows an example of the contents of change when the contents of a symbol are changed, and (b) is the pattern of the last change production when the final lottery result of a continuous chance eye direction production is "usually a big hit" It becomes "special reach change (60 seconds)", and as a result, it is a table showing an example of the contents of change when the contents of the stop design to be displayed are changed. It is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable change jackpot” when the chance is displayed twice in a row. It is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable jackpot” when the chance is displayed three times in a row. (A) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” when a chance is displayed twice in a row, (B) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” when a chance is displayed three times in a row.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the content of the effect at the time of the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot.

  Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time. A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor (not shown), a push button stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a change in When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) changes corresponding to the amount of operation, and the operation is performed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the handle 51, whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Be Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) and the strike stop switch (not shown) are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In addition, in FIG. 2, in order to make the reference numerals understandable, a part such as a nail and a metal fitting is removed and illustrated. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Falling area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112 a to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A first symbol display device 37 mainly for displaying a first symbol is disposed on the upper right side upper portion (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area. The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b which are light emitting means.

  The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in a lighting state, and the gaming state as to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being changed, time is short or normal. Whether or not it is fluctuating is indicated by the lighting state. For example, the first symbol corresponding to the "probable variation big hit" described later, the first symbol corresponding to the "normal big hit", the first symbol corresponding to the "disengagement" is shown by the lighting state, or the number of holding balls is lit It is indicated by the state. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, and it may suggest the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LED by the combination of the luminescent color it can. Also, the 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as a lottery result of the jackpot, there are provided three lottery results of the "probable variation jackpot" of the first symbol, the "normal jackpot" of the first symbol, and the "disengagement" of the first symbol. . And, when winning a prize in the first ball entry 64, whether it is the "probable big hit" of the first symbol, the "normal hit" of the first symbol, or the "disengagement" of the first symbol I will be drawn.

  And, as a result of the lottery, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "probable variation jackpot" of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is increased, and it becomes the state of the game which is easy to shift to the special gaming state (big hit), Furthermore, the probability of hitting the second symbol, which will be described later, increases, and the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 2) opens for a predetermined time, and the ball enters the first entrance 64. It becomes the state of the game which is easy to ball. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as positive change (positive change state).

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “ordinary jackpot” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is in the normal state, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, the first ball entry opening The electric combination attached to the door 64 is in the open state for a predetermined time, and the ball is in a gaming state where it is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as a short time (short state), and a state other than a short change (probable state) and a short time (short state) is referred to as a normal state (normal state).

  In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol during a definite change or during a short time, the time for opening the electric role item attached to the first ball entrance 64, 1 It is also possible to change the number of times the motorized jack opens in each round.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “detachment” of the first symbol, the state of the game which is neither definite nor time-saving (the state that neither the jackpot probability of the first symbol nor the win probability of the second symbol is increased) Become.

  In the first embodiment of the present invention, the “probable variation jackpot” of the first symbol is the jackpot after the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, until the jackpot of the first symbol (a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot) is reached next The interval is the jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot) in which the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to the high probability state (the jackpot probability is higher than usual) and the jackpot probability of the second symbol also increases.

  In addition, the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol is that the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to the low probability state (the jackpot probability is normal) after the jackpot of which the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the predetermined fluctuation It is a big hit (16R normal big hit) in which only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased by the number of times (for example, 100 change times).

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it becomes "normal big hit" of the first symbol, it is configured to increase the probability of hitting the second symbol during a predetermined number of variations (for example, the number of variations of 100). However, instead, it may be configured to continue to increase the probability of hitting the second symbol until the lottery result of the jackpot of the next first symbol is determined.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of rounds is 16 when the first symbol "probable variation jackpot" or the first symbol "normal jackpot" is selected, but the number of rounds is arbitrary (eg, for example) 8 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.). In addition, the number of rounds may be different between the “probable variation jackpot” of the first symbol and the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol. For example, the maximum round number may be 16 rounds in the case of the "probable variation jackpot" of the first symbol, and the maximum round number may be 8 rounds in the case of the "normal jackpot" of the first symbol.

  Also, in the present embodiment, when it becomes the "probable variation jackpot" of the first symbol, the hit probability of the second symbol is increased until the lottery result of the jackpot of the next first symbol is determined. Although it comprises, instead, it may constitute so that the hit probability of the 2nd pattern may be raised only for a predetermined number of times of change (for example, 100 times of change).

  In the following description, the "probable jackpot" of the first symbol is simply described as "probability jackpot", and the "normal jackpot" of the first symbol is simply described as "usually jackpot", the first The "disengagement" of the symbol is simply described as "disengagement".

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 has a third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "LCD") that variably displays the third symbol by using a prize winning on the first entrance 64 as a trigger. The second symbol display portion 83, which is composed of an LED for fluctuating display of the second symbol with the passage of the ball of the second entry ball opening 67 (through gate) as a trigger, passes the second entry hole 67 (through gate) A second symbol holding lamp 84 is provided to indicate the number of holding balls of the held ball.

  The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are controlled by the effect control device 117 described later, and for example, three symbol rows of left, middle and right are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically or horizontally for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See Figure 9). Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and the variable display unit 80 is provided with a center frame so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. 86 are provided. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 and the display of the first symbol indicating the jackpot result of the jackpot, whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol. A decorative display (variation effect) corresponding to the display of the symbol display device 37 is performed in the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the LCD.

  In addition, after the lottery of the jackpot is started, in the first symbol display device 37, the stop symbol (the first symbol indicating the probability variation jackpot, the first symbol indicating the normal jackpot, the first symbol indicating the detachment) If the ball wins (enters the first ball entry 64) until the is displayed, the number of winnings (ball entering) is suspended up to four times, and the number of times of suspension is the first symbol display device Not only is indicated by 37, but it is also indicated by the number of lighting of the special figure holding lamp 85. Hereinafter, the number of holding times for the first entrance 64 is referred to as a special-image holding ball number N. In addition, the special figure reservation lamp 85 is provided four for the maximum number of times of suspension, and is disposed above the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the first entry ball slot 64 is configured to be held for a maximum of four winnings, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four, and is three or less, Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, special figure reservation lamp 85 is deleted, the territory which is divided into 4 or the number of times of suspension of the fluctuation indication which is based on the winning a prize to 1st ball entrance 64 in part of 3rd symbol display 81 May be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) different by the number of holding times. Further, the number of reservations may be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this case, the special view holding lamp 85 may not display the light.

  The second symbol display portion 83 alternates between a symbol of "o" as a display symbol (second symbol) and a symbol of "x" every time the ball passes through the second entry hole 67 (through gate). It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display in the second symbol display portion 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (symbol of “o”), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 has a predetermined time It becomes an open state, and it is constituted so that it may be in the state where it is easy for a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64.

  The number of times of passage of the second ball entry port 67 (through gate) is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of times of suspension is lit and displayed in the second symbol hold lamp 84. In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display portion 83 as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol are displayed. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the number of times the ball is reserved for the second ball entry port 67 (through gate) is not limited to the maximum number of times four, as with the first ball entry port 64, and is three or less, or 5 It may be set to the number of times or more (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reservations is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 4) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, a lottery for a big hit is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37.

  In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the general winning opening 63 are the same. Although it is configured, it may be a different number. For example, the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be twenty.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery with the main control device 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol, The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 16 times (16 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (shown in FIG. 4) part of) and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a, and the open state and normal time closed Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. If the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 lights up in a mode corresponding to a big hit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110) and an effect control board (effect control apparatus 117). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the effect control device 117, the payout control device 111, the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 controls the entire operation of the pachinko machine 10, transmits various commands to the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, and controls the operation of the sub control device It is The various commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in only one direction. The sub controller may be configured to transmit a command indicating the state of the sub controller to the main controller 110.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203 and counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 to be described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. The specific configuration of each of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area in which various flags, counters, values of I / O, etc. Region). Furthermore, the RAM 203 has a holding ball storage area 203a, a holding ball execution area 203b, a special view holding ball counter 203c, a work area 203d, and a prefetch high probability state flag 203e. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 18), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the case of the holding ball storage area 203a, when the ball wins (enters the first entry ball slot 64), the first hit random number counter C1 (see FIG. 5), the first hit type counter C2 in accordance with the winning timing. It is a memory for storing each value (see FIG. 5) and stop pattern selection counter C3 (see FIG. 5). Data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to one winning to the first entrance 64 is stored (held) up to four times in the holding ball storage area 203a. The specific configuration of the holding ball storage area 203a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, when the winning (the entering) to the first entrance 64 is detected and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203a. (That is, when the special figure reservation ball number N at the time of winning is less than 4), immediately based on the respective values of the stored (reserved) counters C1 to C3 separately from the start of the fluctuation effect. The lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol are acquired. In addition, as soon as the winning is detected, it is possible to obtain the lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol based on the data corresponding to the winning (each value of the counters C1 to C3) separately from the start of the fluctuation effect. Thereafter, it is described that the lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol are read ahead. Then, immediately after the end of the pre-reading, a prize information command indicating the pre-read lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  When the prize information command is received in the effect control device 117, the stop symbol (to be described later) is displayed based on the lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol indicated by the prize information command. It is determined whether or not to perform "variation display (variation display)" to be "" and perform it in the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter, referred to as "consecutive chance eye effect").

  In addition, although the specific example of "the chance eyes" is later mentioned with reference to FIG. 10 (a), (b), in this Embodiment, two types, "reach chance eyes" and "out of chance chance eyes" The chance of The "reach chance eye" is a stop symbol that is displayed when out-of-range reach occurs in the variable production when the continuous chance eye effect is being performed, and three identical symbols that are not a hit are displayed. It is a stop symbol to stop. In addition, the “off chance eye” is a stop symbol where no reach occurs but three identical symbols are displayed and stopped. In the following description, when both “reach chance eyes” and “disappeared chance eyes” are shown, or when it is sufficient to show either one, it is simply described as “the chance eyes”.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that has not yet started the effect to "chance eye", and further, the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to be changeable to the "chance of chance" in the middle of the change production. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect which has not yet been started is changed to the chance eye, the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect can be changed to the chance eye, that is, one more time We can display chance eyes.

  In addition, since it is possible to change the stop symbol to "chance eye" in the middle of the change effect, it is possible to perform the continuous chance effect if the change effect is being performed when the prize information command is received. Therefore, the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased as compared with the case where only the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect whose effect is not yet started is changed to the "chance eye", thus improving the player's sense of expectation Can. Further, by making the stop symbol "a chance eye", it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance eye effect is being produced, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to participate in the game.

  The holding ball execution area 203b is a memory for storing data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) referred to when executing processing such as determination of a big hit, setting of display of the first symbol display device 37, and the like.

  When processing such as determination of the jackpot and setting of display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed, data corresponding to each winning (stored in each of the above-mentioned holding balls storage area 203a (counters C1 to C3) The data corresponding to one winning combination among the respective values in (1) is shifted to this holding ball execution area 203b. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that the data is moved from one area where data is stored to another area. The specific configuration of the holding ball execution area 203b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special figure holding ball counter 203c is a counter for counting the number of holdings of winning for the first entrance 64, that is, the special figure holding ball number N. In addition, the special figure reservation ball counter 203c, the maximum value is "4", is initialized to "0" at the time of the initial setting of the RAM (see S113 of Fig. 17).

  In addition, in the special figure reservation lamp 85 (refer FIG. 2) mentioned above, the lamp | ramp of the same number as the special figure reservation ball number N is lighted. More specifically, when the value of special figure reservation ball counter 203c (special figure reservation ball number N) changes, special figure reservation ball after the counter value changes from main controller 110 to effect control apparatus 117 A pending number command is sent indicating the value of the number N. In the effect control device 117, when the number-of-holds command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the lamps with the same number as the number N of special-figure holding balls indicated by the number-of-holds command are turned on .

  The work area 203 d is an area for storing data related to the counters C 1 to C 4, CS 1 to CS 3, CINI 1 to CINI 2 (for example, counter values). The counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 are provided in the work area 203d, and the values of the counters are appropriately stored in counter buffers provided in the work area 203d.

  The prefetching high probability state flag 203e is a jackpot probability that is high when the pattern of the lottery result or the stop symbol is prefetched based on the newly held winning data (each value of the counters C1 to C3). It is a flag indicating whether the winning data should be analyzed as being in the state or the winning data should be analyzed as being in the low probability state (normal state) of the jackpot probability. Further, the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is initialized to OFF at the time of initial setting of the RAM (see S113 in FIG. 17).

  When this pre-reading high probability state flag 203e is on, winning data is analyzed as that the big hit probability is high probability state, when the pre-reading high probability state flag 203e is off, the big hitting probability is low The winning data is analyzed as being in a probability state. In a general pachinko machine, a jackpot lottery is performed, and if the lottery result is “probable jackpot”, the jackpot probability is high until the jackpot (probably jackpot or normal jackpot) is reached next time Transition to the state (the state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal). On the other hand, when the lottery result is “normally big hit” or “off”, the big hit probability shifts to the normal state.

  That is, the jackpot probability of the next jackpot lottery is determined by the most recent jackpot lottery result. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the data of the newly held winning is analyzed when being held, and further, the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203 e is sequentially updated according to the analyzed lottery result. There is. As a result, after the new winning data is stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the new winning data can be obtained without waiting until the start of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the new winning and obtaining the lottery result. When acquired, the lottery result can be analyzed (preread) based on the state of the preread high probability state flag 203e.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5, holding ball storage area 203a provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110, holding ball execution area 203b, a buffer for counters, and counters C1 to C4 and CS1 to CS3. , CINI1 to CINI2 etc. FIG. 5 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of various counters, a holding ball storage area 203a, and a holding ball execution area 203b.

  Determination of jackpot and display setting of the first symbol display device 37 for the storage ball storage area 203a, the storage ball execution area 203b, the buffer for counters, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, etc. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 83 and the like.

  In the setting of the display of the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery, the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the big hit symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the second symbol display portion 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating (see FIGS. 18 and 22), and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0.

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 is at an interval of 4 ms which is an execution interval of main processing (see FIG. 18) or at an interval of 2 ms which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203. When the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3 and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to when executing various control programs, the values of each counter stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the RAM 203, a holding ball storage area 203a and a holding ball execution area 203b are provided. As described above, when the ball wins (enters) the first ball entrance 64, the holding ball storage area 203a is used to store the values of the counters C1 to C3 according to the winning timing. It is a memory.

  The holding ball storage area 203a is composed of four holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area). The first hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the first hit type counter storage area 203a2, and the stop pattern selection counter are respectively stored in the four hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the hold ball storage area 203a. A storage area 203a3 is provided. The values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3.

  In the present embodiment, although the first hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the first hit type counter storage area 203a2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 are provided in the holding ball storage area 203a. The three areas 203a1, 203a2 and 203a3 do not necessarily have to be provided in the holding ball storage area 203a. For example, a new storage area is provided separately from the storage ball storage area 203a, and a part of the three areas 203a1, 203a2 and 203a3 is provided in the storage ball storage area 203a, and the rest is stored anew It may be provided in the area.

  As described above, in this holding ball storage area 203a, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins to the first entrance 64 is stored up to four times, In that case, data are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored.

  On the other hand, the holding ball execution area 203b is composed of only one area. In the reserved ball execution area 203b, a first random number counter storage area 203b1, a first collision type counter storage area 203b2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 are provided.

  Further, the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 19, but when a lottery for a big hit is started, it is stored in the first reserved area of the holding ball storage area 203a by the holding ball storage area sequential feeding process (see FIG. 20). The stored data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) are shifted to the areas 203b1 to 203b3 of the holding ball execution area 203b, respectively. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203b is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 21), the lottery result of the jackpot is determined based on the reference data, and the fluctuation display and stop corresponding to the lottery result The display is performed on the first symbol display device 37 or the like.

  More specifically, when the jackpot lottery is started, the random number value of the first random number counter storage area 203a1 of the first holding area is the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b. Be shifted. Similarly, the random number value of the first type counter storage area 203a2 is shifted to the first type counter storage area 203b2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. Ru.

  Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203b is completed, the holding first area becomes empty, so each processing of the holding ball storage area 203a is performed by the holding ball storage area sequential sending process (see FIG. 20) described later. A shift process is performed to pack the data stored (held) in (second to fourth) in an area (first to third) having a small area number. In the present embodiment, in the holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the holding areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held).

  Here, data shift in the holding ball storage area 203a will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c is "4", and data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203a. In this state, when the data of the first holding area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203b and the first holding area becomes empty, the data of the other areas (second to fourth) have an area number of 1 respectively. It is shifted to a small area (first to third). That is, data of the holding second area is shifted to the holding first area, data of the holding third area is shifted to the holding second area, and data of the holding fourth area is shifted to the holding third area .

  Also, for example, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c is "2", only the data of the holding second area is shifted to the holding first area, and the data shift is completed as described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of times of data shift can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

  Note that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area with a smaller area number, respectively. In that case, the determination as to whether or not the data is stored (held) in the reserved area (second to fourth) is unnecessary, so the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the program can be reduced, and the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the number of data stored in the holding ball storage area 203a (the number of holdings) is counted by the special view holding ball counter 203c, and a new winning is made at the first entrance 64. When it occurs, the data corresponding to the new winning is stored in the holding area (Holding 1st area to the 4th holding area) according to the value indicated by the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N) doing.

  Therefore, in the holding ball storage area 203a, since data corresponding to a new winning is not overwritten on the data stored (held) in the holding area, data from the shift source area to the shift destination area Can be left as it is without clearing the data in the area of the shift source. Therefore, the control burden can be reduced as compared with the case where the data of the shift source area is cleared after the data shift. The data of the shift source area may be cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. For example, the first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 738, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed. It is updated once each time and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 18).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and the holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. There are two types of jackpot random number values: low probability (the jackpot probability is normal) and high probability (the jackpot probability is higher than usual), and low probability (the jackpot probability) There are two kinds of random number values that are the big wins in the normal state), and the values are “373, 727”, and the high win rate random number values are 13 when the high probability (the high hit probability is higher than normal) The type is “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733”. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not the large hit is made from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the type of jackpot (a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot), and in the present embodiment, one by one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 4 And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a. The values of the random numbers that are "high probability state (probable variation big hit) after the big hit end" are "1, 2, 3", and the random number values that become "low probability state (usually big hit) after the big hit end" are "0, 4 And two types of hit types are determined. Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots of "permanent variation jackpot" and "ordinary jackpot", and one type corresponding to disconnection One of the three display modes in total with the display mode is selected.

  In the present embodiment, based on the data acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64, it is determined that "big hit" and "high probability state (probable variation big hit) after big hit". If it is judged as "big hit" and "low probability state (usually big hit) after big hit", it will be "usually big hit". In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether a big hit or a definite variation big hit is usually provided from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 .

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). In the present embodiment, the pattern of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach is generated, the final stop symbol is shifted by only one before and after the reach symbol. With "stop before and after out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and with the same reach, the final stop design stops at other than before and after reach with "reach other than out of back and forth" Three stop (rendering) patterns (a form of display result of dynamic display) with “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) where reach does not occur are selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in 203a.

  A table (not shown) referred to for selecting the stop pattern from the value (random number value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the stop pattern is It is selected based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. A plurality of such tables are provided such that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 which can take one stop pattern is different. This is whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than a normal state), a low probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state) This is to change the selection ratio of each stop pattern according to the value 203c (the number N of special figure holding balls) and the like.

  For example, in a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal), the range of random numbers corresponding to the “completely out” stop pattern is 10 so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. A wide table of ̃238 is selected, and “complete out” is likely to be selected. In this table, the range of random numbers for "reach back and forth out" narrows to 0-5, and the range of random numbers for "reach other than back and forth" also narrows to 6 to 9, "front and back out of reach" and "back and forth It becomes difficult to select "reach except out".

  In addition, if the random number values are not stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203a in the low probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64 is secured. For this reason, a table with a narrow range of random number values 51 to 238 corresponding to the "completely out" stop pattern is selected, and "completely out" is less likely to be selected. In this table, the range of random numbers for "reach back and forth out" is 0 to 8, the range of random numbers for "reach other than back and forth" is as wide as 9 to 50, and "reach other than back and forth out" is easily selected It has become. Therefore, since the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 can be secured in the low probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously. .

  Next, three variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 will be described. First, two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. For example, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), and the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is sequentially added, and it is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as "first variation type counter", and CS2 is also referred to as "second variation type counter".

  In the present embodiment, the first variation type counter CS1 performs out-of-range fluctuation (rendering for 11 seconds), normal reach fluctuation (rendering for 20 seconds), super reach fluctuation (rendering for 40 seconds), special reach fluctuation (rendering for 60 seconds) One of the patterns (display modes) is determined from the patterns of the four variation effects of. By determining this pattern, a rough variation time of symbol variation is determined. Hereinafter, the patterns of these four variation effects are referred to as normal variation effect patterns.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. 8, patterns of variation effects provided in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, 15 types of patterns of fluctuation effects are provided, and in addition to the above-mentioned outlier fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation, chance eye normal fluctuation (representation for 20 seconds) , Chance eye super fluctuation AD (presentation of 40 seconds each), chance eye special fluctuation AF (presentation of 60 seconds each) are provided.

  Although details will be described later, the chance eye normal fluctuation is executed instead of the normal reach fluctuation when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and similarly, the chance eye super fluctuation A to D is a predetermined one. When the condition is satisfied, instead of the super reach fluctuation, the chance eye special fluctuations A to F are executed instead of the special reach fluctuation when the predetermined condition is satisfied. When this chance eye normal fluctuation, chance eye super fluctuation A to D, and chance eye special fluctuation A to F are executed, the stop symbol is displayed after "chance eye" is displayed once or more in the fluctuation time. . The predetermined conditions will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

  First, the pattern of a usual fluctuation production will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of a pattern of normal variation effects and the contents of the effects. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the out-of-range fluctuation, a stop symbol is displayed 11 seconds after the effect (for example, high-speed variation) is started to be executed. Likewise, in normal reach variation, a stop symbol is displayed 20 seconds after the effect is started, 40 seconds in super reach variation, and 60 seconds in special reach variation. In addition, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation generate reach and perform flashy effects (hereinafter referred to as "reach fluctuation"), respectively, to give the player a sense of expectation for a gaming state advantageous to the player. It is something to have.

  Next, chance eye normal fluctuation is explained. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the chance eye normal fluctuation and the contents of the effect thereof. The chance eye normal fluctuation (20 seconds) is executed in place of the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), and is configured to display “chance eye” once in the fluctuation time. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the chance eye normal fluctuation is constituted by the outlier fluctuation (11 seconds) and the reach fluctuation (9 seconds), and stops when it is started. The out-of-focus fluctuation of the "eye pattern" is executed, and then the reach fluctuation is executed and the stop pattern is displayed.

  Next, chance eye super fluctuation A to D will be described. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of chance eye super fluctuation A to D and the contents of the effect thereof. The chance eye super fluctuation AD (each 40 seconds) is executed instead of the super reach fluctuation (40 seconds). The chance eye super fluctuation A, B is configured to display the "chance eye" once in the fluctuation time, and so on, the chance eye super fluctuation C is twice and the chance eye super fluctuation D is 3 similarly. It is configured to display times. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the chance eye super fluctuation A is constituted by the out fluctuation (11 seconds) and the reach fluctuation (29 seconds), and once the execution is started, the stop symbol is displayed first Out-of-chance variation of "chance eye" is executed, followed by reach fluctuation and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Likewise, the chance eye super fluctuation B is configured by two normal reach fluctuations (20 seconds), and when the execution is started, the normal reach fluctuation of the chance symbol “chance eye” is executed first, and then again, Normal reach fluctuation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, the chance eye super fluctuation C is composed of two outlier fluctuations (10 seconds each) and normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), and when the execution is started, the outing fluctuation of the chance pattern of the stop pattern is It is executed twice in a row, and then the normal reach fluctuation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. Also, the chance eye super fluctuation D is composed of four outlier fluctuations (10 seconds each), and once the execution is started, the stop pattern is executed by three consecutive outlier fluctuations of the "chance eye" and continued Once again, the out fluctuation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, while the normal out-of-range fluctuation (refer to FIG. 6A) is the effect for 11 seconds, in this out-of-line variation for 10 seconds, for example, the time of high-speed fluctuation after the start of fluctuation is shortened by 1 second .

  Next, chance eye special variations A to F will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the chance eye special variations A to F and the contents of the effect thereof. The chance eye special variation AF (each 60 seconds) is executed instead of the special reach variation (60 seconds). The chance eye special variation A, B is configured to display the "chance eye" once within the variation time, and similarly, the chance eye special variation C, D is twice, the chance eye special variation E Is configured to be displayed three times, and the chance special variation F is displayed four times. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the chance eye special variation A is configured by the outset variation (11 seconds) and the reach variation (49 seconds), and once the execution is started, the stop symbol is displayed first Out-of-chance variation of "chance eye" is executed, followed by reach fluctuation and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Likewise, chance eye special variation B is composed of normal reach variation (20 seconds) and super reach variation (40 seconds), and when the execution is started, the stop symbol is the normal reach variation with the chance eye first Is executed, and then super reach variation is executed and a stop symbol is displayed. In addition, chance eye special variation C is made up of three normal reach variations (each 20 seconds), and when the execution is started, the normal reach variation of the chance symbol “opportunity eye” is executed twice in a row and continuously Once again, the normal reach change is executed and the stop symbol is displayed.

  In addition, chance eye special variation D is made up of two outliers (10 seconds each) and super reach variation (40 seconds), and once the execution is started, the stop symbol is the "eye of chance" The change is performed twice in a row, and then the super reach change is performed to display the stop symbol. In addition, the chance eye special variation E is composed of two outliers (10 seconds each) and two normal reach variations (20 seconds each), and once the execution is started, the stop symbol is the chance eye The out-of-order fluctuation is executed twice in a row, followed by the normal reach fluctuation in which the stop symbol is a chance eye. And finally, a normal reach change is performed and a stop symbol is displayed. In addition, the chance eye special variation F is composed of 5 outliers (10 seconds or 16 seconds), and when the execution is started, the stop pattern is executed with outliers (16 seconds) of the "eye chance". Then, the stop symbol "offer chance" out of change (10 seconds) is executed three consecutive times. And finally, the out-of-round fluctuation is executed again and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, while the normal out-of-range fluctuation (refer to FIG. 6A) is the effect of 11 seconds, in this out-of-range fluctuation of 16 seconds, for example, the time of high-speed fluctuation after the start of fluctuation is extended for 5 seconds .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, “chance eye normal fluctuation (20 seconds)” and “chance eye super fluctuation A” are combined by combining normal fluctuation effects (outside fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc.) Since “D (40 seconds)” and “Chance eye special fluctuation (60 seconds)” are configured, “Chance eye normal fluctuation”, “Chance eye super fluctuation A to D”, and “Chance eye special fluctuation” In the case of executing the fluctuation presentation according to “A to F”, the data for presentation used for the usual fluctuation presentation may be combined and executed. Therefore, data for presentation (variation production data to be described later) is specially prepared only for “chance eye normal fluctuation”, “chance eye super fluctuation A to D”, and “chance eye special fluctuation A to F”. Since it is not necessary to do so, it is possible to suppress the amount of variation effect data stored in the character ROM 275 of the effect control device 117 described later, and to suppress the consumption of the character ROM 275.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the fluctuation effect (variation display) is executed will be described. FIG. 9 is a view for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9 (a) is a schematic view showing an actual screen and an effective line setting when the display screen is horizontally scrolled. FIG. 9B is a schematic view showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen vertically scrolls.

  The third design consists of 10 main designs consisting of 10 types of character designs corresponding to the numbers from "0" to "9", and one type of sub-pattern formed smaller than this main design (in this embodiment, , And a picture of shellfish). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute symbol rows (virtual symbol reels) by arranging the main symbols in the ascending or descending order of the numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols. The details of the virtual symbol reel will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variation display is finished. It is configured as follows. When transitioning to “high probability state (probable variation big hit) after the big hit end”, a variable display in which main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability pattern”) are aligned is performed. On the other hand, in the case of transitioning to “the low probability state (usually the large hit) after the end of the big hit”, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to the “low probability pattern”) corresponding to even numbers are aligned is performed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the direction (vertical scroll or horizontal scroll) of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the first hit random number counter storage area of the holding ball execution area 203b. It is configured to change in accordance with the value of 203 b 1.

  Specifically, when the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b is an even number, as shown in FIG. 9A, the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed for each symbol row. The display is changed so as to scroll (horizontally scroll) from right to left (in the direction of the arrow X) with periodicity. As shown in FIG. 9A, at the time of such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed on each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3, the numbers in the main symbol are arranged in ascending order. ing.

  On the other hand, when the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b is an odd number, as shown in FIG. 9 (b), the main symbol and the sub symbol are periodic for each symbol row. Is displayed so as to scroll (vertically scroll) from the top to the bottom (arrow Y direction). As shown in FIG. 9B, at the time of such vertical scrolling, three symbol rows Z1 ', Z2' and Z3 'on the left, middle and right are displayed on each symbol row. In this case, in left symbol row Z1 ', numbers corresponding to main symbol row are arranged in descending order, and in middle symbol row Z2' and right symbol row Z1 ', numbers of main symbols appear in ascending order. Are arranged in

  As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, left, middle, and left for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 'to Z3'), respectively. The third symbol is displayed on the right, upper, middle, and lower three levels. Therefore, a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, five effective lines are set in both of vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, five lines of the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the right upward line L4, and the left upward line L5 are set as effective lines during horizontal scrolling. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, at the time of vertical scrolling, five lines of the upper line L1 ′, the middle line L2 ′, the lower line L3 ′, the upper right line L4 ′, and the upper left line L5 ′ are effective lines. It is set.

  And, in each game, when the combination of the jackpot symbol (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on any effective line when stopping the variable display which scrolls vertically or horizontally, the jackpot as a jackpot The video is displayed. In the case of horizontal scrolling (FIG. 9 (a)), the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and in the case of vertical scroll (FIG. 9 (b)) The variable display stops in the order of left symbol row Z1 ′ → right symbol row Z3 ′ → middle symbol row Z2 ′.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), a description will be given of "the chances (the missed chances, the reach chances)" displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. In FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), an example of the stop symbol when the variation direction of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is horizontally scrolled (in the direction of the arrow X in the figure) is shown. . Fig.10 (a) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of "disappearance chance eyes" displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, FIG.10 (b) is "reach" displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of "the chance eyes."

  First of all, I will explain about the "off chance". As described above, the "off chance eye" is a stop symbol where no reach occurs but three identical symbols are displayed and stopped. In FIG. 10 (a), the symbol of "turtle" is displayed on the right line L3 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2 and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. There is no reach in any of the five effective lines L1 to L5.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a stop symbol in which three identical symbols (here, "turtles") are displayed is regarded as a "missing chance eye" without the occurrence of reach. In the example shown in FIG. 10 (a), the same symbol displayed in each of the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 is "turtle", but if the symbols are the same, the other symbols are the same. It may be a symbol (for example, "shark" or "octopus").

  Next, "reach chance eyes" will be described. As described above, the "reach chance eyes" are stop symbols that are displayed as three identical symbols that are not hit but stop after reaching. In FIG. 10 (b), the symbols "Taco" are displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2 and the middle line L2 of the lower row Z3. Therefore, although reach is generated in the effective line L2 among the five effective lines L1 to L5, it is not a hit.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the reach is occurring but it is not a hit, and the stop symbol in which three identical symbols (here, "octopus") are displayed is "reach chance eyes". And As in the example shown in FIG. 10A, the same symbol may be another symbol (for example, "shark" or "turtle") as long as the symbol is the same.

  Further, the above-mentioned "out of chance" shown in FIG. 10 (a) or "reach chance" shown in FIG. 10 (b) is an example, and the stop position of the same symbol is not limited to this. For example, when the same symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is a "mismatched eye". Further, when the same symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is a "reach chance".

  In the present embodiment, as the pattern of the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-mentioned "outgoing chance eyes" and "reach chance eyes", "probably big hit symbol" which indicates a probability variation big hit Or, "Normal jackpot symbol" which usually shows a big hit, "front and back gap reach symbol" which shows a back and forth reach, "reach symbol other than back and forth" which shows a reach other than back and forth, and "completely out symbol" Is provided.

  Here, returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition, the second fluctuation type counter CS2 changes the time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol (middle symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 'in the present embodiment) stops (in other words, after reaching) The number of fluctuation symbols is determined. Then, based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, the reach control type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode are determined by the effect control device 117.

  Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, various diversification of fluctuation patterns can be easily realized. The values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation mode is determined by the combination of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, but the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1, or with the first variation type counter CS1. It is also possible to similarly determine the symbol variation mode in combination with the stop symbol.

  Here, a table (not shown) in which the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the type of display mode is provided in the ROM 202, and the type of display mode is determined from the value of the variation type counter CS1. In the case of selecting (a pattern of variation presentation), such a table is referred to. Similarly, a table (not shown) for selecting a fluctuation time (number of fluctuation symbols) from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS2 to the stop of the final stop symbol is also provided in the ROM 202.

  Next, the fluctuation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a "third variation type counter". The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment performs decorative effects according to the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and in addition to the variation of the symbols, it is possible to slide the changing symbols A notice effect such as passing a notice character for giving notice of occurrence of reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the advance effect is selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3.

  Specifically, the time required for the advance notice effect is added to the fluctuation time (for example, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.), or the fluctuation time is subtracted to shorten the time during which the fluctuation is displayed (eg- An effect pattern is selected which does not add or subtract fluctuation time, etc.).

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, also in the case of the fluctuation type counter CS3, the range of the effect pattern of the notice effect selected to the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS3 is different There are several tables provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal) or a low probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is normal) A table is provided in which the selection ratio of each effect pattern is different in accordance with the value of (the special figure holding ball number N) or the like. The table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 in the same manner as the variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  As described above, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added / subtracted to / from the fluctuation time is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final change time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the change type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the ball is either the left or the right second ball entry port 67 (through gate) Acquired when it is detected that the vehicle has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be won, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) in which a random number value for determining whether or not the second random number counter C4 is determined from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

  Also, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and it is performed once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

  Here, returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an effect control device 117, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display unit 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and various switches and sensors not shown. A switch 208, a large open port solenoid for opening and closing on the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, and a solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an electric part are connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected by a touch sensor (not shown) that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the hit stop switch for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The effect control device 117 sets the sound output setting in the audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, sets the number of lighting of the lamp in the special view holding lamp 85, lights the lamp in the electric decoration 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc. The third symbol display device (LCD) 81 is used to control the change effect (variation display) and the jackpot effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD). These controls are executed based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 110. For example, control regarding lighting and extinguishing of the special view holding lamp 85 is executed based on the number-of-holds command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, and bus lines 279 and 280. The MPU 271 is connected to the input / output port 277 via a bus line 279 configured of an address bus and a data bus. Further, to the input / output port 277, the main controller 110, the image controller 274, the audio output device 226, the special view holding lamp 85, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34 and the like are connected.

  In addition, the image controller 274 is connected to the character ROM 275 and the video RAM 276, and is connected to the output port 278 via the bus line 280. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the winning probability of the big hit and the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there is, the effect control device 117 is made into a common part and the cost is reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, control of sound output, control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of fluctuation representation (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 are collectively performed. Although the effect control device 117 is configured to perform the control, various types of control may be shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, the sound lamp control device performs control of sound output and control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of display of fluctuation representation (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 is controlled. It may be configured to be performed by the device.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic device as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 incorporates a ROM 272 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 271, fixed value data, and the like, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory or the like. The ROM 272 of the effect control device 117 has a virtual symbol reel memory 272a and a maximum changeable period memory 272b. In the virtual symbol reel memory 272a, the virtual symbol reels showing the arrangement of the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are three symbol rows Z1, Z1 of the upper, middle and lower (left, middle and right) It is stored for each Z2, Z3 (Z1 ', Z2', Z3 '), and the maximum changeable period memory 272b is another stop pattern for the fluctuation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81. The maximum changeable period (hereinafter referred to as "maximum changeable period") is stored in the symbol. In addition, the thing of the period which can change the stop symbol of the fluctuation production started in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 to another stop symbol is only called a changeable period.

  Here, the virtual symbol reel memory 272 a of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c). FIG. 11 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to upper symbol row Z1 (left symbol row Z1 ′), and FIG. 11 (b) is a middle symbol row Z2 (middle symbol row Z2 ′). 11 (c) is a schematic view showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower row design row Z3 (right symbol row Z3 ').

  In the following description, only the case where the variable display scrolls horizontally will be described. However, when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 'and the middle symbol row Z2 is middle. The symbol row Z2 'may be read by replacing the lower row symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3'.

  In the virtual symbol reel memory 272a, virtual symbol reels indicating the arrangement of the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored for each of the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. Memory. As described above, the arrangement of the third symbol displayed in the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 is determined for each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, and "0" to "9" Consisting of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers of "" and one type of sub-pattern (in the present embodiment, a pattern of shellfish) formed smaller than this main symbol There is. One virtual symbol reel indicates the arrangement of the third symbol in one symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3.

  As shown to Fig.11 (a), the virtual symbol reel of upper symbol row Z1 is comprised by 18 3rd symbols. The arrangement of the pattern is, from the top to the back, "shellfish", "crab (9)", "shellfish", "angelfish (hereinafter referred to as" A fish ") (8), ...," The "Shellfish" and "Tako (1)" are arranged in the order, and the array numbers indicating the arrangement in the virtual symbol reel are assigned from 1 to 18 in the order of arrangement of the symbols. In addition, after the symbol of the last "octopus (1)", it returns to the symbol at the top, and it shall repeat repeatedly in order of "shellfish", "crab (9)", "shellfish", ....

  In addition, the number enclosed in parentheses following the name of the character symbol indicates the number corresponding to the character symbol. For example, the symbol of "crab" is a symbol corresponding to the numeral "9". It shows. Among the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the upper symbol row Z1, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the upper symbol row Z1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), the virtual symbol reel of the lower row pattern row Z3 is configured with eighteen third symbols. The arrangement of the symbols is the exact opposite of the arrangement of the upper symbol row Z1, and from the top to the rear, "Tako (1)", "Shellfish", "Harrisenbon (2)", ..., "Kani (Screw) 9) ”,“ shellfish ”are arranged in this order. Then, the array numbers indicating the arrangement on the virtual symbol reel are given in the order of 1 to 18. In addition, after the symbol of the final "shellfish", it returns to the symbol at the head, and it shall repeat repeatedly in order of "octopus (1)", "shellfish", "harisens bon (2)", .... Of the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the lower figure pattern row Z3, three consecutive third symbols (main figure and sub-pattern) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the lower figure pattern row Z3.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the virtual symbol reels of the middle symbol row Z2 are constituted by 20 third symbols, and the arrangement of the symbols is the arrangement of the virtual symbol reels of the lower pattern row Z3. It is an arrangement that adds two patterns of "shark (4)" and "shellfish" to the end. Then, as in the case of the virtual symbol reels of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, after the final symbol of "shellfish", it returns to the leading symbol, "octopus (1)", "shellfish", " The sequence of "Harrisembon (2)", ... is repeated, and the sequence numbers are also assigned from 1 to 20 in order from the top of the sequence to the rear. Among the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the middle symbol row Z2, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub-symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the middle symbol row Z2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the maximum changeable period memory 272b of the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 12 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the contents of the maximum changeable period memory 272b of the effect control device 117, and FIG. 12 (b) is a schematic view of the maximum changeable period of the deviation variation. FIG. 12C is a schematic view showing a maximum changeable period of normal reach fluctuation.

  In the following description, only the case where the variable display scrolls horizontally will be described. However, when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 'and the middle symbol row Z2 is middle. The symbol row Z2 'may be read by replacing the lower row symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3'.

  The maximum changeable period memory 272b is a memory in which the maximum changeable period of the outlier fluctuation to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 and the maximum changeable period of the normal reach fluctuation are stored. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12A, 10 seconds is stored as the maximum changeable period of the outlier variation, and 15 seconds is stored as the maximum changeable period of the normal reach variation.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has, as a pattern of normal fluctuation effects, out-of-position fluctuation (11 seconds), normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), super reach fluctuation (40 seconds), special reach fluctuation (60) Seconds) are provided. However, among these, the change effect for changing the stop symbol during the change effect is only out-of-range fluctuation and normal reach fluctuation. The reason will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, although the time of the whole of fluctuation production is different for every pattern of fluctuation production, three symbol lines (for example, upper pattern line Z1, middle pattern line Z2, lower figure pattern line Z3 displayed on the third symbol display device 81) In (refer to FIG. 9A), the time until the first upper symbol row Z1 and the second lower symbol row Z3 stop is common (10 seconds).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), when out-of-plane variation (11 seconds) is performed, three symbol rows (for example, upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, lower pattern) immediately after the start of execution Each of the columns Z3 (see FIG. 9A) starts high-speed fluctuation. After that, the upper symbol row Z1 switches in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation after 8 seconds and stops after 9 seconds, and the lower row pattern row Z3 simultaneously (that is, after 9 seconds) when the upper symbol row Z1 stops. It changes in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation and stops after 10 seconds. Then, the middle symbol row Z2 is switched in the order of the medium speed fluctuation and the low speed fluctuation at the same time as the lower figure design row Z3 is stopped (that is, after 10 seconds) and stopped after 11 seconds.

  In addition, in each variation production, the first upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high-speed variation to medium-speed variation for 1 second from 8 seconds to 9 seconds regardless of deviation variation (11 seconds), and further to low-speed variation This is a margin period provided for reliably performing (following) control processing such as switching and stopping. Also, similarly, the second lower figure pattern row Z3 for one second from 9 seconds to 10 seconds, and the third middle pattern row Z2 for one second from 10 seconds to 11 seconds, from high-speed variation to medium-speed variation This is a margin period provided for reliably performing (following) control processing such as switching and stopping at low speed fluctuation.

  Therefore, after stop display of upper symbol row Z1 is started among upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, that is, after upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high-speed variation to medium-speed variation Or, even after switching from medium speed change to low speed change, the third main pattern (the main pattern in the upper pattern row Z1) is placed in the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3. If you change the symbol (if you change it), you can change the stop symbol in the variable effect to "eye of chance". That is, even after the start of the out-of-out fluctuation, even after the upper symbol row Z1 starts the low-speed variation (after 8 seconds), if the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3 are in high-speed variation (less than 9 seconds), the middle symbol row Z2 And by replacing (changing) the third symbol in the lower row of symbol rows Z3, it is possible to change the stop symbol of the out-of-set variation to "chance eye".

  Therefore, when changing the stop design in the change production to "chance eye" only when the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are all moving at high speed (for example, less than 8 seconds) Rather, it is possible to secure a longer period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed. Therefore, since the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects.

  In particular, when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, the same main symbol is However, the third symbol may be changed to be in the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, after the start of the out-of-out fluctuation, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, and after the stop display of the lower-side pattern row Z3 is started (after 9 seconds), that is, the lower-side pattern row Z3 changes from high speed to middle Even after switching to fluctuation or after switching from medium-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, if middle symbol row Z2 is in high-speed variation (less than 10 seconds), replace (change) the third symbol of middle symbol row Z2 , You can change the stop pattern of out-of-range fluctuation to "chance".

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since it is possible to secure a longer period (changeable period), it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects by allowing a long changeable period. As described above, the maximum changeable period corresponding to the deviation fluctuation (11 seconds) is 10 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, when replacing the third symbol of the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, the third of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during high speed fluctuation or medium speed fluctuation It is configured to replace only the design. This is because while the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are fluctuating at high speed or medium speed, the scroll speed of the third symbol is generally high, and the player recognizes the third symbol constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This is because it is not possible (or because it is difficult to recognize), it is possible to replace the third symbol constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without making the player notice.

  On the other hand, when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are fluctuating slowly, generally, the scroll speed of the third symbol is low, and the player can recognize the third symbol constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Therefore, when the third symbol constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is replaced, the change is recognized by the player, so that a fluctuation effect unnatural to the player is executed. Even when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, if the third symbol constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is replaced, the change is recognized by the player, which is unnatural to the player. Fluctuation effect is executed. Therefore, by replacing only the third symbol of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 during high speed change or medium speed change, it is possible to prevent the player from performing unnatural change effects, thereby improving the value of the change effects. It is possible to increase the value of continuous chance eye effects. It should be noted that instead of replacing only the third symbol of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 during high speed fluctuation or medium speed fluctuation, even if only the third symbol of the symbol column Z1 to Z3 during high speed fluctuation is replaced Alternatively, only the third symbol of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during medium speed variation may be replaced.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 12 (c), when normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is executed, three symbols of upper, middle, and lower immediately after the start of execution, as in the case of out-of-bound fluctuation. Rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 start high-speed variation, upper symbol row Z1 stops after 9 seconds, lower figure symbol row Z3 stops after 10 seconds, and middle symbol row Z2 changes medium-speed and low-speed after 10 seconds Switch in order of fluctuation. However, after that, after the slow fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues for 10 seconds, the stop display is displayed.

  In the case of normal reach variation, the same main symbol is always contained in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. Even if the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display is long (10 seconds), so the middle symbol row Z2 changes the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 even during medium speed change or low speed change By changing (changing), it is possible to change the stop pattern of out-of-range fluctuation to "chance eye".

  More specifically, since the time until the stop display is long (10 seconds), the scroll display time of the middle symbol row Z2 is also long, and the third symbol is frequently exchanged in the middle symbol row Z2. Therefore, if the third symbol is replaced at the timing when a new third symbol is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the stop symbol can be changed to "chance" without making the player notice. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing unnatural fluctuation effects.

  Also, even if the middle symbol row Z2 is switched to medium-speed fluctuation or low-speed fluctuation, the stop symbol during the fluctuation production can be changed to "chance", so if the middle symbol row Z2 is in high-speed fluctuation (for example, 10) Rather than changing the stop symbol during change production to "chance eye" only in less than a second), since the changeable period can be secured longer, the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects can be further increased.

  For example, if it is less than 5 seconds after the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (after 10 seconds), the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed. Here, the reason why it is less than 5 seconds is to ensure that the stop symbol is changed, and the maximum changeable period is 10 seconds depending on the content of the control process (for example, when the control load is small) It may be close to In that case, since the maximum changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects. As described above, the maximum changeable period corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is 15 seconds.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the third symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are scrolled in the third symbol display device 81 in the order of arrangement of the third symbols determined by the virtual symbol reels. Are configured to For example, even if the remaining design time is short (1 second) after the low speed fluctuation of the middle pattern row Z2 is started as in the out-of-order fluctuation, even if the stop design is changed, scroll display to the changed third design It may not be possible to display the desired stop symbol. However, if it is normal reach fluctuation, the remaining display time is long (10 seconds) after the stop display of middle symbol row Z2 is started, so if it is less than 5 seconds after the start of the stop display, change the stop design, The changed third symbol can be scrolled and displayed, and the desired stop symbol can be reliably displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, as in the case of normal reach fluctuation, the stop symbol is changed only when the changed stop symbol ("chance eye") can be displayed reliably, regardless of the outlier fluctuation and the normal reach fluctuation. The control burden can be reduced compared to when trying to change the stop symbol. In addition, you may comprise so that the change of a stop symbol may be tried irrespective of a deviation fluctuation | variation or a normal reach fluctuation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of out-of-out fluctuation (11 seconds), since the time of high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is short (1 second), the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (changed) No, but it is configured to replace (change) the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 as in the case of normal reach variation by lengthening the high speed variation of the middle symbol row Z2 (for example, 6 seconds etc.) Also good.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum changeable period is changed according to the pattern of the change effect, but all the maximum changeable periods are the same time (8 seconds regardless of the pattern of the change effect ) May be used. That is, if all of the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are moving at high speed, replace (change) the third symbol of the upper, middle and lower pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 and remove them. The stop symbol of the change may be configured to be changed to the "chance of chance". In addition, as described above, for one second from 8 seconds to 9 seconds, control processing such as switching upper pattern row Z1 from high-speed fluctuation to medium-speed fluctuation and switching to low-speed fluctuation and stopping is reliably executed (following Margin period provided to Therefore, depending on the contents of the control process (for example, when the control load is small), the maximum changeable period may be close to 9 seconds. In that case, since the maximum changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum changeable period corresponding to normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is 15 seconds, but may be determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. That is, since the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time until the final stop symbol stops after the reach occurrence, a time that can reliably execute the control process is subtracted from the determined time. Maximum changeable period. According to this structure, the maximum changeable period can be secured to the longest according to the contents of the effect, so that the chance to perform the continuous chance effect can be further increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing when the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed (after 9 seconds) and the timing when the stop display of the lower pattern row Z3 is started (after 9 seconds) are the same. It is not necessary to set it, and it may be set arbitrarily. For example, the timing at which the stop display of the lower figure pattern row Z3 is started may be made faster than the timing at which the upper pattern row Z1 is stopped and displayed, and the lower pattern may be faster than the timing at which the upper pattern row Z1 is stopped and displayed. The timing at which the stop display of the column Z3 is started may be delayed. The same applies to the timing (after 10 seconds) when the symbol row Z3 in the lower figure is stopped and displayed (after 10 seconds) when the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (the timing needs to be the same) There is no need to set it arbitrarily.

  Here, returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. The RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 are stored, and various flags, counters, and values such as I / O. Work area (work area). Furthermore, the RAM 273 has various memories, flags, counters, and the like.

  Here, the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic view showing an example of the contents of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. The RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 includes a stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a, a special figure holding ball counter 273b, a chance line consecutive number counter 273c, a fluctuation time memory 273d, a fluctuation time counter 273e, and a fluctuation start flag 273f. , Stop symbol changeable period flag 273g, stop symbol setting in progress flag 273h, stop symbol set completion flag 273i, chance display number of times selection counter 273j, simulated variation chance eye display number memory 273k, stop symbol pattern table memory It has 271l, a display pattern pattern memory 273m, a probability variable extension possible period counter 273n, and a normal extension possible period counter 273o.

  The stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is a memory for storing a stop symbol instruction storage table. The stop symbol instruction storage table is a table for storing a setting value indicating a stop symbol to be set when the fluctuation effect is executed for the fluctuation effect being executed and each fluctuation effect to be executed individually. is there.

  Here, the stop symbol instruction storage table will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 (a) to 14 (c). Fig.14 (a) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the content of a stop symbol instruction storage table, FIG.14 (b) is an example of the relationship between the setting value memorize | stored in a stop symbol instruction storage table, and a stop symbol. FIG. 14C is a schematic view showing an example of a prize information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device 110 and setting values set according to the command. is there.

  The stop symbol instruction storage table stores a set value (mode information) indicating a stop symbol to be set when the fluctuation effect is executed for the fluctuation effect under execution and each fluctuation effect to be executed individually. It is a table for As shown in FIG. 14A, the stop symbol instruction storage table includes an execution area, a first holding area, a second holding area, a third holding area, a fourth holding area, and a next holding area. It is provided.

  The execution area stores the set value indicating the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed, and the first to fourth holding areas and the next holding area are set when the fluctuation effect to be executed is executed. The set value of the stop symbol to be stored is stored. More specifically, the first reserved area stores the next variable production to be executed, that is, the set value of the stop symbol to be set when the first variable presentation is performed for the first one. Ru.

  Likewise, in the second reserve area, the second variation area in the order of execution is scheduled, in the third reserve area, in the third variation area, the third variation area, in the fourth reserve area, the second schedule The setting values of the stop symbol to be set when the fourth variation effect is performed are stored. In the next hold area, the setting value is stored only when the setting value is stored in each of the first to fourth holding areas. In the next hold area, the change effect corresponding to the setting value of the fourth hold area is ended, and the setting value of the stop symbol to be set when the next change effect is performed is stored.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, “off” is stored as a setting value in the execution area. Hereinafter, in order to clarify that it is a set value, “set value:” is described before each set value when indicating the set value. For example, when the setting value is "out", "setting value: out" is described. Then, “set value: chance item” is stored in the first hold area and the second hold area. Likewise, "the set value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" is stored in the third reserve area, "set value: skip after big hit" is stored in the fourth reserve area, and nothing is stored in the next reserve area. Absent.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, when the variation effect corresponding to the setting value of the execution area is ended and the next variation effect is started, the setting value of the first hold area is shifted to the execution area. Then, the setting values of the second to fourth holding areas are respectively shifted to an area with a smaller area number (first to third holding areas), and the setting values of the next holding area are shifted to the fourth holding area. Ru. Thereby, the set value which shows the stop symbol of the fluctuation production in process of execution is memorize | stored in the execution area. In the case of shifting the setting value of each holding area (first to fourth holding areas, next holding area), for example, it may be performed only when the setting value is stored in the shift source holding area. As a result, the number of times of data shift can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced. In addition, regardless of whether setting values are stored in the shift source holding area, the setting values of the respective holding areas (first to fourth holding areas, next holding area) may be shifted. good.

  Next, the relationship between the setting value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol in the variation effect will be described. FIG. 14 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of the relationship between the setting value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect. As shown in FIG. 14B, eight types of setting values are provided in the present embodiment. Specifically, as set values, “set value: out”, “set value: chance eye”, “set value: skip after outset”, “set value: skip after big hit”, “set value: first skip”, "Setting value: jackpot", "setting value: chance eye & odd variation jackpot", "setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" are provided.

  When the change effect is executed when the set value of the execution area of the stop symbol instruction storage table is "set value: out", the stop symbol of the change effect becomes "outside pattern other than the chance eye" and the setting of the execution area When the fluctuation effect is executed when the value is “set value: chance”, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect becomes “the chance”. Likewise, if the setting value of the execution area is "setting value: skip after falling out", "setting value: skip after big hit", "setting value: first time skip", when the fluctuation effect is executed, If the stop symbol is "outside symbol other than chance eyes" and the setting value of the execution area is "set value: big hit" and the fluctuation effect is executed, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect is "probably big hit symbol" Or "usually a jackpot symbol" will be. In addition, it will be determined when a stop symbol command to be described later is received by the effect control device 117 as to which jackpot stop symbol will be given.

  In addition, when the change production is executed when the setting value of the execution area is "set value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot", at least one or more "chance eyes" are displayed in the change production, and finally, The stop symbol is "probably big hit symbol". In addition, when the change production is executed when the setting value of the execution area is "set value: chance eye & normal jackpot", at least one or more "chance eyes" are displayed in the change production, and finally, The stop symbol is "usually a big hit symbol".

  Next, the timing at which a new set value is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table will be described. FIG. 14C is a schematic view showing an example of a prize information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device 110 and a setting value corresponding to the lottery result indicated by the command. When the effect control device 117 receives a winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device 110, a set value (aspect information) corresponding to the received winning information command is added to the stop symbol instruction storage table. Is stored in In that case, the setting values are stored in the ascending order of the area numbers among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas).

  As shown in FIG. 14 (c), if the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command is "reach out of back and forth," "reach other than back and forth out of reach," and "complete out of reach," "set value: out" is stop symbol instruction storage It is newly stored in the table. Further, if the lottery result indicated by the received prize information command is “probable variation big hit”, “ordinary big hit”, “setting value: big hit” is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, when the set value corresponding to the received winning information command (lottery result) is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table, the content of the set value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table is used. In response, the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table are updated (see S1509, S1510 and S1513 of FIG. 34). When this update is performed, "set value: out" and "set value: jackpot" stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table are changed to any of the above-described eight types of set values.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. The special figure reservation ball counter 273b is a counter for counting the number of times of prize holding for the first entrance 64 (the special figure reservation ball number N). The special figure holding ball counter 273 b has a maximum value of “4”, and is initialized to “0” when setting an initial value of the RAM (see S1013 in FIG. 27). In addition, the value of special figure reservation ball counter 273b (special figure reservation ball number N), when the winning a prize information command transmitted from main controller 110 is received (refer to S1404 in Figure 33), fluctuation pattern command and production It is updated when the time addition command is received (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  The chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed. In the case of continuous chance counter effect 273c, 1 is added each time the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the chance symbol is executed, and when the continuous chance effect is finished (see S1417 in FIG. 33), the RAM It is initialized to "0" at the time of initial value setting (see S1013 in FIG. 27).

  The fluctuation time memory 273d is a memory in which the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. When the fluctuation pattern command and the presentation time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110 are received, the fluctuation time is stored in the fluctuation time memory 273d (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern command is a command indicating the pattern of fluctuation presentation to be started (outside fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, special reach fluctuation, etc.), and the presentation time addition command should be started to be executed. It is a command which shows the pattern of the notice production of change production. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is determined for each of the patterns of the fluctuation effect, and the extension time and the shortening time are determined for each of the patterns of the advance effect. Therefore, the fluctuation time memory 273d stores a time obtained by totaling the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the extension time (shortened time) corresponding to the rendering time addition command.

  The fluctuation time counter 273 e is a counter in which an elapsed time from when the fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. The fluctuation start flag 273 f is a flag that is turned on when the start of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is instructed from the main control device 110 and is turned off when the fluctuation effect is started. Specifically, the fluctuation start flag 273f is set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command and the presentation time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110 are received (see S1407 in FIG. 33), and the third symbol display device is displayed. The variable effect is set to OFF when 81 is started (see S1305 in FIG. 30).

  Whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is within the changeable stop symbol period (that is, within the changeable period) whether the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect started in the third symbol display device 81 is changed or not And is set to ON only when out-of-range fluctuation or normal reach fluctuation is started (see S1910 and S1911 in FIG. 41). While the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol (that is, within the changeable period). On the other hand, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off, the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed can not be changed. Specifically, the changeable period is over or the change effect is not executed. And so on.

  The stop symbol setting flag 273h is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is being set. When the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on, it indicates that it is in the process of setting the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect to be started (or started to be executed), and the stop symbol setting flag 273h is If it is off, it indicates that the setting of the stop symbol is finished or the setting of the stop symbol is not yet performed.

  The stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set. The stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is set to ON when the setting of the stop symbol is completed. When the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is off, it indicates that the setting of the stop symbol is not yet performed.

  For example, the chance display count selection counter 273 j is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 1 to 4 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 4). If the chance eye super fluctuation A to D is executed instead of the super reach fluctuation or the special reach fluctuation is executed to execute the chance eye special fluctuation A to F during the continuous chance eye effect production, this chance eye The value of the display number selection counter 273 j is referred to. Then, among the chance eye super fluctuation A to D or the chance eye special fluctuation A to F, the one showing “the chance eye” the same number of times as the reference value is selected and executed.

  If the chance eye normal fluctuation, the chance eye super fluctuation A to D, or the chance eye special fluctuation A to F is executed, the pseudo fluctuation chance eye display number memory 273k continuously displays "chance eye" in the fluctuation effect It is a memory in which the number is stored.

  The stop symbol pattern table memory 2731 is a memory for storing a stop symbol pattern table. The stop symbol pattern table is a table for preparing in advance an arrangement (combination of symbols) of the third symbol corresponding to the pattern of the stop symbol for each pattern of the stop symbol. In addition, only information (hereinafter, referred to as "third symbol array information") indicating "the array of third symbols" is stored in this table, and image data and the like are not stored.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, first, the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) corresponding to the pattern of the stop symbol to be displayed is It is acquired from within this stop symbol pattern table. And, in order to constitute the stop design which corresponds to the 3rd design arrangement information which is acquired, the graphics data of the 3rd design which is included in the stop design is acquired. After that, the image of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the arrangement of the third symbol indicated by the third symbol array information, and as a result, the stop symbol is displayed.

  Here, the stop symbol pattern table will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b). Fig.15 (a) is schematic which shows an example of the content of a stop symbol pattern table, FIG.15 (b) is schematic which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol pattern table which is being updated. In the following description, only the case where the variable display scrolls horizontally will be described. However, when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 'and the middle symbol row Z2 is middle. The symbol row Z2 'may be read by replacing the lower row symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3'.

  The stop symbol pattern table is a table for preparing in advance, for each stop symbol pattern, third symbol array information (information indicating the third symbol array) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. In addition, as above-mentioned, in this embodiment, as a pattern of a stop symbol, "a miss chance eye", a "reach chance eye", a "probability variation big hit symbol", a "normal big hit symbol", a "long reach out reach symbol", " Reach design other than the front and back deviation, "full out design" is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (a), in the stop symbol pattern table, the probability variation big hit area, the normal big hit area, the front and back side reach area, the front and back side reach area, the reach chance eye area, and the front chance eye area and , A completely out of area and a symbol pattern generation area are provided.

  The probability variation jackpot area is an area for storing the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “probability variation jackpot symbol”. Similarly, the normal big hit area corresponds to the "normal big hit symbol", the front and back out of reach area corresponds to the "front and back out of reach design", the reach area other than front and back out corresponds to the "reach reach other than back and forth", reach The chance eye area corresponds to the "reach chance eye", the out-of-chance eye area corresponds to the "out-of-chance eye", and the completely out of the area is for storing each third symbol array information corresponding to the "complete out of design" It is an area. Although the details will be described later, the symbol pattern generation area is a work area when the stop symbol pattern table is updated.

  Further, in each area, a first area, a second area, and a third area are provided, and in the first area, three symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, Among the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 9A), information indicating each symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is stored, and similarly, in the second area, Information indicating each symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is stored, and information indicating each symbol of the lower row symbol row Z3 is stored in the third area.

  Specifically, in the first area, the arrangement numbers (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reels corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 and at the left end of the three third symbols constituting the upper symbol row Z1 The sequence number of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored. Likewise, in the second area, the arrangement number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2 and the arrangement number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2 is It is memorized. In the third area, the arrangement numbers (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reels corresponding to the lower figure row Z3 and the array numbers of the third pattern stopped and displayed at the left end of the lower figure row Z3 are stored. Ru.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 15A, “6” is stored in the first area of the probability variation big hit area, “12” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. I assume. The array number of the first area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the upper symbol row Z1. Therefore, when the array number is "6", the upper symbol row Z1 sequentially extends from the left to the right. 7) It shows that it is a pattern row aligned with "", "shellfish", and "Ancho" (6). Likewise, when the arrangement number of the second area is "12", the middle symbol row Z2 is a symbol arranged in order from "left" to "right", "shellfish", "jugong (7)", "shellfish" When the sequence number of the third area is "11", the lower row of the figure row Z3 is "left-handed" (6), "shellfish" and "dugong (7)" in the order from left to right. Indicates that it is a row of symbols aligned with.

  When these symbol rows are combined, since "Jugon (7)" is lined up on the left upward line L5 (see FIG. 9A), it becomes a stop symbol indicating a probability variation big hit symbol. Therefore, when the stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on each arrangement number of the probability variation jackpot area, the probability variation jackpot symbol is displayed.

  In addition, since the description is the same for the normal jackpot area, the front and back reach area, the reach area other than the front and back, the reach chance eye area, the off chance eye area, and the completely out area, the description will be omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in each of the first to third areas, one array element number indicating each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is stored. Therefore, inside the RAM 273 rather than storing the arrangement numbers of the three third symbols constituting each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 and storing the arrangement order of the third symbols of each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3. The amount of information to be stored in can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, among the first to third areas, among the three third symbols constituting each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, the array number of the third symbol to be displayed stopped at the left end Although stored, the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the center may be stored, or the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the right end may be stored. Further, among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, the array number of any two third symbols may be stored, and each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is configured. The sequence numbers of the three third symbols may be stored respectively.

  Next, a symbol pattern generation area will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol pattern generation area is a work area for updating each area (such as a probability variation big hit area or a normal big hit area) in the stop symbol pattern table, and in each of the first to third areas, the value is like a counter. Will be updated.

  Specifically, 1 is added to the third area periodically (for example, every 5 ms), and when the value of the third area reaches the maximum value (ie 18), the third area is cleared to 1 and , 1 is added to the second area. Then, when the value of the second area reaches the maximum value (ie, 20), the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area. When the value of the first area reaches the maximum value (ie, 18), the first area is simply cleared to 1.

  Also, each time the value of the symbol pattern generation area is updated, the value (arrangement number) of each of the first to third areas after the update is the area in the stop symbol pattern table (for example, the probability variation) It is determined whether it corresponds to a big hit area, a normal big hit area, etc.), and the value (sequence number) of the symbol pattern generation area after updating is stored in the determined area. That is, in the symbol pattern generation area, a new third symbol array (combination of symbols) is generated, and thereafter, the generated third symbol array corresponds to the third symbol array (for example, probability variation big hit It is stored (copied) in an area or a normal jackpot area etc.).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 15B, “15” is stored in the first area of the symbol pattern generation area, “1” is stored in the second area, and “18” is stored in the third area. It is assumed that Here, 1 is added to the third area at the update timing of the symbol pattern generation area, but in this case, the value of the third area exceeds the maximum value (18), so the third area is cleared to 1 At the same time, 1 is added to the second area. As a result, the symbol pattern generation area is updated to a state in which the first area is "15", the second area is "2", and the third area is "1".

  If the first area is "15", it indicates that the upper symbol row Z1 is a symbol row aligned with "shellfish", "harissenbon (2)" and "shellfish" sequentially from left to right, and the following Similarly, when the second area is "2", the middle symbol row Z2 is aligned with "shellfish", "harissenbon (2)", and "shellfish", and when the third area is "1", the pattern shown below It is shown that row Z3 is a row of symbols aligned with "octopus (1)", "shellfish", and "harissenbon (3)".

  When these symbol rows are combined, since "Harrisembon (2)" exists in each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, a stop symbol indicating an eye for a chance of falling off is obtained. Therefore, the value of the updated symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the out-of-check chance area in the stop symbol pattern table.

  Then, when the symbol pattern generation area is updated again, 1 is added to the third area. As a result, in the symbol pattern generation area, the first area is "15" and the second area is "2", the second Three areas are updated to "2". Therefore, in this case, only the arrangement of the pattern row Z3 shown below is updated.

  When the 3rd area is "2", the lower figure handle row Z3 shows the symbol row aligned with "shellfish", "halisenbon (2)", and "shellfish", and when these symbol rows are combined, the middle line Since "Harrisenbon (2)" is lined up with L2, it usually becomes a stop pattern showing a big hit design. Therefore, the value of the updated symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the normal jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table.

  Similarly, the update of the stop symbol pattern table is repeated each time the symbol pattern generation area is updated. In addition, as a result of the symbol pattern generation area being updated, the value of the updated symbol pattern generation area being the stop symbol pattern table is generated when the stop symbol indicating the reach symbol in front and back, and the reach symbol other than back and forth is generated. Although it is stored in the reach area in the front and back, and in the reach area other than the front and back, respectively, when the stop symbol is the reach chance eye, the value of the updated symbol pattern generation area is the reach chance eye area Are also stored.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. The display symbol pattern memory 273 m is a memory for storing the third symbol array information (information indicating the array of the third symbol) of the stop symbol actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display symbol pattern memory 273 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, and FIG. 16 (b) is a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example. In the following description, only the case where the variable display scrolls horizontally (in the direction of the arrow X in the figure) will be described, but when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol column Z1 is displayed as the left symbol column Z1 '. The middle symbol row Z2 may be read by replacing the middle symbol row Z2 with the lower symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  The display symbol pattern memory 273 m is a memory for storing the third symbol array information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) of the stop symbol to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol pattern table Similarly, a first area, a second area, and a third area are provided.

  That is, in the first area, the arrangement numbers (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reels corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 are stopped and displayed at the left end among the three third symbols constituting the upper symbol row Z1. The sequence number of the third symbol is stored. Likewise, in the second area, the arrangement number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2 and the arrangement number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2 is It is memorized. In the third area, the arrangement numbers (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reels corresponding to the lower figure row Z3 and the array numbers of the third pattern stopped and displayed at the left end of the lower figure row Z3 are stored. Ru.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, “6” is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273 m, “12” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. In this state, it is assumed that a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Since the array number of the first area indicates the third symbol on the left end of the upper symbol row Z1, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 sequentially from left to right as shown in FIG. 16 (b) , “Jugong (7)”, “Shellfish”, “Anchow (6)” and a row of symbols are displayed.

  Likewise, since the array number of the second area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2, lined with "shellfish", "jugong (7)", "shellfish" sequentially from left to right The row of symbols is displayed, and the array number of the third area indicates the third symbol on the left end of the row of symbols Z3 in the figure below. Therefore, from left to right, "Ancho (6)", "shellfish", "jugong ( 7) "is displayed. As described above, each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3 is stopped and displayed in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower pattern row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Further, the same description will be made in the case where other arrangement numbers are stored in the first to third areas, and therefore the description will be omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in each of the first to third areas, one array element number indicating each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is stored. Therefore, inside the RAM 273 rather than storing the arrangement numbers of the three third symbols constituting each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 and storing the arrangement order of the third symbols of each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3. The amount of information to be stored in can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, among the first to third areas, among the three third symbols constituting each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, the array number of the third symbol to be displayed stopped at the left end Although stored, the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the center may be stored, or the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the right end may be stored. Further, among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, the array number of any two third symbols may be stored, and each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is configured. The sequence numbers of the three third symbols may be stored respectively.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the random number extension possible period counter 273 n receives a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable random hitting”, the final lottery result is “done until the effect period of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received winning information command. It is a counter used to determine whether it is possible to extend (continue) the presentation period of consecutive chance eye effects that are “off”. The remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before extension of the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is not possible (impossible of continuing the continuous chance eye effect) is stored in the definite variation time extension possible period counter 273n.

  Although details will be described later, it is possible to receive a winning information command in which the lottery result is “reach out of back and forth,” and as a result, the continuous chance effect effect in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed. Then, 5 is always stored in the probability variable extension possible period counter 273 n as the remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before the effect period of the continuous chance effect presentation becomes impossible (cannot be continued). After that, each time a prize information command is newly received, the value is decremented by one, and when the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n becomes less than 1, a prize information command whose lottery result is "certainly hit big hit" is received Also, it will not be possible to extend (continue) the presentation period for continuous chance eye effects.

On the other hand, when the probability change time extension possible period counter 273n is 1 or more, when a prize information command whose lottery result is “probability change jackpot” is received, a final lottery until a fluctuation effect corresponding to the received prize information command The presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation whose result is "off" is extended (continuation). As a result, apparently, the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye effect production is changed to the “permanent change jackpot”, and the production period of the continuous chance eye effect production is extended.
When the normal time extension possible period counter 273 o receives a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the final lottery result is “done until the effect period of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received winning information command. It is a counter used to determine whether it is possible to extend (continue) the presentation period of consecutive chance eye effects that are “off”. The remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before extension of the presentation period of the continuous chance-eye effect is not possible (impossible to continue the continuous chance-eye effect) is stored in the normal-time extendable period counter 273o.

  Although details will be described later, it is possible to receive a winning information command in which the lottery result is “reach out of back and forth,” and as a result, the continuous chance effect effect in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed. Then, the number of winning information commands that can be received by the normal extension extension period counter 273o can not be extended until the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is not extended (the continuous chance eye effect can not be continued), 1 or 2 Is stored. After that, each time a winning information command is newly received, the value is decremented by one, and when this normal time extension possible period counter 273 o becomes less than 1, a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal win” is received. Also, it will not be possible to extend the production period for continuous chance eye effects (continue for continuous chance eye effects).

  On the other hand, when the normal time extension possible period counter 273o is 1 or more, when a winning information command having a lottery result of “normal big hit” is received, a final drawing is performed until a fluctuation effect corresponding to the received winning information command. The presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect production whose result is “off” is extended (continuous chance eye effect presentation is continued). As a result, apparently, the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye effect production is changed to "normal jackpot", and the production period of the continuous chance eye effect production is extended.

  In the present embodiment, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility that the game state shifts to the advantageous gaming state (big hit) for the player after the continuous chance eye effect is finished, as the number of times of continuous display of "chance eye" increases. Be done. In addition, when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is "off" is executed, or when it is executed, a winning information command in which the lottery result is "(probably odd or normal) jackpot" is newly added. When it is received, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect production is extended (continuous chance eye effect production is continued).

  Therefore, when transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the number of times of displaying "chance eyes" displayed in the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, and the effect time of the continuous chance eye effect is extended. be able to. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player after improving the sense of expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the gaming state advantageous to the player, and further, after continuously giving the player a sense of expectation for a long time. It is possible to shift to the gaming state. Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to the gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In the case of giving a predetermined gaming value to the player (for example, performing payout balls) instead of transitioning to a gaming state (big hit) which is advantageous for the player, it is displayed in the continuous chance eye effect production In addition to increasing the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed, it may be configured to extend the presentation time of the continuous opportunity eye presentation. Even in this case, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely giving the predetermined game value to the player, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. The image controller 274 adjusts timings of the character ROM 275, the video RAM 276, the input / output port 277, and the output port 278 to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 276 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 275 is a memory in which data for presentation such as a symbol (a background symbol, a third symbol or a decorative symbol) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in a compressed format. In the character ROM 275, for example, various data for effect used for the fluctuation effect, a character symbol of the third symbol, a background symbol, a notice character symbol and the like are stored. As various data for effect, data (hereinafter referred to as “variation effect data”) used for each fluctuation effect of outlier fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation corresponds.

  As described above, each of the fluctuation effects of chance eye normal fluctuation, chance eye super fluctuation A to D, and chance eye special fluctuation A to F is each fluctuation effect of outlier fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, special reach fluctuation. Since it is a combination, the fluctuation presentation data used only for each fluctuation presentation of chance eye normal fluctuation, chance eye super fluctuation A to D, and chance eye special fluctuation A to F are not stored. However, it is also possible to prepare and store in the character ROM 275 variation presentation data used only for each variation presentation of the chance eye normal variation, the chance eye super variation A to D, and the chance eye special variation A to F.

  In the character ROM 275, the above-described effect data is stored in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the data for effect is constituted by about 1024 M bytes, and the data of about 1024 M bytes is compressed to about 768 M bytes and stored in the character ROM 275. The data for presentation compressed and stored in the character ROM 275 is read out and decompressed, and then written to a predetermined area of the video RAM 276.

  The video RAM 276 is a memory for storing data for effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (ready to be used immediately). The video RAM 276 has a variation effect data storage area 276a and a stop symbol data storage area 276b.

  The change effect data storage area 276a is a memory for storing change effect data for performing change effects such as high speed change in the third symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol data storage area 276b is a third symbol display device It is a memory for storing image data of a third symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop symbol data”) for forming a stop symbol to be displayed at 81.

  In the present embodiment, the one-time fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the fluctuation effect data and the stop symbol data. Although the details will be described later, when the change effect is started, first, an image corresponding to the change effect data (change effect) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the time, and then the stop symbol is displayed Every time it is time, a stop symbol (stop symbol data) is displayed (see S1310 and S1311 in FIG. 30).

  When the production control device 117 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the production time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110, it reads out from the character ROM 275 the fluctuation production data of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the received command. Are stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a (see S1908 and S1909 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, when the stop symbol command transmitted from main controller 110 is received, the stop symbol data of the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the received command is read from character ROM 275 and stored in this stop symbol data storage area 276b. (See S2114 to S2117 in FIG. 43).

  The reason why various data are read from the character ROM 275 and stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a and the stop symbol data storage area 276b is that the processing speed is generally higher in the RAM than in the ROM. For example, when the effect data is read out from the character ROM 275 and displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, when the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read out and smooth display can not be performed or clear. It may be impossible to display. It is also because it is easier to process display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative pattern or changing the color of the background pattern) by storing in the RAM.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 112, 117, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As the outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, 12 volt voltage for driving various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor etc., 5 for logic It generates a voltage of volts, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. and supplies the voltage required by each control device 110 to 112, 117, etc. among the voltage of 12 volts, the voltage of 5 volts and the backup voltage to each. .

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data in the RAM 203, and the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111 It transmits to the payout control device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 17 to 24. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 17) activated upon power-on and a main process (see FIG. 18) executed after the start-up process (regular implementation). In the configuration, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) activated in 2 ms cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. First, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then start-up processing and main processing will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 22, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a process repeatedly executed by the MPU 201, for example, in a cycle of 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, various switches are read (S501). Here, for example, the states of the various switches 208 connected to the main control unit 110 are read, and provided to various winning openings (general winning opening 63, specified winning opening 65a, first ball entry opening 64, etc.) When a winning is detected at the switch, a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 111 to pay out a winning ball number corresponding to the winning opening is set (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the first initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is The updated value is stored in the second initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4, and these counter values have maximum values (the present embodiment In the form, when reaching 738, 4, 238, 250), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the buffer corresponding to the counters C1 to C4 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, the start winning process with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S504), the launch control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by a touch sensor (not shown), and the condition is that the strike stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing is not operated. , It is a process which determines on / off of ball firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the start winning process (S504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504). The start winning process (S504) is a process for storing (holding) the data corresponding to the winning in the holding ball storage area 203a when the winning at the first entrance 64 is detected, as described above. It is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  In the start winning process (S504), first, the state (on or off) of the first ball entry switch 208a is read, and it is determined whether or not the ball has won (enters) the first ball entry 64 ( S651). In the process of S651, when it is determined that the state of the first ball entry switch 208a is off and there is no winning on the first ball entry 64 (S651: No), this is performed without doing anything. The start winning process (S504) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state of the first ball entry switch 208a is on and the ball is won (entered) in the first ball entry 64 (S651: Yes), the special figure holding ball counter It is determined whether or not the value 203c (special figure holding ball number N) is less than a predetermined upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S652).

  In the process of S652, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (special figure reservation ball number N) is 4, that is, when the upper limit value has already been reached (S652: No), S653 to S662 The respective processes are skipped, the start winning process (S504) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, in the process of S652, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (special figure holding ball number N) is less than 4 (S652: Yes), 1 is added to the special figure holding ball counter 203c (S653).

  Next, each value of the first collision random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated by the process of S503 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is stored in the holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203. The storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 in the area corresponding to the special drawing reserve ball number N among the free reserve areas (the reserve first area to the reserve fourth area) are stored (S654).

  For example, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N) updated by the process of S653 is "1", the respective storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 of the holding first area are each counter Each value of C1 to C3 is stored respectively. That is, when the special figure reservation number of balls N is "X", each value of each counter C1-C3 is stored in each storage area 203a1-203a3 of the reserve X area, respectively.

  Next, based on the stored values of the counters C1 to C3 and the state of the prefetch high probability state flag 203e, a new winning lottery result is obtained (S655). More specifically, if the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is on, each value of the stored counters C1 to C3 is analyzed, assuming that the jackpot probability is a high probability state, and the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is off. Then, assuming that the jackpot probability is a low probability state, each value of each stored counter C1 to C3 is analyzed. And as a lottery result, whether it is "big hit" or "outside", and if it is a big hit if it is "probable big hit" or "usually a big hit" and if it is out, the stop symbol is "back and forth out of reach", "back and forth out" Get (read ahead) whether it is "other reach" or "complete out".

  Next, a prize information command indicating the acquired lottery result is output to the effect control device 117 (S656). Here, without waiting for the external output process (see S201 of FIG. 18) of the main process, the prize information command is immediately output to the effect control device 117. Since the main processing is executed every 4 ms, if the prize information command is immediately transmitted, the command can be transmitted to the effect control device 117 at most about 4 ms earlier.

  Therefore, the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced as compared to the case where the winning information command is output at the execution timing of the next main processing. Further, since the effect control device 117 can receive the winning information command and the other commands (for example, the hold number command) at different timings, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed at different timings, Control burden can be distributed. Further, since the main control device 110 can separately transmit the ball entry information command and the other commands to the effect control means 117, the control burden can be dispersed as compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing. .

  In the present embodiment, the winning information command is immediately output, but here, only the setting of the winning information command is performed, and output to the effect control device 117 by the external output processing of the execution timing of the next main processing. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S655 is a jackpot (S657), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S657: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot is a definite variation jackpot (S658) . On the other hand, when the lottery result is out (S657: No), the process of S658 to S660 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S661.

  In the process of S658, if the jackpot is a definite variation jackpot (S658: Yes), the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is set to ON (S659). On the other hand, if the jackpot is the normal jackpot (S658: No), the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is set to OFF (S660).

  Next, a pending number command is set (S661). Here, a number-of-holds command indicating the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N) is set. The hold number command set here is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the output holding number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special drawing holding ball number N indicated by the holding number command is turned on in the special drawing holding lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on according to the value of the special view holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N), and the new holding frequency is indicated by the lighting state (S662). When the process of S662 is completed, the start winning process (S504) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  According to the start winning process (S504) of FIG. 23 described above, when the first ball entrance switch 208a detects a winning on the first ball entrance 64, data corresponding to the winning (each counter C1 Each value of C3 to C3 can be stored in the area with the smallest area number among the vacant reserved areas (pended first area to reserved fourth area) of the reserved ball storage area 203a. Therefore, in the holding ball storage area 203a, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the winning in time can be stored. Therefore, the data is given with the order of winning in time (winning order). It can be memorized.

  In addition, the lottery result of data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the winning on the first entry slot 64 is read ahead, and the prize information command indicating the lottery result is output processing of the main processing (figure The output can be immediately output to the effect control device 117 without waiting for 18 (see S201). By immediately outputting (sending) the winning information command, the command can be sent to the effect control device 117 at a maximum speed of about 4 ms. Therefore, the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced.

  In addition, every time when the lottery result of data corresponding to a new winning combination is prefetched (acquired), the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203e can be updated based on the lottery result. Therefore, even when waiting for the start of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the new prize and acquiring the lottery result, when the data of the new prize is acquired, the state of the high probability state flag 203e of the lottery result is read It can be analyzed (prefetched) based on

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 in the payout emission control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing of main controller 110 and payout emission control device 111. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

  First, NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 will be described. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed in the payout and emission control device 111 will be described. By the NMI interruption process, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout launch control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start-up process of main controller 110. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the main control device 110, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when the MPU 201 is reset.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S101). Specifically, while setting a predetermined value to the stack pointer in advance and waiting for the sub control devices (the payout control device 111, the effect control device 117, etc.) to be in an operable state, the wait processing ( In the present embodiment, one second is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If not stored (S105: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If generation information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S111. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S213 of the main process (see FIG. 18). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 in order to initialize the payout control device 111 (S111). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. On the other hand, after transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of the power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S112, S113), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), occurrence information of the power failure is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S108). Next, a payout recovery command at power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S109), and the process proceeds to the processing of S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls. In the process of S110, an interrupt is permitted, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110 described later.

  Next, main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing main processing of main controller 110. The main process is a process for executing the main control of the pachinko machine 10, and is performed after the completion of the above-described start-up process (see FIG. 17) of the main controller 110 described above. It is a process. As an outline thereof, each processing of S201 to S206 is executed as periodic processing of 4 ms cycle, and the counter updating processing of S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

  In this main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to the sub control device (the payout control device 111, the effect control device 117, etc.) (S201). For example, when a prize ball command is set by the process of S501 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, for example, the number-of-holds command set by the start winning process (see FIG. 23) described above, and the variation of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 set by the variation start process (see FIG. 21) described later Various commands such as fluctuation pattern command necessary for display, stop symbol command, stop command, effect time addition command, etc. are transmitted to the effect control device 117 respectively. Furthermore, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  The transmission of output data such as these commands is performed in the order in which the output data such as commands are set. Then, when the presentation control device 117 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81), the effect control device 117 receives the command according to the received command. 3 The mode of the fluctuation effect or the jackpot effect displayed on the symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set.

  Next, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the buffer corresponding to each of the counters CS1 to CS3 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 have been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the processing and the first pattern display device 37 are performed. A variation process of setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the fluctuation process (S204), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, the large opening opening and closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 ( S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a prescribed number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeatedly performed for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds).

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "o" or "x") in the second symbol display portion 83 is executed (S206). It will be briefly described that the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the second entry ball opening 67 (through gate), and the second symbol display portion 83 The second symbol variation display is carried out. And the judgment of the hit in the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when it comes to the hit state of the second symbol, the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time, Is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S207), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S208) If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes of S201 to S208 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S208: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial random number counter CINI1 and the second initial random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in the present embodiment), it is set to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CINI1 and CINI2 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the buffers corresponding to the counters CS1 to CS3 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 mentioned above changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be randomly updated, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the process of S207, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed, so the process at the time of the power-off after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is transmitted to the sub control device (the payout control device 111, the effect control device 117, etc.) (S212) . Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S213), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  The processing of S207 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the state of the game performed in S201 to S206, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It can start from the process of S201. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S201. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see FIG. 17) is initialized. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value) in the process (S101), the process can be started from the process of S201. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the variation process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) of the main control device 110. The fluctuation process (S204) is a process for starting the fluctuation display corresponding to the data when the data corresponding to the winning is stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203a, and the main process (FIG. 18)).

  In this variation process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S301). During the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot (ie, two of "probable jackpot", "usually jackpot"), and jackpot The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the game is included. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this fluctuation processing (S204) is ended without performing anything, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110.

  If the jackpot is not inside (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S302: No), the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N) is acquired (S303).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304), and as a result of checking by the processing of S304, if the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No), S305 to S305 The process of S306 is skipped, and the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110. On the other hand, if the special figure reserve ball number N is 1 or more (S304: Yes), the reserve ball storage area order sending process to shift the data used for determination of big hit from reserve ball storage area 203a to reserve ball execution area 203b The process is executed (S305), and the variation start process for starting the variation display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). Then, the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110.

  Note that the holding ball storage area order forwarding process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, and the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, since this variation process (S204) is a subroutine executed in the main process, it is executed every 4 ms, but in the case of a big hit (S301: Yes) or in the case of variation (S302: Yes) In addition, since the processing of S305 to S306 is skipped, the fluctuation display is not started and the data corresponding to the pending prize are not consumed each time the fluctuation processing is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S302 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S307). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3, and this fluctuation time is If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, in the process of S307, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S308). The setting of the stop symbol is determined whether or not the big hit according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 "high probability state after big hit (( It is determined whether the symbol to be a “perhaps big hit)” or the symbol to be “a low probability state (usually a big hit) after the end of the big hit”.

  In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on in the “high probability state (probable variation big hit) after the big hit end”, and the green LED in the “low probability state (usually the big hit) after the big hit end”. Is turned on, and when it is out, the blue LED is turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  Further, in the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation among the plurality of LEDs 37a. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, a display mode for lighting the red LED is set.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S308, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37 The command is set (S309). When the effect control device 117 receives this stop command, the variation control in progress in the third symbol display device 81 is ended. More specifically, in the third symbol display device 81, when the variation time has passed, the variation is paused, and by receiving the stop command, the variation effect of 1 in the third symbol display device 81 ends. Then, when the process of S309 is completed, the variation process (S204) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the holding ball storage area order sending process (S305) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the holding ball storage area sequential feeding process (S305) of the main control device 110. The holding ball storage area sequential sending process (S305) is a process for shifting data used for determining the jackpot from the holding ball storage area 203a to the holding ball execution area 203b, and is executed during the variation process (see FIG. 19) Processing. In addition, this process is a process performed when the number of special figures reservation balls N is one or more.

  In this holding ball storage area sequential sending process (S305), first, each data stored in the holding first area of the holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203b (S351). Specifically, in the process of S351, the data stored in the first hit random number counter storage area 203a1 of the hold first area is shifted to the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the hold ball execution area 203b. Similarly, the data stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203a2 is transferred to the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the data stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is transferred to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. Shift to

  Next, each data stored in the pending second area to the pending fourth area is shifted to an area with a smaller area number (first to third areas) (S 352). In the present embodiment, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which the data is stored (held). Therefore, the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of times of data shift can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced. be able to.

  Further, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having a small area number, respectively. In that case, the determination as to whether or not the data is stored (held) in the reserved area (second to fourth) is unnecessary, so the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free space of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, the special figure reservation ball counter 203c value (special figure reservation number of balls N) is decremented by 1 (S353), and the value of the special figure reservation number of balls counter 203c (special figure holding number of balls N) after subtraction is shown A pending number command is set (S354). The hold number command set here is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the output holding number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special drawing holding ball number N indicated by the holding number command is turned on in the special drawing holding lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on according to the value of the special view holding ball counter 203c (the special figure holding ball number N), and the new holding frequency is displayed by the lighting state (S355). When the process of S355 is completed, the processing for sequentially storing the storage ball storage area (S305) is ended, and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 19).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the fluctuation start process (S306) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) of the main control device 110. The variation start process (S306) determines whether the jackpot is or not based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the holding ball execution area 203b, and according to the determination result It is a process for starting the fluctuation display, and is a process executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 19).

  In this variation start process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the holding ball execution area 203b is acquired (S401). That is, the value of the first collision random number counter C1 stored in the first collision random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b and the first collision type counter C2 stored in the first collision type counter storage area 203b2 And the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3.

  Then, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the process of S401, it is determined whether or not a big hit (S402). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode (low probability state or high probability state) of that occasion. As described above, at the time of normal low probability (the state of jackpot probability is normal), “373, 727” is the winning value among the numbers 0 to 738 of the random number counter C1 per first, and the time of high probability Is higher than normal), "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733" is the hit value.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the jackpot is, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired by the process of S401, which jackpot of the two types of jackpots ("probable jackpot", "normal jackpot") Determine the type per hit. As described above, in the case of the jackpot, if the numerical value ("0 to 4") of the first hit type counter C2 is "0, 4", it becomes "the low probability state (usually jackpot) after the jackpot end", "1 , 2 and 3 ", it becomes a" high probability state (probable variation big hit) after the end of the big hit ".

  In the process of S402, when it is determined that it is a big hit (S402: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired by the process of S401 is confirmed, and the display mode at the big hit is set (S403). That is, in the process of S403, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, transition to "high probability state (probable variation big hit) after big hit end" or "transition to low probability state (usually big hit) after big hit end" To set. When the transition state after the big hit ends is set, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on in the “high probability state (probable variation big hit) after the big hit end”, and the green LED in the “low probability state (usually the big hit) after the big hit end”. Is turned on, and when it is out, the blue LED is turned on.

  Further, based on the transition state after the big hit end, the stop design of the big hit which is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by the effect control device 117. That is, by setting the transition state after the big hit end by the process of S403, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S404). That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough variation time of symbol variation is determined among normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds), and special reach variation (60 seconds). In addition, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the variation time until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 '(middle symbol) stops) In other words, the number of fluctuating symbols is determined. By the determination of the variation pattern by the process of S404, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until stopping at the big hit symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined .

  The relationship between the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the fluctuation time is predetermined by a table or the like. The fluctuation time can also be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and is set only by the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether to set or to set both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be appropriately determined according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions at each time.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit in the process of S402 (S402: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S405). In the process of S405, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the holding ball execution area 203b. Based on the value of C3, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as "reach before / after out of reach", "reach outside of before / after out of reach", or "complete out of reach". In the present embodiment, as described above, whether it is a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than a normal state) or a low probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state) The table is set so that the range of values corresponding to the respective stop patterns of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is different according to the value (special figure reserved ball number N) or the like.

  Next, based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S406). That is, as in the above-described S404, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, out-of-range fluctuation (11 seconds), normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds), special reach variation (60 seconds) Among them, while determining the rough fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation, after the reach occurrence based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ' The fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the symbol (middle symbol) stops is determined. By the determination of the fluctuation pattern by the process of S406, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the disappointing symbol is determined .

  In addition, in the process of S405, when "the front and back out of reach" or "reach other than back and forth out of reach" is set as the display mode at the time of out, reach fluctuation (normal reach change, super reach change, special reach) by the process of S406 The table is set in advance so that any of the fluctuations) is determined.

  Then, when the process of S404 or the process of S406 is finished, next, an effect time to be added to or subtracted from the fluctuation time determined by the first and second fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S407). At this time, addition / subtraction of the rendering time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the work area 203d of the RAM 203, and the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set. The fluctuation time of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the addition / subtraction of the presentation time is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added for one second, and when the variation display time is added. Are added for two seconds, and the variable display time is reduced for one second. Four types of addition values are determined.

  In addition, when the fluctuation display time is added / subtracted, the advance notice effect that the expectation value of the big hit becomes high in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the slip effect effect or the like which makes the fluctuation time of the fluctuation symbol longer than usual and slips An effect of displaying the advance notice character, an effect of shortening the fluctuation time of the fluctuation symbol of 1 than usual and immediately stopping it, etc. are performed. Also, if the value of the random number counter C1 per win is a big hit, the probability that the additional value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so the player should expect a big hit by confirming the notice effect. Can.

  Next, the variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S404 or S406 (S408), and the stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S403 or S405. (S409). Then, a rendering time addition command is set according to the addition value of the rendering time determined in the process of S407 (S410).

  After the processing of S410, the fluctuation direction command according to the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b is set (S411), and this fluctuation start process (S306) is ended and the fluctuation process (FIG. 19) Return to

  The variation direction command set by the process of S411 is a command that defines whether the variation display displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is vertical scrolling or horizontal scrolling. In the present embodiment, when the value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the holding ball execution area 203b is an even number, the variation direction command corresponding to the horizontal scroll is set, and the first random number counter storage area When the value of 203 b 1 is an odd number, a fluctuation direction command corresponding to vertical scrolling is set.

  Each command set in the variation start process (S306) is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the effect control device 117 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81), the effect control device 117 receives the command according to the received command. 3 The mode of the fluctuation effect or the jackpot effect displayed on the symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set.

  Here, when the variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the order of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117 will be described. As described above, in the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 18), the commands are transmitted in the order in which the commands are set. Moreover, before execution of the fluctuation start process (S306), the holding ball storage area sequential feed process (S305) is always executed.

  Therefore, the "holding number command" is set by the holding ball storage area sequential sending process (S305), and then the "variation pattern command", "stop symbol command", "calculation time addition command" by the fluctuation start process (S306). The commands are set in the order of “change direction command”. Therefore, various commands are transmitted from main controller 110 to effect control device 117 in the order of "number of pending commands", "variation pattern command", "stop symbol command", "calculation time addition command" and "variation direction command" Be done.

  Note that the information indicated by the "variation direction command" may be included in the "variation pattern command" without providing the "variation direction command". Further, the information indicated by the “calculation time addition command” may be included in the “variation pattern command” without providing the “calculation time addition command”. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which combined each.

  Also, these commands may be sent out of order. Also, the setting order of the commands may be changed, and the order of transmission may be changed. For example, if the "variation pattern command" and the "variation direction command" are sent first from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117, the variation display is started before other commands are transmitted, and the variation display is quickened. You can get started. This is because the "number-of-holds command", "stop symbol command", "calculation time addition command" and the like do not affect the start of the variable display.

  In addition, the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside may be limited to a predetermined number (for example, three) by execution of one external output process (S201). For example, when the number of commands to be transmitted is large (for example, six), transmission is performed over two main processes (the main process to be executed this time and the main process to be executed next). This is because if there are many commands to be transmitted at one time, it takes time to transmit, and there is a possibility that the main processing can not be executed every 4 ms. When configured in this way, it may be configured to transmit from a command with high priority. Specifically, as described above, the "variation pattern command" and the "variation direction command" are transmitted first from the main controller 110 to the effect control device 117, and then the "number-of-holds command" and the "stop symbol command" , “Calculation time addition command”, etc., is transmitted over one or more main processings. Even if the maximum number of commands to be sent to the outside is changed according to the remaining time of the main process, the amount of information to be processed in each main process, etc., by one execution of the external output process (S201). good.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. The processing of the MPU 211 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 25, the start-up process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process of the payout control device 111. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the payout control device 111, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when the MPU 211 is reset.

  First, initial setting processing accompanying power on is executed (S801). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value determined in advance, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S802), and the external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  After that, processing of data backup regarding the RAM 213 in the MPU 211 is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 (S804), and if not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the processing is shifted to S811. Transition. If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S805), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S806: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S811. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 213, as will be described later in the process of S917 of the main process (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111. Instead of the RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the RAM initialization processing of S811 and S812, after all areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), an initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). Thereafter, initialization of peripheral devices of the MPU 211 is performed (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the processing shifts to the main processing (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S806: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is held, In addition to clearing the power shutoff occurrence information (S807), in order to start the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls, the payout permission of the balls is set (S808). Thereafter, initialization of peripheral devices of the MPU 211 is performed (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main processing (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111 described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the main processing executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing main processing of the payout control device 111. The main process is a process for executing the payout control of the ball, which is executed after the completion of the start-up process (see FIG. 25) of the above-described payout control device 111, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In this main processing, first, an award ball command, a payout return command, a payout initialization command and the like transmitted from the main control device 110 are received, and command determination processing for determining the type of those commands is performed (S901). The command determination process is a process for executing a process corresponding to each command according to various commands transmitted and received from the main control apparatus 110. Here, for example, the process is transmitted from the main control apparatus 110. When the payout return command, the payout initialization command, or the prize ball command is received, the payout of the prize balls and the lending balls is permitted.

  When the command determination process (S901) is completed, it is determined whether or not the payout is permitted (S902). If the payout is not permitted (S902: No), the main control device 110 is not yet in the up state. In such a case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout is permitted in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, if the payout is permitted in the process of S902 (S902: Yes), the state recovery switch 120 is checked, and the state recovery operation is executed when it is determined that the state recovery operation is started (S903).

  Thereafter, in accordance with the change in the state of the lower tray 50, setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full release state is executed (S904). That is, the full tray condition of the lower tray 50 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full tank switch, and when the lower tray full is reached, setting of the lower tray full condition is executed, and when the lower tray full is exhausted. , Set the lower plate full release state. Further, in accordance with the change of the state of the tank ball, the setting of the tank ball nonexistent state or the tank sphere nonexistent cancellation state is executed (S905). That is, the tank ball absence state is determined by the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, and the tank sphere absence state is executed when the tank sphere absence is reached, and the tank sphere absence state released when the tank sphere absence is eliminated. Execute the setting. Thereafter, the presence or absence of a state to be notified is determined, and when there is a state to be notified, notification is performed using a 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S906).

  Next, the processing of payout balls is executed by the processing of S 907 to S 909. That is, if the prize balls are not dispensable and the stored total number of prize balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the prize ball control process is started to pay out the prize balls (S909) . On the other hand, if the payout balls can not be paid out (S 907: Yes) or the total number of balls is 0 (S 908: Yes), the processing proceeds to the processing for the payout of the rental balls.

  In the processing of the lending of the balls at S910 to S912, if it is not in the dispensable state of the lending balls and the request for the withdrawal of the balls from the card unit is received (S910: No, S911: Yes), A rental ball control process is started (S912). On the other hand, if the lending balls can not be paid out (S910: Yes) or the rental ball payout request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Also, even after the end of the rental ball control process (S912), the process proceeds to S913.

  In the process of S913, control of the vibrator 134 (vibrator motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged (S913). After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 (S914), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored (S914: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1 Since the output is not performed and the power is not shut off, in this case, the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes of S901 to S913 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S914, if the occurrence information of the power cut is stored (S914: Yes), the power is cut off by the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. That is, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S915), and the command determination processing is executed again to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from main controller 110 (S916). ). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), the access to the RAM 213 is inhibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area backed up in the RAM 213.

  In addition, since the process of S914 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off at the timing when one cycle of the main process of the payout control device 111 ends, when returning from the state before the power-off, the process is started up. After completion of the process, the process can start from the process of S901. That is, the main process can be started as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, the process of the initial setting of the payout control device 111 without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer (S801) In (see FIG. 25), the process can be started from S901 by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value). Therefore, the control load on the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of the payout control device 111. In addition, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 43, the schematic views of FIGS. 44 and 45, and the tables of FIGS. 46 to 53. The process will be described. The processing of the MPU 271 is roughly divided into a start-up process activated upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and the various commands transmitted from the main control unit 110. Command reception interrupt processing, and stop symbol pattern table update processing for continuing to update the stop symbol pattern table until the power is turned off after the power is turned on.

  For the convenience of description, at first, with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. 48, an example of the conditions under which continuous chance eye effects are started and the number of times of continuous display of "chance eyes" displayed when started will be described. Do. Next, referring to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the condition that the number of continuous display of "chance eyes" displayed in the continuous chance eye effect increases and the number of continuous display of the final "chance eyes" when increased And an example will be described. Next, with reference to FIG. 51 to FIG. 53, under the condition that the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (the continuous chance eye effect is continued), and displayed when extended (continued) An example of the continuous display count of the chance eye "will be described. Then, the stop symbol pattern table update process is described with reference to FIG. 31, and subsequently, the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the start-up process (see FIG. 27), and the main process (see FIG. 28). Each process will be described in order.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new winning is detected in main controller 110, if the special figure holding ball number N at the time of winning is less than 4 (maximum number of holding times), each at the time of winning A lottery result corresponding to each value of the counters C1 to C3 is pre-read, and a winning information command indicating the lottery result is transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  Then, when the prize information command is received in the effect control device 117, the effect control device 117 determines whether or not to perform the continuous chance eye effect, and when it is determined to start the continuous chance eye effect, the execution is performed In order to set the stop symbol of the variation effect scheduled to be executed during or during execution to "the chance eye", update of the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a (update of the set value of each area, etc.) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to perform the continuous chance eye effect is performed only when the lottery result of the new winning combination is "probably big hit", "normal big hit" or "reach before and after". In addition, the number of times the "chance eye" is scheduled to be displayed at the start of the successive chance eye effect is the timing when the effect control device 117 receives the prize information command, the lottery result indicated by the received prize information command, and the stop symbol instruction It depends on the combination with the contents of the storage table.

  Although the details will be described later (see FIG. 49 and FIG. 50), the number of continuous display of “chance eye” in the continuous chance eye effect production may increase and may increase at the start of the continuous opportunity eye effect production. More specifically, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance item production is the "perhaps big hit" or the "normal big hit", when the last change production becomes the "super reach change" or the "special reach change", During the final variation production, the "chance" is displayed the same number of times as the value of the "ch" display count selection counter 273j. Therefore, in this case, if the value of the chance display count selection counter 273 j is 2 or more, the continuous display count of “chance show” in the continuous chance production is increased.

  First, with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. 48, an example of the conditions under which continuous chance eye effects are started and the number of times of continuous display of “chance eyes” displayed when started will be described. Each of FIGS. 46 to 48 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see FIG. 14). The left side of the figure (referred to as the left figure) shows the contents of the table immediately after the setting value corresponding to the received winning information command is stored, and the right side of the figure (referred to as the right figure) It shows the contents of the table after updating.

  First, FIG. 46 will be described. FIG. 46 (a) shows an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is "permanent change big hit" within a period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed. It is a table. FIG. 46 (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command in which the lottery result is "permanent change big hit" is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 46 (a) receives a winning information command whose lottery result is "permanent change jackpot" when "setting value: out" is stored in the execution area, and as a result, 1 indicates that "set value: jackpot (certain)" is newly stored in the reserved area. After that, when the table is updated, “setting value: chance” is stored in the execution area as shown in the first row of the right figure. This is because the prize information command has been received within the changeable period. In addition, “setting value: chance eye & probability variation big hit” is stored in the first holding area, and “setting value: skip after big hit” is stored in the second holding area.

  As a result, since the "chance of chance" is displayed in the fluctuation production in execution and the fluctuation production of the next (first scheduled to be performed), the "chance of vision" is displayed twice in a row in the continuous chance of visual production Be done. That is, since the stop symbol becomes "a chance eye" from the variation effect under execution, "chance eye" is displayed once more than the stop symbol becomes a "chance eye" from the variation effect scheduled to be executed.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “set value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, “set value: jackpot (probability)” is newly added to the second reserve area. When the table is updated and the table is updated, as shown in the second row of the right figure, the "opportunity eye" is displayed three times consecutively in the continuous opportunity eye effect presentation. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 46 (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command in which the lottery result is "permanent change big hit" is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 46 (b) receives the winning information command whose lottery result is "probable variation jackpot" when "set value: out" is stored in the execution area, and as a result, 1 indicates that "set value: jackpot (certain)" is newly stored in the reserved area. However, since the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed even if the table is subsequently updated, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in this case, the continuous chance effect presentation is not performed. This is because the prize information command is received during a period when the stop symbol can not be changed, the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed can not be changed to the "chance of chance", and the next (first scheduled to be executed) change effect Even if you change only the stop symbol of to "chance eye", since "chance eye" can not be displayed continuously, it is not possible to perform consecutive chance eye effects.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “set value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, “set value: jackpot (probability)” is newly added to the second reserve area. When the table is updated and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the second row of the right figure, and “setting value: chance eye” is stored in the first reserved area, and the second reserved area The “setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot” is stored in the field, and the “setting value: skip after big hit” is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, "outlying symbols other than chance eyes" is displayed in the change production in execution, and "the chance is displayed in the next (first to be executed) change presentation in execution and the second change performance to be executed. "Eye" is displayed. Therefore, the "opportunity eyes" are displayed twice in a row in the continuous opportunity eye effect production. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 47 (a) shows an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is "normal jackpot" within a period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed. It is a table. FIG. 47 (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 47 (a) receives the winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” when “set value: out” is stored in the execution area, and as a result, 1 Indicates that "set value: jackpot (normal)" is newly stored in the reserved area. After that, when the table is updated, “setting value: chance” is stored in the execution area as shown in the first row of the right figure. This is because the prize information command has been received within the changeable period. Also, "set value: chance & normal jackpot" is stored in the first reserve area, and "set: skip after big hit" is stored in the second reserve area.

  As a result, as in the case of the first row in FIG. 46 (a), the “opportunity eye” is displayed in each of the fluctuation presentation under execution and the fluctuation presentation next to it (first scheduled to be executed), so The chance eye is displayed twice in a row in the chance eye direction. That is, since the stop symbol becomes "a chance eye" from the variation effect under execution, "chance eye" is displayed once more than the stop symbol becomes a "chance eye" from the variation effect scheduled to be executed. Hereinafter, since the second and third stages are the same, the description will be omitted.

  In addition, as shown in the fourth row of the left figure, when “set value: out” is stored in each area from the execution area to the third reserve area, “set value: jackpot (normally in the fourth reserve area) When the table is updated and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the fourth row of the right figure, and each area from the first holding area to the third holding area is set Value: A chance eye is stored. Also, "set value: chance & normal jackpot" is stored in the fourth reserve area, and "set value: skip after big hit" is stored in the next reserve area.

  As a result, "outlying design other than chance eyes" is displayed in the change production in execution, and "chance eyes" are displayed in each of the change productions from the next (first to be executed) to the 4th execution schedule in execution. Is displayed. Therefore, in the continuous chance eye effect production, the "chance eye" is displayed four times in a row. In this case, if the stop symbol of the changing effect in execution is not "a chance eye", the continuous chance effect is performed, and if the final lottery result is a "normal jackpot", it is continuous This is because the number of times the "opportunity eyes" are continuously displayed in the chance eye presentation is limited to four times.

  FIG. 47 (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where a winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” is received in a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 47 (b) receives the winning information command whose lottery result is “normally big hit” when “set value: out” is stored in the execution area, and as a result, 1 Indicates that "set value: jackpot (normal)" is newly stored in the reserved area. However, since the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed even if the table is subsequently updated, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in this case, the continuous chance effect presentation is not performed.

  This is due to the same reason as in the case of the first row in FIG. 46 (b), and since the prize information command is received during a period in which the stop symbol can not be changed, the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed is It is because it can not change to "eye" and as a result, it can not perform continuous chance eye rendition.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “set value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, “set value: jackpot (normal)” is newly added to the second reserve area. When the table is updated and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the second row of the right figure, and “setting value: chance eye” is stored in the first reserved area, and the second reserved area "Preset value: chance eye & normal jackpot" is stored in the "preset value: skip after big hit" is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, "outlying symbols other than chance eyes" is displayed in the change production in execution, and "the chance is displayed in the next (first to be executed) change presentation in execution and the second change performance to be executed. "Eye" is displayed. Therefore, the "opportunity eyes" are displayed twice in a row in the continuous opportunity eye effect production. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 48 will be described. FIG. 48 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is “out of back and forth reach” regardless of whether it is a changeable period or not.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 48 receives the prize information command whose lottery result is "reach out of back and forth" when "set value: out" is stored in the execution area, and as a result, the first hold It shows that "set value: out of order (out of front and back)" is newly stored in the area. However, since the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed even if the table is subsequently updated, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in this case, the continuous chance effect presentation is not performed.

  This is because the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed is not changed, regardless of whether or not it is a changeable period, when a winning information command in which the lottery result is "back and forth out of reach" is received, As a result, it is because it is not possible to perform continuous chance eye effects.

  Also, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when "set value: out" is stored in the execution area and the first hold area, "set value: out (back and forth out)" is displayed in the second hold area. When the table is newly stored and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the second row of the right figure, and “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area. “Set value: skip after removal” is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, "outlying symbols other than chance eyes" is displayed in the change production in execution, and "the chance is displayed in the next (first to be executed) change presentation in execution and the second change performance to be executed. "Eye" is displayed. Therefore, the "opportunity eyes" are displayed twice in a row in the continuous opportunity eye effect production. The same explanation applies to the third row, so the description is omitted.

  In addition, as shown in the fourth row of the left figure, when “set value: out” is stored in each area from the execution area to the third reserve area, “set value: out (before and after) in the fourth reserve area When the table is updated and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the fourth row of the right figure, and the first reserved area stores “setting value: initial skip”. In each of the areas from the second holding area to the fourth holding area, “set value: chance eye” is stored, and in the next holding area, “set value: skip after removal” is stored.

  As a result, during the execution, and in the next (the first scheduled to be executed) fluctuation presentation, "outside the symbol other than chance eyes" is displayed, and in each fluctuation presentation from the execution scheduled to the second execution scheduled to the fourth execution scheduled Each "eye of chance" is displayed. Therefore, in the continuous chance eye effect production, the "chance eye" is displayed three times in a row. In this case, when the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect scheduled to be executed first is not the "chance eye", the continuous chance eye effect is executed, and the final lottery result is "the out of back and forth reach" The reason is that the number of continuous display of "opportunity eyes" in the continuous opportunity eye effect production is limited to a maximum of 3 times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of continuous display of "chance eye" in the continuous chance eye effect is "normal probability big hit (no restriction)" and "usually big hit (up to 4 times in a row) It is configured to be different in the case of “) and in the case of“ reach out of back and forth (up to 3 consecutive times) ”. As a result, the player can enjoy a highly entertaining game to the player, since the player will have a good time depending on the number of times of the continuous display of the "chance eye" when the continuous chance effect production is executed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the condition that the number of continuous display of "chance eyes" displayed in the continuous chance eye effect increases and the number of continuous display of the final "chance eyes" when increased And an example will be described.

  Each table of FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol of each variation effect executed during the continuous chance item effect. The left side of the figure (referred to as the left figure) shows the contents of the stop symbol of each variation effect scheduled at the start of the continuous chance eye effect production, and the right side of the figure (referred to as the right figure) is scheduled Shows the contents of the stop symbol of each variation effect after the change of.

  As described above, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance item production is the "probable variation big hit" or the "normal big hit", when the last variation production becomes the "super reach variation" or the "special reach variation", the final While the variable effect is being performed, the "chance eye" of the same number of times as the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j is displayed. Therefore, in this case, if the value of the chance display count selection counter 273 j is 2 or more, the continuous display count of “chance show” in the continuous chance production is increased.

  First, FIG. 49 will be described. In FIG. 49 (a), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance direction production is "probable change big hit", the pattern of the last change production is "super reach change (40 seconds)", and as a result, it is scheduled to be displayed It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of the stop symbol of is changed. In the case of FIG. 49 (b), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is "normal jackpot", the pattern of the final fluctuation production becomes "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)", and as a result, it is displayed It is a table which shows an example of the contents of change when the contents of stop design are changed.

  The first row in the left figure in FIG. 49 (a) shows that the number of times the “Chance Eye” is continuously displayed is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance eye effect production. After the start of, in the first variation production, "chance of chance" is displayed, and in the second variation of performance, it is shown that "probably sizable big hit symbol" is displayed after the "chance of chance". In the drawings of FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the fact that the “probable variation big hit design” is displayed after the “chance of chance” in the one variation production is described as “the chance eye + probability variation big hit”. In addition, the "normal jackpot design" is described in the same manner.

  Here, when the pattern of the last (second) change production is "super reach change", one of "chance eye super change A to D" (see Fig. 7) is substituted for the "super reach change". To be executed. Then, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times, and then the "probable variation jackpot" is displayed. In addition, the number of times of display of "the chance eye" in the last fluctuation production is determined by the value of the number-of-chance display time selection counter 273j. For example, if the value at the time of referring to the chance display count selection counter 273 j is “2”, the display count of “chance show” in the last variation effect is two.

  Therefore, since the "chance of chance" is displayed in the first fluctuation production and the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times in the second fluctuation production, the "chance of chance" is continuously displayed up to four times in the continuous chance production Is displayed. That is, the “chance of eyes” scheduled to be twice in a row at the start of the consecutive chance of effect production is displayed up to four times in a row.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, normally, after the start of the continuous chance effect production, "chance opportunity" is displayed in the first and second fluctuation production, and in the third fluctuation production, "chance When the “probable variation jackpot” is displayed after the eyes, the final (third) variation effect pattern becomes “super reach variation”, as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times, and thereafter, the "probable odds jackpot" is displayed. Therefore, the "chance eye" scheduled to be three consecutive times at the start of the consecutive chance eye effect presentation is displayed up to five times consecutively. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  In the case of FIG. 49 (b), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is "normal jackpot", the pattern of the final fluctuation production becomes "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)", and as a result, it is displayed The example of the change content when the content of the stop symbol is changed is shown.

  The first row in the left figure in FIG. 49 (b) shows that the number of times the “Chance Eye” is continuously displayed is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance eye effect production. After the start of the "change chance" is displayed in the first change production, and "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed after the "chance" in the second change production.

  Here, when the pattern of the last (second) change production is "super reach change", one of "chance eye super change A to D" (see Fig. 7) is substituted for the "super reach change". To be executed. Then, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times, and then the "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed. Note that, as described above, the number of display of “chance” in the final variation effect is determined by the value of the display number of times display counter 273 j.

  Therefore, since the "chance of chance" is displayed in the first fluctuation production and the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times in the second fluctuation production, the "chance of chance" is continuously displayed up to four times in the continuous chance production Is displayed. That is, the “chance of eyes” scheduled to be twice in a row at the start of the consecutive chance of effect production is displayed up to four times in a row.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, normally, after the start of the continuous chance effect production, "chance opportunity" is displayed in the first and second fluctuation production, and in the third fluctuation production, "chance If the "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed after the eye, the final (third) variation effect pattern becomes "super reach variation", as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to twice, and then the "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed. Therefore, the "chance eye" scheduled to be three consecutive times at the start of the consecutive chance eye effect production is displayed up to four times consecutively. In this case, in the final variation production, the "chance eye" is not displayed up to three times if the continuous chance eye effect is performed and the final lottery result is "usually win", This is because the number of continuous display of "opportunity eyes" in the continuous chance eye effect production is limited to a maximum of 4 times. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 50 will be described. In FIG. 50 (a), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye direction production is "probable change big hit", the pattern of the last change direction effect becomes "special reach change (60 seconds)", and as a result, it is scheduled to be displayed It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of the stop symbol of is changed. In FIG. 50 (b), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye direction production is "normal jackpot", the pattern of the final fluctuation direction is "special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)", and as a result, it is displayed It is a table which shows an example of the contents of change when the contents of stop design are changed.

  The first row in the left figure in FIG. 50 (a) shows that the number of times the “Chance Eye” is continuously displayed is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance eye effect production. After the start of, in the first variation production, "chance of chance" is displayed, and in the second variation of performance, it is shown that "probably sizable big hit symbol" is displayed after the "chance of chance".

  Here, when the final (second time) variation presentation pattern is "special reach variation", any of the "special chance variations A to F" (see Fig. 8) is substituted for the "special reach variation". To be executed. Then, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to four times, and then the "probably oddity winning symbol" is displayed. Note that, as described above, the number of display of “chance” in the last variation presentation is determined by the value of the display number of times display counter 273 j. For example, when the value at the time of referring to the chance display count selection counter 273 j is “3”, the display count of “chance view” is 3 times.

  Therefore, since the "chance of chance" is displayed in the first fluctuation production and the "chance of chance" is displayed up to four times in the second fluctuation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to five times consecutively in the continuous chance production Is displayed. That is, the "chance of chance" scheduled to be twice in a row at the start of the consecutive chance of rendition is displayed up to five times in a row.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, normally, after the start of the continuous chance effect production, "chance opportunity" is displayed in the first and second fluctuation production, and in the third fluctuation production, "chance When the “probable variation jackpot” is displayed after the eyes, the final (third) variation effect pattern becomes “special reach variation”, as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to four times, and thereafter, the "probable odds jackpot" is displayed. Therefore, the "opportunity eyes" scheduled to be three consecutive times at the start of the consecutive chance eye effects are displayed up to six times in succession. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  In FIG. 50 (b), when the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye direction production is "normal jackpot", the pattern of the final fluctuation direction is "special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)", and as a result, it is displayed The example of the change content when the content of the stop symbol is changed is shown.

  The first row in the left figure in FIG. 50 (b) shows that the number of times the “Chance Eye” is continuously displayed is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance eye effect production. After the start of the "change chance" is displayed in the first change production, and "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed after the "chance" in the second change production.

  Here, when the final (second time) variation presentation pattern is "special reach variation", any of the "special chance variations A to F" (see Fig. 8) is substituted for the "special reach variation". To be executed. Then, as shown in the first row of the right figure, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times, and then the "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed. Note that, as described above, the number of display of “chance” in the final variation effect is determined by the value of the display number of times display counter 273 j.

  Also, in this case, if the "chance eye" is not displayed up to four times in the final fluctuation production, the continuous chance eye effect is executed, and if the final lottery result is "usually win", This is because the number of continuous display of "opportunity eyes" in the continuous chance eye effect production is limited to a maximum of 4 times.

  Therefore, since the "chance of chance" is displayed in the first fluctuation production and the "chance of chance" is displayed up to three times in the second fluctuation production, the "chance of chance" is continuously displayed up to four times in the continuous chance production Is displayed. That is, the “chance of eyes” scheduled to be twice in a row at the start of the consecutive chance of effect production is displayed up to four times in a row.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, normally, after the start of the continuous chance effect production, "chance opportunity" is displayed in the first and second fluctuation production, and in the third fluctuation production, "chance When the “normal jackpot symbol” is displayed after the eyes, the final (third) variation effect pattern becomes “special reach variation”, as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the final variation production, the "chance of chance" is displayed up to twice, and then the "normal jackpot symbol" is displayed. Therefore, the "chance eye" scheduled to be three consecutive times at the start of the consecutive chance eye effect production is displayed up to four times consecutively.

  In this case, as described above, the "opportunity eyes" will not be displayed up to 4 times in the last fluctuation presentation, as described above, the continuous opportunity eye presentation is executed, and the final lottery result will be "normal jackpot" In this case, the number of continuous display of "chance eyes" in the continuous chance eye effect production is limited to a maximum of 4 times. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is "probable change big hit" or "normal big hit", the last change production is "super reach change" or "special reach" When it becomes "fluctuation", it is configured to increase the number of continuous display of "the chance eye". As a result, the player can enjoy a highly entertaining game to the player, since the player will have a good time depending on the number of times of the continuous display of the "chance eye" when the continuous chance effect production is executed. In addition, the fluctuation presentation for increasing the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" may not be limited to the last fluctuation presentation, but may be fluctuation presentation at any timing as long as it is the fluctuation presentation in the continuous chance presentation. In addition, the fluctuation presentation for increasing the number of times of the continuous display of “the chance eye” may be performed not only by one fluctuation presentation but by a plurality of fluctuation presentation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51 to FIG. 53, the condition that the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (the continuous chance eye effect is continued) and the “chance displayed when extended (continued) An example of the number of continuous display of “eye” will be described.

  Each of FIGS. 51 to 53 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see FIG. 14). The left side of the figure (referred to as the left figure) shows the contents of the table immediately after the setting value corresponding to the received winning information command is stored, and the right side of the figure (referred to as the right figure) It shows the contents of the table after updating.

  First, FIG. 51 will be described. FIG. 51 receives a winning information command in which the lottery result is "permanent change big hit" when the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is "off", and as a result, the continuous chance eye effect is It is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when the effect period is extended (continuation chance eye effect is continued). In the following description, it is assumed that the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed will be two when the successive chance effect effect that the final lottery result is "off" is executed.

  In the first row in the left diagram of FIG. 51, “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area, and next time in the third holding area When "setting value: skip after removal" is stored as a setting value of winning a prize, a winning information command whose lottery result is "permanent change big hit" is received, and as a result, "setting value of the third holding area: It is indicated that “skip after removal” is overwritten to “set value: jackpot (certain)” (see S1505 in FIG. 34: No).

  After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the first row in the right figure, “setting value: chance item & probability variation big hit” is stored in the third holding area, and the setting value for the next winning in the fourth holding area “Setting value: skip after big hit” is stored as (see S1613 in FIG. 36). The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the next variation presentation is performed after the continuous chance presentation is finished, first, the “eye shot” is displayed, and then the “probable big hit pattern” is displayed. Therefore, apparently, it becomes the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “permanent change big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed three times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) and the number of times of displaying the chance eye is added by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable change big hit" Ru.

  In the second row of the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, and “set value: skip after removal” is set as the set value for the next prize in the second reserve area. When stored, it indicates that “set value: skip after removal” of the second reserved area is overwritten to “set value: jackpot (certain)”. After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance item & probability variation jackpot” is stored in the second holding area as shown in the second row of the right figure, and the next holding area is set in the third holding area. As a value, "set value: skip after big hit" is stored.

  As a result, also in this case, it is the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the "permanent change big hit" is executed, and the "chance opportunity" is displayed three times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is increased by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable change big hit" Ru. The same explanation applies to the third row, so the description is omitted.

  In the fourth row of the left figure, “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area, and next time in the third holding area When “set value: skip after deviance” is stored as a set value of the prize, a prize information command “lot out” is received first, and a prize result is “probably hit” This shows the state in which the information command is received second. That is, “set value: skip after removal” is stored as it is in the third reserve area (see S1505 in FIG. 34: Yes), and “set value: jackpot (probability)” is newly stored in the fourth reserve area. Show that.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance item” is stored in the third reserve area and “set value: chance item & probability variation” is stored in the fourth reserve area as shown in the fourth row of the right figure. A "big hit" is stored, and a "set value: skip after big hit" is stored in the next hold area as the setting value of the next winning. The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the first variation production is executed after the continuous chance production is finished, the "chance of chance" is displayed, and when the second fluctuation production is executed, the "chance of chance" is displayed first, Subsequently, the "probable jackpot symbol" is displayed. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “permanent change big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period for continuous chance eye effects is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued), and the number of displayed "Chance Eyes" is increased by 2 and the final lottery result is changed to "Probable variation big hit" Ru.

  In the fifth row of the left figure, “setting value: chance” is stored in the execution area and the first execution area, and “setting value: skip after removal” is the setting value for the next winning in the second holding area. If stored, the winning information command having the lottery result "off" is received twice (first and second) twice, and the winning information command having the lottery result "certainly hit" is third It shows the received state. That is, “set value: skip after removal” is stored as it is in the third reserve area, and “set value: jackpot (certain change)” is newly stored in the fourth reserve area.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance” is stored in the second holding area and the third hold area, and “setting value: The chance eye & probability variation big hit "is stored, and" predetermined value: skip after big hit "is stored in the next hold area as the setting of the next prize.

  As a result, also in this case, it becomes the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “probable odds hit” is executed, and the “chance effect” is displayed five times in succession in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is increased by three, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable hit". Ru. The same applies to the fifth and subsequent stages, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, FIG. 52 will be described. FIG. 52 receives a winning information command in which the lottery result is "permanent change jackpot" when the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is "off", and as a result, in the continuous chance effect It is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when the effect period is extended (continuation chance eye effect is continued).

  In the above-described FIG. 51, it has been described that the number of continuous display of the “chance eye” is two when the continuous chance effect effect is executed in which the final lottery result is “off”. Then, it demonstrates as what the continuous display frequency of "the chance eyes" will be 3 times.

  In the first row in the left diagram of FIG. 52, “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, “setting value: chance eye” is stored in each area from the first holding area to the third holding area, and the fourth When “set value: skip after removal” is stored as the setting value of the next winning in the reserve area, a prize information command whose lottery result is “permanent change jackpot” is received, and as a result, the fourth reserve area “Setting value: skip after removal” indicates that “setting value: jackpot (certain variation)” is overwritten (see S1505 in FIG. 34: No).

  After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the first row in the right figure, “set value: chance item & probability variation big hit” is stored in the 4th holding area, and as the next winning setting value in the next holding area. “Setting value: skip after big hit” is stored (see S1613 in FIG. 36). The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the next variation presentation is performed after the continuous chance presentation is finished, first, the “eye shot” is displayed, and then the “probable big hit pattern” is displayed. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “permanent change big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) and the number of times of displaying the chance eye is added by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable change big hit" Ru.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in each area from the execution area to the second hold area, and “set value as the next winning set value in the third hold area” : Indicates that “setting value: skipping after removal” of the third reserved area is overwritten to “setting value: jackpot (certain variation)” when “skip after removal” is stored. After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the second row of the right figure, “set value: chance item & probability variation jackpot” is stored in the third reserve area, and the next prize is set in the fourth reserve area. As a value, "set value: skip after big hit" is stored.

  As a result, also in this case, it becomes the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the "probable odds hit" is executed, and the "chance effect" is displayed four times continuously in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is increased by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable change big hit" Ru. The same applies to the third and fourth stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  In the fifth row in the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in each area from the execution area to the second hold area, and “set value: out of the third hold area” as the set value for the next winning. Indicates that the winning information command in which the lottery result is “off” is received first and the winning information command in which the lottery result is “probable jackpot” is received secondly when “skip back” is stored. ing. That is, “set value: skip after removal” is stored as it is in the third reserve area (see S1505 in FIG. 34: Yes), and “set value: jackpot (probability)” is newly stored in the fourth reserve area. Show that.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance item” is stored in the third reserve area and “set value: chance item & probability variation” is stored in the fourth reserve area, as shown in the fifth row in the right figure. A "big hit" is stored, and a "set value: skip after big hit" is stored in the next hold area as the setting value of the next winning.

  As a result, when the first variation production is executed after the continuous chance production is finished, the "chance of chance" is displayed, and when the second fluctuation production is executed, the "chance of chance" is displayed first, Subsequently, the "probable jackpot symbol" is displayed. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “permanent change big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed five times in succession in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period for continuous chance eye effects is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued), and the number of displayed "Chance Eyes" is increased by 2 and the final lottery result is changed to "Probable variation big hit" Ru.

  In the sixth row of the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, and “set value: skip after removal” is set in the second reserve area as the set value for the next prize. If stored, the winning information command having the lottery result "off" is received twice (first and second) twice, and the winning information command having the lottery result "certainly hit" is third It shows the received state. That is, "set value: skip after removal" is stored as it is in the second reserve area, "set value: out" is newly stored in the third reserve area, and "set value: big hit" in the fourth reserve area "(Probable)" indicates that it is newly stored.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance” is stored in the second holding area and the third holding area, and “setting value: The chance eye & probability variation big hit "is stored, and" predetermined value: skip after big hit "is stored in the next hold area as the setting of the next prize.

  As a result, also in this case, it is similar to the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “probable variation jackpot” is executed. Specifically, "opportunity eyes" are displayed six times in a row in the continuous opportunity eye effect presentation. That is, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is increased by three, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "probable hit". Ru. The same applies to the seventh and subsequent stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a continuous effect of which the final lottery result is "off" is executed, if a winning information command whose lottery result is of "probable variation big hit" is received, the continuous chance is It is possible to extend the presentation time of the eye presentation (consecutive chance eye presentation is continued). As a result, the fluctuation effect to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect is added, and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed increases, so the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the advantageous gaming state for the player The feeling can be improved. Furthermore, since the rendering time is extended, it is possible to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous for the player after the player has been continued for a long time in a state where the sense of expectation has been improved. Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  Next, FIG. 53 will be described. FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b) show that the winning information command in which the lottery result is "normally big hit" is received when the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is "off". As a result, it is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where the effect period of the continuous chance item effect is extended (the continuous chance item effect is continued).

  First, FIG. 53 (a) will be described. In FIG. 53 (a), it is assumed that the consecutive chances of being displayed with the "chance of eye" will be two times when the successive chance effect effect of which the final lottery result is "off" is executed.

  In the first row in the left diagram of FIG. 53 (a), “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area, and the third holding is When “set value: skip after removal” is stored as the setting value of the next winning in the area, a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” is received, and as a result, “the third holding area” The setting value: “skip after removal” indicates that “setting value: jackpot (normal)” is overwritten (see S1505 in FIG. 34: No).

  After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the first row in the right figure, “setting value: chance item & normal jackpot” is stored in the third holding area, and the setting value for the next winning in the fourth holding area “Setting value: skip after big hit” is stored as (see S1713 in FIG. 39). The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the next variation presentation is performed after the continuous chance presentation is finished, first, the "chance" is displayed, and then the "normal jackpot" is displayed. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “normal jackpot” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed three times in succession in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period for continuous chance eye effects is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued), and the number of display of "chance eyes" is increased by one, and the final lottery result is changed to "normal jackpot" Ru.

  In the second row of the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in the execution area and the first reserve area, and “set value: skip after removal” is set as the set value for the next prize in the second reserve area. When stored, it indicates that "set value: skip after removal" of the second reserved area is overwritten to "set value: jackpot (normal)". After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the second row of the right figure, “set value: chance item & normal jackpot” is stored in the second holding area, and the next winning area is set in the third holding area. As a value, "set value: skip after big hit" is stored.

  As a result, also in this case, it is the same as when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed, and “chance effect” is continuously displayed three times in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is added by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "normal jackpot" Ru. The same explanation applies to the third row, so the description is omitted.

  In the fourth row of the left figure, “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area, and next time in the third holding area When “set value: skip after deviance” is stored as a set value for a prize, a prize information command “lot out” is randomly received, and a prize result is “usually a big hit”. This shows the state in which the information command is received second. That is, “set value: skip after removal” is stored as it is in the third reserve area (see S1505 in FIG. 34: Yes), and “set value: jackpot (normal)” is newly stored in the fourth reserve area. Show that.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance item” is stored in the third reserve area and “set value: chance item & normal” in the fourth reserve area as shown in the fourth row of the right figure. A "big hit" is stored, and a "set value: skip after big hit" is stored in the next hold area as the setting value of the next winning. The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the first variation production is executed after the continuous chance production is finished, the "chance of chance" is displayed, and when the second fluctuation production is executed, the "chance of chance" is displayed first, "Normal jackpot symbol" is displayed subsequently. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “normal jackpot” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period for continuous chance eye effects is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued), and the number of displayed "Chance Eyes" is increased by 2 and the final lottery result is changed to "Normal win". Ru.

  In the present embodiment, when the continuous chance effect production is executed, and the final lottery result is "normal big hit", the number of times the "chance opportunity" is continuously displayed in the continuous chance effect production is four times at maximum. Is limited to. In addition, although the details will be described later, even if the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) on condition that the winning result information command in which the lottery result is “normal big hit” is received. , The number of consecutive "opportunity eyes" is limited to four times. That is, even when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed apparently, the number of times of continuously displaying “chance eyes” is limited to a maximum of 4 times.

  In addition, as shown in the fifth row of the left figure, "setting value: chance eye" is stored in the execution area and the first holding area, and "setting value: skip after removal" as the setting value for the next winning in the second holding area. "" Is stored, indicates that the winning information command having the lottery result "off" is received first, and the winning information command having the lottery result "normal jackpot" is received second. . That is, “set value: skip after removal” is directly stored in the second reserved area, and “set value: jackpot (normal)” is newly stored in the third reserved area.

  After that, when the table is updated, “set value: chance item” is stored in the second hold area, and “set value: chance item & normal” in the third hold area, as shown in the fifth row of the right figure. A "big hit" is stored, and a "setting value: skip after big hit" is stored in the fourth hold area as the setting of the next winning.

  As a result, also in this case, it is the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is increased by two, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "normal jackpot" Ru. The same applies to the sixth and subsequent stages, and the explanation is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 53 (b) will be described. FIG. 53 (b) is a winning information command in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot” when the continuous chance effect is produced in which the final lottery result is “off” as in FIG. 53 (a). As a result, it is a table which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table in the case where the production period of continuous chance eye effect production is extended (continuous chance eye effect production is continued).

  In FIG. 53 (a) described above, it has been described that the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed will be two when the successive chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is "off" is executed. In FIG. 53 (b), the explanation is made on the assumption that the number of continuous display of "chance" is three.

  In the first row on the left side of FIG. 53 (b), “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area, and “setting value: chance” is stored in each area from the first holding area to the third holding area. When the “setting value: skip after removal” is stored as the setting value for the next winning in the fourth holding area, a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” is received, as a result, the fourth It shows that “setting value: skip after removal” of the holding area is overwritten to “setting value: jackpot (normal)” (see S1505 in FIG. 34: No).

  After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the first row in the right figure, “set value: chance item & normal jackpot” is stored in the fourth holding area, and the next holding area is the setting value for the next winning. “Setting value: skip after big hit” is stored (see S1713 in FIG. 39). The same applies even if the set value stored in the execution area is not "set value: out" but "set value: skip after out" or "set value: skip after hit".

  As a result, when the next variation presentation is performed after the continuous chance presentation is finished, first, the "chance" is displayed, and then the "normal jackpot" is displayed. Therefore, the appearance is the same as in the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is the “normal jackpot” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production. In other words, the production period for continuous chance eye effects is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued), and the number of display of "chance eyes" is increased by one, and the final lottery result is changed to "normal jackpot" Ru.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, “set value: chance” is stored in each area from the execution area to the second hold area, and “set value as the next winning set value in the third hold area” : Indicates that “setting value: skipping after removal” of the third reserved area is overwritten to “setting value: jackpot (normal)” when “skip after removal” is stored. After that, when the table is updated, as shown in the second row in the right figure, “set value: chance item & normal jackpot” is stored in the third reserve area, and the next prize is set in the fourth reserve area. As a value, "set value: skip after big hit" is stored.

  As a result, also in this case, it is the same as the case where the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed, and the “chance effect” is displayed four times consecutively in the continuous chance effect production . That is, the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued), and the number of display of "chance eye" is added by one, and further, the final lottery result is changed to "normal jackpot" Ru. The same explanation applies to the third row, so the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where a continuous chance effect is produced in which the final lottery result is "off", when the winning information command whose lottery result is "usually win" is received, It is possible to extend the presentation time of continuous chance eye effect production (continue continuous chance eye effect presentation). As a result, the fluctuation effect to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect is added, and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed increases, so the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the advantageous gaming state for the player The feeling can be improved. Furthermore, since the rendering time is extended, it is possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state for the player after making the player continue the state in which the sense of expectation has been improved for a long time. Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even when the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) on condition that the winning result command in which the lottery result is “normally big hit” is received, the continuous “chance eye” Since the number of times of display is limited to a maximum of 4 times, the appearance of the "opportunity eyes" is up to 4 even if the appearance of continuous chance eye effects in which the final lottery result is "usually a big hit" is apparently It can be limited to times. Therefore, apparently, when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is executed, the number of continuous display of “chance eye” exceeds 4 times, and the operation of the gaming machine is not good. It can suppress becoming stable beforehand.

  Next, each flowchart of FIGS. 27 to 43 will be described. As described above, the processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 can be roughly divided into the startup processing activated upon power-on, the main processing executed after the startup processing, and transmission from the main control device 110 There are a command reception interrupt process which is executed each time a received various command is received, and a stop symbol pattern table update process which keeps updating the stop symbol pattern table until the power is turned off after the power is turned on.

  First, stop symbol pattern table update processing (see FIG. 31) will be described, followed by command reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), start-up processing (see FIG. 27), and main processing (see FIG. 28). Do. In addition, each flow chart is a flow chart when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 scrolls horizontally, but when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed to the left symbol row Z1 'and the middle symbol is displayed. The column Z2 may be read by replacing the middle pattern row Z2 'with the lower pattern row Z3 with the right pattern row Z3'.

  First, with reference to FIG. 31, the stop symbol pattern table updating process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol pattern table updating process of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol pattern table updating process is a process for continuously updating the stop symbol pattern table stored in the stop symbol pattern table memory 271 (for example, every 5 ms) from the time the power is turned on until the time the power is turned off. is there. In this stop symbol pattern table update processing, first, symbol pattern generation area update processing is executed (S2201).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the symbol pattern generation area updating process (S2201) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the symbol pattern generation area updating process of the effect control device 117. The symbol pattern generation area update process (S2201) is a process for updating the symbol pattern generation area in the stop symbol pattern table, and is a process executed in the stop symbol pattern table update process (see FIG. 31). .

  In this symbol pattern generation area updating process (S2201), first, 1 is added to the third area of the symbol pattern generation area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2231). Next, it is determined whether the value of the third area exceeds 18 (maximum value) (S2232). If the value of the third area exceeds 18 (S2232: Yes), the value of the third area is the maximum value (The arrangement number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reels corresponding to the lower row design row Z3) is exceeded. Therefore, the third area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the second area (S2233). On the other hand, when the value of the third area is 18 or less in S2232 (S2232: No), each processing of S2233 to S2237 is skipped, and this symbol pattern generation area update processing is ended, and the stop symbol pattern table It returns to the update process (see FIG. 31).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the second area exceeds 20 (maximum value) (S2234). If the value of the second area exceeds 20 (S2234: Yes), the value of the second area is the maximum value This is the case where the arrangement number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2 is exceeded. Therefore, the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area (S2235). On the other hand, in S2234, when the value of the second area is within 20 (S2234: No), each processing of S2235 to S2237 is skipped, and this symbol pattern generation area update processing is finished, and the stop symbol pattern table It returns to the update process (see FIG. 31).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the first area exceeds 18 (maximum value) (S2236). If the value of the first area exceeds 18 (S2236: Yes), the value of the first area is the maximum value (The arrangement number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to upper symbol row Z1) is exceeded. Therefore, the first area is cleared to 1 (S2237). On the other hand, in S2236, when the value of the first area is 18 or less (S2236: No), each processing of S2237 is skipped, and this symbol pattern generation area update processing is finished, and stop symbol pattern table update processing Return to (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the third area is incremented by one, and when the value of the third area reaches the maximum value, 1 is added to the second area, and the value of the second area is the maximum value. When 1 is reached, 1 is added to the first area, but the area for increasing the value by 1 may be the second area or the first area. For example, if the value of the second area is increased by one, when the value of the second area reaches the maximum value, the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area. Then, when the value of the first area reaches the maximum value, the first area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the third area. When the third area reaches the maximum value, the third area is simply cleared to one. Further, the value to be added is not limited to 1, and may be set arbitrarily. Further, predetermined values may be added to the first to third areas, respectively.

  In addition, random numbers (in the range of 1 to 18) corresponding to the first area may be acquired and used as the values of the first area, or random numbers (in the range of 1 to 20) corresponding to the second area. It may be acquired and used as the value of the second area, or a random value (in the range of 1 to 18) corresponding to the third area may be acquired and used as the value of the third area.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the symbol pattern generation area updating process (S2201) is completed, it is next determined whether the value of the updated symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach chance eye (S2202). Specifically, an upper symbol row Z1 corresponding to the value of the first area of the symbol pattern generation area, a middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to the value of the second area, and a lower figure symbol row Z3 corresponding to the value of the third area It determines whether the stop symbol which combined with and shows the stop symbol of the reach chance eye.

  In the process of S2202, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach chance eye (S2202: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the reach chance eye area in the stop symbol pattern table. (S2203). Specifically, the value of the first area of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the first area of the reach chance eye area, and similarly, the value of the second area of the symbol pattern generation area is the same as that of the reach chance eye area In the second area, the value of the third area of the symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the third area of the reach chance eye area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the processing of S2204.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2202, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the reach chance eye (S2202: No), the process of S2203 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2204.

  In S2204, it is determined whether the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach symbol in the back and forth direction (S2204). If the stop symbol of the reach symbol in the back and forth direction is indicated (S2204: Yes), the symbol pattern generation area Is stored in the front and back out of reach area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2205). Then, it returns to the process of S2201, and repeats each process of S2201-S2205 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol other than the reach symbol (S2204: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is the stop symbol of the reach symbol except the symbol Is determined (S2206). If the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach symbol other than the front and rear deviation (S2206: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the reach area other than front and rear deviation in the stop symbol pattern table ( S2207). Then, it returns to the process of S2201, and repeats each process of S2201-S2207 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol other than the reach symbol except for the back and forth deviation (S2206: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is the probability symbol of the large stop symbol It is determined whether to show (S2208), and when showing the stop symbol of the probability variation big hit symbol (S2208: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the probability variation big hit area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2209). Then, it returns to the process of S2201, and repeats each process of S2201-S2209 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than a probability variation big hit symbol (S2208: No), does the value of the symbol pattern generation area usually indicate a stop symbol of big hit symbol Is determined (S2210), and when the stop symbol of the normal jackpot symbol is shown (S2210: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the normal jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2211). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of S2201, and the above-described processes of S2201 to S2211 are repeated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2210, if the value of the symbol pattern generation area usually indicates a stop symbol other than the big hit symbol (S2210: No), does the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicate the stop symbol of the missing chance eye Is determined (S2212), and in the case of showing the stop symbol of the missed chance eye (S2212: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the missed chance area in the stopped symbol pattern table (S2213). Then, it returns to the process of S2201, and repeats each process of S2201-S2213 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2212, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the missing chance eye (S2212: No), when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of a completely missing symbol is there. Therefore, the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the complete deviation area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2214). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of S2201, and the above-described processes of S2201 to S2214 are repeated.

  According to the stop symbol pattern table updating process of FIG. 31 described above, the stop symbol pattern table can be continuously updated (for example, every 5 ms) from the time the power is turned on until the time it is shut off. Since the value of each area in the stop symbol pattern table can always be updated, an irregular value is acquired each time the value of each area (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol of the stop symbol) is acquired. Therefore, since the arrangement (stop symbol) of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be various, it is possible to prevent the player from having a monotonous impression on the game, and to be highly entertaining. It becomes possible to provide the game which it has.

  Also, in the stop symbol pattern table, various areas such as the probability variation big hit area and the normal big hit area are provided, but once the value of the symbol pattern generation area provided as the work area (the third symbol arrangement information ), And then the value is stored (copied) in an area according to the updated value (such as a probability variation big hit area or a normal big hit area), so that it is stored correctly in the desired area regardless of the timing. The third symbol array information (information indicating the array of the third symbol) being acquired can be acquired.

  For example, if the value (third symbol array information) of each area (probable variation big hit area or normal big hit area) in the stop symbol pattern table is directly updated without providing the symbol pattern generation area, the value update timing In some cases, desired third symbol sequence information can not be obtained. That is, if the value in the directly updated area is not the value according to the area, it is necessary to correct the value in the area to the correct value (re-update or move to the appropriate area). However, if the value in the area is acquired before the processing is completed, the wrong third symbol array information is acquired. In this embodiment, once, the value of the symbol pattern generation area (third symbol array information) is updated, and then the value is stored in an area (such as a probability variation big hit area or a normal big hit area) according to the updated value ( Since the copying is performed, the third symbol array information stored in the desired area can be acquired accurately regardless of the timing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the effect control device 117. The command reception interrupt process is an interrupt process for receiving various commands transmitted from the main controller 110, and is a process executed each time the various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. is there.

  In the command reception interrupt process, it is first determined whether a winning information command has been received (S1401), and if a winning information command has been received (S1401: Yes), whether the stop symbol setting flag 273h of the RAM 273 is on or not Is determined (S1402). As described above, the winning information command is a command indicating a lottery result for a new winning.

  In the process of S1402, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on (S1402: Yes), since the stop symbol setting process described later (see FIG. 43) is being executed, the process waits until the flag is turned off. On the other hand, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is off (S1402: No), the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set on (S1403), and the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process is executed (S1404).

  Although the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, it is a process for storing a setting value corresponding to the received winning information command in the stop symbol instruction storage table. When the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (S1404) is finished, the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to OFF (S1405), and the process shifts to the process of S1406.

  On the other hand, when the prize information command is not received in the process of S1401 (S1401: No), the process of S1402 to S1405 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1406. In the process of S1406, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command and the presentation time addition command are received (S1406), and when the variation pattern command and the presentation time addition command are received (S1406: Yes), the variation presentation setting process is executed. (S1407).

  As described above, the fluctuation pattern command is a command indicating the fluctuation time (pattern of fluctuation effect) of the fluctuation effect to be executed, and the effect time addition command indicates the extension time or shortening time of the fluctuation effect to be executed. It is a command. Further, the fluctuation effect setting process is a process for setting fluctuation effect data necessary for starting the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later with reference to FIG. When the variation effect setting process (S1407) is completed, the process proceeds to S1408.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command and the effect time addition command are not received in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), the process of S1407 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1408. In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol command has been received (S1408). When the stop symbol command has been received (S1408: Yes), the flag 273h during stop symbol setting is on as in the case of S1402. It is determined whether or not (S1409). In addition, as above-mentioned, stop symbol command is a command which shows the pattern of the stop symbol displayed in the fluctuation production which should be performed.

  In the process of S1409, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on (S1409: Yes), the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34) described later is being executed, so the process waits until the flag is off Do. On the other hand, if the stop symbol setting flag 273h is off (S1409: No), the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set on (S1410), and the stop symbol setting process is executed (S1411).

  Although the stop symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43, the stop symbol setting process is a process for setting a stop symbol of a fluctuation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 or to be started. When the stop symbol setting process (S1411) is finished, the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to OFF (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when the stop symbol command is not received (S1408: No), the process of S1409 to S1412 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1413.

  In the process of S1413, it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1413), and when a stop command has been received (S1413: Yes), the variation effect under execution in the third symbol display device 81 is ended (S1414). Next, the set value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1415), and the set value is "set value: skip after hit" or "set value: after removal" It is determined whether it is "skip" (S1416).

  Here, when the acquired setting value is “setting value: skipping after hit” or “setting value: skipping after falling off” (S 1416: Yes), the chance line consecutive number counter 273 c of the RAM 273 is reset (set to 0) ) (S1417), and proceeds to the processing of S1418. On the other hand, in the process of S1416, when the obtained setting value is not "set value: skip after hit" or "set value: skip after out of step" (S1416: No), the process of S1417 is skipped and Transfer to processing.

  On the other hand, when the stop symbol command is not received in the process of S1413 (S1413: No), the process of S1414 to S1417 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1418. In the process of S1418, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1418). When another command has been received (S1418: Yes), a process according to the other command is executed (S1419).

  For example, when a power-off command is received, processing for storing power-off occurrence information in a predetermined area of the RAM 273 is performed. Also, for example, when the number-of-holds command is received, when the number-of-holds display update processing (see S1203 in FIG. 29) is executed, the same number of lamps as the number N of special figure holding balls indicated by the received number-of-holds command Is a process such as setting to be turned on in the special view holding lamp 85 or the like.

  On the other hand, when another command is not received in the process of S1418 (S1418: No), the process of S1419 described above is skipped, and the command reception interrupt process is ended.

  According to the above command reception interrupt process of FIG. 33, when the winning symbol information command is received or the stop symbol command is received, each of the stop symbol setting in-progress flags 273 h is turned on if it is turned off. It is possible to wait for execution of processing according to the command. In addition, when the winning information command is received or the stop symbol command is received, the stop symbol setting flag 273h can be set to ON during the period from the start to the end of the processing regarding the stop symbol.

  When the process according to the winning information command is executed, new setting values are mainly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table, and the contents of the table are updated. Further, when the processing according to the stop symbol command is executed, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect is set based mainly on the setting value of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  For example, when the winning information command and the stop symbol command are received at the same timing, the processing according to each command is executed at the same timing, so one process refers to the contents of the stop symbol instruction table. During the process, the other process may affect each other, such as rewriting the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table, and as a result, it may not be possible to execute the process correctly in each process.

  However, in the present embodiment, even if the winning information command and the stop symbol command are received at the same timing, the flag 273h is set to ON during the execution of one of the processes, The other process can be queued for execution. Therefore, processing can be accurately performed without affecting each other.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (S1404) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (S1404) of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol instruction storage table update process (S1404) is a process for storing the set value corresponding to the received winning information command in the stop symbol instruction storage table, and is a process executed each time a winning information command is received. It is. This is a process executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (S1404), first, 1 is added to the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b of the RAM 273 (S1501). Next, a lottery result is extracted from the received prize information command (S1502). Here, as a lottery result, whether it is "big hit" or "out", or if it is a big hit, it is "probable big hit" or "usually a big hit" or if it is out, the stop symbol is "back and forth out of reach", " Whether it is a reach other than back and forth deviation or "complete out" is extracted.

  Then, it is determined whether the extracted lottery result is "off" (S1503), and if the extracted lottery result is "off" (S1503: Yes), stop symbol instruction storage of stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a In the table, the setting value of the area storing the setting value of the current winning is acquired (S1504). Next, it is determined whether the acquired setting value is “setting value: skip after hit” or “setting value: skip after removal” (S1505), and the acquired setting is “setting value: skip after hit” Or, if “set value: skip after removal” (S1505: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1507 without doing anything because the set value is already set.

  On the other hand, if the acquired setting value is not “setting value: skipping after hit” or “setting value: skipping after falling off” (S1505: No), the setting value is not set yet, so to the process of S1506 Transition. Further, in the process of S1503, when the extracted lottery result is "hit" (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1506.

  In the process of S1506, the setting value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is an area according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b among the holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table. (S1506). For example, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273 b is “1”, the setting value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is stored in the first holding area. That is, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b is "X", the setting value according to the extracted lottery result is stored in the Xth holding area.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 14C, the set values corresponding to the extracted lottery result are “when the lottery result is“ reach out of back and forth, ”“ reach other than out of back and forth, ”and“ completely out ”. If the setting value is “off” and the lottery result is “probable variation jackpot”, “ordinary jackpot”, it is “setting value: jackpot”.

  Next, it is determined whether the extracted lottery result is a "big hit" (S1507), and if the extracted lottery result is a "big hit" (S1507: Yes), it is determined whether it is a "probable jackpot" (S1508). When the lottery result is “probable variation big hit” (S1508: Yes), the probability variation big hit winning process is executed (S1509), and the process shifts to the process of S1511. In addition, although the probability variation big hit winning processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, start the continuous chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is “a probability variation jackpot”, or, the final lottery result is “off It is a process for determining based on the content of a stop symbol instruction storage table whether extension of the production period of continuous chance eye production which is "is extended."

  On the other hand, in the process of S1508, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot" (S1508: No), the normal jackpot winning process is executed (S1510), and the process shifts to the process of S1511. Although the normal jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, continuous chance eye effects are started in which the final lottery result is “normally jackpot”, or the final lottery result is “off It is a process for determining based on the content of a stop symbol instruction storage table whether extension of the production period of continuous chance eye production which is "is extended."

  In the process of S1511, the values of the probability variable extension possible period counter 273n and the normal extension possible period counter 273o of the RAM 273 are cleared to 0 (S1511). This is because, in the present embodiment, the presentation period is extended only when the continuous chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed. That is, it is assumed that the winning information command in which the lottery result is “(permanent change or normal) jackpot” is received, and as a result, the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is “(permanent change or normal) jackpot” Also, since the extension of the rendering period is not performed, the value of each counter 273n, 273o is cleared. Then, when the process of S1511 is finished, this stop symbol instruction storage table updating process is finished, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In addition, in the process of S1507, if the lottery result is "out" (S1507: No), it is determined whether it is "back and forth out of reach" (S1512). If the lottery result is "back and forth out of reach" (S1512: Yes), the back and forth out of reach prize winning process is executed (S1513), the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process is ended, and the command reception interrupt process (FIG. Return to 33). In addition, about the reach winning combination process before and after, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, stop symbol instruction storage table whether to start the continuous chance eye effect of which the final lottery result is "off (chance eye)" It is a process for making a decision based on the content of.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1512, if the lottery result is not "reach out of back and forth" (S1512: No), it is determined whether the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n of the RAM 273 is 1 or more (S1514) If the period counter 273n is 1 or more (S1514: Yes), the value of the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is decremented by 1 (S1515). On the other hand, when the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is less than 1 (S1514: No), the processing of S1515 is skipped.

  Next, it is determined whether the normal extension possible period counter 273o of the RAM 273 is 1 or more (S1516). If the normal extension possible period counter 273o is 1 or more (S1516: Yes), the normal extension possible period The value of the counter 273o is decremented by 1 (S1517). On the other hand, when the normal time extension possible period counter 273o is less than 1 (S1516: No), the process of S1517 is skipped. Then, this stop symbol instruction storage table updating process is ended, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the probability variable big hit winning process (S1509) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the probability variation jackpot processing (S1509) of the effect control device 117. The probability variation big hit winning process (S1509) starts the continuous chance eye effect production where the final lottery result is the “probability chance success jackpot”, or the duration of the continuous chance eye effect presentation where the final lottery result is “off” Is a process for determining whether to extend the character based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  In this probability variation big hit winning process (S1509), first, it is determined whether the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n of the RAM 273 is 1 or more (S1531). As described above, in the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n, the remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before extension of the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is not possible (continuous chance eye effect can not be continued) is stored. It is memorized.

  If the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is less than 1 (S1531: No), it is impossible to extend the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation (impossible to continue the continuous chance eye effect presentation). Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S1539. For example, when the continuous chance rendition production in which the final lottery result is “(probable or normal) jackpot” is performed, or when it is performed, the rendition period of the continuous chance rendition is not extended. Since it is possible (consecutive chance eye effect can not be continued), 0 is stored in the probability variable extension possible period counter 273n.

  In the present embodiment, based on the value of the probable variation time extension possible period counter 273n, it is determined whether it is possible to extend or not be able to extend the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation. Therefore, in order to determine whether extension is possible or not, it is determined on the basis of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time whether or not there is continuous chance eye effect being executed or scheduled to be executed, or stop symbol instruction storage table Since it is not necessary to count the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production based on the contents of, it is possible to reduce the control burden.

  In addition, when it is determined whether it is possible to extend or not be able to extend the production period of continuous chance eye effects, it is determined whether or not continuous chance eye effects being executed or scheduled to be executed based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time. Alternatively, the determination may be made by counting the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed in the successive chance eye effect production based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1531, when the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is 1 or more (S1531: Yes), the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a (see left figure in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52) Each setting value of) is acquired (S1532).

  Next, it is determined whether “setting value: chance” is stored in the area where the setting value of the previous winning combination is stored (S1533). As described in the process of S1506 in FIG. 34, when a winning information command is newly received, lottery information is extracted from the winning information command, and the set value corresponding to the lottery information is the stop symbol instruction storage table. Of the reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) are stored in an area according to the value of the special map reserved ball counter 273b. Therefore, at least in the execution area of the stop symbol instruction storage table, the previous winning setting value remains (stored).

  Here, in the case where the setting value of the previous winning combination is “setting value: chance eye”, it is first performed after continuous chance eye effects whose final lottery result is “off” are to be executed. , It is only in the case of receiving a winning information command whose lottery result is "permanent change big hit".

  The reason is that the probability variation jackpot process is not executed in the first place when the winning result information command in which the lottery result is “normally big hit” or the lottery result receives “off”. In addition, even if the continuous chance effect is produced in which the final lottery result is "off", the winning information command whose lottery result is "off" is first received thereafter, and thereafter, This is because, upon receiving a winning information command in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the setting value of the previous winning is “setting value: skip after deviation” or “setting value: omission”.

  In the process of S1533, when "set value: chance" is stored in the area in which the previous set value of the winning combination is stored (S1533: Yes), the set value of the current winning combination is "set value". : It is possible to add the fluctuation presentation to the continuous chance eye effect and to extend the effect period (continue the continuous chance eye effect) only by setting it as “chance eye”. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1543.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1533, when "setting value: chance eye" is not stored in the area where the setting value of the previous winning combination is stored (S1533: No), the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (execution All areas in which “set value: skip after deviation” is stored are extracted from the area (including the area) (S1534).

  Then, from the areas thus extracted, one closest to the area in which the setting value of the current winning is stored is extracted (S1535). More specifically, the arrangement order of the areas in the extracted areas means that it is closest to the area in which the setting value of the current winning is stored. The areas are arranged in the following order: “next hold area” → “fourth hold area” → “third hold area” → “second hold area” → “first hold area” → “execution area” It is assumed that

  Next, it is determined whether one area has been extracted from the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area) (S1536). Here, if it is not possible to extract even one area (S1536: No), the change in the stop symbol becomes other than the “chance eye” after the end of the consecutive chance eye effect of which the final lottery result is “disappeared” is finished. This is the case where the effect has been executed several times. Therefore, since the fluctuation presentation can not be added to the continuous chance eye presentation, the processing shifts to the processing of S1539.

  For example, it is assumed that continuous chance eye effects whose final lottery result is "off" are executed, and "set value: skip after out of line" is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. After that, when the successive chance item effect is finished and the next variation effect is executed, the setting area of the stop symbol instruction storage table is shifted by "set value: skip after deviance", and the variation effect is executed. Furthermore, since the set value of the execution area of the stop symbol instruction storage table is overwritten when the next variation effect is executed, “set value: skip after deviance” disappears from the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  On the other hand, if one area can be extracted from the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area) in the process of S1536 (S1536: Yes), it is determined whether the extracted area is the execution area ( S1537). If the extracted area is an execution area (S1537: Yes), there is a possibility that the stop period of the variation effect being executed can be changed to the chance to extend the effect period of the continuous chance eye effect (continue the effect) Because there is, it is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1538).

  On the other hand, if the extracted area is the hold area (the first hold area to the fourth hold area) (S1537: No), the hold area (the first hold area to the fourth area) regardless of the presence or absence of the variation effect being executed. By setting the setting value of the holding area to “set value: chance”, the production period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation can be extended (continuation chance eye effect presentation is continued.) Therefore, the processing shifts to the processing of S1542. .

  In the process of S1538, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1538: No), since it is a period in which the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect under execution can not be changed, the stop symbol other than "chance eye" Will be displayed. That is, since it is not possible to extend the effect period of the continuous chance eye effect production, the probability variation continuous effect start process is executed (S1539).

  In addition, although the definite variation time continuous effect start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table whether to start the continuous chance item effect of which the final lottery result is “precisely changed big hit” It is a process for making a decision based on Then, when the probability variation continuous effect start process (S1539) is finished, the probability variation big hit winning process is terminated, and the process is returned to the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1538, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1538: Yes), by changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect in execution to the chance, the effect period of the continuous chance eye effect If you can extend the Therefore, stop symbol replacement processing is executed (S1540). Although the stop symbol replacement process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, the stop symbol replacement process is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to the "chance of chance". When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, the third symbols of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 'to Z3') during high speed variation among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed are replaced, The stop symbol is changed to a chance eye.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) is completed, next, 1 is added to the chance line continuation number counter 273c (S1541), and the process proceeds to the process of S1542. As described above, the chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed.

  In the processing of S1542, all the setting values of each area from the area storing the previous winning setting value to the area extracted in the processing of S1535 in the stop symbol instruction storage table are "Setting value: It changes to "the chance eye" (S1542), and it shifts to processing of S1543.

  In the process of S1543, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: jackpot" of the area where the set value of the current winning is stored is changed to "set value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" (S1543 ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: skip after big hit" is set in the area where the set value of the next winning should be stored (S1544), and this probability change big hit winning process is ended and stopped It returns to the symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the above-mentioned probability variation big hit winning process (S1509) of FIG. 35, when the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is "off", the prize information command whose lottery result is "probability variation jackpot" Can be extended (continuation chance eye effect presentation can be continued). As a result, the fluctuation effect to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect is added, and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed increases, so the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the advantageous gaming state for the player The feeling can be improved, and the expectation can be kept longer for the player. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, after allowing the player to continue a state in which the sense of expectation has been improved for a long time, it is possible to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player (here, “probable change jackpot”). Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the effect period of the continuous chance effect of which the final lottery result is "off" is over, and the next fluctuation effect is started, if it is within the changeable stop symbol period, Since it is possible to change the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed to "chance eye", the time for the continuous chance eye effect can be extended (continuous chance eye effect can be continued). Therefore, since the opportunity which can increase the number of times of the continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production can be increased, with the opportunity which can improve the sense of expectation of the player, the expectation is continued longer to the player Can increase the chances of having it.

  Further, with reference to the value of the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n, it is determined whether it is possible to extend the rendering period of the continuous chance eye effect rendering or not. Therefore, in order to determine whether extension is possible or not, it is determined on the basis of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time whether or not there is continuous chance eye effect being executed or scheduled to be executed, or stop symbol instruction storage table Since it is not necessary to count the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production based on the contents of, it is possible to reduce the control burden.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the probability variation continuous effect start process (S1539) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the probability variation continuous effect start process (S1539) of the effect control device 117. The probability variation continuous effect start process (S1539) is a process to determine based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table whether to start the continuous chance eye effect of which the final lottery result is "a probability variation big hit". This is a process executed in the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot process (see FIG. 35).

  In this definite variation time continuous effect start process (S1539), first, each setting value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram of FIG. 46) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1601). Next, in the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area), the number of "setting values: out" following the area ahead is counted from the area where the setting value of the previous winning is stored, and is removed. The continuous number is set (S1602).

  Here, the “forward area” indicates an area in the direction approaching the execution area. Specifically, each area is "next holding area" → "fourth holding area" → "third holding area" → "second holding area" → "first holding area" → "execution area" , And continues forward (see FIG. 46).

  Next, it is judged whether the setting value of the execution area is the foremost "setting value: out" in the counted "setting value: out" (S1603), and among the counted "setting values: out" In the case where the setting value of the execution area is the "front end: setting value: out" (S1603: Yes), there is a possibility of changing the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed. Therefore, in this case, it is determined first whether "super reach change" or "special reach change" is being performed (S1604). On the other hand, when the setting value of the execution area is not the foremost "setting value: out" among the "setting value: out" that is counted (S1603: No), the stop symbol of the execution effect (not executed) Since it is the case of changing only, the processing shifts to the processing of S1609.

  In the process of S1604, when "super reach change" or "special reach change" is being executed (S1604: Yes), the variation effect being executed (that is, reach effect) is executed rather than the start of the continuous chance eye effect presentation Give priority to continuation. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1609. This is because the reach effect of “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” generally has a higher game value than the continuous chance effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when "super reach change" or "special reach change" is not executed (S1604: No), there is a possibility to change the stop pattern of the change effect in execution, so next It is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1605). When the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1605: No), since it is a period in which the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect in execution can not be changed, the process proceeds to S1609.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1605, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1605: Yes), the stop symbol of the change effect being executed is changed. In this case, stop symbol replacement processing is executed (S1540). Although the stop symbol replacement process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, the stop symbol replacement process is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to the "chance of chance". When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, the third symbols of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 'to Z3') during high speed variation among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed are replaced, The stop symbol is changed to a chance eye.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) is finished, next, 1 is added to the chance line consecutive number counter 273c (S1607). As described above, the chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed. Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, all the setting values of each area from the area in which the previous winning setting is stored to the execution area are changed to "setting value: chance eye" (S1608), It transfers to the process of S1612.

  In the process of S1609, in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, the area following the area where the previous setting value of winning is stored is continued to the area ahead [Setting value: The number of “outliers” is counted to obtain an outlier continuous number (S1609). Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is one or more (S1610).

  If the number of consecutive runs off is 1 or more (S1610: Yes), at least, using the variation presentation of the last winning (planned) and the variation presentation of the current winning (scheduled), continuous chance eyes I can perform the production. Therefore, in this case, in the hold area (the first hold area to the fourth hold area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, from the area where the setting value of the previous winning is stored, continues to the area ahead : Change all "outside" to "set value: chance" (S1611), and shift to S1612.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1610, if the continuous number of out-of-sequence is less than 1 (S1610: No), it is the case where continuous chance eye effects can not be started. Return to Therefore, since it is possible to prevent that the execution of the fluctuation effect in which the stop pattern becomes the "chance eye" is limited to one time, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the successive ball appearance from being dimmed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in value.

  In the process of S1612, "set value: jackpot" of the area where the set value of the current winning is stored is changed to "set value: chance item & probability variation jackpot" in the stop symbol instruction storage table (S1612 ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: skip after big hit" is set in the area where the set value of the next winning should be stored (S1613), and this probability change continuous effect start process is ended. , Return to the probability variation jackpot processing (see FIG. 35).

  According to the above-mentioned probability variation continuous effect start process (S1539) of FIG. 36, the stop symbol of the change effect being executed is compared with the case where only the stop symbol of the change effect scheduled to be executed is changed to the "chance eye". The part that can be changed to the "chance eye", that is, one more "chance eye" can be displayed. Therefore, the chance to perform the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved. In addition, the fluctuation effect which makes the stop design the “chance of a chance” is executed at least twice continuously. That is, since the single-shot execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect presentation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of continuous display of "chance eye" in the continuous chance eye effect is "normal probability big hit (no limit)" and "usually big hit (up to 4 times maximum) In the case of "" and the case of "reach out of back and forth (up to 3 consecutive times)" is configured to be different. Therefore, every time the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eyes" increases, the player will improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and will rejoicate according to the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eyes". .

  Therefore, the player can not improve the sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state when the display of the "chance eye" is finished only once, and thus not only the sense of the player's sense of expectation is impaired, but also lack of sense or frustration Makes the player feel In particular, if the one-time display of the "chance eye" is frequently performed, the player may repeatedly feel dissatisfaction and dissatisfaction repeatedly, and eventually, the player's interest in the continuous chance eye effect diminishes As a result, the value of continuous chance eye effects is reduced.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the variable effect which sets the stop symbol as the "chance-eye" is executed at least twice or more consecutively. Therefore, the player can improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and the player's attention can be drawn to the fluctuation display to be executed and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed. It can increase the value of chance eye direction.

  In addition, if the upper symbol row Z1, among the three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the stop symbol, is displayed in a stopped state, the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are in high-speed fluctuation. Change (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol (main symbol in upper symbol row Z1) enters in each symbol row Z2 and Z3 in the middle and bottom, and during variation production You can change the stop symbol of to "Chance Eye".

  Therefore, only when all of the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are moving at high speed, the stop symbol is changed rather than the case where the stop symbol in the change effect is changed to "chance eye" It is possible to secure a long possible period (modifiable period). Therefore, since the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects.

  In particular, when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the stop symbol, the middle symbol If the row Z2 is moving at high speed, replace (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, and change the stop symbol during the change production to "chance eye" it can.

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since it is possible to secure a longer period (changeable period), it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects by allowing a long changeable period.

  In addition, when normal reach variation is executed, among the three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the upper, middle, and lower in the stop symbol, it is always the same in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3. The main symbol is included, and even if the low speed fluctuation of the middle pattern row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display (10 seconds) is long, so 5 seconds after the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is started Before passing through, the third symbol can be replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, and the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to "chance eye". Therefore, only when middle symbol row Z2 is moving at high speed, an opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects as long as the changeable period can be secured as compared with the case where the stop symbol during change effect is changed to "chance eye" Can be further increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol replacement process of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol replacement process (S1540) is a process for changing the stop symbol of the change effect being executed to the “chance of a eye”, and the above-mentioned probability variation big hit winning process (see FIG. 35) and the probability variation continuous effect start process (See FIG. 36), normal jackpot winning process (see FIG. 38) described later, and normal time continuous effect starting process (see FIG. 39) described later (see FIG. 39).

  In this stop symbol replacement process (S1540), first, it is judged whether the stop symbol set completion flag 273i of the RAM 273 is on (S2301), and if the stop symbol set completion flag 273i is off (S2301: No) The stop symbol command has not been received yet, and the stop symbol is not set. In this case, all symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are collectively changed without changing the third symbol for each symbol row Z1, Z2, and Z3, and the stop symbol is set to "chance eye".

  That is, the third symbol array information (information indicating the third symbol array) is acquired from the chance eye area (reach chance eye area or out of chance eye area) in the stop symbol pattern table (S2302), and the acquisition The stored third symbol array information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273 m (S2303). Next, stop symbol data (image data of the third symbol) necessary to construct a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol array information of the display symbol pattern memory 273 m is acquired from the character ROM 275 and the stop symbol data storage area It stores in 276b (S2304). Then, the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is set to ON (S2305), and the stop symbol replacement process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if the stop symbol set completion flag 273i is on (S2301: Yes), are all the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the stop symbols in the fluctuation effect in execution all during high speed change? Is determined (S2306). If all symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect under execution are all moving at high speed (S2306: Yes), the replacement of the third symbol for each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3 is not performed Then, all the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are put together and changed, and the stop symbol is set to "chance eye". Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S2302.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2306, when all the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the stop symbols in the fluctuation effect being executed are not in high speed variation (S2306: No), that is, at least one symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3. If the stop display is being performed, or if it is in low speed fluctuation (medium speed fluctuation), the third symbol array information stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273 m is acquired (S2307). Next, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol array information are acquired respectively (S2308).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect being executed is outlier fluctuation (S2309), and when the fluctuation effect being executed is other than outlier fluctuation (that is, normal reach fluctuation) (S2309: No), acquired It is determined whether the stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol array information is the reach chance eye (symbol) (S2310). If the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol array information is the reach chance eye (symbol) (S2310: Yes), the replacement of the third symbol is unnecessary, so this stop symbol replacement process is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol array information is other than the reach chance eye (symbol) (S2310: No), the process proceeds to S2314.

  In the process of S2309, if the fluctuation effect being executed is a outlier fluctuation (S2309: Yes), it is determined whether the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 acquired in S2308 have the same symbol (main symbol) (S2311). If the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 have the same pattern (S2311: Yes), the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 acquired in the process of S2308 are common to each pattern row Z1 and Z3 One third symbol (the same main symbol) is selected (S2314). Then, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 acquired in the process of S2308 is replaced (S2315) so that the chance eye is configured with the selected third symbol (S2315), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2316.

  On the other hand, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 do not have the same symbol in the processing of S2311 (S2311: No), the third symbol (main symbol) is selected from among the upper symbol row Z1 acquired in S2308. One is selected (S2312). Then, the third symbol of the lower figure symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 acquired in the process of S2308 is replaced (S2313) so that the chance eye is constituted by the selected third symbol (S2313).

  Next, third symbol array information indicating a stop symbol (chance) newly configured by replacing the third symbol is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273 m (S2316). Then, among the stop symbol data already stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b, only the stop symbol data of the portion changed by the replacement of the third symbol is replaced (S2317). Specifically, stop symbol data (image data of the third symbol) necessary to construct a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol array information of the display symbol pattern memory 273 m is acquired from the character ROM 275 and replaced (changed (changed) The stop symbol data storage area 276b is overwritten with only stop symbol data corresponding to the) portion. Then, the stop symbol replacement process is ended, and the probability variation jackpot processing (see FIG. 35), the probability variation continuous effect start processing (see FIG. 36), the normal jackpot award processing (see FIG. 38), or the normal time continuous rendering The process returns to the start process (see FIG. 39).

  According to the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) of FIG. 37 described above, each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 of the stop symbols in the case of the variation effect being executed and when the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed is not set yet When Z3 is moving at high speed, the third symbol of each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3 is not replaced, but all symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are collectively changed and stopped. I have changed the design to a chance. Therefore, the third symbol to be replaced (in symbol row unit) is determined for each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3, and the symbol row Z1, Z2 and so on so that the third symbol enters each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3. It is not necessary to replace the third symbol every Z3 (in symbol row unit). Therefore, since the stop symbol can be changed to the chance with simple processing, the control load can be reduced.

  Further, in the processing of S2317, among the stop symbol data already stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b, only the stop symbol data of the portion changed by the replacement of the third symbol is replaced. Therefore, the stop symbol data of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 being stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 for which the low speed fluctuation (or medium speed fluctuation) is started It is possible to replace (change) only the stop symbol data of the non-stop display symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 without affecting the stop symbol data. Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed while the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are accurately stopped on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol in the changing effect being executed is not set yet, and when each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 of the stop symbol in the changing effect being executed is changing at high speed respectively In addition, all symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are collectively changed and the stop symbol is changed to chance, but the third symbol to be replaced for each symbol row Z1, Z2 and Z3 is determined, The third symbol may be replaced for each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 and the stop symbol may be changed to the chance.

  In addition, if the upper design row Z1 and the lower design row Z3 have the same design (third design), replace only the third design of the middle design row Z2 to minimize the change of the third design. , The stop design has been changed to chance. Therefore, the processing for replacing the third symbol is reduced as compared with the case where the third symbol of the lower row symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced, so that the control load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the same symbol (third symbol), only the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced, and the stop symbol is a chance eye Although it has changed, the stop design may be changed to the chance by replacing the third design of the lower row design row Z3 and the middle design row Z2 respectively.

  Here, replacement of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, only the case where the variable display scrolls horizontally (in the direction of the arrow X in the figure) will be described, but when the variable display scrolls vertically, the upper symbol column Z1 is displayed as the left symbol column Z1 '. The middle symbol row Z2 may be read by replacing the middle symbol row Z2 with the lower symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  In FIG. 44, an example in the case of replacing the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower row symbol row Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 will be described, and in FIG. An example in the case of replacing the third symbol only in the middle symbol row Z2 among the middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, an example of replacing the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower row symbol row Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 will be described. FIG. 44 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m before replacing the third symbol (before change) and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the contents; b) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of display symbol pattern memory 273 m after replacing the 3rd symbol (after a change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), "11" is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, "11" is stored in the second area, and "4" is stored in the third area. It is assumed that In this state, when the stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in the upper symbol row Z1, in order from left to right, "shellfish", "shark (4)", "shellfish The symbol row is displayed.

  Likewise, in the middle pattern row Z2, in order from the left to the right, the symbol row aligned with "Ancho (6)", "Shell" and "Jugon (7)" From the to the right, "Shell", "Tortoise (3)" and "Shell" are displayed in order. That is, these symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 indicate the stop symbols of the completely out-of-point symbol displayed in the out-of-range fluctuation.

  As described above, when the out-of-out fluctuation is executed and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol do not have the same symbol, before the low-speed variation of the lower symbol row Z3 starts (less than 9 seconds The stop symbol can be changed up to). Here, in the case of changing the stop symbol, one third symbol (main symbol) has to be selected from the upper symbol row Z1, but in this stop symbol, there is only "shark". Therefore, in this case, the third symbol of the lower row design symbol Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced so that the "shark" enters the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 respectively.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with a symbol row aligned with "turtle (3)", "shellfish" and "shark (4)" sequentially from left to right. Further, the pattern row Z3 in the lower figure is replaced with a symbol row aligned with "turtle (3)", "shellfish" and "shark (4)" sequentially from left to right.

  In this way, when the symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are replaced, symbols of "shark" are displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2 and the right line L3 of the lower pattern row Z3. Because it enters, the stop design becomes the chance eye.

  Then, if the stop symbol can be changed to the chance, the array No. "5" indicating the middle symbol row Z2 after change is stored in the second area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, and the lower pattern row Z3 after change is shown. The array number "5" is stored in the third area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. As a result, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the out-of-out fluctuation is executed and the same pattern exists in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol, before the low-speed variation of the middle symbol row Z2 starts (10 The stop symbol can be changed to less than a second). The explanation of the replacement of the third symbol is omitted because it is the same.

  In addition, replacement of the 3rd symbol described above is an example. For example, the third symbol is replaced so that the symbol of "shark" is disposed in the left line L1 of the lower row pattern Z3 so that the symbol of "shark" is disposed in the left line L1 of the middle symbol array Z2. You may go. In addition, for example, when there are two main symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower row pattern row Z3 so that the stop symbol becomes a chance eye by one of the main symbols Change it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, an example in which only the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with the third symbol among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 will be described.

  Fig. 45 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m before replacing the third symbol (before change) and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the contents; b) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of display symbol pattern memory 273 m after replacing the 3rd symbol (after a change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), "11" is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, "10" is stored in the second area, and "6" is stored in the third area. It is assumed that In this state, when the stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in the upper symbol row Z1, in order from left to right, "shellfish", "shark (4)", "shellfish The symbol row is displayed.

  Likewise, in the middle pattern row Z2, in order from left to right, the symbol row aligned with "shellfish", "angkou (6)" and "shellfish" is shown from left to right in the lower row pattern row Z3. A series of symbols are displayed in line with "shellfish", "shark (4)" and "shellfish" in order. That is, these symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 indicate stop symbols of reach symbols other than the front and back deviation displayed in various reach variations. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol is changed to a chance only when outliers or normal reach change is being executed, so it is assumed here that normal reach change is performed.

  As described above (see FIG. 12), when the normal reach variation is executed, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol always have the same symbol (main symbol) and the middle symbol row Z2 If it is less than 5 seconds even after the low speed fluctuation is started, it is possible to change the third symbol of the non-stop display of the middle symbol row Z2.

  Here, when changing the stop design, it is necessary to select one same third design (main design) from the upper design row Z1 and the lower design row Z3. In this stop design, “shark” There is only ". Therefore, in this case, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced so that the "shark" enters the middle symbol row Z2. For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with a symbol row aligned with "shark (4)", "shellfish" and "octopus (1)" sequentially from left to right.

  When the middle pattern row Z2 is replaced in this way, a "shark" pattern is inserted in the middle line L2 of the upper pattern row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle pattern row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower pattern row Z3. So, the stop pattern is the reach chance eye.

  Then, when the stop symbol can be changed to the reach chance, the arrangement number "19" indicating the middle symbol row Z2 after the change is stored in the second area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. As a result, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed.

  The replacement of the third symbol described above is an example. For example, the third symbol may be replaced so that the symbol “shark” is arranged on the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2. Also, for example, in the case where the same main symbol is included in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, two in the same main symbol, the stop symbol becomes a chance eye by one of the main symbols It is sufficient to change the symbol row Z2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the normal jackpot winning process (S1510) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the normal jackpot winning process (S1510) of the effect control device 117. In the normal jackpot winning process (S1510), a continuous chance item presentation of which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is started, or a presentation period of continuous chance item effects of which the final lottery result is “off” Is a process for determining whether to extend the character based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  In this normal jackpot winning process (S1510), first, it is determined whether the normal time extension possible period counter 273o of the RAM 273 is 1 or more (S1571). As described above, the remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before extension time period of the continuous chance eye effect is not extendable (continuous chance eye effect can not be continued) is stored in the normal extension possible period counter 273o. Ru.

  If the normal-time extendable period counter 273o is less than 1 (S1571: No), it is impossible to extend the effect period of the continuous chance-eye effect (the continuous chance-eye effect can not be continued). Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S1576. For example, when the continuous chance rendition production in which the final lottery result is “(probable or normal) jackpot” is performed, or when it is performed, the rendition period of the continuous chance rendition is not extended. Since it is possible (consecutive chance eye effect can not be continued), 0 is normally stored in the extension possible period counter 273o.

  In the present embodiment, based on the value of the normal-time extendable period counter 273o, it is determined whether it is possible or not to extend the effect period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation. Therefore, whenever it is determined whether extension is possible or not, the presence or absence of a continuous chance effect being executed or scheduled to be executed is determined based on the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table, or the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table Since it is not necessary to count the number of times of continuous display of the "opportunity eyes" in the continuous opportunity eye effects based on the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, when it is determined whether it is possible to extend or not be able to extend the production period of continuous chance eye effects, it is determined whether or not continuous chance eye effects being executed or scheduled to be executed based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time. Alternatively, the determination may be made by counting the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed in the successive chance eye effect production based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1571, when the normal time extension possible period counter 273o is 1 or more (S1571: Yes), each of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see left figure in FIG. 53) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a. The setting value is acquired (S1572).

  Next, it is determined what the setting value of the previous winning combination is (S1573). Note that, as described above, since either 1 or 2 is set in the normal-time extendable period counter 273o, the condition that becomes S1571: Yes is the consecutive chances that the final lottery result is "off". Only when the winning information command received first or the winning information command received second is the winning information command whose lottery result is “normally a big hit” after the effect is to be executed.

  For example, if the winning information command received first is a winning information command in which the lottery result is “normally a big hit”, the setting value of the previous winning is “setting value: chance”. On the other hand, if the second received prize information command is a prize information command in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the setting value of the previous prize is “set value: skip after deviation”. The reason is that the normal time can be extended if the prize information command received first is not a prize information command whose lottery result is "off" (that is, if it is a prize information command whose lottery result is "probable variation jackpot") Since the value of the period counter 273o is set to 0 (see S1511 in FIG. 34), S1571: Yes does not result.

  In the process of S1573, when the setting value of the previous winning combination is "setting value: chance eye", it is only for setting the setting value of this winning combination to "setting value: chance eye", and continuous chance eye effect is produced Variation presentation can be added, and the presentation period of continuous chance eye effects can be extended (continuous chance eye effects can be continued). Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1579.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1573, if the setting value of the previous winning combination is "setting value: skip after deviating", it is determined whether the setting value of the execution area is "setting value: skipping after deviating" (S1574 ). If the setting value of the execution area is "set value: skip after deviance" (S1574: Yes), the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed is changed to a chance to extend the production period of continuous chance eye effects ( Since there is a possibility that the effect can be continued), it is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1575).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1574, when the setting value of the first holding area is "setting value: skip after removal", the setting value of the first holding area is "setting value regardless of the presence or absence of the variation effect being executed. : It is possible to extend the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect presentation (continue the continuous chance eye effect presentation) only by setting it as "the chance eye". Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1578.

  In the process of S1575, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1575: No), since it is a period that can not change the stop symbol of the variation effect under execution, the stop symbol other than "chance eye" Will be displayed. That is, since it is not possible to extend the effect period of the continuous chance-eye effect, the normal-time continuous effect start process is executed (S1576).

  In addition, although it will be described later with reference to FIG. 39 about the normal time continuous effect start process, the content of the stop symbol instruction storage table whether to start the continuous chance effect effect of which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” It is a process for making a decision based on Then, when the normal time continuous effect start process (S1576) is ended, the normal jackpot winning process is ended, and the process is returned to the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1575, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1575: Yes), by changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed to the chance, the effect period of the continuous chance eye effect If you can extend the Therefore, stop symbol replacement processing is executed (S1540). In addition, about a stop symbol replacement process, it is a process for changing the stop symbol of the fluctuation production in process of execution into a "chance of chance", as described above with reference to FIG. When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, the third symbols of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 'to Z3') during high speed variation among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed are replaced, The stop symbol is changed to a chance eye.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) is finished, next, 1 is added to the chance line continuation number counter 273c (S1577), and the process shifts to the process of S1578. As described above, the chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed. In the process of S1578, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, change "set value: skip after removal" in the area where the previous set value of the winning is stored, "set value: change to a chance (S1578), Transfer to the process of S1579.

  In the process of S1579, "set value: jackpot" of the area where the set value of the current winning is stored is changed to "set value: chance & normal jackpot" in the stop symbol instruction storage table (S1579 ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: skip after big hit" is set in the area where the preset value of the next winning should be stored (S1580), and this normal big hit winning process is ended and stopped It returns to the symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the normal jackpot processing (S1510) of FIG. 38 described above, the winning information command in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot” when the continuous chance effect is performed in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed. Can be extended (continuation chance eye effect presentation can be continued). As a result, the fluctuation effect to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect is added, and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed increases, so the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the advantageous gaming state for the player The feeling can be improved, and the expectation can be kept longer for the player. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, after allowing the player to continue a state in which the sense of expectation has been improved for a long time, it is possible to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player (here, “normal jackpot”). Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the effect period of the continuous chance effect of which the final lottery result is "off" is over, and the next fluctuation effect is started, if it is within the changeable stop symbol period, Since it is possible to change the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed to "chance eye", the time for the continuous chance eye effect can be extended (continuous chance eye effect can be continued). Therefore, since the opportunity which can increase the number of times of the continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production can be increased, with the opportunity which can improve the sense of expectation of the player, the expectation is continued longer to the player Can increase the chances of having it.

  In addition, even when the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) on condition that the winning result command in which the lottery result is “normally big hit” is received, the continuous “chance eye” The normal time extension possible period counter 273o is set so that the number of display times is limited to a maximum of four times (see S1806 and S1808 in FIG. 40). Therefore, even when the continuous chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed apparently, it is possible to limit the number of continuously displayed “chance eyes” to 4 times at the maximum. Therefore, apparently, when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is "normally big hit" is executed, the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed exceeds 4 times, and the operation of the gaming machine is not good. It can suppress becoming stable beforehand.

  Further, with reference to the value of the normal-time extendable period counter 273 o, it is determined whether it is possible to extend the rendering period of the continuous chance eye effect rendering or not. Therefore, in order to determine whether extension is possible or not, it is determined on the basis of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time whether or not there is continuous chance eye effect being executed or scheduled to be executed, or stop symbol instruction storage table Since it is not necessary to count the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production based on the contents of, it is possible to reduce the control burden.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the normal time continuous rendering start process (S1576) executed by the MPU 271 in the rendering control device 117 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the normal time continuous effect start process (S1576) of the effect control device 117. The normal time continuous effect start process (S1576) is a process for determining based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect that the final lottery result is "normally big hit" This is a process executed in the above-described normal jackpot winning process (see FIG. 38).

  In this normal time continuous rendering start process (S1576), first, each setting value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram in FIG. 47) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1701). Next, in the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area), the number of "setting values: out" following the area ahead is counted from the area where the setting value of the previous winning is stored, and is removed. The continuous number is set (S1702). As described above, each area is in the order of "next hold area" → "fourth hold area" → "third hold area" → "second hold area" → "first hold area" → "execution area" So let's continue ahead.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is 4 (maximum value) (S1703). If the number of consecutive outliers is 4 (S1703: Yes), each area from the execution area to the third reserved area is It is a case where the setting value: out of position is stored, and the “setting value: hit (normal)” is stored in the fourth holding area. Here, if the chance chance effect is started continuously and the "chance chance" is displayed from the variation production being executed, the number of times the "chance chance" is continuously displayed in the continuous chance production is 5 times or more, so it is being executed. I do not change the stop symbol of the change production of. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1709. That is, since the final lottery result is "normally a big hit", the process proceeds to the process of S1709 in order to limit the number of times of continuous display of "chance" to 4 times at the maximum.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1703, if the number of consecutive outliers is other than 4 (any of 0 to 3) (S1703: No), the setting value of the execution area is the forefront among the counted "setting values: out". It is determined whether "set value: out" of (S1704). If the setting value of the execution area is the foremost "setting value: out" among the "setting values: out" that are counted (S1704: Yes), the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed First, it is determined whether "super reach change" or "special reach change" is being performed (S1705).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1704, if the setting value of the execution area is not the frontmost "setting value: out of the counted" setting values: out "(S1704: No), the execution schedule (not executed) Since only the stop symbol of the change effect is changed, the process proceeds to S1709.

  In the process of S1705, when the "super reach change" or the "special reach change" is being executed (S1705: Yes), the variation effect being executed (that is, reach effect) is executed rather than the start of the continuous chance eye effect presentation Give priority to continuation. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process of S1709. This is because, as described above, reach effects of “super reach change” or “special reach change” generally have higher game value than “continuous reach eye effects”.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1705, when "super reach change" or "special reach change" is not executed (S1705: No), there is a possibility of changing the stop pattern of the change effect being executed, so next It is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1706). If the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1706: No), since it is a period in which the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect under execution can not be changed, the process proceeds to S1709.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1706, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1706: Yes), it is a case of changing the stop symbol of the variation effect under execution. In this case, stop symbol replacement processing is executed (S1540). In addition, about a stop symbol replacement process (refer FIG. 37), it is a process for changing the stop symbol of the change production in process of execution into a "chance of chance" as mentioned above. When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, the third symbols of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 'to Z3') during high speed variation among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed are replaced, The stop symbol is changed to a chance eye.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1540) is finished, next, 1 is added to the chance line consecutive number counter 273c (S1707). As described above, the chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed. Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, all the setting values of each area from the area where the previous winning setting is stored to the execution area are changed to "setting value: chance eye" (S1708), It transfers to the process of S1712.

  In the process of S1709, in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, the area following the area where the previous setting value of winning is stored is continued to the area ahead [Setting value: The number of “outliers” is counted to obtain an outlier continuous number (S1709). Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is 1 or more (S1710).

  If the number of consecutive runs off is 1 or more (S1710: Yes), at least, using the variation presentation of the last winning (planned) and the variation presentation of the current winning (scheduled), continuous chance eyes I can perform the production. Therefore, in this case, in the hold area (the first hold area to the fourth hold area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, from the area where the setting value of the previous winning is stored, continues to the area ahead : Change all "off" to "set value: chance" (S1711), and shift to S1712.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1710, when the continuous number of out-of-sequence is less than 1 (S1710: No), since the continuous chance eye effect can not be started, this normal time continuous effect start process is ended, and the normal jackpot winning process (FIG. 38) Return to Therefore, since it is possible to prevent that the execution of the fluctuation effect in which the stop pattern becomes the "chance eye" is limited to one time, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the successive ball appearance from being dimmed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in value.

  In the process of S1712, "set value: jackpot" of the area where the set value of the current winning is stored is changed to "set value: chance eye & normal jackpot" in the stop symbol instruction storage table (S1712 ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: skip after big hit" is set in the area where the set value of the next winning should be stored (S1713), and this normal time continuous effect start process is ended. Return to the normal jackpot winning process (see FIG. 38).

  According to the normal-time continuous rendering start process (S1576) of FIG. 39 described above, just as in the case of the probability variation-time continuous rendering start process (see FIG. 36), only the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect scheduled to be executed As compared with the case of changing, it is possible to display "more chance eyes" as much as it is possible to change the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed to "chance eyes", that is, one more time. Therefore, the chance to perform the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

  In addition, the fluctuation effect which makes the stop design the “chance of a chance” is executed at least twice continuously. That is, since the single-shot execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect presentation. Specifically, as described above, when the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the variable effect which sets the stop symbol as the "chance-eye" is executed at least twice or more consecutively. Therefore, the player can improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and the player's attention can be drawn to the fluctuation display to be executed and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed. It can increase the value of chance eye direction.

  In addition, if the upper symbol row Z1, among the three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the stop symbol, is displayed in a stopped state, the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are in high-speed fluctuation. Change (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol (main symbol in upper symbol row Z1) enters in each symbol row Z2 and Z3 in the middle and bottom, and during variation production You can change the stop symbol of to "Chance Eye".

  Therefore, only when all of the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are moving at high speed, the stop symbol is changed rather than the case where the stop symbol in the change effect is changed to "chance eye" It is possible to secure a long possible period (modifiable period). Therefore, since the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects.

  In particular, when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the stop symbol, the middle symbol If the row Z2 is moving at high speed, replace (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, and change the stop symbol during the change production to "chance eye" it can.

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since it is possible to secure a longer period (changeable period), it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects by allowing a long changeable period.

  In addition, when normal reach variation is executed, among the three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 in the upper, middle, and lower in the stop symbol, it is always the same in each of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3. The main symbol is included, and even if the low speed fluctuation of the middle pattern row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display (10 seconds) is long, so 5 seconds after the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is started Before passing through, the third symbol can be replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, and the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to "chance eye". Therefore, only when middle symbol row Z2 is moving at high speed, an opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects as long as the changeable period can be secured as compared with the case where the stop symbol during change effect is changed to "chance eye" Can be further increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the back and forth reach reach winning process (S1513) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the out-of-order reach winning process (S1513) of the effect control device 117. A process for determining whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect of which the final lottery result is “off (chance)”, based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table, in the reach winning process before and after (S1513) It is a process performed in the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (refer FIG. 34) mentioned above.

  In the front and back out of reach reach winning process (S1513), first, each setting value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram in FIG. 48) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1801).

  Next, in the reserve area (the first reserve area to the fourth reserve area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, from the area where the setting value of the previous winning is stored, "setting value: out" continuing from the area ahead The number of is counted to obtain an out-of-order continuous number (S1802). As described above, each area is in the order of "next hold area" → "fourth hold area" → "third hold area" → "second hold area" → "first hold area" → "execution area" So let's continue ahead. In addition, here, as in the process of S1602 of FIG. 36 and the process of S1702 of FIG. 39, the final lottery result is that “set value: out” of each area up to the execution area is not counted. This is because, in the case of the continuous chance eye effect which is "off (a chance eye)", the stop symbol in progress is not changed.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is 3 (maximum value) (S1803). If the number of consecutive outliers is 3 (S1803: Yes), each area from the first holding area to the third holding area “Set value: out” is stored in “4”, and “set value: out (back and forth out)” is stored in the fourth hold area.

  Here, when the continuous chance eye effect presentation is started, and the "chance eye" is displayed from the fluctuation presentation scheduled to be executed first, the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed in the continuous chance eye effect is four times, three times Beyond. Therefore, in this case, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect scheduled to be executed first is not considered as a chance eye. Therefore, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, "set value: out" of the first holding area is changed to "set value: first time skip" (S1804), and the process moves to S1806.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1803, if the number of consecutive outliers is other than 3 (any of 0 to 2) (S1803: No), it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is 2 (S1805). If the number of consecutive outliers is 2 (S1805: Yes), the process proceeds to S1806.

  In the process of S1806, 1 is set to the normal time extendable period counter 273o of the RAM 273 (S1806), and the process shifts to the process of S1809. In addition, as described above, the number of winning information commands that can be received by the normal extension possible period counter 273o can not be extended until the production period of the continuous chance effect production can not be extended (the continuous chance effect production can not be continued). It is memorized. In the case of S1803: Yes and S1805: Yes, when the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the number of times the "chance-eye" is continuously displayed is three. Even if the continuous chance item production is extended (continuous chance item production is continued) and the final lottery result is changed to "normally big hit", the normal time extension possible period counter 273o in the processing of S1806. Since 1 is memorized, it is possible to limit the number of continuous display of "chance eye" to a maximum of 4 times.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the number of consecutive outliers is other than 2 (less than 2) (S1805: No), it is determined whether the number of consecutive outliers is 1 (S1807). If the number of consecutive runs is 1 (S1807: Yes), at least, using the variation presentation of the last winning (planned) and the variation presentation of the current winning (scheduled), continuous chance Can perform eye effects. Therefore, in this case, 2 is set in the normal time extension possible period counter 273o (S1808), and the process shifts to the processing of S1809. In addition, in the case of 1807: Yes, if the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the number of continuous display of “chance-eye” is two. Even if the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) and the final lottery result is changed to “normal jackpot”, the process of S1808 allows the normal time extension possible period counter 273 o Since 2 is memorized, it is possible to limit the number of continuous display of "chance" to up to 4 times.

  In the process of S1809, 5 is set in the probability variable extension possible period counter 273n of the RAM 273 (S1809), and the process proceeds to the process of S1810. In addition, as described above, the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n has the remaining number of winning information commands that can be received before extension of the presentation period of the continuous chance eye effect becomes impossible (continuous chance eye effect can not be continued). Memory is stored. Even if continuous chance eye direction production is extended (continuous chance eye direction production is continued) and the final lottery result is changed to "probable variation jackpot", there is no restriction on the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed, so The time extendable period counter 273 n stores 5 (maximum value).

  In the process of S1810, in the holding area (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, from the area where the setting value of the current winning is stored, continues to the area ahead [Setting value: All the "off" is changed to "set value: chance" (S1810). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, in the area where the setting value of the next winning should be stored, "setting value: skip after deviance" is set (S1811), and this out-of-front / outside reach prize winning processing is ended, It returns to the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1807, if the number of consecutive outliers is other than 1 (specifically, 0) (S1807: No), it is a case where continuous chance eye effects can not be started. In this case, it is determined whether the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is 1 or more (S1812). If the probability variation extension possible period counter 273n is 1 or more (S1812: Yes), the probability variation extension possible period counter The value 273 n is decremented by 1 (S 1813). On the other hand, when the probability variation extension possible period counter 273 n is less than 1 (S 1812: No), the processing of S 1813 is skipped.

  Next, it is determined whether the normal extension possible period counter 273o is 1 or more (S1814). If the normal extension possible period counter 273o is 1 or more (S1814: Yes), the normal extension possible period counter 273o Is decremented by 1 (S1815). On the other hand, when the normal time extension possible period counter 273o is less than 1 (S1814: No), the process of S1815 is skipped. Then, the front and back out of reach reach winning process is ended, and the process returns to the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the above-described front and back out of reach reach winning process (S1513), in the stop symbol instruction storage table, in the area where the setting value of the next winning should be stored, “setting value: skip after removal” can be set. . Therefore, since the stop symbol of the next fluctuation production for which the continuous chance eye effect is finished can always be a stop symbol other than the "chance eye", the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is "off (chance eye)" If you execute, you can definitely limit the number of consecutive "chances" to 3 times. In the case where the production time for the continuous chance eye effect is extended, the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye effect is changed from “off” to “(probably changed or normal) jackpot”.

  For example, after the end of the continuous chance eye effect production (for example, the "chance eye" is displayed three times in a row), another continuous chance eye effect production (for example, the "chance eye" is displayed three times in succession) is performed Then, it would appear as if the variable effect with the stop symbol as the chance eye was performed six consecutive times. However, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the next variation effect for which the continuous chance-eye effect is finished can always be a stop symbol other than the "chance-eye", so that the continuous chance-eye effect is continuously executed. It can prevent.

  In addition, for example, after the end of the continuous chance eye effect (for example, the "chance eye" is displayed three times in a row), subsequently, the continuous chance eye effect (for example, Even when "the eye" is displayed four times in a row, it seems as if the variable effect with the stop symbol "a chance eye" has been performed seven times in a row. However, even in such a case, for the same reason as described above, the continuous chance eye effect can be prevented from being continuously performed, so that the continuous chance eye effect can be accurately performed.

  In addition, the fluctuation effect which makes the stop design the “chance of a chance” is executed at least twice continuously. That is, since the single-shot execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect presentation. Specifically, as described above, when the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the variable effect which sets the stop symbol as the "chance-eye" is executed at least twice or more consecutively. Therefore, the player can improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and the player's attention can be drawn to the fluctuation display to be executed and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed. It can increase the value of chance eye direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the fluctuation effect setting process (S1407) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation effect setting process (S1407) of the effect control device 117. The fluctuation effect setting process (S1407) is a process for setting the fluctuation effect data required to start the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, each time the fluctuation pattern command and the effect time addition command are received. It is a process to be performed. This is a process executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In the fluctuation effect setting process (S1407), first, the fluctuation start flag 273f of the RAM 273 is set to ON, and the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is set to OFF (S1901). As described above, the fluctuation start flag 273f is a flag that is turned on when the start of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is instructed from the main control device 110, and turned off when the fluctuation effect is started. Further, the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is a flag that is turned on when the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation time is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command and presentation time addition command, and it is stored in the fluctuation time memory 273d (S1902). As described above, the fluctuation pattern command is a command indicating the fluctuation time (pattern of fluctuation effect) of the fluctuation effect to be executed, and the effect time addition command indicates the extension time or shortening time of the fluctuation effect to be executed. It is a command.

  Next, the set value of each area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is shifted by one area (forward) in the direction of the execution area (S1903). As described above, each area is in the order of "next hold area" → "fourth hold area" → "third hold area" → "second hold area" → "first hold area" → "execution area" So let's continue ahead. That is, the set value of the "first reserved area" is shifted to the "execution area", and the set value of the "second reserved area" is shifted to the "first reserved area". Likewise, the setting value of "third holding area" is set to "second holding area", the setting value of "fourth holding area" is set to "third holding area", and the setting value of "next holding area" is set to "third Shift to the 4th reserve area.

  In the present embodiment, data (setting value) is shifted only for the area in which the setting value is stored. Therefore, data shift processing is not performed for areas where setting values are not stored, so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the setting value, the data (setting value) of each area may be shifted to the area one area ahead. In that case, since it is unnecessary to determine whether data is stored in each area, the number of program steps can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the program can be reduced, and the free space of the ROM 272 can be increased.

  Next, the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 273b is decremented by 1 (S1904), and the set value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is acquired (S1905). Then, it is determined whether the acquired setting value is "setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" or "setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" (S1906), and the acquired setting value is "setting value: chance eye & If the probability variation jackpot is "set value: chance & normal jackpot" (S1906: Yes), the pseudo variation setting process is executed (S1907).

  Although the pseudo change setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, the change of the final change effect when the final lottery result of the continuous chance item effect is “probable change big hit” or “normal big hit” It is a process for determining whether to increase the number of times of continuous display of the "opportunity eyes" based on time. When this pseudo variation setting process (S1907) is completed, the variation effect setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1906, when the acquired setting value is other than "setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" or "setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" (S1906: No), fluctuation of fluctuation time memory 273d Fluctuation effect data corresponding to time is acquired from the character ROM 275 (S1908). Then, the acquired variation effect data is stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276 (S1909).

  Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time memory 273d is fluctuation time of outlier fluctuation or normal reach fluctuation (S1910), and if fluctuation time is fluctuation time of outlier fluctuation or normal reach fluctuation (S1910: Yes), the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is set to ON (S1911), the variation effect setting process is ended, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if the fluctuation time is a fluctuation time other than the outlier fluctuation or the normal reach fluctuation (S1910: Yes), the process of S1911 is skipped, the fluctuation effect setting process is ended, and the command reception allocation is completed. It returns to the loading process (see FIG. 33).

  According to the change effect setting process (S1407) of FIG. 41 described above, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g can be set to ON only when out-of-range change or normal reach change is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the pseudo variation setting process (S1907) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the pseudo variation setting process (S1907) of the effect control device 117. The simulated change setting process (S1907) is performed based on the change time of the last change effect, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance item production is the "probable change big hit" or the "normal big hit". It is a process for determining whether to increase the number of continuous display times. In addition, it is a process that is executed in the above-described variation effect setting process (see FIG. 41).

  In this pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1907), first, the fluctuation time stored in the fluctuation time memory 273d of the RAM 273 is acquired (S2001), and the acquired fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of "normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)" It is determined (S2002). In addition, as described above, in the fluctuation effect where the lottery result of the prize is “perhaps big hit” or “usually big hit”, “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)”, “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, “special reach fluctuation ( Among the respective patterns of “60 seconds)”, the variation representation of any pattern is selected (see FIG. 21).

  In the process of S2002, when the acquired fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)” (S2002: Yes), the chance eye normal fluctuation (20 seconds) is substituted for the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) (20 seconds) This is the case where FIG. 6 (b) is executed. In addition, the number of continuous display of "the chance eye" is not changed. In this case, 1 is stored in the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273k of the RAM 273 (S2003), and variation effect data of "chance eye normally variation (20 seconds)" is acquired from the character ROM 275 (S2004), S2012 Move to the process of

  Note that, as described above, the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273 k is used when “chance order normal variation”, “chance order super variation A to D”, or “chance eye special variation A to F” is executed. , It is a memory in which the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" in the fluctuation production is stored.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when the acquired fluctuation time is not the fluctuation time of "normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)" (S2002: No), the value of the chance eye display frequency selection counter 273j of the RAM 273 is acquired and the value Are stored in the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273k (S2005).

  Next, it is determined whether the setting value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is "chance of chance & normal jackpot" (S2006). If the setting value of the execution area is "chance eye & normal jackpot" (S2006: Yes), the total value of the value of the chance line consecutive number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo fluctuation chance eye display number memory 273k is 4 It is determined whether it exceeds (S2007).

  When the total value of the value of the chance line consecutive number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273k exceeds 4 (S2007: Yes), the final lottery result is “normal big hit” Since the number of times the “opportunity eye” is displayed continuously exceeds 4 in the continuous chance eye effect production, it is limited to a maximum of 4 times. Therefore, "4-value of the consecutive chance counter number 273c" is calculated, and the result is stored in the pseudo variation chance display number memory 273k (S2008), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2009.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2006, when the setting value of the execution area is "chance & probability variation jackpot" (S2006: No), the process of S2007 and S2008 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2009. In addition, in the process of S2007, when the total value of the value of the chance line consecutive number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273k is 4 or less (S2007: No), the process of 2008 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S2009.

  In the process of S2009, it is determined whether the acquired fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)" (S2009), and the acquired fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)" In some cases (S2009: Yes), instead of super reach change (40 seconds), one of chance eye super change AD (40 seconds) (see FIG. 7) is executed. In addition, the number of continuous display of "opportunity eyes" may increase.

  In this case, one fluctuation effect data for displaying the same number of "chances" as the value stored in the simulated fluctuation chances display number memory 273k is stored in the character ROM 275. It acquires from among each of the variation presentation data of “D” (S2010), and shifts to the processing of S2012.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2009, when the acquired fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)” (S2009: No), the chance reach special fluctuation A is substituted for the special reach fluctuation (60 seconds). .About.F (40 seconds) (see FIG. 8). In addition, the number of continuous display of "opportunity eyes" may increase.

  In this case, one chance effect data for displaying the same number of "chances" as the value stored in the simulated fluctuation chances display number memory 273k is stored in the character ROM 275. It acquires from among each fluctuation production data of "F" (S2011), and shifts to processing of S2012.

  In the process of S2012, the change effect data acquired in the process of S2004, the process of S2010, or the process of S2011 is stored in the change effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276 (S2012), and the pseudo change setting process is ended. , And return to the change effect setting process (see FIG. 41).

  According to the above-described simulated change setting process (S1907) in FIG. 42, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance item effect is “probable change big hit” or “normal big hit”, the change time of the last change effect “ If the change time of the super reach change (40 seconds) or the change time of the “special reach change (60 seconds)”, it is possible to increase the number of times the “opportunity eye” is continuously displayed. Therefore, even when the number of fluctuation effects to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect production is small and the number of continuous display of the "chance eye" is small, the number of continuous display times of the "chance eye" can be increased. Therefore, every time the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eyes" increases, the player will improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and as a result, the player can continuously view the number of "chance eyes". I will have a good time in response. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a highly entertaining game.

  In addition, even when the number of the fluctuation effects performed in the continuous chance effect production is small, the number of the fluctuation effects performed is apparently increased, so that the fluctuation effects in the continuous chance effect production can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a monotonous impression on the game and to provide a game having high interest.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the last variation effect is "variation time of normal reach variation (20 seconds)", the variation time of "super reach variation (40 seconds)", "special reach variation ( In the case of a fluctuation time of 60 seconds), either one of “chance eye normal fluctuation” or “chance eye super fluctuation A to D” or “chance eye special fluctuation A to F” is respectively executed. There is. On the other hand, at least one time of “normal reach” only if the change time of the last change presentation is the change time of “super reach change (40 seconds)” and the change time of “special reach change (60 seconds)” After performing "variation (20 seconds)", the number of continuous display of "chance" may be increased. Specifically, if the fluctuation time of the last fluctuation presentation is the fluctuation time of "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)", one of "chance eye super fluctuation B, C" is configured to be executed, and If the fluctuation time of the last fluctuation presentation is the fluctuation time of “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, one of “chance eye special fluctuation B to E” is configured to be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed and to execute "normal reach fluctuation" or "special reach fluctuation" at least once. As described above, the normal reach fluctuation and the super reach fluctuation each generate the reach and give a flashy effect to give the player a sense of anticipation for the game state which is advantageous, so that the chance eye is The combination of the increase in the number of times of continuous display and the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state can further improve the player's sense of expectation. Therefore, the player can be monotonous with respect to the game because the expectation given to the player can be changed depending on whether to increase the number of times the "opportunity" is continuously displayed or not. It is possible to avoid having an impression and to provide a game having high interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, stop symbol setting processing (S1411) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol setting process (S1411) of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol setting process (S1411) is a process for setting a stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed or started in the third symbol display device 81, and is executed each time the stop symbol command is received. It is a process. Further, it is a process executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In the stop symbol setting process (S1411), first, it is determined whether the stop symbol setting completed flag 273i of the RAM 273 is on (S2101). As described above, the stop symbol set completion flag 273i is a flag that is turned on when the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set. Here, when the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is already on, within the changeable period after the change effect is started, the winning information command is received earlier than the stop symbol command, and as a result, it is executed It is a case where the stop pattern of the change effect to be started (or underway) is set to the "chance of chance".

  In the process of S2101, when the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is on (S2101: Yes), the above-mentioned stop symbol replacement process (see FIG. 37) is executed, and the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed is already set. Since this is the case, the stop symbol setting process is ended without doing anything, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is off (S2101: No), the setting value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S2102) .

  Then, it is determined whether the acquired setting value is "setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" or "setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" (S2103), and the acquired setting value is "setting value: chance If it is the "eye & probability variation jackpot", or "the setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" (S2103: Yes), the continuous chance eye effect production in which the final lottery result is "probability variation jackpot" or "usually jackpot" Is the case of setting the stop symbol of the final variation effect.

  In this case, the third symbol array information (the third image from the chance symbol area (reach chance symbol area or missing chance symbol area) in the stop symbol pattern table by the value of the pseudo variation chance symbol display number memory 273k of the RAM 273 Information indicating the arrangement of the three designs is acquired (S2104). As described above, the stop symbol pattern table is constantly updated (for example, every 5 ms) from the time the power is turned on until it is shut off, so the values of each area (arrangement of the third symbols of stop symbols) An irregular value is acquired each time the information indicating.

  For example, in the process of S2104, only the third symbol array information corresponding to the "reach chance eye" may be acquired, or only the third symbol array information corresponding to the "disappointment chance eye" may be acquired. Further, third symbol array information corresponding to the "reach chance eye" and third symbol array information corresponding to the "mismatched chance eye" may be acquired. In this way, it is possible to change the "chance of chance" displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance of illusion effect, so that the player has a monotonous impression on the game. It becomes possible to avoid and to provide a game having high interest.

  As described above, when the chance eye normal fluctuation, the chance eye super fluctuation A to D, or the chance eye special fluctuation A to F is executed, the pseudo fluctuation chance eye display number memory 273 k indicates “in the fluctuation effect”. It is a memory in which the number of continuous display of the chance eye is stored. Normally, in the case of a fluctuation effect where the lottery result is "perhaps big hit" or "usually big hit", "normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)", "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)", "special reach fluctuation (60 seconds) The variation representation of any of the patterns is selected from the respective patterns of)) (see FIG. 21). However, this time it is the last change production of the continuous chance item production that the final lottery result is "perhaps big hit" or "usually big hit", so as described above (see Fig. 42), normal reach change, super reach change , Instead of each variation of the special reach variation, either the chance eye normal variation, the chance eye super variation A to D, or the chance eye special variation A to F is executed.

  Next, stop symbol data (image data of the third symbol) necessary to construct a stop symbol corresponding to each third symbol array information acquired in the process of S2104 is acquired from the character ROM 275, and the video RAM 276 is selected. Each is stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b (S2305). Then, the pattern of the stop symbol is extracted from the received stop symbol command (S2106), and among the areas in the stop symbol pattern table (see FIG. 15A), an area corresponding to the pattern of the extracted stop symbol Then, third symbol array information is acquired (S2107). That is, in the process of S2107, the third symbol array information corresponding to the "probable jackpot symbol" or the "normal jackpot symbol" is acquired.

  Next, the acquired third symbol array information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273 m (S2108), and stop symbol data necessary to form a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol array information of the display symbol pattern memory 273 m (Image data of the third symbol) is acquired from the character ROM 275, and additionally stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276 (S2309). As a result, stop symbol data of "chance eye" and "probable big hit symbol" or "normal big hit symbol" displayed in the final variation effect are stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b.

  In addition, in the process of S2106 mentioned above, although the pattern of the stop symbol is acquired from the received stop symbol command, the final stop symbol is also the “probable large hit symbol” or “normally large hit even with the setting value acquired in S2102 Since it is possible to identify whether it is a symbol, it may be possible to extract the pattern of the stop symbol based on the setting value acquired in S2102 instead of the received stop symbol command.

  Then, the value of the pseudo variation chance eye display number memory 273k is added to the chance eye continuation number counter 273c (S2110), and the process shifts to the process of S2118. As described above, the chance line consecutive number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as the "eye of the eye" is continuously executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2103, when the acquired setting value is not "setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot" or "setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot" (S2103: No), the acquired setting value is It is determined whether "set value: chance" (S2111). When the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance eye” (S2111: Yes), 1 is added to the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c (S2112), and the chance eye area (reach) in the stop symbol pattern table The third symbol array information is acquired from the chance eye area or the out of chance eye area (S2113).

  For example, in the process of S2113, it is acquired whether it is the third symbol array information corresponding to the "mismatched chance" or the third symbol array information corresponding to the "reach chance" according to the pattern of the variation effect being executed. . More specifically, if the pattern of the variation effect being executed is "outside fluctuation (11 seconds)", the third symbol array information corresponding to "outside chance eye" is acquired. In addition, if the pattern of the fluctuation effect being executed is "normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)", "super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)", or "special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)", it corresponds to "reach chance eyes" Acquires the third symbol array information.

  In this way, it is possible to change the "chance of chance" displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance of illusion effect, so that the player has a monotonous impression on the game. It becomes possible to avoid and to provide a game having high interest. In addition, only the third symbol array information corresponding to the "reach chance eye" may be acquired, or only the third symbol array information corresponding to the "mismatched chance eye" may be acquired. Further, third symbol array information corresponding to the "reach chance eye" and third symbol array information corresponding to the "mismatched chance eye" may be acquired.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2111, when the acquired setting value is not “set value: chance” (S2110: No), it is a case where the stop symbol instructed by the stop symbol command may be set as it is. In this case, the pattern of the stop symbol is extracted from the received stop symbol command (S2114). Here, from the stop symbol command, any one of "long reach", "full reach", "complete miss", "probable big hit", and "normal hit" is extracted as the stop symbol pattern.

  Next, 3rd symbol arrangement information is acquired from the area corresponding to the pattern of the extracted stop symbol among the areas in the stop symbol pattern table (see FIG. 15A) (S2115). Then, the acquired third symbol array information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273 m (S2116), and the stop symbol data necessary for constructing the stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol array information of the display symbol pattern memory 273 m ( The third symbol image data is acquired from the character ROM 275 and stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276 (S2317).

  As a result, stop symbol data, which is image data of the stop symbol displayed in the variable effect, is stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S2118. In the process of S2118, the stop symbol setting completion flag 273i is set to ON (S2118), the stop symbol setting process is ended, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  When stop symbol command is received by the stop symbol setting process (S1411) of FIG. 43 above, based on the setting value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the pattern of the stop symbol indicated by the received stop symbol command It is possible to set the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being executed or to be started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the stop symbol instruction storage table is provided, when setting the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed or to be started, the stop symbol instruction storage table is simply used. An appropriate stop symbol can be set by referring to the setting value of the execution area and referring to the received stop symbol command only when necessary. In other words, every time when the stop symbol command is received, the number of times the "opportunity eye" should be displayed in the continuous opportunity eye effect display, the number of the "opportunity eye" displayed continuously after starting the continuous opportunity eye effect, etc. It is not necessary to make a determination to determine the stop symbol of the current variable effect based on the situation of the present, and to set an appropriate stop symbol. Thus, the control burden can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, a stop symbol instruction storage table is provided, but a counter for counting the number of times of displaying "chance eyes" to be displayed in the continuous chance eye effect, stopping this, and the continuous chance eye effect A counter is provided to count the number of "chance eyes" displayed continuously since the start of the game, and every time a stop symbol command is received, the current variation's effect is displayed based on the conditions such as the contents of various counters. A decision may be made to determine the stop symbol, and an appropriate stop symbol may be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the start-up process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the start-up process of the effect control device 117. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the effect control device 117, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when the MPU 271 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, the power on notification process is executed (S1002).

  The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. 33, the display lamp 34, the special view holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  When the power on notification process is finished, next, to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 275, and the video RAM 276 is displayed. Are stored in a predetermined area of (S1003). Then, using the effect data, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (S1004).

  Next, the power-off process flag is turned on to determine whether the current start-up process has been executed because the MPU 271 has been reset during execution of the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) described later. It is judged by whether or not it is (S1005).

  As described above, when a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instant power failure”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to effect control device 117 or the like. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the power-off command is received, the effect control device 117 stores power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received in the RAM 273 and performs power-off processing ( 28) is executed. Then, the power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process is completed.

  That is, during the execution of the power-off process, whether or not the MPU 271 is reset can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag. If the power is completely shut off during or after the completion of the power-off process, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, and the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, when the power-off process flag is off, the current start-up process is performed after one of the following three states is entered. In the first state, the power supply is completely shut off. Since the data in the RAM 273 is lost when the power is completely shut off, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  In the second state, a power failure process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power shutdown does not occur and returns to normal, and then the power shutdown process is completed. , And MPU 271 are reset. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 273 is held without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  The third state is a state in which only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset by noise or the like. That is, when the MPU 271 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110), the power-off process flag is kept off and the data of the RAM 273 is held. Be done.

  If the current start-up process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is off (S1005: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 273 is destroyed It confirms (S1006). It should be noted that it is checked here whether the data is destroyed if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held if the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. For example, control of the effect control device 117 can be continued using the data.

  For example, even if only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, the control can be continued using the data to perform the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is necessarily initialized, it is also necessary to start over from the initial state as to whether to start the continuous chance eye effect presentation. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, it is possible to use the data to continuously determine whether to start rendering for the continuous chance eyes, so perform continuous chance eyes rendering It is possible to suppress the reduction of opportunities.

  The confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 273 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 273. Conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction in the RAM 273 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 273 is confirmed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 273 is not confirmed (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1011.

  More specifically, when the power-on process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 273 (the power is turned off (the RAM 273 is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 273 is destroyed (S1006: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1007. On the other hand, although a power failure process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, the power is not shut off and returns to normal. Thereafter, the MPU 271 is reset after the power shutdown process is completed. If the current start-up process is started after the current start-up process is started or after the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset only by noise or the like, Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1006: No), and the process proceeds to the process of S1011.

  In the process of S1005, when the power-off process flag is on (S1005: Yes), the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power-off occurs. Then, the state returns to normal, and thereafter, the MPU 271 is reset during execution of the power-off process. In this case, the current memory state of the RAM 273 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since it is difficult to continue the control in such a case, the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started.

  In the process of S1007, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 273 is checked (S1007). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. The read / write check of the RAM 273 clears all storage areas of the RAM 273 to zero.

  Next, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 273 (S1008: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 273 to set RAM destruction check data (S1009) . By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 273 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 273 (S1008: No), an abnormality in the RAM 273 is notified (S1010), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 273. In addition, on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the abnormality of the RAM 273 may be notified.

  In the process of S1011, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1011). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is performed, and turned off when the power is completely shut off (see S1117 in FIG. 28). Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process is executed because a momentary power failure occurs, but the power-off process does not occur and returns to normal, and then the power-off process The MPU 271 is reset during execution of the program or after completion of the process.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1011: Yes), the work area of the RAM 273 is cleared to initialize each process of the effect control device 117 (S1012), and the initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1013). Is set (S1014), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The memory 273a to 273k of the RAM 273 corresponds to the work area of the RAM 273.

  On the other hand, the case where the power-off flag is off when the start-up process is executed is, for example, the case where the power is turned on again after the power is completely shut off (data in RAM 273 including data of the power-off flag is lost) Or the noise or the like resets only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117, and the power-off flag is not turned on (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110), the RAM 273 Is the case when the data of

  Therefore, in such a case (S1011: No), S1012, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 273, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1013, and the initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1013). Then (S1014), the processing shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1012 is to save the data in the work area of the RAM 273 without clearing it when the start process is started when only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued by keeping it. For example, even if only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, the control can be continued using the data to perform the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is necessarily initialized, it is also necessary to start over from the initial state as to whether to start the continuous chance eye effect presentation. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, it is possible to use the data to continuously determine whether to start rendering for the continuous chance eyes, so perform continuous chance eyes rendering It is possible to suppress the reduction of opportunities.

  Further, when the processing of S1007 to S1009 is executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 273 have already been cleared by the processing of S1007, so it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 273 again.

  Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing main processing of the effect control device 117. The main process is a process for executing control relating to a game effect (such as voice output and display), and is executed after the start process (see FIG. 27) of the effect control device 117 described above is completed, and then repeatedly executed. Processing.

  In the main processing, first, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1101) is performed (S1101), and after the previous determination (the process of S1101) is performed, If one millisecond or more has elapsed (S1101: Yes), voice lamp effect processing is executed (S1102). The sound lamp effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. The sound lamp effect process is mainly a process for executing lighting control of various lamps and sound output control. When this audio lamp effect process (S1102) is completed, the process proceeds to S1103.

  On the other hand, if one millisecond or more has not elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1101) is executed (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1103. It is the processing in S1102 that mainly relates to lamp lighting control and audio output control that it is the processing in S1102 that determines whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed in the processing of S1101. It is because it is not necessary to execute in a short cycle (within 1 ms).

  In the process of S1103, it is determined whether 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1103) was performed (S1103), and 20 m after the previous determination (the process of S1103) was performed. When the second or more has elapsed (S1103: Yes), the variation effect process is executed (S1104). In addition, about a fluctuation production process, although it mentions later with reference to FIG. 30, it is a process for displaying the moving image (image) according to a fluctuation production on 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 (LCD). When this variation production process (S1104) is completed, the process proceeds to S1105.

  On the other hand, if 20 ms or more has not elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1103) is executed (S1103: No), the process of S1104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1105. The process of S1103 is to determine whether 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed, because the process of S1104 changes the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) in the fluctuation time. Since the process is performed according to the update, it is not necessary to execute in a short cycle (within 20 ms).

  In the process of S1105, it is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g of the RAM 273 is on (S1105), and if the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1105: Yes), the fluctuation time counter of the RAM 273 273 e is updated (S 1106). In addition, as described above, since the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is a flag which is turned on only during the changeable period of the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed, the change effect is always executed if the flag is turned on. . In addition, out-of-range fluctuation or normal reach fluctuation is always performed (see S1910 and S1911 in FIG. 41).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time counter 273e is equal to or greater than the maximum changeable period (see FIG. 12A) corresponding to the fluctuation effect being executed (S1107), and the value of the fluctuation time counter 273e is the maximum If it is more than the changeable period (S1107: Yes), the stop symbol of the changing effect in execution can not be changed, so the process proceeds to S1112. That is, in the process of S1107, it is determined whether the variation effect being executed is out of effect for 10 seconds or more, and if the normal reach variation is 15 seconds or more.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1107, if the value of the fluctuation time counter 273e is less than the maximum changeable period corresponding to the fluctuation effect being executed (S1107: No), whether the fluctuation effect being executed is out of fluctuation It determines (S1108). If the fluctuation effect being executed is other than the out-of-out fluctuation (that is, normal reach fluctuation) (S1108: No), the stop symbol can still be changed, so the processing of S1109 to S1112 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1113. Transition.

  Thereby, when the normal reach change is executed, the stop symbol changeable period flag is not turned off until the maximum changeable period (15 seconds) of the normal reach change elapses, so the stop symbol changeable period flag is turned off. The timing at which the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are all stopped can be displayed as close as possible to the time (20 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect until the time (20 seconds) when all of the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed approaches. , Opportunity can increase the opportunity to do eye effect presentation.

  On the other hand, if the variable effect being executed is out of step (S1108: Yes), the third symbol array information of the display symbol pattern memory 273m is acquired (S1109). Then, it is determined whether the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the same symbol among the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower of the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol array information (S1110) If there is the same symbol (S1110: Yes), since it is still possible to change the stop symbol of deviation variation, the processing of S1111 to S1112 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1113.

  Thereby, when out-of-plane variation is being executed, if the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower-side pattern row Z3 have the same pattern, the stop pattern can be changed until the maximum changeable period (10 seconds) of the out-of-plane variation has elapsed. Since the period flag is not turned off, the timing at which the stop symbol changeable period flag is turned off should be as close as possible to the time (11 seconds) in which all upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed. it can. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous chance eye effect is to be started until the time (11 seconds) during which all of the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed (11 seconds) , Opportunity can increase the opportunity to do eye effect presentation.

  Also, if out-of-set variation is being performed, if the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 do not have the same symbol, the upper symbol row Z1 stops until the upper symbol row Z1 stops (that is, until the lower row pattern Z3 starts low-speed variation) The stop symbol changeable period flag is not turned off). Also in this case, the timing at which the stop symbol changeable period flag is turned off can be made as close as possible to the time (11 seconds) in which the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are all stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect until the time (11 seconds) when all the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed approaches. , Opportunity can increase the opportunity to do eye effect presentation.

  On the other hand, if the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 do not have the same symbol (S1110: No), it is determined whether the upper symbol row Z1 has stopped in the third symbol display device 81 (S1111). If the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped (including middle and low speed fluctuations) (S1111: Yes), the stop design change flag can not be changed, so the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is turned off Then (S1112), the process proceeds to S1113.

  In the process of S1111, when the upper symbol row Z1 is in high-speed variation in the third symbol display device 81 (S1111: No), the stop symbol of the deviation variation can be changed, so the process of S1112 is skipped and S1113 Transfer to processing.

  In the process of S1113, the chance display number selection counter 273j of the RAM 273 is updated (S1113), and it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 273 (S1114). The occurrence information of the power-off is stored when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110. In the process of S1114, when the occurrence information of the power-off is stored (S1114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1116), and the power-off process is executed (S1117) . After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1118), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off, and the output to the audio output device 226, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the third symbol display device 81 Turn off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased. Note that turning off each output port is to prevent abnormal display or abnormal voice output, and prevents the player from being confused by the abnormal display or abnormal voice output. It is for.

  In the process of S1114, if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored (S1114: No), whether or not the RAM 273 is destroyed based on the keyword “55AAh” (see the process of S1009 of FIG. 27) stored in the RAM 273. If the RAM 273 is not destroyed (S1115: No), the processing returns to S1101 and the above-described processing of S1101 to S1115 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the RAM 273 is destroyed in the process of S1115 (S1115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. In addition, when it is confirmed that the RAM 273 is destroyed, the sound output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special view holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc. The notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by

  By the main processing of FIG. 28 described above, the timing at which the stop symbol changeable period flag is turned off can be made as close as possible to the time when all the upper, middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the continuous chance eye effect presentation starts until the time when the upper, middle, lower each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 are all stopped and displayed, it is possible to determine the continuous chance eye You can increase the opportunity to make a presentation.

  In addition, while the continuous chance eye effect can be performed by replacing only the third symbol of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 during high speed fluctuation or medium speed fluctuation, the stop symbol changeable period flag is set to ON, If it is not possible to execute the continuous chance eye effect unless the third symbol of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed during the low speed fluctuation (or during the stop display), the stop symbol changeable period flag is set to OFF. Then, after the stop symbol changeable period flag is turned off, it is not determined (skipped) whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect production, so during the low speed fluctuation (or stop display) third It is possible to prevent the design from being changed. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player from changing the third symbol that can be recognized by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an unnatural fluctuation effect. Therefore, the value of the fluctuation presentation can be improved, and the value of the continuous chance eye presentation can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the audio lamp effect process (S1102) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the audio lamp effect process (S1102) of the effect control device 117. The audio lamp effect process (S1102) is mainly a process for executing lamp lighting control and audio output control, and is a process executed in the above-described main process (see FIG. 28).

  In the sound lamp effect process (S1102), first, the output of each lamp (for example, the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) is set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1205 described later. (S1201). Then, the customer waiting effect processing of S1202 is executed, and thereafter, the number-of-helds display update processing is executed (S1203). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has passed for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed. Moreover, in the number-of-holds display update processing, the number of lighting of the special-image holding lamp 85 is updated based on the number-of-holds command transmitted and received from the main control device 110.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1204). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. For example, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces an expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, it may be a decision button for changing to an effect that can be possessed or selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1204 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, the lamp editing process is executed (S1205), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1206). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1206, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1207), the sound lamp effect process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted and received from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1205 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1206 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the fluctuation effect process (S1104) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation effect process (S1104) of the effect control device 117. The fluctuation effect process (S1104) is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) to display a moving image (image) corresponding to the fluctuation effect, and is executed in the above-described main process (see FIG. 28). Processing.

  In the fluctuation effect process (S1104), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for big hit (that is, whether it is big hit or not) (S1301), If it is inside (S1301: Yes), jackpot effect processing is executed (S1302). In the jackpot effect processing, the number of rounds is updated, the number of prize balls is updated, the background image is updated for each round, and the like (for example, the effect data is read from the character ROM 275 every round Write to the area, etc.). After the end of the jackpot effect process (S1302), the variation effect process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is not a big hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether the third symbol display device 81 is in the middle of executing the fluctuation effect (during fluctuation) (S1303), and is not in fluctuation. (S1303: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 273f of the RAM 273 is on (S1304). As described above, the fluctuation start flag 273f is a flag that is turned on when the start of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is instructed from the main control device 110, and is turned off when the fluctuation effect is started. Specifically, the flag is set to ON when the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110 are received (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  In the process of S1304, when the change start flag 273f is off (S1304: No), another display process is executed (S1313), and the change effect process is ended. The other display processing is, for example, display processing such as a customer waiting effect which is executed when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has passed a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1304, when the fluctuation start flag 273f is on (S1304: Yes), first, the fluctuation start flag 273f is turned off (S1305). Then, the fluctuation time counter 273e of the RAM 273 is reset (set to 0), counting of the fluctuation time is started (S1306), and the process shifts to the processing of S1308. As described above, the fluctuation time counter 273 e is a counter that stores an elapsed time from when the fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when the fluctuation effect is being executed (varying) (S1303: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 273e is updated (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not it is within the fluctuation presentation time by confirming the presence or absence of reception of the stop command transmitted from the main control device 110 (S1308). For example, it is determined that it is within the fluctuation production time between the start of the fluctuation production and the reception of the stop command.

  When it is determined in the process of S1308 that it is within the fluctuation production time (S1308: Yes), it is determined whether it is the display time of the stop symbol (S1309). For example, it is determined whether the elapsed time of the fluctuation time counter 273e has reached the display time of the stop symbol set for the fluctuation effect being executed, and when the elapsed time becomes the display time of the stop symbol, the stop symbol is displayed. It is determined that it is time to display.

  In the process of S1309, when it is not yet the display time of the stop symbol (S1309: No), the third symbol display device 81 (LCD is displayed using the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276 ) Displays an image corresponding to the change effect data (change effect such as high-speed change) (S1310). As described above, in the present embodiment, the one-time variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the variation effect data for performing the variation effect such as high-speed variation and the stop which is the image data of the stop symbol It is performed based on the symbol data. Then, when the process of S1310 ends, the variation effect process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1309, if it is the display time of the stop symbol (S1309: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 is performed using the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276. A stop symbol is displayed on (LCD) (S1311). Then, the variation effect processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 28).

  In the process of S1308, when it is not within the fluctuation production time (S1308: No), that is, when the time of the fluctuation production ends, the fluctuation production in the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is paused (S1312). For example, the display of a new image is stopped on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), the image being displayed continues to be displayed without being changed. When the process of S1312 ends, the variation effect process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  According to the above-described change effect process (S1104) in FIG. 30, it is possible to display a moving image (image) and a stop pattern according to the change effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). In addition, it is possible to perform one-time change effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) based on the change effect data and the stop symbol data. Specifically, when the change effect is started, first, the change effect data stored in the change effect data storage area 276a is read, and the image corresponding to the change effect data (the change effect such as the high speed change) is the third symbol It is displayed on the display device 81. Then, every time the display time of the stop symbol is reached, the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b is read out and the stop symbol is displayed.

  That is, since data used for one time of the variable performance are stored in different storage areas 276a and 276b and read out as necessary, it is within the time of the variable performance and before the stop symbol display time In this case, the stop symbol data set (stored) once after the start of the change effect can be rewritten (overwritten) to another stop symbol data. Therefore, after the fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (that is, in the middle of the fluctuation effect), the stop symbol can be changed to the "chance of chance".

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to change the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that has not yet started the effect to "chance eye", and further, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to change the stop symbol during the change production to the "chance of chance" during the change production. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect which has not yet been started is changed to the chance eye, the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect can be changed to the chance eye, that is, one more time You can display "Opportunity Eye". Therefore, the chance to perform the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved. In addition, the fluctuation effect which makes the stop design the “chance of a chance” is executed at least twice continuously. That is, since the single-shot execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance eye effect presentation. Specifically, as described above, when the continuous chance-eye effect is executed, the variable effect which sets the stop symbol as the "chance-eye" is executed at least twice or more consecutively. Therefore, the player can improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and the player's attention can be drawn to the fluctuation display to be executed and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed. It can increase the value of chance eye direction.

  In addition, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye effect production is "probable variation big hit" or "normally big hit", the variation time of the last variation production of "super reach variation (40 seconds)", or A fluctuation time of "special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)" can increase the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed. Therefore, even when the number of fluctuation effects to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect production is small and the number of continuous display of the "chance eye" is small, the number of continuous display times of the "chance eye" can be increased. Therefore, every time the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eyes" increases, the player will improve the sense of expectation to the advantageous gaming state, and as a result, the player can continuously view the number of "chance eyes". I will have a good time in response. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a highly entertaining game.

  In addition, even when the number of the fluctuation effects performed in the continuous chance effect production is small, the number of the fluctuation effects performed is apparently increased, so that the fluctuation effects in the continuous chance effect production can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a monotonous impression on the game and to provide a game having high interest.

  When the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed, when the prize information command whose lottery result is “(probable change or normal) jackpot” is received, the production time of the continuous chance effect production Can be extended (continuation chance eye effect presentation continued). As a result, the fluctuation effect to be executed in the continuous chance eye effect is added, and the number of times the "opportunity eye" is continuously displayed increases, so the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the advantageous gaming state for the player The feeling can be improved, and the expectation can be kept longer for the player. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, after allowing the player to continue a state in which the expectation is improved for a long time, it is possible to shift to a game state advantageous to the player (here, “(probably changed or normal) jackpot”). Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the effect period of the continuous chance effect of which the final lottery result is "off" is over, and the next fluctuation effect is started, if it is within the changeable stop symbol period, Since it is possible to change the stop symbol of the changing effect being executed to "chance eye", the time for the continuous chance eye effect can be extended (continuous chance eye effect can be continued). Therefore, since the opportunity which can increase the number of times of the continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production can be increased, with the opportunity which can improve the sense of expectation of the player, the expectation is continued longer to the player Can increase the chances of having it.

  In addition, even when the production period of the continuous chance eye effect is extended (continuous chance eye effect is continued) on condition that the winning result command in which the lottery result is “normally big hit” is received, the continuous “chance eye” The normal time extension possible period counter 273o is set so that the number of display times is limited to a maximum of four times (see S1806 and S1808 in FIG. 40). Therefore, even when the continuous chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is “normally big hit” is performed apparently, it is possible to limit the number of continuously displayed “chance eyes” to 4 times at the maximum. Therefore, apparently, when the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is "normally big hit" is executed, the number of times the "chance eye" is continuously displayed exceeds 4 times, and the operation of the gaming machine is not good. It can suppress becoming stable beforehand.

  In addition, when the winning result information command whose lottery result is “probable variation big hit” is received, referring to the value of the probable variation time extension possible period counter 273n, the winning information command whose lottery result is “usually big hit” If received, the value of the normal time extension possible period counter 273o is referred to, and it is determined whether the duration of the continuous chance eye stage rendering can or can not be extended. Therefore, in order to determine whether extension is possible or not, it is determined on the basis of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table each time whether or not there is continuous chance eye effect being executed or scheduled to be executed, or stop symbol instruction storage table Since it is not necessary to count the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" in the continuous chance eye production based on the contents of, it is possible to reduce the control burden.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on each above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, and various modification improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the continuous chance effect is produced in which the final lottery result is "off", the winning information command having the lottery result "(probable or normal) jackpot" is received, The production period of continuous chance eye effects whose final lottery result is "off" is extended (continuous chance eye effects are continued) until the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received winning information command. . As a result, apparently, the final lottery result of the continuous chance eye effect production is changed to “(probable or normal) jackpot”, and the production period of the continuous chance eye effect production is extended. In addition to this, or in place of this, a continuous chance effect with the final lottery result being "off" and a continuous chance effect with the final lottery result as "(probable or normal) jackpot" When two continuous effects are executed, the two continuous effects may be connected so as to be one continuous effect. As an example, the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “off” is executed first, and then the continuous chance effect production in which the final lottery result is “(probably odd or normal) jackpot” is executed Case will be described. In this case, among the variable effects to be executed in order, it is a variable effect to be executed after the continuous chance effect effect that the final lottery result is “off”, and the final lottery result is “(probable change Or, all the fluctuation effects to be executed prior to the continuous chance eye effect which is the “big hit” are extracted. Then, the stop symbols of each of the extracted variation effects are set to be all "chance eyes". As a result, the continuous chance effect with the final lottery result being "off" and the continuous chance effect with the final lottery result as "(probable change or normal) jackpot" are one continuous chance effect. It is connected, and apparently, it becomes the same as the case where the continuous chance effect presentation in which the final lottery result is “(probability or normal) jackpot” is executed. Therefore, since the number of times of continuous display of "the chance eye" increases, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the gaming state advantageous to the player, and the sense of expectation is made longer. It can be held by the player continuously. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, after allowing the player to continue a state in which the expectation is improved for a long time, it is possible to shift to a game state advantageous to the player (here, “(probably changed or normal) jackpot”). Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, when the horizontal scroll variation display is executed in the third symbol display device 81, a part of the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol is displayed. Even after the symbol row (upper symbol row Z1 or lower row symbol row Z3) is stopped and displayed, replace the third symbol of the symbol row during high-speed variation, and change the stop symbol during variation effect to "chance eye" However, after all of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the third symbol of each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 may be replaced so that the stop symbol becomes a "chance eye". For example, as soon as all the stop symbols are displayed, an effect may be performed in which all the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 are replaced, or an effect in which only some symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 may be replaced may be performed. According to this configuration, the stop symbol can be changed even after the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and therefore, the period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed can be secured at the longest. Therefore, since the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the opportunity to perform continuous chance eye effects. The same applies to the case where variable display of vertical scroll is executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the fluctuation effect data used for the fluctuation effect and the stop symbol data used for displaying the stop symbol are stored separately, and the symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the stop symbol are “chance The stop symbol data is changed so as to become "the eye", and each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 which is scrolled (fluctuating) is displayed so that the stop symbol is stopped and displayed, but the stop symbol is stopped. Acquires the remaining time until the stop symbol is displayed without storing the data, and when the remaining time elapses, the scroll display is being performed so that the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 stop at the "chance eye" The symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be changed.

  In the above embodiment, when the variable display is horizontally scrolled in the third symbol display device 81, the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed, but The number of symbol rows is not limited to three, and may be one or two, or four or more. Further, also in the case where the variable display vertically scrolls, the number of symbol rows may be other than three.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the continuous chance effect is executed, the fluctuation effect in which the stop symbol becomes the "chance symbol" is configured to be continuously executed, but the stop symbol is the "chance symbol". An effect in which the variable effect which is to be performed is performed intermittently may be performed as a continuous chance effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although it is determined in the presentation control device 117 whether or not the continuous chance eye effect is to be performed, instead, it is determined whether the main control device 110 is to perform the continuous chance eye effect or not It is good also as composition of performing judgment. When it is determined in the main control unit 110 whether or not to perform the continuous chance eye effect, since transmission and reception of the winning information command is unnecessary, the number of transmissions of the command in the main control unit 110, and in the effect control unit 117 The number of command receptions can be reduced. Therefore, both control burdens of the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above embodiment, each time the prize information command is received, the effect control device 117 stores the setting value corresponding to the lottery result indicated by the received prize information command in the stop symbol instruction storage table. Although it comprises, it may constitute so that a setup value which can distinguish each lottery result may be memorized, respectively. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command is "reach before and after reach", "set value: reach before and after reach" is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. Likewise, if "reach other than out of reach," "set value: reach other than out of reach," "complete out," "set out: completely out," if "certainly hit big hit," "set up If "normal jackpot", "setting value: normal jackpot" is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. If configured in this way, it is possible to identify the pattern of the stop symbol by referring to the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table, so every time when a new change effect is started, the stop symbol command indicating the stop symbol of the change effect is displayed. There is no need to send and receive. Therefore, the control load can be reduced for both the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the last fluctuation production in the continuous chance film production ends in the “permanent change jackpot” or the “normal jackpot”, one or more “chance eyes” once the last fluctuation production is started. Is displayed and the effect is continued, and then the stop symbol corresponding to "perhaps big hit" or "usually big hit" is displayed, but in the last variation production, the effect to display the "eye of chance" is not performed The effect may be performed as usual, and a stop symbol corresponding to "probably big hit" or "usually big hit" may be displayed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lottery result of the new winning is “normally big hit”, and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within a period (changeable period) in which the stop symbol can be changed. If “set value: out” is stored from the execution area to the third hold area in the stop symbol instruction storage table, the display of “chance eye” is limited to a maximum of four consecutive times in the case where In addition, do not change the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently being executed. Instead of this, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently being executed is changed to "chance", and thereafter, the stop symbol of each of the first to third fluctuation effects is also changed to "chance". And in the stop symbol of the fourth change production which is the last change production, without displaying "the chance eyes", it is made to simply display the stop design corresponding to "the normal jackpot", "the chance eyes" The display of may be limited to a maximum of 4 consecutive times.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the maximum value of the number of continuous display of "chance eyes" in the continuous chance eye production is "normally big hit (no limit)" and "usually a big hit (up to 4 times in a row)" Although the case and the case of “reach out of back and forth (up to 3 consecutive times)” are configured differently, this maximum value may be set arbitrarily.

  Further, in the above embodiment, another continuous chance eye effect is not performed after completion of the continuous chance eye effect, but the continuous chance eye effect may be continuously performed. . For example, when performing continuous chance eye effects continuously, the total number of "chance eyes" displayed as if they were continuous by executing each continuous opportunity eye effect continuously is the subsequent continuous Do not exceed the maximum number of consecutive times according to the final lottery results for directing the chance eyes. Specifically, if the lottery result of the subsequent consecutive chance eye direction production is "probable variation big hit", the restriction number of continuous display of "chance eye" is not performed, and if "normal big hit", up to 4 times in a row and up to "out of order" If it is a reach or a chance of getting out, it will be up to 3 consecutive times. As a result, since the number of times of continuous changing effects with the stop symbol as the "chance of chance" increases, the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

  Moreover, in the continuous chance eye effect production of the above embodiment, although the fluctuation effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as "the chance eye (the missed chance eye, the reach chance eye)", the stop symbol is the "chance eye". Alternatively, the sound effect during the change effect (a mode of the sound effect of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third symbol) may be changed to a sound effect different from that during the normal change effect. This sound effect makes it possible for the player to recognize that the player is producing the continuous chance eyes, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to participate in the game. In addition, after making the stop design “the chance eye”, furthermore, the sound effect during the change production (a mode of the sound effect of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third design, etc.) You may change it to a different sound effect.

  Moreover, in the continuous chance eye effect production of the above embodiment, although the fluctuation effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as "the chance eye (the missed chance eye, the reach chance eye)", the stop symbol is the "chance eye". Alternatively, the lighting portions 29 (33) during the variable effect and the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (a form of the dynamic display effect) may be changed to a pattern different from that during the normal variable effect. Since it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance effect is being produced by the lighting pattern different from the normal, it is possible to attract the player's interest. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to participate in the game. In addition, after making the stop design “the chance eye”, furthermore, during the normal fluctuation production of the illumination parts 29 to 33 during the fluctuation production and the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (a form of the dynamic display production) You may change it to a different pattern.

  Moreover, in the continuous chance eye effect production of the above embodiment, although the fluctuation effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as "the chance eye (the missed chance eye, the reach chance eye)", instead, it is different from the usual special It is also possible to perform various fluctuation effects continuously. For example, the same variation effect (the same aspect of the effect of dynamic display) may be performed continuously, or different variation effects may be continuously performed in a predetermined order. This special variation effect makes it possible for the player to recognize that the continuous chance effect is being performed, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect production of the above embodiment, the fluctuation effect with the stop symbol as "the chance eye (the missed chance eye, the reach chance eye)" is continuously performed, but at that time, the effect during the fluctuation effect Change the sound (a mode of sound effect of dynamic display, for example, stop sound of the third symbol etc.) to a sound effect different from that during normal fluctuation production, or display parts 29 to 33 or display lamp during fluctuation production The lighting pattern of 34 (a mode of the effect of dynamic display) may be changed to a pattern different from that during the normal change effect, or a special change effect different from the normal may be performed continuously. Moreover, you may perform each combining two or more.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the stop symbol in which three same 3rd symbols are stopped and displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is set as "the chance eye", three predetermined third symbols are the 3rd symbol. The stop symbol displayed in a stopped state on the three-symbol display device 81 may be set as the "chance of chance".

  Further, in the above embodiment, control of sound output, control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of fluctuation representation (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 are collectively performed. Although the effect control device 117 is configured to perform the control, various types of control may be shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, the sound lamp control device performs control of sound output and control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of display of fluctuation representation (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 is controlled. It may be configured to be performed by the device.

  In the above embodiment, one first ball entry port 64 is provided as the ball entry port at which the determination of the jackpot is started, but two or more first ball entry ports may be provided. . Then, in accordance with the first ball entry where the game ball has won, it may be configured to change the effect mode of the continuous chance effect (for example, change the scroll direction (vertical and horizontal) of the effect).

  Further, in the above embodiment, when determining the effect pattern (front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear out, reach completely out) displayed by the third symbol display device 81, based on the counter value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Although it has been decided, it is decided based on the counter values of other counters (first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3) without providing stop pattern selection counter C3. It may be configured to In addition, the effect pattern displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is one of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3, the counter value of the first random number counter C1, and the counter of the first type counter C2. It may be determined based on the value, or based on a plurality of counter values of the variation type counters C1 to C3, the counter value of the first random number counter C1, and the counter value of the first collision type counter C2. You may decide.

  In the first embodiment, the first random number counter C1 counts numerical values in the range of 0 to 738, but the range to be counted may be appropriately determined. Here, in order to count numerical values in the range of 0 to 738, an area of at least 2 bytes (the range which can be counted in 2 bytes is 0 to 65535) is required. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is composed of 2 bytes, it may count a numeric value in the range of 0 to 65535, which is the maximum range that can be counted by 2 bytes, or 0 to 32768 (most significant bit Only the bit value is “1”, the other bits may be counted in the range of bit values “0”.

  Similarly, in the first hit type counter C2 in the above embodiment, numerical values in the range of 0 to 4 are counted, and in the stop pattern selection counter C3, numerical values in the range of 0 to 238 are counted. The range may be determined as appropriate. Here, in order to count numerical values in the range of 0 to 4 and in the range of 0 to 238, an area of at least 1 byte (the range which can be counted by 1 byte is 0 to 255) is required. For example, if the first type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are configured by 1 byte, it is possible to count a numerical value in the range of 0 to 255 which is the maximum range that can be counted by 1 byte. , 0 to 128 (only the most significant bit has a bit value of “1”, and the other bits have a bit value of “0”).

  Here, when calculating the probability with the maximum value of the range to be counted as the denominator and one count value as the numerator, the wider the range to be counted, the easier it is to provide various probabilities. For example, if the denominator is 100, the probability can be set only every 1%, but if the denominator is 1000, the probability can be set every 0.1%. That is, the wider the range to be counted, the easier it is to fine-tune the probability. In pachinko machines, it is common practice to produce models with the same variation effects and jackpot effects but different jackpot probabilities, so by configuring the pachinko machine to easily perform fine adjustment of the probability, Fine adjustment of the jackpot probability can be easily performed for each model, and the design load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 is configured to transmit the hold count command to the effect control unit 117, but the hold count command may not be transmitted. That is, in the effect control device 117, since the special figure reserve ball number N is stored in the special figure reserve ball counter 273b of the RAM 273, the special figure reserve ball number N can be known without receiving the reserve number command. That is, in this case, the lamps of the same number as the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273 b are configured to be lighted by the special figure holding lamp 85. As a result, the number of transmissions of the command in the main control device 110 and the number of reception of the command in the effect control device 117 can be reduced, so that the control burden on both the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117 can be reduced. Can.

  Moreover, although the "variation direction command" is provided in the said embodiment, you may implement this invention by the pachinko machine etc. in which the "variation direction command" is not provided. Further, although the “operation time addition command” is provided in the above embodiment, the present invention may be implemented by a pachinko machine or the like in which the “operation time addition command” is not provided.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control device 110 determines the change effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the advance notice effect, but the effect control device 117 replaces the main control device 110, The fluctuation effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the advance effect may be determined. For example, in the effect control device 117, when the winning information command is received, the change effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the advance effect effect are determined based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. In the case where the effect control device 117 determines the change effect or the notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the special view holding lamp 85 displays the number of holdings for the first ball entrance 64. You do not have to, or you may. When the number of holdings is not displayed, the number of transmissions of the number-of-holdings command in the main control device 110 can be reduced, so that the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure reserve ball number N is notified by turning on the special figure reserve lamp 85, but without the special figure reserve lamp 85, the special figure reserve ball number N is displayed as the third symbol It may be configured to display on the device 81. In addition, the display is such that the number of reservations is displayed visually distinguishably (for example, a number or an area divided into four is displayed as an aspect different by the number of reservations (for example, color or lighting pattern)) Do. The special figure holding ball number N may be notified by turning on the special figure holding lamp 85, and the special figure holding ball number N may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, although it was constituted so that winning a prize to the 1st entrance 64 can be held a maximum of four times, the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times, or three times or less, or , 5 or more times (for example, 8 times) may be set.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure holding ball counter 203c is provided as a counter for counting the special drawing holding ball number N of the first entrance 64, but without providing the counter 203c, it is possible to Check the contents of the holding ball storage area 203a (for example, at the start of fluctuation) (count the number of areas with data) to obtain the special figure holding ball number N of the first entrance 64 You may configure it. In this case, after shifting data from the shift source area to the shift destination area, the data of the shift source area is cleared.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is limited to the one that scrolls the symbols as identification information in the vertical or horizontal direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 Instead, the symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Also, it may be scrolled diagonally. Also, it may be scrolled immediately above. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In the above embodiment, the passage of the second entrance 67 is configured to be suspended up to four times each, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The present invention may be implemented on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from that of the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented in a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as V zone. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an allearch or a ball.

  The present invention may be implemented on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from that of the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area after the jackpot symbol is displayed. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is a coin, a medal, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above will be shown. A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry A game machine comprising: peripheral control means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control regarding a game. The control means is a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information accompanying the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means , Lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering the ball, lottery information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means to the peripheral control means, and the ball entering information By acquisition means Ball storage information storage means for storing the stored ball storage information, and dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball storage information storage means; The control means performs, on the display means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, and the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means , Lottery information receiving means for receiving the lottery information by the lottery information receiving means, and aspect information storage means for storing the aspect information indicating the aspect of the dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information received by the lottery information receiving means When it is determined that the mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to a predetermined mode based on the contents of the mode information storage means First change means for changing the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means to the predetermined mode when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means, and the first change For each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display whose aspect is changed by the means, the dynamic display is executed in the predetermined mode, or instead of the dynamic display, the dynamic display is different from the dynamic display A game machine A1 comprising: predetermined mode execution means for executing a plurality of target displays in the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the entering of the game medium is detected by the detecting means in the main control means, the entering information associated with the entering ball is acquired by the entering information acquiring means, and based on the entered information. Lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. The display control means instructs the peripheral control means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means. Further, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode information indicating the mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information is used as the mode information storage means Based on the contents of the mode information storage means, whether or not the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to a predetermined mode is determined by the change possibility determination means. Here, if it is determined that the changeability determination unit determines that the change is possible, the mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed by the first change unit to a predetermined mode. Furthermore, for each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display whose aspect is changed by the predetermined aspect execution means, the dynamic display is executed in a predetermined aspect, or instead of the dynamic display A plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are executed in a predetermined manner.

  Since the dynamic display executing means of the peripheral control means executes the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means, the aspect of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means of the peripheral control means Is determined before the start of its execution. In the peripheral control means, since the aspect of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to the predetermined aspect by the first changing means, the aspect of the dynamic display determined before the start of the execution is It can be changed in a predetermined manner during execution of the dynamic display. Therefore, when the aspect of the dynamic display is continuously made into the predetermined aspect, since the aspect of the active dynamic display which has already been executed can be made into the predetermined aspect, the unexecuted dynamic is executed next. The aspect of the dynamic display can be made into the predetermined aspect more than once from the aspect of the dynamic display to the predetermined aspect. Therefore, the opportunity to make the aspect of dynamic display into the predetermined aspect continuously can be increased. Further, the dynamic display performed following the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first change means is executed by the predetermined mode execution means in a predetermined mode, or the dynamic display performed subsequently is performed Instead of the dynamic display, a plurality of dynamic display different from the dynamic display can be executed in a predetermined manner. Therefore, as compared with the case where the dynamic display is performed in a predetermined manner without changing the dynamic display, the dynamic display is replaced, and a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are performed in a predetermined manner. In some cases, dynamic display of a predetermined aspect can be performed one or more times. Therefore, while increasing the opportunity to make the aspect of dynamic display a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, the frequency | count of execution of the dynamic display of a predetermined aspect can also be increased.

  In the gaming machine A1, the peripheral control means includes effect information storage means for storing effect information for which dynamic display effect contents to be executed in the display means are defined, and the predetermined mode execution means is the effect A game machine A2 characterized in that a plurality of dynamic displays are executed from among the dynamic displays defined by the effect information stored in the information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the effect information storage means stores the effect information in which the effect contents of the dynamic display executed in the display means are defined in the peripheral control means, and the predetermined mode execution means A plurality of dynamic displays are executed from among the dynamic displays defined by the presentation information. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare special effect information and store it in the storage area only in order to execute a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display changed by the second changing means. Therefore, the consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the effect information, the effect contents of the dynamic display for enhancing the player's sense of expectation and the effect contents of the dynamic display different from the dynamic display are included in each of the dynamic display It is determined together with the execution time, and when the execution of the dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first changing means is instructed by the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means. The method further comprises executability determination means for determining whether it is possible to execute a plurality of dynamic displays including the dynamic display for enhancing the player's sense of expectation within the execution time of the instructed dynamic display, If it is determined that execution is possible by the executability judging means, instead of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means, the dynamic display including the player's sense of expectation is included. It has multiple dynamic displays Gaming machine A3, wherein are those to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in the presentation information, presentation contents of dynamic display for enhancing the player's sense of expectation and presentation contents of dynamic display different from the dynamic display are executed for each of the dynamic display If execution of the dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first changing means is instructed by the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means, the execution of the instructed dynamic display is performed. It is determined by the executability judging means whether or not a plurality of dynamic displays including dynamic displays which increase the player's sense of expectation can be respectively executed within the time. Then, if it is determined that execution is possible, instead of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, a plurality of dynamic pictures including dynamic display for enhancing the player's sense of expectation Each display is executed by the predetermined mode execution means. Therefore, instead of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, when a plurality of dynamic displays are executed, the dynamic display which always enhances the player's sense of expectation is executed As a result, the player can be made to have a sense of expectation, and furthermore, since a plurality of dynamic displays are executed, the contents of the dynamic display can be diversified. Therefore, in the case where the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed as it is, and in the case where plural dynamic displays are executed instead of the instructed dynamic display, the player Since it is possible to make a change in the sense of expectation given to the player, it is possible to provide the player with a highly entertaining game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, whenever the peripheral control means receives lottery information by the lottery information receiving means, mode information indicating an aspect of dynamic display not yet executed corresponding to the lottery information, When the execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the aspect information storage execution means associated with the reception order of the lottery information and stored in the aspect information storage means, and the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the execution is instructed Means for acquiring, from the mode information storage means, mode information corresponding to the selected dynamic display based on the reception order of the lottery information, and the mode information obtained based on the mode information obtained by the mode information acquisition means Execution mode setting means for setting the mode of dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means, and the predetermined mode execution means is determined to be changeable by the changeability determination means And a second change unit configured to change the mode information of the unexecuted dynamic display stored in the mode information storage unit to mode information indicating the predetermined mode. Gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in the peripheral control means, whenever the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode information indicating the non-executed dynamic display mode corresponding to the lottery information is executed as the mode information storage The mode information of the unexecuted dynamic display stored in the mode information storage means when stored in the mode information storage means in association with the order of reception of the lottery information from the means and stored in the mode information storage means and changeable by the change possibility determination means Are each changed by the second changing means to the mode information indicating the predetermined mode. Then, when execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instructing means, the mode information corresponding to the dynamic display for which the execution is instructed is the mode information from the mode information storage means on the basis of the reception order of the lottery information. Based on the mode information, the mode of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means is set by the execution mode setting means based on the mode information. Therefore, when execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means, the mode information corresponding to the instructed dynamic display is simply obtained, and the dynamic instructed for the execution based thereon. The display mode can be set. That is, whenever it is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means to execute the dynamic display, it is necessary to determine a situation such as whether the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode and set an appropriate mode. Because it does not exist, control burden can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A4, if one of the second changing means and the aspect information storage executing means has the other of the second changing means and the aspect information storage executing means changing or setting the aspect information in the aspect information storage means , A game machine A5 characterized in that the mode information is changed or set after the end of the process.

  According to the gaming machine A5, if one of the second changing means and the mode information storage executing means is changing or setting the mode information in the mode information storing means, the other of the second changing means and the mode information storage executing means Change or set the form information after it is finished. Therefore, while the mode information in the mode information storage means is being changed or set by one of the second changing means and the mode information storage execution means, the mode information being changed or set is erroneously changed to the second change It can be prevented from being changed or set by the other of the means and aspect information storage execution means. Therefore, accurate aspect information can be stored in the aspect information storage means.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the aspect of the dynamic display executed next to each dynamic display in which the aspect is changed to the predetermined aspect by the second changing means is limited to an aspect different from the predetermined aspect. A game machine A6 characterized by comprising mode restriction means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the aspect of the dynamic display performed next to each dynamic display whose aspect is changed to the predetermined aspect by the second changing means is the aspect restriction means in an aspect different from the predetermined aspect. Limited by Therefore, when execution of a dynamic display is instructed next to each dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the second changing means, the dynamic display is performed in a mode different from the predetermined mode. In addition, while the dynamic display is being executed, even if it is determined that the aspect of the dynamic display being executed by the changeability determining means can be changed to the predetermined aspect, the aspect of the dynamic display being executed is It is executed without change. Therefore, after the aspect of the dynamic display is continuously made into the predetermined aspect, it is possible to prevent the aspect of the dynamic display from being continuously made into the predetermined aspect again, so that the aspect of the dynamic display exceeds the scheduled number. Can be prevented from continuing.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the main control means may separate the information on the number of ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means separately from the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means. A game machine A7 characterized in that it has a number-of-entered-number-of-balls sending means for sending to the peripheral control means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in the main control means, information on the number of ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means separates from the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means to the periphery control means It is transmitted by the number transmission means. Therefore, since the peripheral control means can separately receive the lottery information and the information on the number of ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means, processing for each information can be executed at different timings. , The control burden can be distributed. In addition, since the main control means can separately transmit the lottery information and the information on the number of ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means to the peripheral control means, compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing, Control burden can be distributed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a dynamic display mode, a dynamic display mode, and a dynamic mode sound effect. Game machine A8 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the predetermined mode includes at least one of the mode of dynamic display effect, the mode of display result of dynamic display, and the mode of sound effect of dynamic display, The player can be made aware that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode, and the player's interest can be attracted.

  In addition, when making the aspect of a dynamic display into a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, you may change a predetermined | prescribed aspect for every dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined aspect is the aspect of the dynamic display, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined aspect is the display of the dynamic display, and the third dynamic In the display, the predetermined aspect is the aspect of the sound effect of the dynamic display. As described above, changing the aspect of the dynamic display can make the dynamic display change more colorful, and thus can attract the player's interest more strongly.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry And a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to perform dynamic display of the identification information, and when the detection means detects the entrance of the game medium, the detection means is accompanied by the entrance of the game medium. The lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information, the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry based on the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, and the lottery information Aspect information storage means for storing aspect information indicating an aspect of dynamic display corresponding to lottery information acquired by acquisition means, and ball entry information storage means for storing ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, The dynamic display execution means is The dynamic display of the identification information is performed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, and when the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the content information of the aspect information storage means is used. The changeable / non-removable determination unit determines whether or not the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution unit can be changed to a predetermined mode, and when the changeable / non-changeable determination unit determines that change is possible, the dynamic About the 1st change means which changes the mode of the dynamic display currently performed by the display execution means into the said predetermined mode, and each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display which changed the mode by the 1st change means And a predetermined mode execution means for executing the dynamic display in the predetermined mode or performing a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display in the predetermined mode instead of the dynamic display. A baby Game machine A9 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A9, when the detecting means detects the entering of the game medium, the entering information associated with the entering ball is acquired by the entering information acquiring means, and the entering information is stored in the entering information storage means It is memorized. And execution of dynamic display is performed by dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the entering information storage means. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the ball entry information, and the dynamic corresponding to the lottery information Aspect information indicating an aspect of display is stored in the aspect information storage means. Then, based on the contents of the mode information storage means, the change possibility determination means determines whether or not the mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to a predetermined mode. Here, if it is determined that the changeability determination unit determines that the change is possible, the mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed by the first change unit to a predetermined mode. Furthermore, the aspect of the dynamic display before the execution of the dynamic display performed next to the dynamic display whose aspect is changed is changed by the second change means to the predetermined aspect. Then, based on the execution time of the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the second changing means, the executability judging means determines whether or not a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display whose mode is changed can be executed. . If it is determined that execution is possible by the executability judging means, instead of the dynamic display changed by the second changing means, a plurality of dynamic displays different from the changed dynamic display are respectively executed in a predetermined mode in a predetermined mode It is carried out by means.

  Since the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, the aspect of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined before the start of its execution. However, since the aspect of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to the predetermined aspect by the first changing means, the aspect of the dynamic display determined before the start of the execution is the dynamic display Can be changed in a predetermined manner during execution of. Therefore, when the aspect of the dynamic display is continuously made into the predetermined aspect, since the aspect of the active dynamic display which has already been executed can be made into the predetermined aspect, the unexecuted dynamic is executed next. The aspect of the dynamic display can be made into the predetermined aspect more than once from the aspect of the dynamic display to the predetermined aspect. Therefore, the opportunity to make the aspect of dynamic display into the predetermined aspect continuously can be increased. Further, the dynamic display performed following the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first change means is executed by the predetermined mode execution means in a predetermined mode, or the dynamic display performed subsequently is performed Instead of the dynamic display, a plurality of dynamic display different from the dynamic display can be executed in a predetermined manner. Therefore, as compared with the case where the dynamic display is performed in a predetermined manner without changing the dynamic display, the dynamic display is replaced, and a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are performed in a predetermined manner. In some cases, dynamic display of a predetermined aspect can be performed one or more times. Therefore, while increasing the opportunity to make the aspect of dynamic display a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, the frequency | count of execution of the dynamic display of a predetermined aspect can also be increased.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry A game machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control related to a game. The control means is a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information accompanying the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means , Lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering the ball, lottery information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means to the peripheral control means, and the ball entering information By acquisition means It comprises: ball entry information storage means for storing the acquired ball entry information; and dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute dynamic display of identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means The peripheral control means, when instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means to execute dynamic display of identification information, the player can dynamically display identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. The player can recognize the identification information by the dynamic display execution means executed on the display means in a manner in which the identification information is difficult to recognize, and the aspect of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means After the display mode is changed to the above mode, stop display execution means for stopping and displaying the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information on the display means, and lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means are received When the lottery information is received by the selected information receiving means and the lottery information receiving means, a part of the plurality of identification information is stopped by the stop display execution means or the plurality of identification information is displayed by the dynamic display execution means If a portion of the character is dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode, the dynamic display execution means changes the identification information dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode, thereby stopping the display of the identification information The dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the difficult-to-recognize mode when it is determined by the changeable determination means that the changeability determination means determines whether the changeable to the predetermined aspect and the changeability determination means The first change means for changing the stop display mode of the existing identification information to the predetermined mode, and the stop display of the identification information whose mode is changed by the first change means is ended, and the dynamic display of the identification information thereafter is performed. A game machine characterized by further comprising: second changing means for controlling so that the predetermined mode is selected as a stop display mode of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means when being executed B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information accompanying the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and based on the ball entering information Lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means Is instructed to the peripheral control means by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, when execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the player can dynamically display the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. After the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in a difficult-to-recognize manner, and then the aspect of the dynamic display being executed is made an aspect in which the player can recognize the identification information. The plurality of identification information dynamically displayed is stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display execution means. Then, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means is received by the lottery information reception means, the stop display execution means causes part of the plurality of identification information to be stopped or displayed by the dynamic display execution means When a part of the plurality of identification information is displayed dynamically in a recognizable manner, stop display of the identification information by changing the identification information dynamically displayed in a manner difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means It is determined by the changeability determination means whether or not the mode can be changed to a predetermined mode. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is changed by the first change unit to a predetermined mode. Then, the stop display of the identification information changed to the predetermined mode is ended by the first changing means, and the dynamic display of the identification information thereafter is executed, the stop of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means Since the second changing unit controls the predetermined mode as the display mode, the stop display mode of the identification information executed by the stop display execution unit is continuously or intermittently changed to the predetermined mode.

  Therefore, even after the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information and then the stop display execution means causes some of the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed, or the dynamic display execution means performs the plurality of identification information Dynamic display in a difficult-to-recognize manner within a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic-display execution means, even if The stop display mode of the identification information in can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is not a period during which the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, but only a period in which all of the plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner. The period dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize can also be a period that can be changed to a predetermined manner. Therefore, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of identification information be a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased by the part which can extend the changeable period.

  Note that, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a high speed (scroll display) is exemplified. Further, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a medium speed or a low speed (scroll display) is exemplified.

  Moreover, that the stop display mode is a predetermined mode means that predetermined identification information is included in the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed, and that the predetermined identification information is regularly included. Are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means instructs the dynamic display execution means of the dynamic display execution means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information, the first to n-th plural pieces of identification information are connected. Dynamic display of the identification information sequence up to (n is an integer of 2 or more) is executed on the display means in the unit of identification information sequence, and the same identification information is included in each of the first to nth identification information sequences When the stop display mode of the identification information is the predetermined mode when the stop display is displayed, the stop display execution means performs the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. The first to n-th identification information sequences are stopped and displayed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to n-th identification information sequences, and the changeability determination unit determines lottery information by the lottery information receiving unit When receiving the If the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence is executed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the display execution means, it is determined that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, and the first change means The stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is determined as a predetermined mode when it is determined that the changeability determination unit determines that the change is possible. A game machine B2 characterized in that it is to be changed.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the first to n-th (n is an integer of 2 or more) in which a plurality of identification information are connected. Dynamic display of identification information strings up to is performed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in units of identification information strings, and thereafter, the first to nth identification information strings are the first to nth identification information Stop display is performed by the stop display execution unit for each identification information column in the order of the columns. Here, when the same identification information is included in each of the first to n-th identification information strings and the stop display is performed, it is determined that the stop display mode of the identification information is a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence is executed by the dynamic display execution means in a mode in which recognition of the second identification information is difficult, the stop display mode of the identification information Is determined to be changeable to a predetermined mode by the change possibility determination means. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed by the first change means to a predetermined mode . Therefore, when the stop display of the identification information is performed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to n-th identification information sequences by the stop display execution unit, even after the first identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, even if the first identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner by the dynamic display execution means, the second identification information string is recognized within a period in which the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a difficult recognition manner. It is possible to change the stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings in the dynamic display in a difficult manner to a predetermined mode. Therefore, the period during which the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to the predetermined mode is not limited to the period in which all of the first to n-th identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize mode. A period from the time when one identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to the time before the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner is also a changeable period in a predetermined manner. Can. Therefore, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of identification information be a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased by the part which can extend the changeable period.

  The arrangement of each of the first to n-th identification information strings stopped and displayed in each display area of the display means may be any arrangement. For example, each identification information row may be arranged in a row in the vertical direction and may be arranged in order horizontally, or each identification information row may be arranged in a row in the horizontal direction and arranged in order in the vertical direction. The information row may be a row in the diagonal direction, and may be arranged in parallel by shifting in parallel. Further, each identification information string may be arranged on a straight line.

  In the gaming machine B2, the changeability determination means includes identification information determination means for determining whether the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information rows, and the lottery information When the lottery information is received by the receiving means, the identification information judging means judges that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information strings, and the dynamic display executing means If the dynamic display of the n-th identification information sequence is executed in the difficult-to-recognize mode, it is determined that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, and the second changing unit The stop display mode of the nth identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed to a predetermined mode when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means. Feature game machine B3

  According to the gaming machine B3, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined by the identification information determining means that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information lines. If the dynamic display execution means performs the dynamic display of the nth identification information string in a difficult-to-recognize mode, the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to the predetermined mode and the change possibility determination means determines Be done. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the stop display mode of the nth identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed by the first change means to a predetermined mode. Therefore, the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information strings is displayed in the order of the first to n-th identification information strings by the stop display execution means. When executed for each identification information string, the first to (n−1) th identification information strings can be recognized even after each identification information string is stopped and displayed, or the (n−1) th identification information string can be recognized Even if it is displayed dynamically, within the period in which the nth identification information string is displayed dynamically in a difficult-to-recognize manner, stop display of the nth identification information sequence in the dynamic display in its difficult-to-recognize manner The aspect can be changed to a predetermined aspect. Therefore, the period during which the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to the predetermined mode is not limited to the period in which all of the first to n-th identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize mode. The period from when one identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to before the (n-1) th identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner can also be changed to a predetermined aspect It can be a period. Therefore, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of identification information be a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased by the part which can extend the changeable period.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the dynamic display of the identification information, the (n-1) th identification information string is dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode, and then the nth identification information string is stopped. The first dynamic display capable of executing change processing for changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the first change unit until the display is performed, and the (n-1) th identification information string The second dynamic display incapable of executing the change process by the first changing unit after the dynamic display in the recognizable mode and the stop display of the nth identification information string is displayed. The dynamic display execution unit executes any one of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display, and the changeability determination unit is configured to execute the first to the second (n Determine whether the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each identification information string up to -1) The identification information determination means includes the same identification information in each of the first to (n−1) th identification information strings when the lottery information is received by the lottery information reception means. If it is determined that the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, it is determined that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. Machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the dynamic display of the identification information includes the dynamic display of the (n-1) th identification information string in a recognizable manner and the stop display of the nth identification information string The first dynamic display capable of executing the changing process of changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the first changing means during the period, and the (n-1) th identification information sequence moving in a recognizable manner And the second dynamic display in which the change processing by the first change means can not be executed between the time when the dynamic display is performed and the n-th identification information string is stopped and displayed, and the first dynamic One of the display and the second dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined by the identification information determining means that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information columns, and the dynamic display is executed. If the first dynamic display is executed by the means, the stop display mode of the identification information is determined to be changeable to the predetermined mode by the change possibility determination means. When the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, the (n-1) th identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, and then the n-th identification information string is displayed. Since the change processing for changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the first change means can be executed before the stop display is performed, the nth identification information is generated before the nth identification information string is displayed by stop. Be certain to change the column identification information. Therefore, the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) identification information columns is stopped and executed. When executed by the means, the stop display mode of the identification information can be reliably changed to the predetermined mode before the n-th identification information string is stopped and displayed. Therefore, only when the stop display mode of the identification information can be reliably changed to the predetermined mode before the nth identification information string is stopped and displayed, the stop display mode of the identification information is determined by the first changing means in the predetermined mode. The first change means changes the stop display mode of the identification information to the stop display mode regardless of whether or not the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed before the n-th identification information row is stopped and displayed. Control burden can also be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, an array information storage means for storing array information indicating an array of identification information in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged in a predetermined order is provided. The stop display execution means corresponds to the one identification information sequence in the arrangement of the identification information indicated by the arrangement information, corresponding to a part of the continuous arrangement in the arrangement of the identification information indicated by the arrangement information. Range information storage means for storing one range information indicating the range of continuous arrangement for each of the first to n-th identification information strings is provided, and dynamic display of identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means A game machine B5 for causing the display means to stop and display each identification information of an identification information sequence corresponding to each range information stored in the range information storage means after being stored.

  According to the gaming machine B5, array information indicating an array of identification information in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged in a predetermined order is stored in the array information storage means, and one identification information string includes array information It corresponds to a part of continuous sequences among the sequences of identification information to be shown. Further, in the arrangement of identification information indicated by the arrangement information, one range information indicating a range of a continuous arrangement corresponding to one identification information sequence is a range information storage means for each of the first to n-th identification information sequences Is stored in the display unit, and after the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the dynamic display execution unit, each identification information of the identification information string corresponding to each range information stored in the range information storage unit is stopped and displayed on the display unit The stop means is displayed by the execution means. Therefore, when identifying each identification information of each of the first to n-th identification information sequences to be displayed in a stopped state, one range information indicating the range of the array corresponding to one identification information sequence is selected from the first to the first Since each identification information string up to n can be stored, for each of the first to n-th identification information strings, information individually indicating each identification information included in the identification information string, and a sequence of each identification information The amount of information stored in the storage means can be reduced compared to the case of storing the information indicating the order.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the stop display execution means includes identification information acquisition means for acquiring the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed on the display means, and the plurality of the acquisition information acquired by the identification information acquisition means. Identification information storage means for storing identification information, and after the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, each identification information stored in the identification information storage means is displayed on the display means The display is stopped, and the first change unit is the dynamic display execution unit among the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit when the changeability determination unit determines that the change is possible. A game machine B6, characterized in that the identification information corresponding to the identification information dynamically displayed is changed, and the stop display mode of the identification information is changed to a predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine B6, when the identification information acquisition means acquires the plurality of pieces of identification information to be stopped and displayed on the display means, the plurality of acquired identification information is stored in the identification information storage means, and the plurality of pieces of stored information The identification information is displayed on the display means by the stop display execution means after the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means. In addition, when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means, among the pieces of identification information stored in the identification information storage means, the identification information corresponding to the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed. And the stop display mode of the identification information is changed to the predetermined mode by the first change means. Therefore, among the plurality of pieces of identification information stored in the identification information storage means stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means, only the identification information not yet stopped and displayed can be changed by the first change means, so the stop display is executed. It is possible to change the identification information without affecting the identification information in the middle and the identification information which has been stopped and displayed. Therefore, the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode while accurately performing the stop display of the identification information.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry Dynamic display execution means for the player to execute the dynamic display of identification information composed of a plurality of identification information in the display means in a manner in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means Stop display execution means for causing the display means to stop and display the plurality of pieces of identification information dynamically displayed after the player has made the aspect in which the player is able to recognize the identification information; In the gaming machine, the ball entering information acquiring means acquiring ball entering information accompanying the ball entering when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, and the ball entering information acquiring means Record ball entry information The ball entry information storage means and the dynamic display execution means execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, and are acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means When the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entering based on the ball entering information, and the lottery information acquiring means, the plurality of identification information by the stop display executing means By changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means if the dynamic display is executed in the recognizable mode by a part of the stop display or the dynamic display execution means The changeable determination unit determines whether the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, and the dynamic display execution unit determines that the changeable determination unit determines that the stop display mode can be changed. The first change means for changing the stop display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed in the difficult mode to the predetermined mode, and the stop display of the identification information whose mode is changed by the first change means is ended, and then And second changing means for controlling so that the predetermined mode is selected as the stop display mode of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. Gaming machine B7 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B7, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information associated with the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and the ball entering information is received by the ball entering information storage means It is memorized. Then, based on the contents of the entering information storage means, the dynamic display of the identification information constituted by the plurality of identification information is performed by the dynamic display instructing means in the display means in a mode in which the player has difficulty in recognizing the identification information. After the mode of the dynamic display being performed and the mode of the dynamic display being performed is made the mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, the plurality of identification information being dynamically displayed is stopped at the display means Stop display is performed by the display execution means. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the ball entry information, and the lottery information is acquired. Furthermore, the dynamic display execution unit is configured such that the stop display execution unit dynamically displays a part of the plurality of identification information in a state in which a part of the plurality of identification information can be recognized by the stop display or the dynamic display execution unit. It is determined by the change possibility determination means whether or not the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode by changing the identification information dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is changed by the first change unit to a predetermined mode. Then, the stop display of the identification information changed to the predetermined mode is ended by the first changing means, and the dynamic display of the identification information thereafter is executed, the stop of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means Since the second changing unit controls the predetermined mode as the display mode, the stop display mode of the identification information executed by the stop display execution unit is continuously or intermittently changed to the predetermined mode.

  Therefore, even after the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information and then the stop display execution means causes some of the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed, or the dynamic display execution means performs the plurality of identification information Dynamic display in a difficult-to-recognize manner within a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic-display execution means, even if The stop display mode of the identification information in can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is not a period during which the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, but only a period in which all of the plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner. The period dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize can also be a period that can be changed to a predetermined manner. Therefore, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of identification information be a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased by the part which can extend the changeable period.

  Note that, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a high speed (scroll display) is exemplified. Further, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a medium speed or a low speed (scroll display) is exemplified.

  Moreover, that the stop display mode is a predetermined mode means that predetermined identification information is included in the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed, and that the predetermined identification information is regularly included. Are illustrated.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry A game machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control related to a game. The control means is a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information accompanying the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means , Lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering the ball, lottery information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means to the peripheral control means, and the ball entering information By acquisition means Ball entering information storage means for storing the obtained ball entering information, and dynamic display instructing means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball entering information storage means, The peripheral control means is a dynamic display execution means for executing on the display means the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, and the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means Aspect setting means for setting an aspect to a predetermined aspect or an aspect different from the predetermined aspect, lottery information reception means for receiving lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means, and the lottery information A mode information storage means for storing mode information indicating a mode of dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information received by the receiving means, and the order by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the mode information storage means In the dynamic display to be executed, the production availability determination means for determining whether or not the continuous performance for performing the continuous dynamic display in the execution order in the predetermined mode can be performed, and the continuous performance by the performance availability determination means A continuous effect control unit configured to control the mode of continuous dynamic display of the execution order to be executed by the dynamic display execution unit, when it is determined that execution is executable; The method further comprises setting prohibiting means for prohibiting the mode of the dynamic display from being set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means when the effect determining means determines that the continuous effect can not be performed. A game machine C1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C1, in the main control means, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information accompanying the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and based on the ball entering information Lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. The display control means instructs the peripheral control means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means. Further, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode information indicating the mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information is used as the mode information storage means A continuous effect that causes continuous dynamic display of the execution order to be executed in a predetermined manner in the dynamic display that is stored and is sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the aspect information storage means It is determined by the production availability determination means whether it is feasible. Here, if it is determined that the continuous effect can be performed by the effect determining means, the continuous effect control means such that the form of the continuous dynamic display of the execution order to be executed by the dynamic display executing means becomes a predetermined aspect respectively When it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed, the setting prohibiting means prohibits the mode setting means from setting the mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode.

  Therefore, when performing the dynamic display in order by the dynamic display executing means, if the continuous effect can be performed, the continuous dynamic display of the execution order can be performed in a predetermined manner, and the continuous effect can be performed. Can be prevented to prevent the dynamic display of a predetermined mode from being performed. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is performed, the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is always performed continuously, so that the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is performed only once. It can prevent. Therefore, when the continuous effect is executed, the dynamic display is always performed twice or more, so the player can be attracted to the dynamic display to be executed and the number of times of the execution, etc. Can increase the value of

  In the gaming machine C1, when the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, when the entering of the gaming medium is detected by the detection means, the gaming machine is detected along with the detection of the entering ball. The execution of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means is configured to be suspended in the order of detection of the entering ball, and the effect determination means determines whether or not the effect is determined based on the content of the mode information storage means. A hold determination unit that determines whether execution of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution unit is suspended, and the lottery determination unit receives the lottery information by the lottery information reception unit; If it is determined that the execution of the display is suspended, it is determined that the continuous effect is executable, and if it is determined that the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended by the suspension determining means, the continuous effect is When it is determined that the line is not possible, and the continuous effect control means determines that the continuous effect can be performed by the effect possibility determination means, the dynamic display in which the execution by the dynamic display execution means is suspended A game machine C2 characterized in that a mode of continuous dynamic display of the execution order is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, when the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, when the entering of the gaming medium is detected by the detecting means, the gaming machine moves in response to the detection of the entering. Execution of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means is suspended in the order of detection of the entering sphere, and the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the mode information storage means It is determined by the suspension determination means whether the execution is suspended. When it is determined that the execution of the dynamic display is suspended by the suspension determining unit when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the continuous effect is determined to be executable by the effect determining unit, and as a result, The continuous effect control means sets the mode of the continuous dynamic display of the execution order in the dynamic display in which the execution by the dynamic display execution means is suspended to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means. On the other hand, when it is determined by the hold determination unit that the execution of the dynamic display is not held, the continuous production effect determination unit determines that the continuous effect can not be performed.

  Therefore, when the execution of the dynamic display is suspended in the gaming machine when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the aspect of the dynamic display in which the execution is suspended, and the new display following the suspension. The mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information whose execution is suspended can be executed in a predetermined mode. On the other hand, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the predetermined mode from being executed unless the execution of the dynamic display is suspended. Therefore, while the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended in the gaming machine and continuous rendering can not be performed, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the predetermined mode from being performed only once. Therefore, even in the gaming machine in which the execution of the dynamic display is suspended, the value of the continuous rendering can be increased.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display is being executed until the execution of the dynamic display is finished until a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display execution means starts the execution. The aspect of the dynamic display is configured to be changeable, and the peripheral control means determines whether the aspect of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means has been set by the aspect setting means. It comprises: a setting completion determination means, and a mode change means for changing the mode of the dynamic display set in the mode different from the predetermined mode by the mode setting means to the predetermined mode, and the effect determination means may The progress display means for determining whether the predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display start means starts dynamic display, and the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means; If it is determined by the means that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the continuous effect is determined to be executable, and if the changeable determination unit determines that the predetermined time has elapsed, the continuous effect is not executed. If it is determined that the continuous effect control means determines that the continuous effect can be performed by the effect determination means and if it is determined that the setting determination means determines that the continuous effect has been set, the dynamic display The mode of the dynamic display being executed by the execution means is changed to the predetermined mode by the mode changing means, and the dynamic display executed after the dynamic display having the mode changed is finished In the case where the mode of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means, and the setting prohibition means determines that the continuous effect can not be performed by the effect determination means, The aspect of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined aspect by the aspect setting means, and the aspect of the dynamic display is prohibited to be changed to the predetermined aspect by the aspect changing means. A gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the dynamic display is executed during the period from the start of execution by the dynamic display execution means to the end of the execution of the dynamic display until a predetermined time elapses. The display mode is configured to be changeable, and the peripheral control means determines whether the dynamic display mode being executed by the dynamic display execution means has been set by the mode setting means by the setting determination means. The aspect of the dynamic display set in the aspect different from the predetermined aspect by the aspect setting means is changed to the predetermined aspect by the aspect changing means. In addition, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if it is determined by the progress determining means that the predetermined time has not passed since the dynamic display was started by the dynamic display executing means, continuous effect is given. If it is determined by the changeable determination means that the predetermined time has elapsed, the changeable determination means determines that the continuous effect can not be performed by the effect determination means. Then, if it is determined that the continuous effect can be performed by the effect determination unit and determined that the setting is determined by the setting determination unit, the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit by the continuous effect control unit The aspect of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display executing means is changed to the predetermined aspect by the aspect changing means, and the aspect of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means is changed to the predetermined aspect by the aspect setting means. It is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed by the effect determining means, the setting prohibiting means sets the aspect of the dynamic display by the aspect setting means to the predetermined aspect, and the dynamic display by the aspect changing means It is prohibited that the aspect of is changed to a predetermined aspect.

  Therefore, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, and before the predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is started. The aspect of the dynamic display being executed and the aspect of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information to be executed next to the dynamic display can be executed in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the dynamic display is not executed by the dynamic display executing unit, or the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing unit. If a predetermined time has elapsed since the target display was started, dynamic display of a predetermined mode can be prevented from being performed. Therefore, while the aspect of the dynamic display being executed and the aspect of the dynamic display to be executed next to the dynamic display can not both be made into the predetermined aspect, continuous presentation can not be performed, It is possible to prevent the execution of the dynamic display of the predetermined aspect from being performed only once. Therefore, even in a gaming machine capable of changing the aspect of the dynamic display being executed, the value of continuous rendering can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the aspect information storage means includes, as the aspect information, first aspect information indicating that the aspect of the dynamic display is the predetermined aspect, or the dynamic display The second mode information indicating that the mode of the second mode is different from the predetermined mode is stored, and the peripheral control means receives the lottery information every time the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means. Means for storing the second mode information in the mode information storage means in association with the reception order of the lottery information as the mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the mode information storage executing means, and the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means Aspect information acquisition means for acquiring, from the aspect information storage means, aspect information corresponding to the dynamic display for which execution is instructed when execution of the dynamic display is instructed, based on the reception order of the lottery information And the effect determining unit determines that the continuous effect can be performed when the second mode information in which the receiving order is continuous is stored in the mode information storing unit, and the mode information storing unit The continuous effect is determined to be not executable when the second mode information in which the reception order is continuous is not stored, and the continuous effect control means determines that the continuous effect can be executed by the effect determination means. When the second aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is changed to the first aspect information, the setting prohibition means may When it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed by the determination unit, the change processing is not executed, and the mode setting unit acquires the first mode information by the mode information acquisition unit. If the second mode information is acquired by the mode information acquisition unit, the mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit is set to the predetermined mode. A game machine C4 characterized in that an aspect of the dynamic display executed by the display execution means is set to an aspect different from the predetermined aspect.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the aspect information storage means includes, as aspect information, first aspect information indicating that the aspect of dynamic display is a predetermined aspect, or the aspect of dynamic display is a predetermined aspect. The second mode information indicating that it is another mode is stored, and in the peripheral control means, every time the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information The second mode information is stored in the mode information storage means by the mode information storage execution means in association with the reception order of the lottery information. And, when the second information in which the reception order is continuous is stored in the information storage means, it is determined by the effect determination means that the continuous effect can be performed, and the second aspect in which the reception order is continuous in the information storage means If the information is not stored, it is determined by the effect determining unit that the effect can not be performed continuously. Here, when it is determined that the continuous effect can be performed by the effectability determination means, the change process of changing the continuous second mode information of the reception order stored in the mode information storage means to the first mode information is continuous effect It is executed by the control means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed by the effect determining unit, the change processing is not performed by the setting prohibiting unit. Further, when execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the mode information corresponding to the dynamic display instructed for the execution is the mode information storage based on the reception order of the lottery information It is acquired by the aspect information acquisition means from the means. Then, when the first mode information is acquired, the mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means, and when the second mode information is acquired, the dynamic mode is dynamically performed. The aspect of the dynamic display executed by the display execution means is set by the aspect setting means to an aspect other than the predetermined aspect.

  Therefore, the mode information newly stored in the mode information storage means can be only the second mode information, and only in the second mode information stored in the mode information storage means, when the continuous effect can be executed. The continuous second mode information of the reception order can be changed to the first mode information. Therefore, when the continuous effect can not be performed, the first mode information is not stored in the mode information storage means in the first place, so that the mode of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means. And the dynamic display execution means does not execute the dynamic display of the predetermined mode. Therefore, when the dynamic display is sequentially performed by the dynamic display execution means, it can be reliably prevented that the execution of the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is performed only once.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry Different from the predetermined aspect or the predetermined aspect of the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of identification information in the display means, and the aspect of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means In the gaming machine provided with mode setting means set to the mode, when the ball is detected by the detection means, ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information accompanying the ball; A lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering a ball based on the ball entering information acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and a dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means Information indicating the aspect of The aspect information storage means, the ball entry information storage means for storing the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, and the dynamic display execution means are based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means The dynamic display of identification information is executed, and when the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, the dynamic display execution unit is sequentially executed based on the contents of the aspect information storage unit. In the dynamic display, it is possible to execute the continuous production by means of the production availability determination means for determining whether it is possible to execute the continuous production in which the continuous dynamic display in the execution order is performed in the predetermined mode. A continuous effect control unit configured to control each of the continuous dynamic display aspects of the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution unit when it is determined that: And setting prohibition means for prohibiting the mode of the dynamic display from being set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means when it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed by the effect determining means. Gaming machine C5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C5, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information associated with the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and the ball entering information is received by the ball entering information storage means It is memorized. Then, based on the contents of the entry information storage means, dynamic display of identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the ball entry information, and the dynamic corresponding to the lottery information Aspect information indicating an aspect of display is stored in the aspect information storage means. Then, based on the contents of the mode information storage means, the continuous effect is executed to execute the continuous dynamic display of the execution order in the predetermined mode among the dynamic displays sequentially executed by the dynamic display executing means Whether it is possible or not is determined by the effect determination means. Here, if it is determined that the continuous effect can be performed by the effect determining means, the continuous effect control means such that the form of the continuous dynamic display of the execution order to be executed by the dynamic display executing means becomes a predetermined aspect respectively When it is determined that the continuous effect can not be performed, the setting prohibiting means prohibits the mode setting means from setting the mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode.

  Therefore, when performing the dynamic display in order by the dynamic display executing means, if the continuous effect can be performed, the continuous dynamic display of the execution order can be performed in a predetermined manner, and the continuous effect can be performed. Can be prevented to prevent the dynamic display of a predetermined mode from being performed. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is performed, the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is always performed continuously, so that the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is performed only once. It can prevent. Therefore, when the continuous effect is executed, the dynamic display is always performed twice or more, so the player can be attracted to the dynamic display to be executed and the number of times of the execution, etc. Can increase the value of

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a dynamic display mode, a dynamic display mode, and a dynamic mode sound effect. Gaming machine C6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C6, the predetermined aspect includes at least one of the aspect of the dynamic display effect, the aspect of the display result of the dynamic display, and the aspect of the sound effect of the dynamic display, The player can be made aware that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode, and the player's interest can be attracted.

  In addition, when making the aspect of a dynamic display into a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, you may change a predetermined | prescribed aspect for every dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined aspect is the aspect of the dynamic display, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined aspect is the display of the dynamic display, and the third dynamic In the display, the predetermined aspect is the aspect of the sound effect of the dynamic display. As described above, changing the aspect of the dynamic display can make the dynamic display change more colorful, and thus can attract the player's interest more strongly.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry A game machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control related to a game. The control means is a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information accompanying the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means , Lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering the ball, lottery information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means to the peripheral control means, and the ball entering information By acquisition means Ball entering information storage means for storing the obtained ball entering information, and dynamic display instructing means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball entering information storage means, When the peripheral control means instructs execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the player can dynamically display the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. Dynamic display execution means executed in the display means in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the game, and the aspect in which the player can recognize the identification information the mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means Stop display execution means for causing the display means to stop and display the plurality of identification information being dynamically displayed, and a predetermined stop display mode for the dynamic display to be stopped and displayed by the stop display execution means Mode setting means for setting a mode different from the predetermined mode or the mode thereof, and a stop display mode of the dynamic display in which a mode different from the predetermined mode is set as the stop display mode by the mode setting means When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means and the lottery information receiving means for receiving the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means. If a part of the plurality of identification information is stopped by the stop display execution means or a part of the plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode by the dynamic display execution means, The stop display mode of the dynamic display is set as the predetermined display mode by changing the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the dynamic display execution means. Means for judging whether change is possible to the aspect of and the stop display of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means when it is judged that the change is possible by the change possibility judging means Mode control means for controlling so that the display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means becomes at least the predetermined mode after execution, and the changeability determination means determines that the change is impossible In this case, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode by the mode changing unit. A game machine D1 characterized by including predetermined mode prohibiting means for prohibiting.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the entering of the gaming medium is detected by the detecting means in the main control means, the entering information associated with the entering ball is acquired by the entering information acquiring means, and based on the entered information. Lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. The display control means instructs the peripheral control means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, when execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the player dynamically identifies the identification information by the dynamic display of the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. It is made to be executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in a difficult-to-recognize mode, and then the mode of the dynamic display being executed is made to be a dynamic mode after the player is made to recognize the identification information. The plurality of pieces of identification information being displayed are stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display execution means. The stop display mode of the dynamic display for which the stop display is made is set by the mode setting means to a mode different from the predetermined mode or the predetermined mode, and is set to the mode different from the predetermined mode as the stop display mode The stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to a predetermined mode by the mode changing means. Then, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means is received by the lottery information reception means, the stop display execution means causes part of the plurality of identification information to be stopped or displayed by the dynamic display execution means If a part of a plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in a manner difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means is changed By doing this, it is determined by the changeability determination means whether the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined mode. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means after the stop of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means is finished is at least predetermined. It is controlled by the aspect control means to become the aspect of. On the other hand, if it is determined that change is not possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode by the mode change means. Is prohibited by the predetermined mode prohibiting means.

  Therefore, until the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display execution means, and a part of the plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, and then the identification information dynamically displayed in a difficult recognition manner disappears. When the lottery information is received, the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in a manner difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means is changed to the stop display mode of the dynamic display as the predetermined mode It is possible to determine whether the change is possible by the change possibility determination means. Therefore, the time limit for determining whether the display mode of dynamic display can be changed can be as close as possible to the time when all of the plurality of identification information dynamically displayed is stopped and displayed, so that the dynamic display The determination as to whether or not the stop display mode can be changed can be performed until the time when all of the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be determined to be changeable until all of the plurality of identification information displayed dynamically are stopped and displayed, so that control by the mode control means The opportunity to make the stop display mode of the dynamic display be a predetermined mode continuously can be increased.

  In addition, when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means, after the stop of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is ended, the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means Since the stop display mode can be controlled by the mode control means so as to be at least a predetermined mode, for example, the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed to a predetermined mode. Dynamic display in which the display mode is a predetermined mode can be continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change is not possible by the change possibility determination means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting means and the stop display mode of the dynamic display by the mode change means Since it is possible to prohibit the change in the predetermined mode by the predetermined mode prohibiting means, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display executing means from executing the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent that the execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is performed only once, and when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is performed, it is always performed twice Since the above-described process is continuously executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the stop display mode of the dynamic display and the number of times of the dynamic display. Therefore, while being able to raise the value of the presentation which carries out the dynamic display which a stop display mode turns into a predetermined mode continuously, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of a dynamic display continuously a predetermined mode can be increased. .

  Note that, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a high speed (scroll display) is exemplified. Further, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a medium speed or a low speed (scroll display) is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D1, when the execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the dynamic display execution means is connected to a plurality of identification information from the first to the n-th (n Executes the dynamic display of the identification information sequence up to an integer of 2 or more in the display means in units of identification information sequence, and the same identification information is included in each of the first to nth identification information sequences The stop display mode of the dynamic display is the predetermined mode when the stop display is performed, and the stop display execution unit is configured to execute the second display after the dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display execution unit. The identification information sequence from 1 to n is stopped and displayed for each identification information sequence in the order of the 1st to nth identification information sequence, and the changeability determination means receives the lottery information by the lottery information receiving means The dynamic display execution when If the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the step, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is determined to be changeable to the predetermined mode, and the stop display execution means If the second identification information sequence is displayed as a stop display or the second identification information sequence is displayed dynamically by the dynamic display execution means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is When it is determined that the change to the predetermined mode is not possible, and the mode control means is determined to be changeable by the change possibility determination means, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays in the difficult-to-recognize mode. The stop display mode of the second to the n-th identification information sequence is changed to the predetermined mode by the mode changing means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display whose stop display mode is changed is ended after the stop display is ended. Dynamic display execution hand Gaming machine D2, wherein the dynamic display of the stop display mode to be performed is to set the predetermined manner by the mode setting means by.

  According to the gaming machine D2, when the execution of the dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the identification from the first to the n-th (n is an integer of 2 or more) in which a plurality of identification information are connected Dynamic display of the information sequence is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in units of identification information sequence, and thereafter, the first to n-th identification information sequences are arranged in the order of the first to n-th identification information sequence The stop display execution means causes the stop display to be performed for each identification information row. Here, when the same identification information is included in each of the first to n-th identification information strings and the stop display is performed, it is assumed that the stop display mode of the dynamic information is a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the second identification information sequence by the dynamic display executing means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is specified. It is determined by the changeability determination means that the change to the aspect of is possible. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means by the mode control means changes the mode The stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the stop display of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode by the means and the stop display mode is changed is ended by the mode setting means It is set to an aspect. On the other hand, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the second identification information string is stopped by the stop display execution unit, or the second identification information string is dynamically recognized by the dynamic display execution unit. If it is displayed, it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can not be changed to a predetermined mode and the change possibility determination unit.

  In order to set the stop display mode of the dynamic display as the predetermined mode, the stop display mode of each of the first to n-th identification information columns needs to include the same identification information. The stop display mode of the second identification information line includes at least one piece of identification information that constitutes the stop display mode of the first identification information line before the second identification information line is stopped and displayed. It must be done. Here, when the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, if the identification information dynamically displayed is changed, the change in the identification information is recognized by the player. Unnatural dynamic display will be executed for the player. However, after the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the stop setting manner of the dynamic display is set to a predetermined manner by the manner setting means, and the dynamic indication is performed by the manner changing means. Since it is possible to prohibit the stop display mode of the display mode from being changed to the predetermined mode by the predetermined mode prohibiting means, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display execution means from executing the dynamic display unnatural to the player. Therefore, the value of the dynamic display which a stop display aspect turns into a predetermined | prescribed aspect can be improved, and the value of the production | presentation which performs the dynamic display which a stop display aspect becomes a predetermined aspect continuously can be raised.

  The arrangement of each of the first to n-th identification information strings stopped and displayed in the display area of the display means may be any arrangement. For example, each identification information row may be arranged in a row in the vertical direction and may be arranged in order horizontally, or each identification information row may be arranged in a row in the horizontal direction and arranged in order in the vertical direction. The information row may be a row in the diagonal direction, and may be arranged in parallel by shifting in parallel. Further, each identification information string may be arranged on a straight line.

  In the gaming machine D2, the changeability determination means includes identification information determination means for determining whether the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each of the first to (n-1) of the identification information rows. When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined that the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each of the first to (n-1) of the identification information sequences by the identification information determining means If the nth identification information string is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the dynamic display execution unit, it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed to the predetermined mode. The dynamic display is performed if the nth identification information sequence is displayed as a stop indication by the stop display execution means or the nth identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner by the dynamic display execution means. Stop display mode of display Note that it is determined that the predetermined mode can not be changed, and the mode control means is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the dynamic display execution means when the change possibility determination means determines that the change is possible. The dynamic display after changing the stop display mode of the n-th identification information row to the predetermined mode by the mode changing means and stopping the dynamic display whose stop display mode is changed A game machine D3 characterized in that a stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the execution means is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each of the first to (n-1) identification information columns, the identification information is determined If it is determined by the means and the nth identification information string is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means in a difficult-to-recognize manner, the stop display manner of the dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined manner and the changeability determination means It is determined by Here, if it is determined that the change is possible, the stop control mode of the nth identification information string dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means by the mode control means is specified by the mode change means. The stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the stop display of the dynamic display is changed to the mode and the stop display mode is changed is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means Ru. On the other hand, if the nth identification information string is displayed by the stop display execution means in the stop display or the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the nth identification information string in a recognizable manner, the stop display mode of the dynamic display It is determined by the changeability determining means that the change to the predetermined mode is impossible.

  In order to set the stop display mode of the dynamic display as the predetermined mode, the stop display mode of each of the first to n-th identification information columns needs to include the same identification information. When the same identification information is included in the stop display modes of each identification information sequence up to the (n-1) th, only the stop display mode of the nth identification information sequence may be changed. According to the gaming machine D3, even after the second identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed while being dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner. Since the determination as to whether or not the stop display mode of the display can be changed can be made by the change possibility determination means, it is possible to further increase the chances of being determined as changeable. In addition, after the nth identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable mode, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, and the dynamic display is performed by the mode changing unit. Since it is possible to prohibit the stop display mode of the vehicle from being changed to the predetermined mode by the predetermined mode prohibiting means, it is possible to prevent dynamic display unnatural to the player from being executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the stop display mode Can improve the value of the dynamic display of the predetermined aspect. Therefore, while being able to raise the value of the presentation which carries out the dynamic display which a stop display mode turns into a predetermined mode continuously, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of a dynamic display continuously a predetermined mode can be increased. .

  In the gaming machine D2 or D3, in the dynamic display of the identification information, the n-th identification information string is dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the n-th identification information string is displayed. A first dynamic display capable of executing a change process of changing the stop display mode of the nth identification information sequence to the predetermined mode by the mode changing unit until the identification information sequence of the is stopped and displayed; After the nth identification information string is dynamically displayed in the recognizable mode, a second dynamic display which can not execute the change process by the mode changing means is provided, and the dynamic display is provided. The execution means executes any one of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display, and the changeability determination means executes the first dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. And the nth identification information string in the first dynamic display is Note: A progress determining means for determining whether the predetermined time has passed since the dynamic display in a recognizable manner, and the stop display mode of each of the first to (n-1) identification information sequences are the same. When the lottery information is received by the identification information judging means for judging whether the identification information exists and the lottery information receiving means, it is judged whether the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means Dynamic display determination means, and when the dynamic display determination means determines that the first dynamic display is being executed, the identification information determination means If it is determined that the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each identification information string up to 1), and it is determined that the predetermined time has not passed by the progress determining means, the stop display of the dynamic display An aspect to the above-mentioned predetermined aspect If it is determined that the additional display is possible, and if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed by the progress determining means, it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can not be changed to the predetermined mode. A gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the dynamic display of the identification information includes the n-th identification information within a period from the time when the n-th identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to when the predetermined time passes. A first dynamic display capable of executing change processing for changing the stop display mode of the nth identification information column to a predetermined mode by the mode changing means until the column is stopped and displayed, and the nth identification information column And the second dynamic display incapable of executing change processing by the mode change unit after the dynamic display is performed in a recognizable manner, and the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are provided. One of the above is executed by the dynamic display execution means. When it is determined by the dynamic display determination unit that the first dynamic display is being executed, the identification information determination unit is the same as the stop display mode of each of the first to (n−1) th identification information sequences It is determined by the identification information determination unit that there is identification information of the above, and the predetermined time has not elapsed since the progress determination unit dynamically displays the nth identification information string in the first dynamic display in a recognizable manner If it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changeable to the predetermined mode, it is determined by the change possibility determination unit. On the other hand, when it is determined by the dynamic display determination means that the first dynamic display is being executed, the progress determination means moves the nth identification information string in the first dynamic display in a recognizable manner If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed since the intentional display, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is determined by the change possibility determination unit as being not changeable to the predetermined mode. Therefore, the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display in which the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each of the first to (n-1) identification information columns is executed If it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed before the predetermined time elapses even after the nth identification information string is dynamically displayed in a manner recognizable by the player Can be performed by the change possibility determination means. Therefore, since the opportunity judged to be changeable can be further increased, the opportunity to make the stop display mode of the dynamic display into the predetermined mode continuously can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, when the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution unit, when the entering of the gaming medium is detected by the detection unit, the game is entered. The execution of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display executing means is suspended in the order of detection of the entering ball in accordance with the detection of the sphere, and the changeability determination means determines the dynamic display execution. Holding determination means for determining whether execution of the dynamic display performed by the means is held, and when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, execution of the dynamic display by the hold determination means Is determined to be suspended, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is determined to be changeable to the predetermined mode, and it is determined that the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended by the hold determination unit. And If it is determined that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can not be changed to the predetermined mode, and the mode control means determines that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means, the dynamic display execution is performed It is characterized in that, in the dynamic display pending execution by the means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display in continuous execution order is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means. Gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, when the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, when the entering of the gaming medium is detected by the detecting means, the gaming machine moves in response to the detection of the entering. The execution of the dynamic display performed by the target display execution means is configured to be suspended in the order of detection of entering balls. When it is determined that the execution of the dynamic display is suspended by the suspension determination means when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the changeable mode. It is determined by the availability determination means. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the mode control means causes the stop display mode of the continuous dynamic display of the execution order to be displayed in the dynamic display pending execution by the dynamic display execution means as the mode setting means Are set to predetermined modes respectively. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended by the suspension determination unit when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is not changed to a predetermined mode. It is determined by the possible / modifiable determination means.

  Therefore, when the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode setting means sets the stop display mode of the dynamic display to the predetermined mode and the mode change It is possible to prohibit the stop display mode of the dynamic display from being changed to the predetermined mode by the means by the predetermined mode prohibiting means. Accordingly, while the execution of the dynamic display is not suspended in the gaming machine, the stop display can not be performed continuously by the dynamic display execution means in which the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode can not be continuously executed. It is possible to prevent the dynamic display whose aspect is the predetermined aspect from being executed by the dynamic display execution means. Therefore, it can be prevented that the execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is performed only once, and the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is always performed twice Since the above-described process is continuously executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the stop display mode of the dynamic display and the number of times of the dynamic display. In addition, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the execution of the dynamic display is suspended in the gaming machine, the dynamic display in which the execution is suspended and the newly executed following the suspension. In the dynamic display including the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information, the stop display mode of the continuous dynamic display of the execution order can be set to a predetermined mode. Therefore, the opportunity to make the stop display mode of a dynamic display into a predetermined | prescribed mode continuously can be increased. Therefore, even in the gaming machine in which the execution of the dynamic display is suspended, the value of the effect of continuously executing the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode can be enhanced, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display The opportunity to make it a predetermined aspect continuously can be increased.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry Dynamic display execution means for the player to execute the dynamic display of identification information composed of a plurality of identification information in the display means in a manner in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means Stop display execution means for causing the display means to stop and display the plurality of identification information being dynamically displayed after the player has made the aspect in which the dynamic display being executed allows the identification information to be recognized And the ball entry information acquiring unit for acquiring ball entry information accompanying the ball when the ball is detected by the detection unit, and the ball acquisition information acquiring unit for acquiring the ball entry information. Entered ball information The ball entry information storage means to store and the dynamic display execution means execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, and are acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means When the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entering based on the entered ball information, and the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means, the plurality of identifications by the stop display execution means If the part of the information is displayed in a stop display or the part of the plurality of identification information is displayed dynamically by the dynamic display execution means, the aspect in which the dynamic display execution means makes the recognition difficult Changeable determination means for determining whether or not the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed to the predetermined mode by changing the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in The dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after termination of the stop display of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution unit when it is determined that the changeability is determined by the changeability determination unit The mode display means for controlling the stop display mode of at least the predetermined mode and the stop display mode for the dynamic display by the mode setting means when it is determined that the change is not possible by the change possibility determination means Is set to the predetermined aspect, and the aspect changing means is provided with predetermined aspect prohibition means for prohibiting the stop display aspect of the dynamic display from being changed to the predetermined aspect. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information associated with the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and the ball entering information is received by the ball entering information storage means It is memorized. Then, based on the contents of the entering information storage means, the dynamic display of the identification information constituted by the plurality of identification information is performed by the dynamic display instructing means in the display means in a mode in which the player has difficulty in recognizing the identification information. After the mode of the dynamic display being performed and the mode of the dynamic display being performed is made the mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, the plurality of identification information being dynamically displayed is stopped at the display means Stop display is performed by the display execution means. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the ball entry information, and the lottery information is acquired. Furthermore, the dynamic display execution unit is configured such that the stop display execution unit dynamically displays a part of the plurality of identification information in a state in which a part of the plurality of identification information can be recognized by the stop display or the dynamic display execution unit. Determines whether the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be changed to a predetermined mode by changing the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized Be done. Here, if it is determined that change is possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means after the stop of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means is finished is at least predetermined. It is controlled by the aspect control means to become the aspect of. On the other hand, if it is determined that change is not possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display is changed to the predetermined mode by the mode change means. Is prohibited by the predetermined mode prohibiting means.

  Therefore, until the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display execution means, and a part of the plurality of identification information is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, and then the identification information dynamically displayed in a difficult recognition manner disappears. When the lottery information is received, the stop display mode set for the identification information dynamically displayed in a manner difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution means is changed to the stop display mode of the dynamic display as the predetermined mode It is possible to determine whether the change is possible by the change possibility determination means. Therefore, the time limit for determining whether the display mode of dynamic display can be changed can be as close as possible to the time when all of the plurality of identification information dynamically displayed is stopped and displayed, so that the dynamic display The determination as to whether or not the stop display mode can be changed can be performed until the time when all of the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the stop display mode of the dynamic display can be determined to be changeable until all of the plurality of identification information displayed dynamically are stopped and displayed, so that control by the mode control means The opportunity to make the stop display mode of the dynamic display be a predetermined mode continuously can be increased.

  In addition, when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determination means, after the stop of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is ended, the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means Since the stop display mode can be controlled by the mode control means so as to be at least a predetermined mode, for example, the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed to a predetermined mode. Dynamic display in which the display mode is a predetermined mode can be continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change is not possible by the change possibility determination means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting means and the stop display mode of the dynamic display by the mode change means Since it is possible to prohibit the change in the predetermined mode by the predetermined mode prohibiting means, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display executing means from executing the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent that the execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is performed only once, and when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is performed, it is always performed twice Since the above-described process is continuously executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the stop display mode of the dynamic display and the number of times of the dynamic display. Therefore, while being able to raise the value of the presentation which carries out the dynamic display which a stop display mode turns into a predetermined mode continuously, the opportunity which makes the stop display mode of a dynamic display continuously a predetermined mode can be increased. .

  Note that, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can not easily recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a high speed (scroll display) is exemplified. Further, as an aspect of the dynamic display in which the player can recognize the identification information, a state in which the identification information is moved and displayed at a medium speed or a low speed (scroll display) is exemplified.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry A game machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control related to a game. The control means is a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information accompanying the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means , Lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entering the ball, lottery information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means to the peripheral control means, and the ball entering information By acquisition means Ball entering information storage means for storing the obtained ball entering information, and dynamic display instructing means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball entering information storage means, The peripheral control means is a dynamic display execution means for executing on the display means the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, and the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means A mode setting means for setting the stop display mode to a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode, a lottery information receiving means for receiving lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means, and According to the content of the aspect information storage means for storing the aspect information indicating the stop display aspect of the dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information received by the lottery information receiving means, the dynamic display is performed based on the contents of the aspect information storage means A first mode control means for controlling so that a stop display mode of a continuous series of dynamic display in the execution order becomes the predetermined mode among the dynamic display sequentially executed by the means, and the lottery information reception When the lottery information is received by the means, after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control unit is executed, the stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit is An executability judging means for judging whether the executability can be performed in a predetermined mode and the series of dynamic display controlled by the first mode control means when the executability judging means judges that the executability is possible A second mode control means for controlling the stop display mode of the dynamic display to be executed by the dynamic display execution means after being played back to the predetermined mode Machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information accompanying the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and based on the ball entering information Lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. The display control means instructs the peripheral control means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display to be executed is predetermined. The aspect setting means sets the aspect other than the aspect of the aspect or the predetermined aspect thereof. Then, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode information indicating the stop display mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information is the mode information storage In the dynamic display which is stored in the means and is sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the aspect information storage means, the stop display modes of the continuous series of dynamic display in the execution order are respectively predetermined It is controlled by the first aspect control means to become the aspect of In addition, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed, the stop display aspect is performed for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means It is determined by the executability judging means whether or not it can be executed in a predetermined manner. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed is a predetermined aspect It is controlled by the second mode control means so that Therefore, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution unit, the number of times of execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is increased. it can. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of execution, the sense of expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the gaming state advantageous to the player can be improved, and the sense of expectation is continued to the player longer. Can be held. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, a game value determination to determine whether the lottery result indicated by the received lottery information is to impart a predetermined game value to the player Means, the executability judging means being controlled by the first aspect control means when the game value judging means judges that the predetermined game value is to be given to the player It is determined whether or not the stop display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode with respect to the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the dynamic display is executed.

  According to the gaming machine E2, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the gaming value judging means that the lottery result indicated by the received lottery information is to give the predetermined gaming value to the player. If determined, it is possible to execute the stop display mode in a predetermined mode for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed It is determined by the availability determination means. Therefore, when a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, it is possible to increase the number of times of dynamic display in which the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means becomes the predetermined mode. Therefore, the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player is improved, and further, after the sense of expectation is continuously held by the player for a longer time, the predetermined game is performed. The value can be given to the player. Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely giving the predetermined game value to the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display executing means, the game console performs the dynamic display which is continuously executed. Is configured to be limited to a predetermined number or less, and the executability judging means controls the display mode of stopping the dynamic display to be the predetermined mode by the second mode control means. The lottery information includes a total number determination unit that determines whether the total number of dynamic displays for which the predetermined mode is the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means exceeds the predetermined number, and the lottery information When the lottery information is received by the receiving means, if it is determined that the total number determining means does not exceed the predetermined number, the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed. Gaming machine E3, characterized in that the stop display mode for dynamic display that is performed is to determine executable by the predetermined manner by the dynamic display execution means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means, the total number of the dynamic display executed in succession is predetermined. It is configured to be limited to a number or less, and is executed continuously by the dynamic display execution means by controlling the stop display aspect of the dynamic display to be a predetermined aspect by the second aspect control means It is determined by the total number determination means whether the total number of dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode exceeds the predetermined number. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if it is determined that the total number determining means does not exceed the predetermined number, a series of dynamic display controlled by the first mode control means is executed. With regard to the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, it is determined by the executability judging means that the stop display mode is executable in a predetermined mode. Therefore, even if the second mode control means controls the stop display mode of the dynamic display to be a predetermined mode, the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means becomes a predetermined mode. The control by the second mode control means can be executed only when the total number of displays does not exceed the predetermined number. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress that the total number of dynamic display in which the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means becomes a predetermined mode exceeds the predetermined number, the total number of the dynamic display exceeds the predetermined number It is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from becoming unstable.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display executing means, the game console performs the dynamic display which is continuously executed. The executability judging means is configured to limit the total number of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means and the second aspect control means to the predetermined number. It has a remaining number counting means for counting the remaining number of dynamic display until reaching, and when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the remaining number of dynamic display counted by the remaining number counting means is 1 If it is the above, the stop display mode is executed in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first mode control unit is executed. Possible and judgment The second aspect control means is configured to execute the dynamic processing after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed when the execution possibility determination means determines that the execution is possible. Among the dynamic display executed by the display execution means, the display mode for stopping the dynamic display equal to or less than the remaining number counted by the remaining number counting means is controlled to be the predetermined mode. Game machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means, the total number of the dynamic display executed continuously is predetermined. It is configured to be limited to a number or less, and the remaining number of dynamic displays is counted until the total number of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means and the second aspect control means reaches a predetermined number. It is counted by means. And, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the remaining number of the dynamic display counted by the remaining number counting means is one or more, a series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means It is determined by the executability judging unit that the stop display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution unit after the above is executed. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, counting by the remaining number counting means among the dynamic displays executed by the dynamic display executing means after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed It is controlled by the second mode control means so that the stop display mode of the dynamic display equal to or less than the remaining number to be set becomes the predetermined mode. Therefore, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, whether the execution is possible can be determined by the executability judging means by referring to the remaining number counted by the remaining number counting means. Therefore, the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display executing means becomes a predetermined mode each time the lottery information receiving means receives the lottery information in order to determine whether the execution is possible by the executability determining means. Since there is no need to calculate the total number of dynamic displays, the control burden can be reduced. Further, even in the case where the stop display mode of the dynamic display is controlled by the second mode control means, it is not necessary to calculate the number of controllable dynamic displays, so the control load can be further reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display executing means until the predetermined time has elapsed until the execution of the dynamic display is ended. The stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed is configured to be changeable, and the peripheral control unit is configured to execute the dynamic display after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first mode control unit is executed. The progress display means for determining whether the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the dynamic display performed by the display execution means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means In the predetermined mode, there are set display determination means for determining whether or not the mode setting means has been set, and the display mode for stopping the dynamic display set to a mode different from the predetermined mode by the mode setting means. Change form When lottery information is received by the changing means and the lottery information receiving means, the progress determining means determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed, and the set determination means determines that the setting has been made. And third mode control means for changing the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means to the predetermined mode by the mode change means. Machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the dynamic display is executed during the period from the start of execution by the dynamic display execution means to the end of the execution of the dynamic display until a predetermined time passes. The stop display mode of the display is configured to be changeable, and a series of dynamic display controlled by the first mode control unit is executed, and then the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit is started to be executed. It is determined by the progress determining means whether a predetermined time has elapsed since then. In addition, it is determined by the setting completion determination means whether or not the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is already set by the mode setting means, and an aspect different from the predetermined aspect by the mode setting means The stop display mode of the dynamic display set to is changed by the mode changing means to a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed by the progress determining means, and it is determined that the setting completion determining means has been set, the third mode control By the means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed into the predetermined mode by the mode change means. Therefore, even if a series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed, and then the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is started next to the series of dynamic display Within the period from the start of execution to the passage of a predetermined time, the third mode control means can set the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means to the predetermined mode. Therefore, when dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means, there is an opportunity to increase the number of times of execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode becomes the predetermined mode. It can be increased. Therefore, together with the opportunity to improve the player's sense of expectation, it is possible to increase the chance that the sense of expectation can be kept longer for the player.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E5, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the series of dynamic to be controlled by the first aspect control means based on the contents of the aspect information storage means Dynamic display determination means for determining whether there is a plurality of displays, and when it is determined by the dynamic display determination means that there is a plurality of a series of dynamic displays to be controlled, the first aspect control means first The execution order of the dynamic display execution means is later than the series of dynamic display controlled by the first mode control means, and the dynamic display execution is performed from the series of dynamic display finally controlled by the first aspect control means A game machine E6 comprising: fourth mode control means for controlling the stop display mode of each dynamic display in which the execution order of the means is earlier to be the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine E6, when lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is dynamic if there is a series of dynamic displays to be controlled by the first aspect control means based on the contents of the aspect information storage means As determined by the display determination means, the execution order of the dynamic display execution means is later than the series of dynamic displays initially controlled by the first aspect control means, and is finally controlled by the first aspect control means The stop display mode of each dynamic display in which the execution order of the dynamic display execution means precedes the series of dynamic displays is controlled by the fourth mode control means so as to be a predetermined mode. Therefore, when there are a plurality of series of dynamic displays to be controlled by the first aspect control means, the plurality of series of dynamic displays are executed by the dynamic display execution means as one series of dynamic displays. Can. Therefore, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means, the number of executions of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is further increased. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be further improved by increasing the number of times of execution, and the sense of expectation can be kept longer for the player. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information in the display means, and a stop display mode of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means in a predetermined mode or the predetermined mode Is a game machine provided with a mode setting means for setting in another mode, wherein when the ball is detected by the detection means, ball entry information acquiring means for acquiring ball entry information accompanying the ball. And ball entry information storage means for storing the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, and the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means To carry out the above Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball based on the entering information acquired by the acquiring means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means Of the mode information storage means for storing the mode information, and a series of continuous motions of the execution order in the dynamic display sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the mode information storage means When the lottery information is acquired by the first mode control means for controlling the stop display mode of the target display to be the predetermined mode and the lottery information acquiring means, the first aspect control means controls the first aspect control means An executability judging means for judging whether the stop display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means after the series of the dynamic display is executed; Dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control unit is executed when it is determined by the execution availability determination unit that the execution is possible And a second mode control means for controlling the stop display mode of the second mode to be the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine E7, when the ball entering the game medium is detected by the detecting means, the ball entering information associated with the ball entering is acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and the ball entering information is received by the ball entering information storage means It is memorized. Then, based on the contents of the entry information storage means, the dynamic display execution means causes the dynamic display execution means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display to be executed is a predetermined mode or The mode setting means sets the mode other than the predetermined mode. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entry is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the ball entry information, and the dynamic corresponding to the lottery information The mode information indicating the stop display mode of the display is stored in the mode information storage means. Then, based on the contents of the mode information storage means, the stop display modes of the continuous series of dynamic display in the execution order among the dynamic display executed in order by the dynamic display execution means are respectively predetermined modes and It is controlled by the first aspect control means to become Furthermore, when lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a stop display aspect is performed for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed. It is determined by the executability judging means whether or not it can be executed in a predetermined manner. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed is a predetermined aspect It is controlled by the second mode control means so that Therefore, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution unit, the number of times of execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is increased. it can. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of execution, the sense of expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the gaming state advantageous to the player can be improved, and the sense of expectation is continued to the player longer. Can be held. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a mode of effect of stop display, a mode of display result of stop display, and a mode of sound effect of stop display. A game machine E8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E8, at least one of the mode of the effect of the stop display, the mode of the display result of the stop display, and the mode of the sound effect of the stop display is included in the predetermined mode, so dynamic display The player can be made to recognize that the stop display mode of is set to the predetermined mode, and the player's interest can be attracted.

  In addition, when making the stop display aspect of dynamic display into a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, you may change the content of the predetermined aspect for every dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the mode of the effect of the stop display, in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the mode of the display result of the stop display, and in the third dynamic display The predetermined mode is the mode of the sound effect of the stop display. As described above, if the content of the predetermined mode is changed for each dynamic display, the change of the stop display becomes colorful, so that the player's interest can be attracted more strongly.

  A gaming machine F1 characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

A gaming machine F3 characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, pachinko machines have been known that improve the interest of a game by performing variable effects (dynamic display) or the like on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. The fluctuation effect (dynamic display) is an effect started by the game ball entering the ball entry opening (starting opening) (winning), for example, 3 provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device A total of nine symbols etc. are displayed on a square of × 3. More specifically, when the gaming ball wins the starting opening, the scroll of symbols etc. is started, and then the symbols etc. being scrolled are sequentially stopped and the total of nine symbols etc (stop symbols) are stopped and displayed. Do. In such a variable effect, a device is made to give an expectation to the player by executing an effect which suggests in advance that the player transitions to a game state (for example, a big hit) which is advantageous to the player.
In this type of pachinko machine, for example, as an effect that suggests transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, display of the chance eyes etc. is not only performed once but also continuously for a plurality of times. Have been configured to perform the same effect or to perform the same effect or different effects continuously by displaying or sound effects multiple times (hereinafter referred to as "continuous effect"), expecting a sense of expectation for an advantageous gaming state The interest of the game is further improved by, for example, letting the player keep it. In addition, a chance eye is, for example, a stop symbol other than a hit, and a stop symbol (a display result, for example, symbols such as "3", "4", "1", etc.) respectively included Aspect of the For example, when the game ball wins to the starting opening, if there are a plurality of pending change effects to be started, this continuous effect is performed for the plurality of pending change effects, and is continuous It is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of shifting to the advantageous gaming state as the number of times of the change effect performed to the player is higher (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Utility Model Application Laid-Open No. 7-24383).
However, even if the continuous effect is started, if the display frequency such as the chance eye is small, the player can not continue to have a sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state, and the player's sense of expectation is heightened. In addition, there is a problem that the player is given an impression that the game is monotonous.
The present technical concept is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 detects display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry port where game media enters, and entry of game media into the ball entrance. A detection means, peripheral control means for executing dynamic display of identification information on the display means when the game medium is detected to be entered by the detection means, and control of the peripheral control means And a main control means for performing control, wherein the main control means acquires ball entry information associated with the ball entry when the ball entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means. The lottery information acquiring means for acquiring lottery information indicating the lottery result of the ball entering based on the acquiring means and the ball entering information acquired by the ball entering information acquiring means, and the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means Send to peripheral control means Selection information transmission means, ball entry information storage means for storing ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, and execution of the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the display means, the peripheral control means performing, on the display means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means; A mode setting means for setting the stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means to a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode, and transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means Lottery information receiving means for receiving the selected lottery information, aspect information storage means for storing the aspect information indicating the stop display aspect of the dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information received by the lottery information receiving means, and the aspect In the dynamic display sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the information storage means, the stop display mode of the continuous series of dynamic display in the execution order becomes the respective predetermined mode The first mode control means to control the lottery information when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the dynamic display execution is performed after the series of the dynamic display controlled by the first mode control means is executed An executability judging means for judging whether the stop display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display executed by the means, and the first aspect when the executability judging means judges that the executability is possible A second mode of controlling the stop display mode of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of the dynamic display controlled by the control means is performed to be the predetermined mode And control means.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the lottery result indicated by the received lottery information plays a predetermined game value The game value determining means for determining whether or not to give to the player, and the executability determining means determines that the predetermined game value is given to the player by the game value determining means It is possible to execute the stop display mode in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first mode control unit is executed. It is to judge.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, the dynamic display is performed dynamically until a predetermined time has elapsed since execution is started by the dynamic display executing means. The stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed can be changed before the end of the execution of the display, and the peripheral control unit is configured to control the series of the motions controlled by the first mode control unit. Progress determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed since execution of the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means next to the execution of the dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display execution means Setting completion judging means for judging whether or not the stop display mode of the dynamic display being set is already set by the mode setting means, and the dynamic being set to a mode different from the predetermined mode by the mode setting means Stop indication of indication When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the progress determining unit determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed, and the setting determination unit And third mode control means for changing the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means into the predetermined mode by the mode changing means if it is determined that the setting has been made. Have.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3. In the predetermined mode, an aspect of the effect of the stop indication, an aspect of the indication result of the stop indication, the stop indication At least one of the modes of sound effects is included.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the entering of the game medium is detected by the detecting means in the main control means, the entering information associated with the entering ball is acquired by the entering information acquiring means, Lottery information indicating the lottery result of entering the ball is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means based on the ball entering information. Then, the acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the lottery information transmission unit. In addition, when the ball entry information is acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, the ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. The display control means instructs the peripheral control means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and the stop display mode of the dynamic display to be executed is predetermined. The aspect setting means sets the aspect other than the aspect of the aspect or the predetermined aspect thereof. Then, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the lottery information receiving means, the mode information indicating the stop display mode of the dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information is the mode information storage In the dynamic display which is stored in the means and is sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the aspect information storage means, the stop display modes of the continuous series of dynamic display in the execution order are respectively predetermined It is controlled by the first aspect control means to become the aspect of In addition, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed, the stop display aspect is performed for the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means It is determined by the executability judging means whether or not it can be executed in a predetermined manner. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means after the series of dynamic displays controlled by the first aspect control means is executed is a predetermined aspect It is controlled by the second mode control means so that Therefore, when the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution unit, the number of times of execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is increased. it can. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of execution, the sense of expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to the gaming state advantageous to the player can be improved, and the sense of expectation is continued to the player longer. Can be held. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the lottery result indicated by the received lottery information is If it is determined by the game value determination means that the predetermined game value is to be provided to the player, the dynamic display execution means is executed after a series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed. Whether the stop display mode can be executed in a predetermined mode for the dynamic display to be performed is determined by the executability judging means. Therefore, when a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, it is possible to increase the number of times of dynamic display in which the stop display mode continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means becomes the predetermined mode. Therefore, the expectation of the player who is expecting to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player is improved, and further, after the sense of expectation is continuously held by the player for a longer time, the predetermined game is performed. The value can be given to the player. Therefore, since the player can be excited more strongly than in the case of merely giving the predetermined game value to the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. The dynamic display changes the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed until the end of the execution of the dynamic display until the predetermined time passes after the start of the execution by the dynamic display execution means A series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution means was started. The heel is determined by the progress determining means. In addition, it is determined by the setting completion determination means whether or not the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is already set by the mode setting means, and an aspect different from the predetermined aspect by the mode setting means The stop display mode of the dynamic display set to is changed by the mode changing means to a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed by the progress determining means, and it is determined that the setting completion determining means has been set, the third mode control By the means, the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed into the predetermined mode by the mode change means. Therefore, even if a series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed, and then the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is started next to the series of dynamic display Within the period from the start of execution to the passage of a predetermined time, the third mode control means can set the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means to the predetermined mode. Therefore, when dynamic display in which the stop display mode is the predetermined mode is continuously executed by the dynamic display execution means, there is an opportunity to increase the number of times of execution of the dynamic display in which the stop display mode becomes the predetermined mode. It can be increased. Therefore, together with the opportunity to improve the player's sense of expectation, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the chance that the sense of expectation can be kept longer for the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, in the predetermined mode, the mode of the effect of the stop display, the display result of the stop display And at least one of the stop sound effects, the player can be made to recognize that the dynamic display stop display mode is set to the predetermined mode. Has the effect of being able to attract
In addition, when making the stop display aspect of dynamic display into a predetermined | prescribed aspect continuously, you may change the content of the predetermined aspect for every dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the mode of the effect of the stop display, in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the mode of the display result of the stop display, and in the third dynamic display The predetermined mode is the mode of the sound effect of the stop display. As described above, if the content of the predetermined mode is changed for each dynamic display, the change of the stop display becomes colorful, so that the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64 first ball entry (ball entry)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
203a Holding ball storage area (ball entry information storage means)
208a First ball entry switch (detection means)
273l stop symbol pattern table memory (storage means)
S205 bonus game execution means
S402 determination means
S404, S406 dynamic display time determination means S654 ball entry information acquisition means S1104 dynamic display execution means
S1538 change possibility determination means S1540 first change means
S1608 stop display setting means
S2313, S2315 determination means

Claims (4)

A display means for displaying identification information, a ball entry opening for game media to enter, a detection means for detecting entry of game media into the entrance, and a detection means for detecting game entry A gaming machine comprising peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means, and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control related to a game.
The main control means
Ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information accompanying the ball entry when game entry of the game medium is detected by the detection means;
Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information indicating a result of lottery of entering on the basis of the entering information acquired by the entering information acquiring means;
Lottery information transmission means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means to the peripheral control means;
Ball-entry information storage means for storing ball-entry information acquired by the ball-entry information acquisition means;
Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means;
The peripheral control means
Dynamic display execution means for executing on the display means the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means;
A mode setting means for setting the stop display mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means to a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode;
Lottery information receiving means for receiving lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means;
Aspect information storage means for storing aspect information indicating a stop display aspect of dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information received by the lottery information receiving means;
In the dynamic display sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the mode information storage means, the stop display modes of a continuous series of dynamic display in the execution order are respectively the above-mentioned predetermined aspects Control means to control to become
When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the dynamic display performed by the dynamic display execution unit is stopped after the series of the dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control unit is executed. An executability determining unit that determines whether the display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode;
Dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control unit is executed when it is determined by the execution availability determination unit that the execution is possible And a second mode control unit configured to control the stop display mode of the control unit to be the predetermined mode. When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, there is provided a game value determination means for determining whether the lottery result indicated by the received lottery information is to give a predetermined game value to the player,
The executability judging means is
When it is determined that the predetermined game value is to be provided to the player by the game value determination means, the motion is performed after the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control means is executed. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein it is determined whether or not the stop display mode can be executed in the predetermined mode for the dynamic display executed by the intention display execution means. The dynamic display is a stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed until the execution of the dynamic display is finished until the predetermined time elapses from the start of the execution by the dynamic display execution means. Is configured to be changeable,
The peripheral control means
After the series of dynamic display controlled by the first aspect control unit has been executed, it is determined whether the predetermined time has passed since the dynamic display to be executed by the dynamic display execution unit is started. Progress determination means for
Setting determination means for determining whether or not the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means is already set by the mode setting means;
Aspect change means for changing the stop display aspect of the dynamic display set in the aspect different from the predetermined aspect by the aspect setting means to the predetermined aspect;
When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed by the progress determining means, and it is determined that the setting has been made by the set completion determining means. 3. A third mode control means for changing the stop display mode of the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means into the predetermined mode by the mode changing means. The gaming machine described.   4. The apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined mode includes at least one of a mode of effect of stop display, a mode of display result of stop display, and a mode of sound effect of stop display. The gaming machine according to any of the above.

Images